Konica Minolta ineo 452 - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta
Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous
Autres documentations et logiciels Konica Minolta :
Konica-Minolta-ineo-250-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Documentation-12-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-User-s-Guide-ColorCentro-IC-601-Ver1.0-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Documentation-11-Manuels
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/text.gif)
Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 20:31 5.5M
Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:29 2.8M
Konica-Minolta-D-162..> 24-Mar-2013 20:29 2.8M
Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:28 2.8M
Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:28 2.8M
Konica-Minolta-Docum..> 24-Mar-2013 10:18 4.1M
Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 10:18 2.8M
Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:17 2.8M
Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:17 5.3M
Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:15 5.0M
Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:14 4.2M
Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:13 4.2M
Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:12 4.2M
Konica-Minolta-Docum..> 24-Mar-2013 10:11 5.8M
Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:10 3.5M
Konica-Minolta-IC-305-Francais-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Magicolor-1600W-Francais-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C280-Francais-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-Francais-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-751-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C220-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-1200-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-C6000L-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-250-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C20P-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-951-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-751-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-951-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-1051-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350W-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350W-Francais-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350EN-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Magicolor-2550-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10P-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-200-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-IC-402-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C253P-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-C252-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-600-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450P-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Documentation-8-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-C252-2-Logiciels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C451-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-Danois-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Konica-Minolta-FAX-1610-Danois-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Documentation-Anglais-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-600-Francais-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C280-Francais-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C353-Francais-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Danois-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-1200-Danois-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Danois-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-451-Danois-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-750-Danois-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-5501-Danois-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C200-Danois-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-350-Anglais-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-160f-Danois-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Ineo-650-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-IC-303-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-IC-402-Manuels
Konica-business-hub-C284-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Documentation-Italie-4-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-CN5001Pro-Allemand-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRESS-1052-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-223-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-213-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRO-C6000L-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRESS-1250-P-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-550-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-1051-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-D131F-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C30P-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-ineo-283-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Danois-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-353-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-751-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-35P-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-654-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRESS-1052-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-20P-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-200-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-20-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-165-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8460CK-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650CK-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7460CK-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-160-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-160f-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-C5501-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-421-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-500-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Cabinet-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-AU-201-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C35P-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-CF2001-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Documentation-English-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Documentation-4-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Documentation-3-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-mc1650ENUserGuide.pdf-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub423SeriesAdvancedFunctionOperationsUserGuide.pdf-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhubC35FacsimileUserGuide.pdf-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhubC35Printer_Copier_ScannerUserGuide.pdf-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhubC550UserGuideBoxOper.pdf-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Short-Guide-Poster-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-PagePro-1300W-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-IC-302-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10P-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-501-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bihub-423-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-203-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-223-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-282-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-282-English-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-211-English-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-1600f-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-164-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhubC452_C552_C552DS_C652_C652DSCopyOperationsUserGuide.pdf-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Documentation-2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-40P-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-3-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-IC-408-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Francais-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-D191F-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-7000-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Francais-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-Ineo-951-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-1052-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Ineo-25-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-163-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-253-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-Francais-documentation-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-documentation-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels
Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25461&productName=magicolor%202490MF
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=24593&productName=magicolor%202500W
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=45226&productName=magicolor%203730DN
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650DN
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650EN
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48849&productName=magicolor%204690MF
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48858&productName=magicolor%204695MF
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=41338&productName=magicolor%204750DN
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25354&productName=magicolor%205450
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=29872&productName=bizhub%20C10
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0719195EN00&name=user.pdf
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/products/copier-print-systems/multifunctional-systems-black-and-white/bizhub-652/downloads/download-details.html?packageId=48057&productName=bizhub%20652
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=25408&productName=bizhub%20C250
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_box-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdfhttp://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_enlarge-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_print-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_copy-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=49761&productName=bizhub%20C25
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=47425&productName=magicolor%201600W
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=22632&productName=bizhub%20C252
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0610809EN00&name=bizhub_c252_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=26947&productName=Konica%20Minolta%20190f
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=21374&productName=bizhub%20210
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0514130EN00&name=bizhub_162_210_UM_FR_1.1.1.pdf
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/cartouche-toner.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieur-couleur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs-couleur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-copieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-imprimante-copieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fileadmin/content/fr/rss/flux.xml
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/accueil.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/certificats-et-labels.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/cycle-de-vie-eco-responsable.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-fonctionnalites.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-technologies.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/historique.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/ops-green.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/politique-environnementale.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/carrieres-et-emplois.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/contacts.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/jamais-deux-sans-trois-konica-minolta-est-elu-gamme-de-lannee-par-bli-pour-la-troisieme-ann.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-parraine-la-9eme-edition-de-la-nuit-des-trophees-de-limprimerie-francaise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-stand-c05-profitera-du-salon-it-partners-qui-se-tiendra-les-5-et-6-fevrier-procha.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/la-4eme-edition-des-journees-du-bureau-eco-responsable-par-konica-minolta-business-solutions-fr.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/temoignage-copy-top-retour-sur-un-investissement-reussi.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/informations-sur-lentreprise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/responsabilite-societale.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/gartner-magic-quadrant-2012.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/applications.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/presses-numeriques.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/securite.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/systemes-dimpression-office.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/itraining.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/marches-verticaux.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html/solutions-dentreprise/produits/conseils-et-services/la-prestation-de-consulting-idoc/audit-idoc.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/programme-dsp.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/services-informatiques.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/acces-reserve.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/cleanplanet.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/service-et-garantie.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-multifonction.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-photocopieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-copieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-laser-couleur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-multifonction.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-photocopieuse.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs-konica-minolta.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/presse-numerique.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/toner-photocopieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/domain.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/history.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/message.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/outline.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/vision.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/csr/governance/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/siteinfo/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/01/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/02/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/03/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/04/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html
Advanced Function Operations
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Contents-1
Table of contents
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2 Use conditions................................................................................................................................. 1-4
1.3 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5
1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5
To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5
Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5
Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6
Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6
Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6
2 Overview
2.1 Overview of each function ............................................................................................................. 2-3
2.1.1 Supported function table ................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions.................................................................................... 2-4
3 Assigning Application Keys
3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.2 [Application Menu] ............................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2.................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.1 [Application Key Settings] .................................................................................................................. 3-5
4 Web Browser Function
4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function ........................................................................ 4-3
4.1.2 Specifications..................................................................................................................................... 4-4
Specifications for Web Browser ........................................................................................................ 4-4
Restrictions on Flash Player .............................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2 Displaying Web Browser ................................................................................................................ 4-5
4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser............................................................. 4-6
4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP .......................................................................... 4-6
[Web Browser Setting] ....................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user ............................................................................ 4-7
[Function Permission]......................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents ................................................................................................. 4-8
[Web browser contents access]......................................................................................................... 4-8
4.4 Basic operation ............................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.4.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.4.2 Operating instructions...................................................................................................................... 4-10
Operation using the Touch Panel .................................................................................................... 4-10
Operation using the Keypad ............................................................................................................ 4-10
4.4.3 How to enter text ............................................................................................................................. 4-10
Entering text..................................................................................................................................... 4-10
Contents-2 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.4.4 Screen display mode ....................................................................................................................... 4-11
[Normal]............................................................................................................................................ 4-11
[Just-Fit Rendering].......................................................................................................................... 4-11
[Smart-Fit Rendering]....................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume.............................................................................................................. 4-11
4.5 Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.5.1 Description of the toolbar ................................................................................................................ 4-12
4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List].............................................................................................................................. 4-13
List of favorites................................................................................................................................. 4-13
4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add]............................................................................................................................. 4-13
4.5.4 [Address] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.5.5 [History] ............................................................................................................................................ 4-14
[Display History] ............................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.5.6 [Print]................................................................................................................................................ 4-15
4.5.7 [Menu] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-15
4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings....................................................................................... 4-16
4.6.1 [Page Operation] .............................................................................................................................. 4-16
4.6.2 [Display]............................................................................................................................................ 4-16
4.6.3 [Manage windows] ........................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.6.4 [Settings] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file .......................................................................... 4-18
4.7.1 Printing a document file ................................................................................................................... 4-18
4.7.2 Displaying a document file............................................................................................................... 4-20
4.7.3 Saving a document file .................................................................................................................... 4-21
4.8 Uploading a document file ........................................................................................................... 4-22
4.8.1 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 4-22
4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file ................................................................................................ 4-22
4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box ........................................................................................ 4-23
5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function)
5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection .............................................................................................. 5-3
5.1.1 Prior check......................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2 How to access ................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Screen components........................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.3 Logging in and logging out ............................................................................................................ 5-5
5.3.1 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 5-5
5.3.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 5-5
5.4 Using the User Box function .......................................................................................................... 5-6
5.4.1 Open User Box .................................................................................................................................. 5-6
[Open User Box]................................................................................................................................. 5-6
[File List] ............................................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.4.2 Document operations ........................................................................................................................ 5-8
Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 5-8
Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 5-10
6 Image Panel
6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Features ............................................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2 Displaying the Image Panel............................................................................................................ 6-4
6.3 Operating Image Panel................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.2 General operation .............................................................................................................................. 6-6
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Contents-3
6.3.3 Reading a document.......................................................................................................................... 6-8
Scanning a document ........................................................................................................................ 6-8
Retrieving from User Box................................................................................................................... 6-9
Retrieving a document from an external memory............................................................................ 6-10
Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................. 6-11
6.3.4 Editing the document....................................................................................................................... 6-12
[Preview]........................................................................................................................................... 6-12
[Document/Page] - [Edit Document] ................................................................................................ 6-12
[Document/Page] - [Combine Documents]...................................................................................... 6-13
[Document/Page] - [Document Settings] ......................................................................................... 6-14
[Return to Scan Dest.]...................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.3.5 Specifying a destination................................................................................................................... 6-15
Printing............................................................................................................................................. 6-15
Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................... 6-16
Saving a document in an external memory ..................................................................................... 6-16
6.3.6 Checking the send tray .................................................................................................................... 6-17
Send Tray......................................................................................................................................... 6-17
[Check TX Tray]................................................................................................................................ 6-17
6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................... 6-18
6.4 Registering a photo in the address book ................................................................................... 6-19
6.4.1 Specifications of photo data............................................................................................................ 6-19
6.4.2 Registering photo data .................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.5 Customizing Image Panel ............................................................................................................ 6-22
6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area ..................................................................................................... 6-22
6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area .................................................................................. 6-23
6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon.................................................................................................. 6-24
7 PDF Processing Function
7.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Available operations with the PDF processing function .................................................................... 7-3
7.2 PDF document properties .............................................................................................................. 7-4
7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature ............................................................ 7-5
7.3.1 Password-based encryption.............................................................................................................. 7-5
7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption ............................................................................................................... 7-6
7.4 Direct Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-8
8 Searchable PDF function
8.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 8-3
Precautions when creating searchable PDF files .............................................................................. 8-3
Recognizable character size.............................................................................................................. 8-3
8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting ........................................................................................ 8-4
[OCR Operation Setting] .................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting....................................................................................... 8-5
9 My Panel Function
9.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel ................................................................................................... 9-3
Customizable items ........................................................................................................................... 9-3
Functions available by linking to the Web browser ........................................................................... 9-3
Functions available with Image Panel................................................................................................ 9-4
9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure ........................................................................................................ 9-4
9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function ..................................................................................... 9-4
9.2 Displaying My Panel........................................................................................................................ 9-5
9.2.1 Main Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu........................................................................................................................ 9-5
Contents-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.3 Customizing My Panel.................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] ............................................................................................................................ 9-6
9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings]........................................................................................................... 9-7
9.3.3 [Language Setting] ............................................................................................................................. 9-8
9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings].............................................................................................................. 9-8
9.3.5 [Copier Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 9-9
[Default Tab]....................................................................................................................................... 9-9
[Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................... 9-9
[Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] ............................................................................................. 9-10
[Default Tab Density Settings].......................................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 9-11
[Default Tab]..................................................................................................................................... 9-11
[Address Book Index Default] .......................................................................................................... 9-12
[Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-12
[Default Address Book] .................................................................................................................... 9-13
[Default Address Type]..................................................................................................................... 9-13
9.3.7 [User Box Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 9-13
[Default Tab]..................................................................................................................................... 9-13
[Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-14
9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] ................................................................................................................ 9-14
9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] ....................................................................................................................... 9-15
Main menu button............................................................................................................................ 9-15
Registering a main menu button...................................................................................................... 9-15
9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] .................................................................................................................... 9-16
10 My Address function
10.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 10-3
10.1.1 Classification of address books....................................................................................................... 10-3
Public address book ........................................................................................................................ 10-3
My Address Book ............................................................................................................................ 10-3
10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure......................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function ............................................................................... 10-4
10.2 Registering and editing a destination ......................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.1 Address Book .................................................................................................................................. 10-5
10.2.2 Group ............................................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3 Copying destinations between address books.......................................................................... 10-8
10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book..................................... 10-8
10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book ..................................... 10-9
10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document............................................................... 10-10
10.4.1 Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................. 10-10
10.4.2 Searching for destinations ............................................................................................................. 10-10
11 Index
11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3
11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-4
1 Introduction
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1-3
1.1 Welcome 1
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This User's Guide describes the overview and usage of functions available by registering an optional license
kit to this machine, and functions available by connecting it to an application. To use each function effectively,
please read this User's Guide.
1.1.1 User's guides
Printed manual Overview
[Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]
This manual describes operating procedures and the
functions that are most frequently used in order to enable
you to begin using this machine immediately.
This manual also contains notes and precautions that
should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine.
Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine.
This manual describes details on trademarks and copyrights.
• Trademarks and copyrights
User's guide DVD manuals Overview
[User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations
and the settings of this machine.
• Specifications of originals and copy paper
• Copy function
• Maintaining this machine
• Troubleshooting
[User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures
of the enlarge display mode.
• Copy function
• Scanning function
• G3 fax function
• Network fax function
[User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions.
• Printer function
• Setting the printer driver
[User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on the boxed functions using
the hard disk.
• Saving data in user boxes
• Retrieving data from user boxes
• Transferring and printing data from user boxes
[User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations]
This manual describes details on transmitting scanned
data.
• E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, Web-
DAV TX, Web Services
• G3 fax
• IP Address Fax, Internet Fax
[User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function
that transmits faxes directly from a computer.
• PC-FAX
[User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for
each function using the network connection.
• Network settings
• Settings using Web Connection
1 Use conditions
1-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
1.2
1.1.2 User's Guide
This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators.
It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations,
and various setting methods of this machine.
Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform troubleshooting
operation. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual.
Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative.
1.2 Use conditions
Enabling i-Option LK-101 v2 allows you to access the Internet from the Control Panel of the MFP.
Users will bear a responsibility for contents accessed, downloaded, and uploaded using Web Browser in the
MFP, and other communicated contents. Users shall conform to the company rules and laws of the country
where this machine is used.
Develop GmbH and its group businesses will not bear any responsibility for use of the Internet by users.
[User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become
available by registering the optional license kit and by
connecting to an application.
• Web browser function
• Image panel
• PDF Processing Function
• Searchable PDF
• My panel and My address functions
User's guide DVD manuals Overview
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1-5
1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1
1.3 Conventions used in this manual
1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual
Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information.
The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine.
To use this machine safely
7 WARNING
- This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury.
7 CAUTION
- This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury
or property damage.
NOTICE
This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents.
Follow the instructions to avoid property damage.
Procedural instruction
0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite
for a procedure.
1 This format number "1" represents the first step.
2 This format number represents the order of serial steps.
% This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural
instruction.
% This symbol indicates transition of the Control Panel to access a desired menu item.
This symbol indicates a desired page.
The operation procedures
are described
using illustrations.
1 Conventions used in this manual
1-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
1.3
dReference
This symbol indicates a reference.
View the reference as required.
Key symbols
[ ]
Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets.
Bold text
Key names on the control panel, part names, product names and option names are indicated in bold text.
1.3.2 Original and paper indications
Original and paper sizes
The following explains the indication for originals and paper described
in this manual.
When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the
width and the X side the length.
Original and paper indications
w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the
width (Y).
v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the
width (Y).
2 Overview
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2-3
2.1 Overview of each function 2
2 Overview
2.1 Overview of each function
The following describes the overview of each function.
Reference
- To use the advanced function, an optional Upgrade Kit UK-203 is required.
- For details on the license kit registration and enabling functions on MFPs, refer to the [Quick Guide
Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations].
- To connect the function to the application, enable it at the application side. For details on enabling the
function, refer to the manual for the corresponding application.
2.1.1 Supported function table
The following table shows the supported functions for the license kits and applications.
2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded
Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function changes the usage of the User
Box, Fax/Scan, and Copy keys on the Control Panel.
- The User Box key functions as an Application Menu, and the Fax/Scan and Copy keys function as
application keys.
- Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu], which allows you to switch to the added
function.
- To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application key can be changed.
For details, refer to page 3-3.
Web Browser Image Panel PDF processing
Searchable
PDF
i-Option LK-101 v2 o o − −
i-Option LK-102 − − o −
i-Option LK-105 − − − o
My Panel My Address
My Panel Manager o o
2 Overview of each function
2-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
2.1
2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions
The following describes the overview of each function. For details, refer to the reference described below.
Reference
- When the accounting management device is installed in the MFP, Image Panel cannot be used.
Function Overview Reference
Web Browser This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP.
By using the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network, you
can access to the Internet or intranet and display or print the contents.
Also, through a Web browser, you can operate Web Connection of the
MFP connected to the network and use documents saved in User Boxes.
p. 4-3
p. 5-3
Image Panel This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP.
Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface.
This panel helps you easily image the entire operation flow from loading
to sending a document.
You can add photo data to the one-touch destinations using Web Connection.
The registered photo data is applied to the address list of Image
Panel.
p. 6-3
PDF processing This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-102 in the MFP.
Performs password- or digital ID-based encryption of PDF, adds a digital
signature, and configures property settings when distributing documents
in the PDF format using the scan or User Box function.
p. 7-3
Searchable PDF This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the
MFP.
You can create a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text
data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized
through an OCR process.
You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original
in the PDF format using the scan or User Box functions.
p. 8-3
My Panel This function is used in connection with the My Panel Manager.
Available by centrally managing the environment of the Control Panel
customized by the user depending on the application (My Panel), and
then obtaining My Panel on the MFP selected by the user.
p. 9-3
My Address This function is used in connection with the My Panel Manager.
Available by centrally managing the personal address book (My Address
Book) by the server, and then obtaining My Address Book on the MFP
selected by the user.
p. 10-3
3 Assigning Application Keys
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-3
3.1 Overview 3
3 Assigning Application Keys
3.1 Overview
The following describes the key layout and [Application Menu] of the Control Panel.
3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded
Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function allows User Box to function
as Application Menu, and Fax/Scan and Copy as application keys.
Reference
- The Web Browser and Image Panel functions can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the
MFP.
- The My Panel function is used in connection with the My Panel Manager.
No. Name Description
1 Application menu Press this key to display the [Application Menu]. You cannot assign a different
function to this key.
If a function is added, attach a Application Menu sticker (included in the
Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel.
For details, refer to page 3-4.
2 Application key 1 The fax/scan function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign
a different function to this key.
If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing
the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key
name on the Control Panel.
For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-5.
1 2 3
3 Overview
3-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
3.1
3.1.2 [Application Menu]
Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu].
To use a function not assigned to the application key 1 or 2, you can switch functions to a desired one from
the [Application Menu].
3 Application key 2 The copy function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign a
different function to this key.
If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing
the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key
name on the Control Panel.
For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-5.
No. Name Description
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-5
3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 3
3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2
To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application keys 1 and 2 can be changed.
3.2.1 [Application Key Settings]
To assign a function to the application keys 1 and 2, use [Application Key Settings].
1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility].
2 Press [Administrator Settings].
3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK].
4 Press [System Settings].
5 In [System Settings] (2/2), press [Application Key Settings].
6 Select an application key ([Key 1] or [Key 2]) to which you assign a function.
3 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2
3-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
3.2
7 Select a function to be assigned.
8 Press [OK].
The function is assigned to the application key.
4 Web Browser Function
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-3
4.1 Overview 4
4 Web Browser Function
4.1 Overview
The Web Browser function prints, displays, and saves contents on the Internet or intranet by accessing them
from the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network.
Reference
- This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered.
4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function
The Web Browser function allows you to perform the following operations.
- Displaying and printing Web contents on the Internet or intranet.
- Displaying, printing, and saving a document file on the Internet or intranet.
- Uploading a scanned document file or a document file saved in a User Box to a server on the Internet
or intranet.
- Sharing documents in the User Box of MFPs on the network using Web Connection.
- When the My Panel function is available, you can personalize the user operation environment of the
Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel.
dReference
For details on using Web Connection from the Control Panel, refer to page 5-3.
For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-3.
4 Overview
4-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.1
4.1.2 Specifications
Specifications for Web Browser
The following shows the major specifications of the Web Browser installed in the MFP.
Restrictions on Flash Player
There are following restrictions on the Flash Player installed in Web Browser.
- The function to generate an event by key operations is not supported.
- The functions to paste or obtain data such as character strings from the clipboard are not supported.
- The context menu is not supported.
- The print function of Flash is not supported.
- The functions to execute JavaScript from Flash or operate Flash from JavaScript are not supported.
- The screen without a window (pop-up) is not supported.
- The favorite function of Flash is not supported.
- The function to communicate data in real time using the Flash Media Server is not supported.
- The XMLSocket-based communication function is not supported.
Item Specifications
Browser engine NetFront
Supported protocols HTTP (HTTP/0.9, 1.0, 1.1), HTTPS, TCP/IP
Supported markup
language
HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1/Basic
Supported style sheet Part of CSS1 and 2
Supported script language
Part of JavaScript 1.5, ECMAScript 3rd Edition, Ajax (limited to the scope supported
by JavaScript)
Supported DOM Part of Level 1 and 2
Supported format JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, animation GIF, PDF, Flash 7.0 and earlier
Supported SSL/TLS
versions
SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0
Supported character
codes
Japanese (Shift_JIS), Japanese (ISO-2022-JP), Japanese (EUC-JP), Chinese
Simplified (GB2312), Chinese Traditional (Big5), Western European (ISO-8859-
1), Unicode (UTF-8)
Display mode Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering
PDF viewer Adobe® Reader® LE
Flash player Adobe® Flash® Player 7
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-5
4.2 Displaying Web Browser 4
4.2 Displaying Web Browser
In [Application Menu], press [Web Browser]. The page specified as the home is displayed.
Reference
- If a login user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel and the user presses [Web Browser], the
Web browser setting and information related to the user is downloaded to the MFP from the server. If
the user has specified a personal home page, that page is displayed.
- When the Web browser starts, you can specify whether to display the home page or the last page that
was visited. For details, refer to page 4-17.
dReference
For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4.
For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-3.
4 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser
4-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.3
4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser
If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser in the MFP, you can restrict its use without disabling the
license kit. Also, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user.
4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP
If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser, you can restrict its use without disabling the license kit.
[Web Browser Setting]
1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility].
2 Press [Administrator Settings].
3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK].
4 Press [Network Settings].
5 In [Network Settings] (2/2), press [Web Browser Setting].
6 Select [Invalid], and then press [OK].
Reference
- If [Web Browser Setting] is set to [Invalid], [Web Browser] is hidden in the [Application Menu].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-7
4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4
4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user
If user management is performed in the MFP, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user.
[Function Permission]
1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility].
2 Press [Administrator Settings].
3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK].
4 Press [User Authentication/ Account Track].
5 In [User Authentication Settings], press [User Registration].
6 Select the user you want to restrict use of the Web browser, and press [Edit].
% If you want to restrict public users to use the Web browser, press [ ] and select [Public].
7 Press [Function Permission].
8 In [Function Permission] (3/3), specify [Web Browser] to [Restrict], and press [OK].
Reference
- This setting is not available if [Invalid] is specified in [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]
ö[Web Browser Setting].
- Configuring the function permission of the public user is available when public user access is allowed
in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[General Settings]ö[Public User
Access].
- If users are managed in the external server, you can configure the default settings for function permissions
to users who log in to the MFP using external server authentication for the first time. To configure
it, select [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]
ö[Administrative Settings]ö[Default Function Permission]ö[Web Browser]. For details on [Default
Function Permission], refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
4 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser
4-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.3
4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents
If the Web browser is used through the use of an application that interacts with the Web browser, you can
access the files (pre-installed contents, image files, help files, etc.) saved in the HDD of the MFP from the
Web browser.
The administrator can restrict the use of files saved in the HDD of the MFP from the Web browser as required.
Reference
- For details on the application that interacts with the Web browser, contact your service representative.
[Web browser contents access]
1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility].
2 Press [Administrator Settings].
3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK].
4 Press [Security Settings].
5 Press [Security Details].
6 In [Security Details] (4/4), specify [Web browser contents access] to [Restrict], and press [OK].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-9
4.4 Basic operation 4
4.4 Basic operation
4.4.1 Screen components
The Web browser screen has the following components.
Reference
- When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents
can be output through the speaker in the local connection kit. The speaker volume can be adjustable
using the speaker icon. For details, refer to page 4-11.
No. Name Description
1 Toolbar Operates Web Browser or configure the Web Browser settings. It is always
displayed on the Web Browser screen.
For details, refer to page 4-12.
2 Scroll bar Appears on the right of the screen when all display contents are not displayed
vertically in one screen.
Appears at the bottom of the screen when all display contents are not displayed
horizontally in one screen.
3 Window When multiple windows are displayed, you can switch the window using
the tab located at the bottom of the screen.
Press [e] in the active tab to close the window.
4 Icon The icon that represents the connection status appears when loading contents.
If the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, the speaker icon
is displayed.
1
4 3
2
4 Basic operation
4-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.4
4.4.2 Operating instructions
Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel. You can perform some of the operations from the Keypad
of the Control Panel.
Reference
- Using the Stylus Pen to operate the Touch Panel provides operating comfort.
Operation using the Touch Panel
Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel.
- To select an item, press a desired item.
- If a link is provided in the contents, press the link to jump to it.
- If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen
appears. To enter characters, use the keyboard screen.
- To scroll the screen, press [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] on the scroll bar.
Operation using the Keypad
You can use the Keypad in the Control Panel to enter numeric values or select items in the list.
4.4.3 How to enter text
If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen appears.
Entering text
Press the character you want to enter in the keyboard screen.
- To enter uppercase letters or symbols, press [Shift].
- You can also enter numbers using the Keypad.
Reference
- To change a character in the entered text, press [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be
changed, press [Delete], and then enter the desired letter or number.
- To delete all characters entered, press C (clear) in the Control Panel.
- To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, press [Undo].
- Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered.
- When entering character codes on multiple lines is allowed, the linefeed button appears.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-11
4.4 Basic operation 4
4.4.4 Screen display mode
There are three types of display modes for the Web Browser screen.
[Normal]
This is the display mode same as that for the normal Web Browser. Content is not adjusted to the screen
size. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it.
(The default is set to [Normal]. )
[Just-Fit Rendering]
The content layout is maintained and a page is displayed by reducing its width to fit the screen. Scroll the
screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it.
[Smart-Fit Rendering]
The table is divided and laid out vertically to fit the width of the screen. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically
when browsing it. The layout may be changed depending on the page to be displayed.
dReference
For details on changing the display mode, refer to page 4-16.
4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume
When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents can
be output through the speaker in the local connection kit.
If a speaker is connected to the MFP, the speaker icon is displayed at the bottom left of the Web browser.
Press the speaker icon to display the Volume screen where you can control the speaker volume.
- To increase the volume one level, press [Higher], or the # key on the Control Panel.
- To reduce the volume one level, press [Lower], or the * key on the Control Panel.
- Pressing [Mute] outputs no sound. In addition, the speaker icon changes to the speaker mute icon.
4 Toolbar
4-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.5
4.5 Toolbar
The toolbar on the top of the Web Browser screen allows you to perform various operations and configure
various settings.
4.5.1 Description of the toolbar
The following shows the functions of the buttons on the toolbar.
Icon Name Description
Back Brings you back to the previous page.
Next Brings you to the next page.
Reload/Abort Reloads the currently displayed page to update the contents.
If you press this button while loading a page, the loading stops.
Home Displays the page registered as the home.
For details on changing the home page, refer to page 4-16.
[Favorites] -
[List]
Displays the list of registered favorites.
For details, refer to page 4-13.
[Favorites] -
[Add]
Adds the URL of the currently displayed page to the favorites. Adding
a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority.
For details, refer to page 4-13.
[Address] Brings you to the screen to enter a URL.
For details, refer to page 4-14.
[History] Displays the list of pages displayed up till then.
For details, refer to page 4-14.
[Print] Prints the currently displayed contents.
For details, refer to page 4-15.
[Menu] Configure the Web browser settings. There are two types of menus;
one for the user and one for the administrator.
For details, refer to page 4-15.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-13
4.5 Toolbar 4
4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List]
Press [List] to display the list of the registered favorites using the thumbnails. Selecting a favorite allows you
to access the corresponding URL.
Reference
- If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of favorites for the user who is managed
in the server is displayed.
List of favorites
Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation.
The following shows the available operations.
4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add]
(Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority. )
Pressing [Add] prompts you to enter the administrator password. Enter the administrator password and press
[OK]. The registration screen appears. Check the contents and press [OK]. The URL of the displayed page is
added to the favorites. The MFP can hold up to 100 favorites.
- To register the thumbnail images of the page to be added to the favorites, select the [Register Thumbnail]
check box on the registration screen.
- It is registered with the title previously given to the contents. To change the title, press the entry form
for the title on the registration screen, and then change the title.
Reference
- For users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel, administrator authority is not required. My Panel
can hold up to 20 favorites for each user.
Item Description
[List View]/[Thumbnail
View]
Switches the favorites display between the list display and thumbnail view.
[Address View]/[Title
View]
Switches the display of favorites between the address view and title view.
[Delete All] Deletes all registered favorites.
Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority.
[Close] Closes the list of favorites.
Item Description
[Open New Window] Opens the selected favorite with a new window.
[Edit] Edits the title and address of the selected favorite.
Editing the favorites requires the administrator authority.
[Up] Brings you above the selected favorite.
Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view.
[Down] Brings you below the selected favorite.
Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view.
[Delete] Deletes the selected favorite.
Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority.
[Close] Closes this screen.
4 Toolbar
4-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.5
4.5.4 [Address]
Press [Address] to display the screen for entering the address.
Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. Enter the URL of the page to be displayed, and press
[OK] or [Open New Window].
Press [Input History] to display the list of input history. You can reference the past inputs. The MFP can hold
up to 100 input history records.
Reference
- If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To
delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the
Control Panel to delete all data entries.
- If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of input history records for the user who
is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 input history records for each user.
4.5.5 [History]
Press [History] to display the display history screen. From the list of display history, select a page to be displayed
again. The MFP can hold up to 100 display history records.
Reference
- If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of display history records for the user
who is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 display history records for each
user.
[Display History]
Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation.
The following shows the available operations.
Item Description
[Address View]/[Title
View]
Switches the display history between the address view and title view.
[Delete All] Deletes all registered entries in the display history.
Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority.
[Close] Closes the list of display history.
Item Description
[Open New Window] Loads the selected display history with a new window.
[Delete] Deletes the selected display history.
Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority.
[Close] Closes this screen.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-15
4.5 Toolbar 4
4.5.6 [Print]
Press [Print] to display the Print screen.
Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The displayed contents
are printed.
Reference
- If you attempt to print a Web page or JPEG or other image that takes up a large amount of memory, a
scan error may occur and printing will be disabled.
- The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed.
– The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed.
– The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher.
– The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional
finisher.
4.5.7 [Menu]
Press [Menu] to configure the Web Browser settings. There are two types of menus; one for the user and one
for the administrator.
For details, refer to page 4-16.
Item Description
[Color] Specify whether to print originals in color or black-and-white.
[Paper] Select the size of paper for printing.
[Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode.
[Stamp Settings] Specify whether to print the [Title], [URL], [Date/Time], and [Page Number].
[Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching,
folding, or binding.
4 Configuring the Web Browser settings
4-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.6
4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings
Pressing [Menu] in the tool bar displays the menu for the user. Users can only view the Web browser operation
settings and information.
The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings in addition to the
Web browser operation settings. To display the administrator menu, press [Administrator] in the menu
screen, and enter the administrator password.
4.6.1 [Page Operation]
In the [Page Operation] tab, configure the settings for page operation.
Reference
- Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu.
- [Use for Home Page] is displayed for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel.
4.6.2 [Display]
In the [Display] tab, configure settings for displaying contents. The administrator of the MFP can configure
the settings to hide or display images and animations, enable or disable JavaScript, and make detailed setting
related to the contents display.
Item Description
[Use for Home Page]* Registers the displayed page as the home page.
[Page Memo] Displays the page saved as a page memo. Selecting the page memo from the
list displays the corresponding page.
Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list,
select the desired operation.
[Save as Page Memo] Saves the displayed page as it is.
[Zoom Display] Press [Zoom Display] to display the key to enlarge or reduce the page display
size. Press the key to adjust the page display size.
Item Description
[Display Mode] Select the display mode for Web Browser from [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering],
and [Smart-Fit Rendering].
For details, refer to page 4-11.
[Encoding] Specify the encode type to be used when displaying contents.
[Detail Settings] Configure settings for displaying contents.
• [Image]: Select this check box to display images.
• [Animation]: Select this check box to display animation GIF.
• [Table]: Select this check box to recognize the table in HTML and adjust
the layout.
• [JavaScript]: Select this check box to enable JavaScript in contents.
• [CSS]: Select this check box to enable CSS in contents.
• [Ward Wrap]: Select this check box to enable the word wrap in contents.
• [Line Boundary Char. Check]: Select this check box to enable the line
boundary character check in contents.
• [Rapid-Render]: Select this check box to enable the Rapid-Render function.
• [Pop-Up Window]: Select this check box to allow displaying the pop-up
window.
• [Offline Permission]: Select this check box to allow the use of the contents
off-line.
• [Auto Flash Playback]: Select this check box to automatically play a Flash
content.
• [Enable Offline Display]: Select this check box to enable viewing of the contents
off-line. Displayed when [Offline Permission] is allowed by the administrator.
[Color Selection Setting]
Select a color for the selected item ([Green], [Blue], [Yellow], or [Orange]).
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-17
4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4
4.6.3 [Manage windows]
In the [Manage windows] tab, operate the window. Up to five windows can be opened.
4.6.4 [Settings]
The [Settings] tab allows you to check and reset the Web browser information. The administrator of the MFP
can configure the operating environment and security settings of the Web browser.
Reference
- Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu.
- The following settings are available for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel.
– [Startup Settings]
– Setting for deleting [Cookies]
– Setting for deleting [Authentication Information]
- My Panel can hold up to 20 items of cookies and authentication information for each user.
Item Description
[Create new window] Displays the contents of the URL registered as the home page with a new window.
[Open in new window] Displays the link destination page with a new window.
[Close active window] Closes the active window.
[Close other windows] Closes all windows.
This is not selectable when only one window is open.
Item Description
[Startup Settings]* Specify whether to display the page registered as the home page or the last
page being displayed when you exited Web Browser previously, at the startup
of Web Browser.
[Security]* Configure SSL or TLS setting, or display a root certificate or CA certificate.
[Cookies]* Configure settings to receive and delete cookies. This menu is also used to delete
all cookies saved in the MFP.
[Cache]* Configure settings to use and delete caches. This menu is also used to delete
all caches saved in the MFP.
[Proxy]* Configure the settings for use of proxy.
To use the proxy, register the address and port for the proxy server. If proxy
authentication is required, register the ID and password for use in proxy authentication.
[Authentication Information]*
Specify the timing to delete the authentication information you have entered in
the contents. This menu is also used to delete all authentication information
saved in the MFP.
[Access Log]* Check for access history of all users.
You can check the [ID], [User Name], [URL] and [Access].
[Web Browser Information]
Displays Web Browser information.
[Reset] Restart the Web browser.
4 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file
4-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.7
4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file
If a link to a document file is provided in the displayed contents, you can print, display, or save the document
file.
- The PDF and XPS formats are supported for the document files.
- You cannot display an XPS file.
Press the link to the document file in the contents to display the top screen of the document file.
4.7.1 Printing a document file
Press [Print] to display the Print screen.
Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The document file is
downloaded and printed.
Item Description
[Color] Specify whether to print originals in color or black-and-white.
[Paper] Select the size of paper for printing.
[Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode.
[Stamp Settings] Press this button to specify whether to print a [Date/Time] and [Page Number].
[Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching,
folding, or binding.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-19
4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4
Reference
- If you attempt to print a document file that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur
and printing will be disabled.
- If the downloaded PDF is encrypted, it is saved in the Encryption PDF User Box without being printed.
- The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed.
– The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed.
– The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher.
– The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional
finisher.
4 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file
4-20 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.7
4.7.2 Displaying a document file
Press [View] to display the link destination PDF file.
The toolbar on the top of the screen allows you to enlarge, reduce, print, or save the PDF file.
Key Description
Brings you back to the top page.
Brings you back to the previous page.
Brings you to the next page.
Brings you to the last page.
Rotates the display 90 degrees clockwise.
Increases the zoom ratio.
Reduces the zoom ratio.
Displays according to the width of the display area.
Displays the entire page.
Select the User Box to save the document file.
Configure the print settings, and print the document file.
Displays the splash window (displayed momentarily when the software activates).
Closes the screen.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-21
4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4
4.7.3 Saving a document file
Press [Save]. The User Box selection screen is displayed.
Select the User Box to save the file, press[OK], and then [Start] or Start. Then the document file is saved in
the User Box.
Reference
- To save a document file to a User Box, you must register the User Box in the MFP in advance. For details,
refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].
- When printing a document file (full color) that was saved in a User Box from the Web browser, you cannot
specify [Zoom] or [Combine].
4 Uploading a document file
4-22 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.8
4.8 Uploading a document file
If document files are shared on the server, you can upload a scanned document file or a document file in a
User Box to the server using a Web Browser.
This section explains how to upload a document file, using the following upload site as an example.
Example
4.8.1 Restrictions
Note that there are following restrictions to use this function.
- PDF, TIFF, or XPS is the type of a document file that can be uploaded. A document cannot be divided
to upload.
- Multiple document files cannot be uploaded at the same time.
- The user cannot manually edit the file name text box.
- If you perform one of the following operations after selecting a document file to be uploaded, the job is
deleted together with the selected document file.
– The System Auto Reset function has been started.
– The Web browser has been closed.
– The upload site has been updated by operating the toolbar of the Web browser.
– The Web browser has been restarted.
– The user has logged out during login processing.
– The sub power switch has been turned off.
– Reset has been pressed to reset the panel.
4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file
The following explains the procedure to upload a scanned document file.
Reference
- This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from scanning data.
- The file format cannot be set to JPEG when scanning an original to be uploaded.
1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP.
2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded.
% In this example, press [Browse].
Item Description
[Browse] Press this button to select a document file to be uploaded.
"type" is set to "file" in the Input tag of HTML.
[OK] Press this button to upload a document file.
"type" is set to "submit" in the Input tag of HTML.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-23
4.8 Uploading a document file 4
3 Press [Scan].
4 Place the original to be uploaded on the MFP.
5 Configure the scan settings, and press [Start] or the Start key.
% If Proof Copy is selected, you can check finishing.
After scanning is completed, the file name is displayed in the text box.
6 Press the button to start uploading.
% In this example, press [OK].
Uploading of a document file then starts.
4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box
The following explains the procedure to upload a document file retrieved from a User Box.
Reference
- This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from accessing the saved documents.
- Before uploading a document file in a User Box, create a User Box to save the document file in.
- Only the Public User Box and Personal User Box can be selected.
- The file format cannot be set to JPEG when selecting a document file to be uploaded from a User Box.
When selecting a JPEG document file saved in a User Box, the file format is changed to PDF. If necessary,
specify the appropriate file format before uploading a document file.
- When uploading a document file saved in a User Box while Page Separation is enabled, Page Separation
is canceled and changed to Multi Page.
1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP.
2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded.
% In this example, press [Browse].
4 Uploading a document file
4-24 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.8
3 Press the [User Box] key.
4 Select a desired User Box, and press [Use Document].
5 Select a document file to be uploaded, and press [File Settings].
% Select multiple document files and press [Combine]; they can be combined as one file. The combination
order can be changed as required.
% Select a document file and press [Document Details] to check the date and time the document file
was saved and to preview the image.
6 Configure the file setting, and press [Start] or the Start key.
% Press [Application] to configure the stamp or page number print setting.
The file name appears in the text box.
7 Press the button to start uploading.
% In this example, press [OK].
Uploading of a document file then starts.
5 Web Connection (Web
Browser Function)
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5-3
5.1 Using Web Connection 5
5 Web Connection (Web Browser Function)
5.1 Using Web Connection
Web Connection is a device management utility that is supported by the HTTP server built in this machine.
To use this utility, directly access the MFP connected to the network using Web Browser.
To use this utility using Web Browser installed in the MFP, only the User Box function is available.
This chapter describes how to use documents in the User Box of the MFP on the network by operating Web
Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP.
Reference
- This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered.
- i-Option LK-101 v2 must be registered also in the MFP access destination.
- For details on using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, refer to page 4-3.
- To operate Web Connection from a Web browser of your computer, you can use various functions
such as the status check, setting change, and network setting functions of the MFP. For details, refer
to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
5.1.1 Prior check
The most recent information may not appear in Web Connection screens because older versions of pages
are saved in the cache for the Web browser. In addition, problems may occur when the cache is used.
When using Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web browser.
Reference
- Changing the cache settings requires the administrator authority.
1 Press [Menu] on the toolbar of the Web browser.
2 Press [Administrator].
3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK].
4 Press the [Settings] tab, and then select [Cache].
5 Clear the [Use cache] check box, and then press [OK].
5.1.2 How to access
Start the Web browser, and then specify the IP address of the MFP to be accessed.
1 Press [Address] on the toolbar of the Web browser.
2 Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen.
3 Enter the IP address of the MFP to be accessed, and then press [OK].
4 Press [OK] or [Open New Window].
The Web Connection screen appears.
Reference
- If you have specified to not receive cookies for Web browser settings, Web Connection screen does
not appear. For details on configuring cookie settings, refer to page 4-17.
- If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To
delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the
Control Panel to delete all URL entries.
5 Screen components
5-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
5.2
5.2 Screen components
The Web Connection screen is constructed as shown below.
No. Name Description
1 Login user name Displays the icon of the current mode and the name of the user who is
logged on (public, registered user, or account).
2 [Logout] Press this button to log out from the current mode.
3 Help Press this button to reference the online manual.
4 Contents display Displays the contents of Web Connection.
1 2 3
4
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5-5
5.3 Logging in and logging out 5
5.3 Logging in and logging out
If you have specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track on the MFP, the login screen appears
after displaying Web Connection.
Reference
- If you have not specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track, the screen displayed when
you logged in as a public user appears.
- To use Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, its administrator mode is not
available.
5.3.1 Login
Select whether to log in as a public user or registered user. If External Server Authentication is selected, select
an external authentication server.
Enter the required information, and press [Login]. Select a display language if necessary.
Reference
- The User Boxes that can be accessed vary depending on the logged in user or account track.
5.3.2 Logout
Press [Logout] on the upper right of the screen to display a logout confirmation screen. Press [OK]. The login
screen appears again.
5 Using the User Box function
5-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
5.4
5.4 Using the User Box function
To use Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, the following operations are available
as the User Box function.
- Operating documents in the User Box on the MFP being used or a different MFP connected to the network.
- Using the Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes as User Box Types.
- Displaying, printing, and deleting a document in the User Box.
5.4.1 Open User Box
Logging in using Web Connection displays the list of User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes)
registered in the accessed MFP.
[Open User Box]
Select a desired User Box name ([User Box Name]) at User Box List. Alternatively, directly enter a User Box
number ([User Box Number]) and User Box password ([User Box Password]), and then press [OK].
Reference
- When you select a User Box name ([User Box Name]) with a password specified in [User Box List], a
screen for entering the password appears.
[Open User Box]
[User Box List]
Item Description
[User Box Number] Enter the User Box number to be opened.
[User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password.
Item Description
[Search from Index] Switch the index display according to the indexes selected when creating a
User Box.
[Page (Display by 50
cases)]
When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired page
to change the display.
User Box List Displays the [User Box Number], [User Box Name], [Type] and [Time Stored].
A key icon appears beside User Boxes where a password has been specified.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5-7
5.4 Using the User Box function 5
[File List]
Select a User Box in [Open User Box]. The basic information of the User Box is displayed with a list of the
documents saved in the User Box.
Item Description
[Thumbnail View] Specify whether to view the thumbnail images of the document.
Set to [OFF] for list display.
[Specify operation] Select an operation.
For details, refer to page 5-8.
[Changes the display] Press this button to display the [Select] check box beside all documents with
which the selected operation can be performed.
[Select] Displays a check box beside all documents with which the selected operation
can be performed.
[Thumbnail] Displays thumbnail images of the document.
[Document Name] Displays the name of the document.
[Number of Originals] Displays the number of originals in a document.
[Edit Name] Press this button to change the document name.
5 Using the User Box function
5-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
5.4
5.4.2 Document operations
A selected document can be printed or deleted.
Printing a document
1 Select [Print] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display].
A check box appears beside all printable documents.
2 Select the check box for the document to be printed, and then press [Print Setting].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5-9
5.4 Using the User Box function 5
3 Configure necessary settings, and then press [OK].
% In [Page Range], select whether to print all pages of the selected document or to print by specifying
a page range.
% In [Change order], you can change the print order when printing multiple documents.
4 Press [Open File].
5 Press [Print].
% If [View] is pressed, a PDF file appears. To print the displayed PDF file, press .
6 Configure print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel.
Reference
- If the [Function Version] of the destination MFP is not [Version 3], press [Open File] in Step 4 to display
the PDF file on the panel. To print the displayed PDF file, press . To check the function version of
the MFP, select [Device Information] in [Utility].
5 Using the User Box function
5-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
5.4
Deleting a document
1 Select [Delete] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display].
A check box appears beside the documents that can be deleted.
2 Select the check box for the document to be deleted, and then press [Delete].
% Select the [Check/Uncheck (applied to all the documents )] check box to select all documents.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5-11
5.4 Using the User Box function 5
3 Check the document name to be deleted, and then press [OK].
The document is deleted.
5 Using the User Box function
5-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
5.4
6 Image Panel
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-3
6.1 Overview 6
6 Image Panel
6.1 Overview
Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface.
Reference
- This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered.
- If [User Authentication/ Account Track] ö [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] is set to [Limit] in [Administrator
Settings], Image Panel cannot be used.
Features
Image Panel divides the operation workflow into three processes, "reading a document", "editing a document",
and "specifying a destination", which can be operated on one screen. This allows you to easily understand
the entire operation workflow and operation in progress.
Image Panel focuses on operability. Therefore, the functions available in Image Panel are limited compared
with the conventional panel.
When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a
user-specific screen.
dReference
For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-3.
For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3.
6 Displaying the Image Panel
6-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.2
6.2 Displaying the Image Panel
In [Application Menu], press [Image Panel] to display the Image Panel top screen.
dReference
For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-5
6.3 Operating Image Panel 6
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6.3.1 Screen components
The Image Panel screen consists of the following.
No. Name Description
1 Login Information
area
Displays the user name and icon of the user who is currently logged in.
2 Read Data area Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory,
and send data from a cellular phone or PDA.
3 Desktop area Documents read in the Read Data area are displayed in a thumbnail view
or list view.
4 List Display/Thumbnail
View switching
Switches the desktop area display between the list display and thumbnail
view.
5 Message area Displays an auxiliary message such as operating instructions.
6 Status area Displays the date and current time.
If an alert occurs, an alert icon appears.
7 Edit tool area Edit the page, combine and change settings of the document after it is
scanned.
8 Send Tray/Edit Tool
display switching
Switches the display between the send tray and edit tool display.
For details on the send tray, refer to page 6-17.
9 Document Destination
area
Specify a destination of the read document from [Print] or [Destination
List].
1 3 4 5 6
9
8 7
2
6 Operating Image Panel
6-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.3
6.3.2 General operation
The following describes the operation flow from document reading processing to sending processing by
showing operations of Image Panel in order of "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying
a destination".
Reference
- You can specify a destination first, and then read a document.
In the Read Data area, read or retrieve a document.
• To scan a document, place the document, and then press [Scan]. Configure the scan settings as needed,
and then start to read the document. For details, refer to page 6-8.
• To use a document saved in a User Box, select the User Box from [Document Source List], and select
the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-9.
• To use a document saved in an external memory, select [External Memory] from [Document Source
List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-10.
• To use data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. For details,
refer to page 6-11.
Select [Scan] Select [Document Source List].
In the Edit Tool area, edit the read document. For details, refer to page 6-12.
In the Document Destination area, specify a destination of the read document.
• To print, press [Print]. For details, refer to page 6-15.
• To send the document, select a destination from [Destination List]. For details, refer to page 6-16.
• To save data in an external memory, press [External Memory] in the Destination List screen. For details,
refer to page 6-16.
Select [Print]. Select [Destination List]
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-7
6.3 Operating Image Panel 6
If you specify an address, the send tray appears. For details, refer to page 6-17.
Press Start to send the document.
• To send data from a cellular phone or PDA, press
Start to display a PIN code. Enter the PIN code in
the cellular phone or PDA to send data to the MFP.
Data is sent to the specified destination. For details,
refer to page 6-18.
6 Operating Image Panel
6-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.3
6.3.3 Reading a document
Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular
phone or PDA.
Scanning a document
Press [Scan] to display the Scan Settings screen. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then press
[Scan].
Reference
- Only one document can be scanned.
Item Description
[Original Type] Select the image quality from [Text], [Text/Photo], [Photo], [Dot Matrix Original]
and [Copied Paper] according to the contents of the original to be scanned.
[Simplex/Duplex] Select either to scan a 1-sided original or 2-sided original.
[Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi
(Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra
Fine)].
[File Type] Select a file type from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact
XPS].
Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file
in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi
Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type.
To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment
Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files
to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages
for each divided file.
Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF].
If i-Option LK-102 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF]
for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties].
For details on the function, refer to page 7-3.
If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF]
for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function,
refer to page 8-3.
[Density] Adjust the density for scanning.
[Color] Select the scan color from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black].
[Document Name] Specify the document name.
[Separate Scan] Press this button to divide scanning of the document into several times. It is
useful for the following cases.
• When the number of pages of a document is too many, and it cannot be
loaded into the ADF
• When placing the originals on the original glass
• When 1-sided originals and 2-sided originals are mixed
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-9
6.3 Operating Image Panel 6
Retrieving from User Box
Select a User Box from [Document Source List] to display the Use Document screen. Select a document to
be retrieved, and then press [OK].
Reference
- If a password has been specified for the selected User Box, the password input screen appears. Enter
the password.
- Only one User Box can be selected.
- Up to 10 documents can be retrieved from a User Box at one time.
- If a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot retrieve more than one document.
- If [Print]is specified as a destination, you cannot retrieve more than one document.
- You cannot specify the User Box, from which you retrieved the document, as the destination.
Item Description
[Edit Name] Press this button to change the name of the selected document.
[Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected
document.
6 Operating Image Panel
6-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.3
Retrieving a document from an external memory
Select [External Memory] from [Document Source List] to display the list of documents saved in the external
memory. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK].
Reference
- To retrieve a document from an external memory, you must configure the following settings in the MFP
depending on the purpose of the document to be used.
– To print a retrieved document, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]
ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Print Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user
authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication
Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Print] to [Allow] for each user.
– To save a retrieved document in a User Box, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box
Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [External Memory Document Scan] to [ON]. To additionally
perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account
Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[External
Memory Document Scan] to [Allow] for each user.
- The available file formats are PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS.
- Up to 200 documents can be retrieved from an external memory.
- To open a folder, select the one you want to open, and then press [Open].
- You cannot specify a JPEG document together with any other format at the same time.
- If a document has been retrieved from an external memory, you cannot read the document using [Scan]
or [Document Source List].
- You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination of a document retrieved from an external
memory. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User
Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance.
- If other than User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-11
6.3 Operating Image Panel 6
Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA
Select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. Selecting [Mobile/PDA] and pressing [OK] displays the cellular
phone icon on the desktop area.
Reference
- To connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA, install the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 in the
MFP. Additionally, configure the following settings in the MFP.
– Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[Bluetooth Setting] to [Enable]. Also, set [Administrator
Settings]ö[System Connection]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] to [Allow].
– To perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account
Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Cellular
Phone/PDA] to [Allow] for each user.
- If [Mobile/PDA] is selected, you cannot read a document using [Scan] or [Document Source List].
- You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone
or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box,
you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance.
- If other than [Print] or a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [Mobile].
- This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.9.
- To print an XHTML file, since a linked file is retrieved using the WebDAV client function, you must configure
the following settings in the MFP in advance.
– Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[WebDAV Settings]ö[WebDAV Client Settings] to
[ON].
– To connect via a proxy, register a proxy server in [Proxy Server Address] of [WebDAV Client Settings].
Additionally, set [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Proxy Server Use] to [Yes].
– In [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Link File Error Notification], specify the operation for
the machine to execute when it is unable to retrieve the linked file.
dReference
For details on how to send data from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 6-18.
The function to connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA is available even if the license kit is not registered.
For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations] and [User's Guide Print Operations].
Item Specifications
Communication protocol
Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR
Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP
Supporting file type PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo
Supporting XHTML file Character code: UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859
Extension of link file: JPEG, JPG, PNG
6 Operating Image Panel
6-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.3
6.3.4 Editing the document
Edit the read document.
Reference
- When using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you cannot check the preview image or edit the data.
[Preview]
Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document.
Reference
- For a document retrieved from an external memory, the [Preview] function is not available.
- For a combined document, the preview function is available only for the first document.
[Document/Page] - [Edit Document]
Edit the pages of a selected document.
You can rotate the page that has been scanned in the wrong direction, or delete an unnecessary page. For
a document consisting of multiple pages, you can move pages to change the page order. Also, you can preview
the pages to check the page content.
Reference
- If you have selected multiple documents, the edit page function is not available.
- If you have selected a combined document, the edit page function is not available.
Item Description
[Odd Page] Press this button to select the odd page.
[Even Page] Press this button to select the even page.
[Preview /Set Range] Press this button to preview the page.
[Delete Page] Press this button to delete the selected page.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-13
6.3 Operating Image Panel 6
[Document/Page] - [Combine Documents]
Combine selected multiple documents. You can use [Move] to change the combination order.
Reference
- You can only select either [Print] or [Destination List] as a destination of a combined document.
- Up to 10 documents can be combined at one time.
- You cannot combine a scanned document with a document retrieved from a User Box.
[Rotate Page] Press this button to rotate the selected page.
The allowable rotation angles are left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180
degrees.
[Move Page] Press this button to change the order by moving the selected page.
While checking the thumbnail images, you can select the moving position.
Item Description
6 Operating Image Panel
6-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.3
[Document/Page] - [Document Settings]
Configure settings for sending the selected document.
You can change the resolution of the document, file type, and color setting.
Reference
- If you have selected multiple documents, the document setting function is not available.
- If you have selected a document retrieved from an external memory, the document setting function is
not available.
[Return to Scan Dest.]
Press [Return to Scan Dest.] to restore the selected document to the source location.
- The scanned document is deleted from the MFP.
- The document retrieved from a User Box is restored to the source User Box.
Item Description
[Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [Settings when saving], [200 e 100dpi (Standard)],
[200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600
e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)].
[File Type] Select the file format for sending data from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF],
[JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS].
Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file
in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi
Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type.
To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment
Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files
to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages
for each divided file.
Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF].
If i-Option LK-102 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF]
for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties].
For details on the function, refer to page 7-3.
If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF]
for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function,
refer to page 8-3.
[Color] Select the scan color for sending data from [Use Existing Color Setting], [Full
Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-15
6.3 Operating Image Panel 6
6.3.5 Specifying a destination
Specify a destination of the read document.
Printing
Press [Print] to print data directly from the MFP. Configure the print settings, and then press [OK].
Reference
- If you have scanned multiple documents, the print setting function will not be available.
- When you print a combined document, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available.
- When printing a document with an embedded password using the password copy function, you cannot
specify [Combine] or [Zoom]. For details on the password copy function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy
Operations].
- When you print a document that has been retrieved from an external memory, [Use Existing Color Setting],
[Combine] and [Zoom] are not available.
- When you print a document of JPEG, XPS, or Compact XPS format that has been retrieved from an
external memory, [2-Sided] is not available. Also, Staple and Punch are not available for the [Finishing]
setting.
- When printing data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you can only check the print settings. To change
print settings, select [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Print].
Reference
- The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which option is installed.
– The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed.
– The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher.
- [Continuous Print] is displayed when multiple documents are combined using the editing tool, and then
[Print] is selected as a destination.
Item Description
[Copies:] Specify the number of copies to be printed using the Keypad.
[Print] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode.
[Color] Specify whether to print originals in color or black-and-white.
[Finishing] Press this button to configure settings for collating, grouping, stapling, or hole
punching.
[Combine] Press this button to specify whether to combine pages.
Multiple pages of a document can be combined and printed on a single page.
[Zoom] Press this button to specify a zoom ratio for the document.
[Continuous Print] This function is available when printing combined documents in the 2-sided
print mode.
Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined. When
printing in 2-Sided mode, and the document ends on the front side of a sheet
of paper, select whether to start printing of the next document on the back side
of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet.
6 Operating Image Panel
6-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.3
Specifying destinations
From [Destination List], select an address to which you want to send a document.
Press the [Search] tab to reference one-touch destinations registered in the main unit. Press the [Group] tab
to reference the group list registered in the main unit.
Reference
- If you have read multiple documents, the User Box function will not be available.
- If My address function is available, pressing [My Address] allows you to view My Address Book. For
details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3.
- If you have specified an address, you can check the send tray by pressing [Verify Address Tray/ Remote
Address Setting].
- E-mail addresses for which a certificate is registered are displayed with a key icon.
- You can only specify User Boxes as an address book destination of a document retrieved from an external
memory or a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA.
Saving a document in an external memory
Select [External Memory] from [Destination List], and press [OK].
Reference
- To save data in an external memory, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]
ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Save Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user
authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication
Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Save to External Memory] to [Allow] for
each user.
- If [Print] or a destination is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-17
6.3 Operating Image Panel 6
6.3.6 Checking the send tray
Send Tray
If you specify an address, the send tray appears. The send tray displays the icon for the destination you have
specified.
[Check TX Tray]
Press the icon of the send tray to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified
destinations.
If an E-mail address is specified as a destination, you can specify settings for the E-mail encryption and digital
signature attachment.
No. Name Description
1 Dest. Settings icon Press the Dest. Settings icon to display the Check Send To screen, where
you can check the list of specified destinations.
2 Destination icon Displays the icons for destinations.
Press the icon for the desired destination to display the Check Send To
screen, where you can check the detail information of the destination.
1 2
Item Description
[Remote Address Settings]
Press this button to configure settings for E-mail encryption based on S/MIME
and digital signature attachment.
This setting is available when [ON] is selected for [S/MIME Communication
Settings] of [Administrator Settings], and E-mail is selected.
[Detail] Press this button to check the detailed information of the address.
6 Operating Image Panel
6-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.3
Reference
- To encrypt an E-mail message and attach a digital signature using S/MIME, set [Administrator Settings]
ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings] to [ON].
- To encrypt an E-mail, a certificate must be registered in the E-mail address.
- To attach a digital signature to an E-mail message, the device certificate must be registered in the MFP.
Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication
Settings]ö[Digital Signature] to [Always add signature] or [Select when sending]. For details, refer to
the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA
Selecting a destination and pressing Start displays the PIN code on the Control Panel.
Specify the data you want to use and the MFP to send data in the cellular phone or PDA. Then enter the PIN
code to send data to the MFP.
Reference
- You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone
or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box,
you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance.
– For details on how to create a User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].
– For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
- For the operation of a cellular phone or PDA, refer to the operation manual of the cellular phone or PDA.
- The communication speed may be reduced or communication may be interrupted by obstacles, signal
quality, magnetic field or static electricity.
- Documents and image data may not be sent correctly depending on the security setting of the cellular
phone or PDA.
[Delete] Press this button to delete the selected address.
Item Description
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-19
6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6
6.4 Registering a photo in the address book
From the Web browser on your computer, you can use Web Connection to add photo data to registered
one-touch destinations.
The registered photo data is applied to the [Destination List] of Image Panel.
dReference
For details on Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
6.4.1 Specifications of photo data
The specifications for registerable photo data are as shown below.
Reference
- Photo data is not enlarged or reduced during photo data registration process.
Item Specifications
File Type BMP format, 24-bit color, uncompressed
Image size 48 e 48 pixels
Data size 6,966 bytes
6 Registering a photo in the address book
6-20 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.4
6.4.2 Registering photo data
Register photo data by operating Web Connection from the Web browser on your computer.
Reference
- To add photo data to the address book, you must register one-touch destinations in advance.
- When the My Address function is available, you can add photo data to one-touch destinations in My
Address Book.
- Photo data can be registered in My Address Book only when you log in as a registered user.
1 Log in to the user mode or administrator mode.
2 Select [Store Address].
3 Select [Photo/Icon].
4 Select the one-touch destination to which you want to add photo data, and then click [Edit].
% When the photo data is registered, [Photo/Icon] is displayed in [Photo].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-21
6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6
5 Select [Register Photo].
6 Click [Browse], and then specify the folder where the photo data you want to add is saved.
7 Press [OK].
The photo data is added to the one-touch destination.
6 Customizing Image Panel
6-22 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.5
6.5 Customizing Image Panel
When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a
user-specific screen.
To customize the Image Panel screen, the following conditions are required.
- The My Panel and My Address functions are available on the MFP.
- Perform user authentication, and then log in as a registered user.
dReference
For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-3.
For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3.
6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area
Shortcut icons for frequently used User Boxes can be registered in the Read Data area.
1 In [Data Source], press [Document Source List].
2 Press [Customize Basic Screen].
3 Select the User Box you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Read Data
area.
% If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten.
% You cannot register a User Box that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in
the basic screen.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-23
6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6
4 Press [OK].
A shortcut icon is registered.
6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area
Shortcut icons for frequently used destinations can be registered in the Document Destination area.
1 Press [Destination List] in the [Data Destination] area.
2 Press [Customize Basic Screen].
3 Select the destination you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Document
Destination area.
% If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten.
% You cannot register a destination that is already registered in the basic screen to another location
in the basic screen.
6 Customizing Image Panel
6-24 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.5
4 Press [OK].
A shortcut icon is registered.
6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon
1 Press [Customize Basic Screen].
2 Select an icon you want to delete.
3 Press [Delete].
4 Press [OK].
The shortcut icon is deleted.
7 PDF Processing Function
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-3
7.1 Overview 7
7 PDF Processing Function
7.1 Overview
The PDF processing function allows you to specify the security level for distributing a scanned document and
a document saved in a User Box, such as by encrypting a document or adding a digital signature as required.
Reference
- This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-102 registered.
Available operations with the PDF processing function
The PDF processing function allows you to perform the following operations.
- Configuring the PDF document property settings when distributing it with the scan or User Box function
(p. 7-4).
- Encrypting a PDF document using a password or digital ID (public key) when distributing it with the scan
or User Box function (p. 7-5).
- Adding a digital signature when distributing an encrypted PDF document (p. 7-5).
- An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed using the direct print mode (p. 7-8).
dReference
For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].
7 PDF document properties
7-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.2
7.2 PDF document properties
Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved
in a User Box allows you to configure the PDF document property settings.
Reference
- When saving a document in a User Box using [Save Document] of the User Box function, you cannot
configure the PDF document property settings.
- When sending a document in a User Box in the PDF format to other device using Web Connection,
you can configure the PDF document property settings.
Item Description
[Title] If [No] is selected for [Apply file name.], specify the title of the PDF document
(up to 64 characters).
[Apply file name.] Specify whether to apply the file name as the name of the PDF document.
[Author] Enter the author of the PDF document (up to 64 characters).
When user authentication is performed, the login name is entered as the author
name.
[Subject] Enter the sub-title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters).
[Keywords] Enter the keywords of the PDF document (up to 64 characters).
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-5
7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7
7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature
Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved
in a User Box allows you to enhance security for the PDF document by encrypting it using a password or the
digital ID of a user (public key).
When a device certificate is registered in the MFP, a PDF document can be distributed with a digital signature
added. Adding a digital signature certifies the author (MFP) of the sent document and guarantees that the
document has not been modified after being signed.
Reference
- Using Web Connection, you can encrypt and add a digital signature to send a document in a User Box
to another device in the PDF format.
- To add a digital signature, it is necessary to encrypt the PDF document using a password or digital ID.
7.3.1 Password-based encryption
To encrypt a document using a password, configure the following settings.
Item Description
[Encryption Target] Select an encryption target.
Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document
Properties] from the encryption target.
Selecting [Other than Metadata] does not allow you to select [Low Level] for
Encryption Level.
[Encryption Type] Select [Password].
[Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to
add a digital signature.
For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's
Guide Network Administrator].
[Encryption Level] Select an encryption level.
• [Low Level]: RC4 encoding method (40-bit key length), supported by Acrobat
3.0 or later
• [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by
Acrobat 5.0 or later
• [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by
Acrobat 7.0 or later
[Password] Enter the password required to open a PDF document.
Enter the password twice for confirmation.
[Document Permissions]
Enter the password required to change the document permissions. Enter the
password twice for confirmation. You cannot use the same password as that
specified in [Password].
After you have configured document permissions, press [Detail Settings] to
configure the detailed permission settings. The set values vary depending on
the encryption level.
7 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature
7-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.3
[Detail Settings]
7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption
To encrypt a document using the digital ID of a user, configure the following settings.
Item Description
[Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document.
[Low Resolution] is selectable when [High Level 1] or [High Level 2] is selected
for Encryption Level.
[Enable copying of
text, images and other
content]
Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content.
[Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document.
• Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the
page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level.
• Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form
and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher
security level.
• Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments,
enter information in the form and add a digital signature.
• Select [Page layout, filling in form fields and signing.] to insert, delete or rotate
the page, enter information in the form and add a digital signature.
Configure this setting for encryption at a lower security level.
• Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form
field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature.
Item Description
[Encryption Target] Select an encryption target.
Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document
Properties] from the encryption target.
[Encryption Type] Select [Digital ID].
Select [Digital ID] to display the screen for selecting destinations. The screen
for selecting an address displays a list of E-mail addresses with registered digital
IDs for S/MIME sending. Specify a digital ID to be used for encryption by
selecting an E-mail address.
Selecting [Same as destination] uses the digital ID of the address; you do not
need to specify a digital ID on this screen.
Specification of the digital ID is independent of specification of an address;
therefore, you need to specify an address separately.
[Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to
add a digital signature.
For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's
Guide Network Administrator].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-7
7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7
[Detail Settings]
Reference
- Digital ID-based encryption requires registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address in advance.
For details on registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address, refer to the [User's Guide Network
Administrator].
- You can specify up to 100 digital IDs.
- The specifiable digital ID depends on the apply level of a user.
- When saving a PDF document in a User Box, you cannot encrypt it using a digital ID.
- When encrypting a PDF document and creating a searchable PDF document at the same time, the following
settings are not available if [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] in the searchable PDF setting.
– [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID]
– [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2]
– [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata]
– [Signature]: [Yes]
- For details on the searchable PDF function, refer to page 8-3.
[Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. To encrypt a document using a digital ID, you cannot
select [Low Level] for Encryption Level.
• [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by
Acrobat 5.0 or later
• [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by
Acrobat 7.0 or later
Item Description
[Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document.
[Enable copying of
text, images and other
content]
Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content.
[Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document.
• Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the
page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level.
• Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form
and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher
security level.
• Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments,
enter information in the form and add a digital signature.
• Select [Page layout, filling in form fields and signing.] to insert, delete or rotate
the page, enter information in the form and add a digital signature.
Configure this setting for encryption at a lower security level.
• Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form
field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature.
Item Description
7 Direct Print
7-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.4
7.4 Direct Print
An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed in the direct print mode.
User Web Connection to print documents in the direct print mode. Log in as a public user or registered user,
and then select [Direct Print].
Click [Browse] to locate the file, and then click [OK].
dReference
For details on Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations].
8 Searchable PDF function
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-3
8.1 Overview 8
8 Searchable PDF function
8.1 Overview
Searchable PDF refers to a function that creates a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data
on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process.
You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF or compact PDF format
using the scan or User Box function. The searchable PDF function supports multiple languages. When creating
a searchable PDF file, select an appropriate language according to the original for correct OCR
processing. Also, you can improve the accuracy of OCR processing by automatically correcting the page direction.
If you want to manage paper-based documents in electronic format, it will be convenient to use the searchable
PDF function to convert documents into a text-searchable PDF file.
Reference
- This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP.
- For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
- For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].
Precautions when creating searchable PDF files
Depending on the original condition, there may be some problems recognizing the text, the text may become
garbled, or other problems may arise.
Example
- The characters that the MFP does not support will not be correctly recognized.
- If any language different from that used in the original is selected when creating a searchable PDF file,
text will not be correctly recognized.
- If the page direction is not set to be corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original
does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized.
dReference
For details on the setting to automatically correct the page direction, refer to page 8-5.
Recognizable character size
Reference
- When creating a searchable PDF file, a resolution over 300 dpi cannot be specified for scanning.
Japanese European language Asian language
Resolution 200 dpi 12 pt to 142 pt 9 pt to 142 pt 20 pt to 142 pt
300 dpi 8 pt to 96 pt 6 pt to 96 pt 12 pt to 96 pt
8 Configuring the OCR operation setting
8-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.2
8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting
Before creating a searchable PDF file, you can specify whether to give priority to accuracy or speed for OCR
processing.
[OCR Operation Setting]
1 Press Utility/Counter.
2 Press [User Settings].
3 Press [Scan/Fax Settings].
4 In [Scan/Fax Settings] (2/2), press [OCR Operation Setting].
5 Select the OCR operation, and press [OK].
% [Prioritize Quality]: Give priority to recognition accuracy of an original text. Also, inclination of the
original is adjusted automatically.
% [Prioritize Speed]: Give priority to OCR processing speed. Inclination of the original is not adjusted.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-5
8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting 8
8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting
You can create a searchable PDF file by selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type when saving or sending
an original in the PDF format using the Scan and User Box functions.
dReference
For details on how to specify the file type when using the Scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
For details on how to specify the file type when using the User Box function, refer to the [User's Guide Box
Operations].
Reference
- If [Compact PDF] is selected for [File Type] to create a searchable PDF file, the OCR processing speed
may be faster than when [PDF] is selected.
- When creating a searchable PDF file, [Resolution] cannot be set to [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] or
[600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)].
- To create a searchable PDF file and encrypt a PDF file at the same time, if any of the following settings
are specified, [Adjust Rotation] cannot be set to [Adjust] in the PDF encryption setting.
– [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID]
– [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2]
– [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata]
– [Signature]: [Yes]
- For details on how to encrypt a PDF file, refer to page 7-5.
- For [Japanese], [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], the text direction (vertical or horizontal writing) is
recognized automatically. However, for [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], if both vertical and horizontal
text directions are used on the same page, the original is processed based on one or the other.
Item Description
[Language Selection] Select a language to use to create a searchable PDF file.
Text will not be correctly recognized unless an appropriate language is selected
according to the original.
[Adjust Rotation] Specify whether to automatically rotate each page to correct it according to
the text direction detected through an OCR process.
If the page direction is not corrected automatically, and the direction of the
specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly
recognized.
8 Configuring the searchable PDF setting
8-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.3
9 My Panel Function
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-3
9.1 Overview 9
9 My Panel Function
9.1 Overview
The My Panel function allows the user to centrally manage the environment of the Control Panel customized
by the user according to the application (My Panel), and to obtain My Panel on the MFP selected by the user.
Using My Panel provides the same operationality on multiple MFPs in network environment.
dReference
This function is used in connection with the My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer
to the My Panel Manager manual.
You can also configure My Panel settings using the My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the My Panel
Manager manual.
9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel
My Panel allows you to personalize the Control Panel so that frequently-used functions are preferentially displayed.
Also, if the Web browser or Image Panel is available, by linking it with My Panel Manager, you can manage
the Web browser settings and information for each user, and personalize the Image Panel screen.
Customizable items
My Panel allows you to customize the following items.
- Specification of a language displayed on the Control Panel
- Specification of a measurement unit to be displayed when entering numbers
- Initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and registration of short-cut keys and
setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen
- Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys
- Initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and registration of shortcut keys
- Specification of the color of selected buttons of the Control Panel
- Display of the My Panel main menu
- Display of the initial screen of the Control Panel
Functions available by linking to the Web browser
You can personalize the operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel.
My Panel allows you to manage the following settings and information for each user.
- Home page
- Favorites
- Display history of contents
- URL input history
- Cookie
- Authentication information
dReference
Register a home page and favorites using the Web browser. Display history, input history, cookies, authentication
information are automatically stored in the server as the user uses the Web browser. For details on
how to use the Web browser, refer to page 4-3.
You can edit the registration information of a home page and favorites using My Panel Manager. For details,
refer to the manual.
9 Overview
9-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.1
Functions available with Image Panel
By linking the Image Panel with My Panel or My Address Book, you can register shortcuts for the document
source and destination in the basic screen of Image Panel to personalize the operation environment of Image
Panel. Also, you can refer to My Address Book to specify a destination to send data to.
dReference
For details on customizing the Image Panel screen, refer to page 6-22.
For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3.
9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure
Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically
accesses the server to obtain My Panel of the user who is logged in.
The user can use My Panel while logged in to the MFP. My Panel is not available after the user logs out.
9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function
The following are restrictions on the use of My Panel.
- Registering, editing and deleting My Panel are available only for the user who owns the My Panel. The
administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Panel.
- When you access My Panel for the first time, the language, measurement unit and color selection settings
comply with the settings in the MFP.
- When you access My Panel for the first time, the main menu of My Panel is displayed in the initial
screen.
- Only the setting memory (copy program and fax/scan program) registered on the MFP you use is available.
- Depending on the functions or option installation status of the MFP on which My Panel is used, the operating
environment specified as My Panel may not be available.
- When registering, editing, or deleting My panel, an error may occur depending on the connection status
to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection.
My Panel is available
My Panel is available
Server
(manages My Panel)
(3) Obtain My Panel (2) Access the server
(1) Perform authentication
My Panel is not available
• Authentication failed
• Log out
• Failed to obtain My Panel,etc.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-5
9.2 Displaying My Panel 9
9.2 Displaying My Panel
9.2.1 Main Menu
Main Menu appears first when displaying My Panel.
In Main Menu, you can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory. In
Main Menu, 12 types of shortcut keys can be registered.
For details on configuring settings for Main Menu, refer to page 9-15.
9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu
When using the My Panel function, you can change the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication
is succeeded. To display Main Menu for My Panel from a different initial screen, use the [Application Menu].
In [Application Menu], press [My Panel] to display Main Menu of My Panel.
dReference
The initial screen displayed after user authentication is succeeded can be changed in [My Panel Settings] Settings.
For details, refer to page 9-16.
For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4.
9 Customizing My Panel
9-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.3
9.3 Customizing My Panel
Customize My Panel in [My Panel Settings] of [Utility].
9.3.1 [My Panel Settings]
Customizable items are as follows.
Item Description
[Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel.
For details, refer to page 9-8.
[Measurement Unit
Settings]
Select a measurement unit to be used when displaying values on My Panel.
For details, refer to page 9-8.
[Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and
register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic
screen.
For details, refer to page 9-9.
[Scan/Fax Settings] Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration
of shortcut keys
For details, refer to page 9-11.
[User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function
and register shortcut keys.
For details, refer to page 9-13.
[Color Selection Settings]
Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel.
For details, refer to page 9-14.
[Main Menu Settings] Register the main menu buttons on the Main Menu screen of My Panel.
For details, refer to page 9-15.
[Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded.
For details, refer to page 9-16.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-7
9.3 Customizing My Panel 9
9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings]
When the My Panel function is available, [My Panel Settings] appears in [Utility].
1 Log in as a registered user.
2 Press Utility/Counter.
3 Press [My Panel Settings].
The My Panel Settings screen appears.
9 Customizing My Panel
9-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.3
9.3.3 [Language Setting]
Select a language to be used on My Panel from the languages available on the MFP.
9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings]
Select a length unit to be used on My Panel.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-9
9.3 Customizing My Panel 9
9.3.5 [Copier Settings]
Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and
setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen.
[Default Tab]
Configure the default display settings for the basic screen in the copy mode.
[Basic] displays normal basic display.
[Quick Copy] displays the setting items of basic settings screen in a single screen. It can be used to specify
multiple setting at one time.
[Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2]
Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used copy application functions on the basic screen.
Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out.
Reference
- When the optional Image Controller IC-412 v1.1 is installed, only one shortcut key can be programmed
for the basic screen.
9 Customizing My Panel
9-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.3
[Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4]
Arrange the setting values of the Copy function and copy program keys in the basic screen.
By arranging the frequently-used setting values and copy program keys in the basic screen, you can configure
the copy settings easily only by pressing the key. You can arrange up to four keys.
dReference
To arrange a copy program in the basic screen, you must register the copy program in advance. For details
on how to register a copy program, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
[Default Tab Density Settings]
Place the key to adjust the copy density on the basic screen.
Reference
- When placing the density adjustment key on the basic screen, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings 4]
are not available.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-11
9.3 Customizing My Panel 9
9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings]
Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and register shortcut keys.
[Default Tab]
Configure initial display settings for the basic screen in the fax/scan function.
9 Customizing My Panel
9-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.3
[Address Book Index Default]
To use the public address book, specify the type of an index to be displayed initially in [Address Book].
By default, [My Address Book] is selected.
dReference
For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3.
[Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2]
Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used fax/scan application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut
keys can be laid out.
Reference
- When the optional Image Controller IC-412 v1.1 is installed, only one shortcut key can be programmed
for the basic screen.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-13
9.3 Customizing My Panel 9
[Default Address Book]
Configure settings for the default screen of [Address Book].
[Default Address Type]
When displaying an address book by address type, specify an address type to be displayed by default.
9.3.7 [User Box Settings]
Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys.
[Default Tab]
Configure the default display settings for the basic screen (after User Box is pressed on the Control Panel)
in the User Box mode.
9 Customizing My Panel
9-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.3
[Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2]
Lay out shortcut keys for User Boxes frequently used when using a User Box document on the basic screen.
Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out.
Reference
- When the optional Image Controller IC-412 v1.1 is installed, only one shortcut key can be programmed
for the basic screen.
9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings]
Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-15
9.3 Customizing My Panel 9
9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings]
Customize the main menu of My Panel.
You can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory (copy programs and
fax/scan programs) in Main Menu.
Main menu button
The shortcut key displayed in Main Menu is called the main menu button, and up to 12 types can be registered.
To register the set memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) as main menu buttons, press [Icon] to
select icons for the setting memory to be displayed on Main Menu.
Registering a main menu button
[Function], [Copy Function Settings], [Scan/Fax Function Settings], [Copy Program Settings], and [Scan/Fax
Program Settings] can be assigned as main menu buttons.
Item Description
[Function] Registers a shortcut key to each of [Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Image Panel],
and [Web Browser] functions.
Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered
in Main Menu only when its function is enabled.
[Copy Function Settings]
Register shortcut keys in Copy Function Settings for each of [Color], [Paper
Setting], [Zoom], [Duplex/Combine], and [Finishing].
[Scan/Fax Function
Settings]
Register shortcut keys in Scan/Fax Function Settings for each of [Scan Settings],
[Original Settings] and [Comm. Settings].
[Copy Program Settings]
Register a shortcut key to the copier setting memory (copy program) registered
in the MFP.
Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory
icons to be displayed on Main Menu.
The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the
setting memory registered.
For details on registering the copier setting memory (copy program), refer to
the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
[Scan/Fax Program
Settings]
Register a shortcut key to the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program)
registered in the MFP.
Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory
icons to be displayed on Main Menu.
The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the
setting memory registered.
For details on registering the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program), refer
to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
9 Customizing My Panel
9-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.3
9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings]
Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. By default, the My Panel
main menu is displayed as the initial screen.
Reference
- Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in the initial screen only
when its function is enabled.
10 My Address function
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10-3
10.1 Overview 10
10 My Address function
10.1 Overview
The My Address function allows the user to centrally manage the personal address book (My Address Book)
on the server, and to obtain My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user.
Using My Address Book allows you to use the same address book on multiple MFPs in your network environment
without registering addresses individually on each MFP.
dReference
This function is used in connection with the My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer
to the My Panel Manager manual.
You can also add entries to My Address Book using My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the My Panel
Manager manual.
10.1.1 Classification of address books
When the My Address function is available, you can use the following two kinds of address books.
Public address book
Public address book refers to an address book accessible to anyone registered in the main unit of the MFP
selected by the user.
The public address book is provided with the following features.
- In the public address book. one-touch destinations, groups, and programs can be registered.
- Since the public address book is registered in the main unit of the MFP, available destinations depend
on the selected MFP.
- The user or administrator can register, edit, or delete the public address book.
- If registration and editing of destinations by a user is restricted by the administrator, registration or editing
of the public address book is not possible.
My Address Book
My Address Book refers to a server-managed address book accessible only to the user.
My Address Book is provided with the following features.
- In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered.
- Since the My Address function is obtained from the server on the MFP selected by the user, it is available
on any MFP in which the My Address function is available.
- Only the specified user can register, edit or delete My Panel.
10 Overview
10-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
10.1
10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure
Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically
accesses the server to obtain My Address Book of the user who is logged in.
The user can use My Address Book while logged in to the MFP. My Address Book is not available after the
user logs out.
10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function
There are following restrictions on My Address Book.
- Only the user who owns My Address Book can register, edit or delete My Address Book. The administrator
of the MFP cannot operate My Address Book.
- My Address Book can contain up to 100 one-touch destinations and up to 10 groups (up to 100 onetouch
destinations per group).
- If the number of registered destinations in My Address Book exceeds the maximum value, a new destination
cannot be registered.
- Program cannot be registered in My Address Book.
- Destination search by index is not possible in My Address Book.
- User Box is available only on the MFPs with registered destinations.
- Depending on the MFP settings or options installed in the MFP on which My Address Book is used,
sending that has been specified in the address book may not be performed.
- When registering, editing, or deleting My address book, an error may occur depending on the connection
status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection.
My Address Book is available
My Address Book is
available
Server
(manages My Address Book)
(3) Obtain My Address
Book
(2) Access the server
(1) Perform authentication
My Address Book is not available
• Authentication failed
• Log out
• Failed to obtain My Panel, etc.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10-5
10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10
10.2 Registering and editing a destination
Register frequently used personal addresses in My Address Book. Addresses can be registered using any of
the following methods.
- Using the Control Panel of the MFP
- Using Web Connection from a computer on the network
- Using the My Panel Manager
In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. This section describes how to
register addresses from the Control Panel of the MFP.
10.2.1 Address Book
Frequently used fax numbers and E-mail addresses, and registered User Boxes can be registered as onetouch
destinations. Up to 100 one-touch destinations can be registered in My Address Book.
1 Log in as a registered user.
2 Press Utility/Counter.
3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration].
4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination].
5 Press [Address Book (Personal)].
% To add one-touch destinations to the shared address book, press [Address Book (Public)].
A list of personal one-touch destinations appears.
6 Press [New].
% To edit a registered destination, select the destination, and then press [Edit].
% To delete a registered address, select the destination, and then press [Delete].
% To check a registered address, select the address, and then press [Check Job Set.].
10 Registering and editing a destination
10-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
10.2
7 Select the type of address to be registered, and then configure settings for required items.
dReference
For details of the address book entries, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
10.2.2 Group
Multiple one-touch destinations in My Address Book can be grouped, and registered as a group. In My Address
Book, up to 10 groups (up to 100 one-touch destinations per group) can be registered.
1 Log in as a registered user.
2 Press Utility/Counter.
3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration].
4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination].
5 Press [Group].
A list of groups appears.
6 Press [Personal], and then press [New].
% To edit a registered group, select the group, and then press [Edit].
% To delete a registered group, select the group, and then press [Delete].
% To check a registered group, select the group, and then press [Check Job Set.].
% Press [Public] to display the public groups.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10-7
10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10
7 Check that a personal group is selected as a registration destination, and then configure settings for
required items.
% Select [Select Group]. The addresses registered in My Address Book are displayed. Select onetouch
destination to be grouped.
dReference
For details on registration contents of the group, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations].
10 Copying destinations between address books
10-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
10.3
10.3 Copying destinations between address books
Registered one-touch destinations can be copied between the public address book and My Address Book.
Reference
- Groups cannot be copied between the public address book and My Address Book.
10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book
Addresses registered in the public address book can be copied to My Address Book.
1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination].
2 Press [Address Book (Public)].
3 Select the type of address to be copied.
A list of registered address books of the selected address type appears.
4 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Personal Addr.].
5 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK].
The selected address is copied.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10-9
10.3 Copying destinations between address books 10
10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book
Destinations registered in My Address Book can be copied to the public address book.
1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination].
2 Press [Address Book (Personal)].
A list of personal one-touch destinations appears.
3 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Shared Addr.].
4 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK].
The selected address is copied.
10 Using My Address Book when sending a document
10-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
10.4
10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document
Use My Address Book to specify a destination when sending a document using the Scan/Fax functions, or
sending a document in a User Box.
10.4.1 Specifying destinations
When the My Address function is available, the following screen appears when specifying an address.
Addresses registered in My Address Book appears by address type. Select the desired destination.
To select an address registered in the public address book, press [Public].
10.4.2 Searching for destinations
If a desired address is not found, you can search for it. In the screen for specifying a destination, press
[Search].
To search for destinations based on the registered address type, press [Address Type].
To search for destinations based on the name and a part of registration contents, press [Detail Search].
11 Index
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 11-3
11.1 Index by item 11
11 Index
11.1 Index by item
A
Accessing 5-3
Acquiring my panel 9-4
Address book 10-5
Application key 3-3, 3-5
Application menu 3-4
C
Cache 5-3
Cellular phone/PDA 6-11, 6-18
Customizing 3-5, 6-22, 9-6
D
Deleting 5-10
Display mode of web browser 4-11
Displaying 4-20
E
Entering text in web browser 4-10
External memory 6-16
F
Flash player 4-4
G
Group 10-6
I
Image panel 2-4, 6-3, 6-4, 6-22
Image panel operation 6-6
J
Just-fit rendering 4-11
L
Logging in 5-5
Logging out 5-5
M
Main menu 9-5
My address 2-4, 10-3
My address book 10-3, 10-10
My address book acquisition 10-4
My panel 2-4, 9-3, 9-5
My panel settings 9-6
O
OCR 8-4
Opening user boxes 5-6
Operating web browser 4-10
P
PDF processing 2-4, 7-3
Photo 6-19
PIN code 6-18
Print 6-15
Printing 4-18, 5-8
Public address book 10-3
R
Restriction of web browser 4-6
Restrictions on my address 10-4
Restrictions on my panel 9-4
S
Saving 4-21
Scanning 6-8
Screen components of image panel 6-5
Screen components of Web Connection 5-4
Screen components of web browser 4-9
Searchable PDF 2-4, 8-3, 8-5
Send tray 6-17
Smart-fit rendering 4-11
Speaker 4-11
Specifications 4-4, 6-19
Specifications for web browser 4-4
T
Toolbar 4-12
U
Upload 4-22
User box 5-6, 6-9
W
Web browser 2-4, 4-3, 4-5
Web browser information 4-17
Web browser settings 4-16
Web Connection 5-3
11-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
11 Index by button 11.2
11.2 Index by button
A
Access log 4-17
Address 4-14
Address Book (Personal) 10-5
Address Book Index Default 9-12
Application key 1 3-3
Application key 2 3-4
Application Key Settings 3-5
Application menu 3-4
Application menu key 3-3
Authentication information 4-17
C
Cache 4-17
Cellular Phone 6-11
Color Selection Settings 9-14
Combine Documents 6-13
Cookie 4-17
Copier Settings 9-9
Copy to Personal Addr. 10-8
Copy to Shared Addr. 10-9
D
Default Address Book 9-13
Default Address Type 9-13
Default Tab 9-9, 9-11, 9-13
Default Tab Density Settings 9-10
Destination List 6-16
Digital ID 7-6
Direct Print 7-8
Display 4-16
Document Settings 6-14
Document Source List 6-9
Document/Page 6-12, 6-13, 6-14
E
Edit Document 6-12
Encryption 7-5
External memory 6-10, 6-16
F
Favorites (Add) 4-13
Favorites (List) 4-13
Function Permission 4-7
G
Group 10-6
H
History 4-14
I
Initial Screen Settings 9-16
L
Language Setting 9-8
M
Main Menu Settings 9-15
Manage windows 4-17
Measurement Unit Settings 9-8
Menu 4-16
My Panel Settings 9-6
O
OCR operation setting 8-4
P
Page Operation 4-16
Password 7-5
PDF Document Properties 7-4
Photo/Icon 6-20
Preview 6-12
Print 4-15, 6-15
Proxy 4-17
Q
Quick Settings 9-10
R
Return to Scan Dest. 6-14
S
Scan 6-8
Scan/Fax Settings 9-11
Security 4-17
Settings 4-17
Shortcut key 9-9, 9-12, 9-14
U
User Box Settings 9-13
W
Web browser contents access 4-8
Web browser setting 4-6
Box operations
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Contents-1
Table of contents
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5
1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5
To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5
Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5
Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6
Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6
Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3 To check the function you want to use......................................................................................... 1-7
Understanding Operation Flow.......................................................................................................... 1-7
Using Menu Tree................................................................................................................................ 1-7
2 User Box Function Overview
2.1 User Box functions ......................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.1 Available User Box functions ............................................................................................................. 2-3
Saving documents ............................................................................................................................. 2-3
Using documents............................................................................................................................... 2-4
Organizing documents....................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions ...................................................................... 2-7
Registering a User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-7
When using this machine as a relay device ....................................................................................... 2-7
The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception............................................................. 2-7
2.2 Information ...................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.1 User authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-8
MFP authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-8
External server authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-8
Account track authentication ............................................................................................................. 2-9
2.2.2 Restriction of box registration............................................................................................................ 2-9
Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 2-9
Bulletin Board User Box..................................................................................................................... 2-9
Polling TX User Box ........................................................................................................................... 2-9
Memory RX User Box ........................................................................................................................ 2-9
Relay User Box ................................................................................................................................ 2-10
2.2.3 Restriction of file name .................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes................................................................................ 2-11
2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled........................................................... 2-11
2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled ....................................................................................... 2-11
2.3.3 When only account track is enabled................................................................................................ 2-12
2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized................................. 2-12
2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized ........................... 2-14
3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display
3.1 Control panel ................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1 Screen component............................................................................................................................. 3-4
Icons that appear in the touch panel ................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel ................................................................................................... 3-5
Job List .............................................................................................................................................. 3-6
Contents-2 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
Job List - Delete................................................................................................................................. 3-6
Job List - Job Details ......................................................................................................................... 3-7
User Box information ....................................................................................................................... 3-12
Use/File - Detail................................................................................................................................ 3-12
Use/File - Check Job Settings ......................................................................................................... 3-12
Use/File - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ..................................................................... 3-13
Use/File - Check Job Settings - Document Setting Contents ......................................................... 3-13
Use/File - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings .............................................................. 3-14
Use/File - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings.................................................................. 3-14
Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-14
Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-15
Preview (Print/Combine) .................................................................................................................. 3-15
Preview (Send/Bind TX) ................................................................................................................... 3-16
4 User Box Operation Flow
4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes.................................................................................................. 4-3
4.2 Printing documents from a User Box............................................................................................ 4-5
4.3 Sending documents from a User Box ........................................................................................... 4-8
4.4 Saving a document in an external memory ................................................................................ 4-11
4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box.............................................. 4-13
4.6 Printing a document from an external memory ......................................................................... 4-15
4.7 Filing documents in a User Box................................................................................................... 4-17
4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA ........................................................... 4-19
4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box.................................... 4-21
4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode ................................................................................................ 4-23
4.10.1 Save Document................................................................................................................................ 4-23
Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 4-23
System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-24
4.10.2 Use/File ............................................................................................................................................ 4-26
Print (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................. 4-26
Send (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................ 4-29
Filing Settings (for public/personal/group User Boxes) ................................................................... 4-32
Application (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes)....................................................................... 4-33
System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-34
5 Accessing the User Box mode
5.1 Accessing the User Box mode ...................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 User Box Operation Menu.............................................................................................................. 5-4
5.2.1 Save Document.................................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.2.2 Use/File .............................................................................................................................................. 5-4
6 Save Document
6.1 Save Document Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-3
6.1.1 Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-3
Annotation User Box.......................................................................................................................... 6-3
External Memory................................................................................................................................ 6-3
6.1.2 Initial Window of Save Document...................................................................................................... 6-4
Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-4
System User Box ............................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.3 Save Document window .................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2 Scan Settings .................................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.2.1 Basic - Original Type.......................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.2 Basic - Simplex/Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.2.3 Basic - Resolution.............................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.2.4 Basic - File Type ................................................................................................................................ 6-8
File Type............................................................................................................................................. 6-8
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Contents-3
Encryption .......................................................................................................................................... 6-9
Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................... 6-9
Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 6-11
Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.5 Basic - Density................................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.2.6 Basic - Color .................................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.2.7 Scan Size ......................................................................................................................................... 6-13
Standard size ................................................................................................................................... 6-13
Custom Size..................................................................................................................................... 6-13
Photo Size........................................................................................................................................ 6-13
6.2.8 Image Adjustment............................................................................................................................ 6-14
Background Removal ...................................................................................................................... 6-14
Sharpness ........................................................................................................................................ 6-15
6.2.9 Application - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-15
6.2.10 Application - Book Copy.................................................................................................................. 6-16
Book copy method .......................................................................................................................... 6-16
Book Erase - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-16
Book Erase - Center Erase .............................................................................................................. 6-17
Binding Position ............................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.2.11 Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 6-18
6.3 Original Settings............................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.3.1 Special Original ................................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.3.2 Direction Settings - Original Direction ............................................................................................. 6-19
6.3.3 Direction Settings - Binding Position ............................................................................................... 6-20
6.3.4 Despeckle ........................................................................................................................................ 6-20
7 Use/File
7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations............................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.1 Functions of Use/File ......................................................................................................................... 7-3
Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 7-3
Sending.............................................................................................................................................. 7-3
Filing................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Application settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.2 Detail of the Use Document screen ................................................................................................... 7-4
7.1.3 If a password is specified for a User Box .......................................................................................... 7-5
7.2 Print .................................................................................................................................................. 7-6
7.2.1 Overview of the Print tab ................................................................................................................... 7-6
Description of the Print tab ................................................................................................................ 7-6
Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-7
7.2.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.3 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-8
Document Order ................................................................................................................................ 7-8
Configurable items to combine and print documents ....................................................................... 7-8
7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) .................................................................... 7-9
7.3.1 Copies................................................................................................................................................ 7-9
7.3.2 1-Sided/2-Sided................................................................................................................................. 7-9
7.3.3 Color ................................................................................................................................................ 7-10
7.3.4 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-10
Sort/Group ....................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Staple ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Staple - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-11
Punch............................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Punch - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12
Fold/Bind.......................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.3.5 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.3.6 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-14
7.3.7 Continuous Print .............................................................................................................................. 7-15
Contents-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) ........................................................ 7-16
7.4.1 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16
Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16
Image Shift ....................................................................................................................................... 7-16
Image Shift - Change Back Shift ..................................................................................................... 7-17
7.4.2 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-17
7.4.3 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet...................................................................................... 7-18
7.4.4 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ...................................................................................... 7-19
7.4.5 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters........................................................................................... 7-20
7.4.6 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.4.7 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time..................................................................................................... 7-21
7.4.8 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................... 7-22
Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-22
Insert Sheet Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-23
7.4.9 Stamp/Composition - Stamp........................................................................................................... 7-23
7.4.10 Stamp/Composition -Copy Security -Copy Protect ........................................................................ 7-24
Copy Protect Type........................................................................................................................... 7-25
Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-25
Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25
7.4.11 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard........................................................................ 7-26
Copy Guard Type............................................................................................................................. 7-26
Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-27
7.4.12 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy.................................................................. 7-27
Stamp Type...................................................................................................................................... 7-28
Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-28
7.4.13 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat .............................................................................................. 7-28
Stamp Repeat Type ......................................................................................................................... 7-29
Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-29
Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-29
7.4.14 Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer .............................................................................................. 7-30
Check/Change Temporarily ............................................................................................................. 7-30
7.4.15 Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay....................................................................................... 7-31
Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-31
Overlay Setting................................................................................................................................. 7-32
7.5 Send ............................................................................................................................................... 7-33
7.5.1 Overview of the Transmission Settings............................................................................................ 7-33
Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-33
Send................................................................................................................................................. 7-34
Bind TX............................................................................................................................................. 7-34
7.5.2 Transmission Settings...................................................................................................................... 7-35
7.5.3 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-36
Document Order .............................................................................................................................. 7-36
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)............................................................................... 7-37
7.6.1 Address Book - Search.................................................................................................................... 7-37
Address Type................................................................................................................................... 7-37
Index ................................................................................................................................................ 7-38
Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-38
Detail Search - Search options ........................................................................................................ 7-39
7.6.2 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-39
7.6.3 Direct Input - Fax ............................................................................................................................. 7-40
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-40
When the Confirm Address (TX) function is specified: .................................................................... 7-40
7.6.4 Direct Input - E-mail......................................................................................................................... 7-40
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-40
7.6.5 Direct Input - Internet Fax................................................................................................................ 7-41
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41
Receiver RX Ability........................................................................................................................... 7-41
7.6.6 Direct Input - IP Address Fax........................................................................................................... 7-42
7.6.7 Direct Input - PC (SMB) ................................................................................................................... 7-42
Host Name ....................................................................................................................................... 7-42
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Contents-5
File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-42
User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-42
Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-42
Reference......................................................................................................................................... 7-43
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-43
7.6.8 Direct Input - FTP............................................................................................................................. 7-43
Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-43
File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-43
User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-43
Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-43
Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-43
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-43
7.6.9 Direct Input - WebDAV..................................................................................................................... 7-44
Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-44
File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-44
User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-44
Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-44
Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-44
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-44
7.6.10 Job History....................................................................................................................................... 7-45
7.6.11 Address Search................................................................................................................................ 7-45
7.6.12 LDAP Search - Search..................................................................................................................... 7-46
7.6.13 LDAP Search - Advanced Search.................................................................................................... 7-46
Name................................................................................................................................................ 7-46
E-mail Addr. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-46
Fax Number ..................................................................................................................................... 7-46
Last Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-46
First Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-46
City................................................................................................................................................... 7-46
Company Name............................................................................................................................... 7-47
Department ...................................................................................................................................... 7-47
OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH.............................................................................................. 7-47
7.6.14 Overview of the Document Settings ................................................................................................ 7-47
7.6.15 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-47
7.6.16 Document Settings - File Type ........................................................................................................ 7-48
File Type........................................................................................................................................... 7-48
Encryption ........................................................................................................................................ 7-49
Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................. 7-49
Stamp Composition ......................................................................................................................... 7-51
Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 7-51
Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 7-52
7.6.17 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-52
7.6.18 Overview of the Communication Settings ....................................................................................... 7-53
7.6.19 Communication Settings - Line Setting ........................................................................................... 7-53
Description of Line Settings............................................................................................................. 7-53
Overseas TX..................................................................................................................................... 7-53
ECM OFF ......................................................................................................................................... 7-54
V.34 OFF .......................................................................................................................................... 7-54
Check Dest. & Send......................................................................................................................... 7-54
Select Line ....................................................................................................................................... 7-54
7.6.20 Communication Settings - E-Mail Settings...................................................................................... 7-55
E-mail Settings................................................................................................................................. 7-55
Document Name.............................................................................................................................. 7-55
Subject ............................................................................................................................................. 7-55
From................................................................................................................................................. 7-56
Body................................................................................................................................................. 7-56
7.6.21 Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting ....................................................................... 7-57
URL Notification............................................................................................................................... 7-57
Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-57
Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-57
7.6.22 Communication Settings - Communication Method Settings ......................................................... 7-58
Timer transmission (Timer TX).......................................................................................................... 7-58
Contents-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
Password transmission (Password TX)............................................................................................ 7-59
F-Code transmission (F-Code TX) ................................................................................................... 7-59
7.6.23 Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption.................................................................................. 7-60
7.6.24 Communication Settings - Digital Signature.................................................................................... 7-60
7.6.25 Communication Settings - Fax Header Settings ............................................................................. 7-60
7.6.26 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-61
7.6.27 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 7-61
7.6.28 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 7-61
7.6.29 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 7-61
7.6.30 Application - Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer......................................................................... 7-61
7.6.31 Application - Send & Print................................................................................................................ 7-62
7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) ........................................................... 7-63
7.7.1 Overview of the Filing Settings ........................................................................................................ 7-63
Description of the Filing Settings tab............................................................................................... 7-63
7.7.2 Deleting documents ......................................................................................................................... 7-64
7.7.3 Edit Name ........................................................................................................................................ 7-64
7.7.4 Moving documents .......................................................................................................................... 7-64
7.7.5 Copy................................................................................................................................................. 7-65
7.7.6 Save in external memory ................................................................................................................. 7-65
Document Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-66
Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-66
Document Settings -File Type ......................................................................................................... 7-67
Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-67
7.7.7 Document Details............................................................................................................................. 7-68
Displaying detailed information........................................................................................................ 7-68
Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 7-68
7.8 Application..................................................................................................................................... 7-69
7.8.1 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-69
Description of the Application tab ................................................................................................... 7-69
7.8.2 Edit Document ................................................................................................................................. 7-70
Edit Document - Delete Page .......................................................................................................... 7-70
Edit Document - Rotate Page.......................................................................................................... 7-71
Edit Document - Move Page............................................................................................................ 7-73
Preview/Set Range .......................................................................................................................... 7-75
Preview/Specify by Input ................................................................................................................. 7-75
7.8.3 Register Overlay............................................................................................................................... 7-77
Register Overlay - New.................................................................................................................... 7-78
Register Overlay - Overwrite............................................................................................................ 7-79
Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-80
7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box)............................................................................... 7-81
7.9.1 Overview of the Bulletin Board User Boxes..................................................................................... 7-81
7.9.2 Bulletin Board User Box screen....................................................................................................... 7-81
7.9.3 Printing a document in a Bulletin Board User Box .......................................................................... 7-81
7.9.4 Deleting a document in the Bulletin Board User Box ...................................................................... 7-81
7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box)...................................................................................... 7-82
7.10.1 Overview of the Polling Transmission User Boxes .......................................................................... 7-82
7.10.2 Printing a document in the Polling TX User Box.............................................................................. 7-82
7.10.3 Deleting a document in the Polling TX User Box............................................................................. 7-82
7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) ........................................................................ 7-83
7.11.1 Overview of the Secure Document User Box .................................................................................. 7-83
7.11.2 Authentication procedure 1 ............................................................................................................. 7-83
7.11.3 Authentication procedure 2 ............................................................................................................. 7-83
7.11.4 Print - Printing .................................................................................................................................. 7-84
Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-84
Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-84
Color ................................................................................................................................................ 7-84
Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-84
Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-84
Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-84
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Contents-7
Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-84
Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-84
Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-84
7.11.5 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-85
7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box)................................................................................... 7-86
7.12.1 Overview of the Memory RX User Box ............................................................................................ 7-86
7.12.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-86
7.12.3 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-86
7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) .................................................................................... 7-87
7.13.1 Overview of the Annotation User Box.............................................................................................. 7-87
7.13.2 Print - Basic ..................................................................................................................................... 7-87
7.13.3 Print - Page Margin .......................................................................................................................... 7-87
7.13.4 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet........................................................................... 7-88
7.13.5 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ........................................................................... 7-88
7.13.6 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters................................................................................ 7-88
7.13.7 Print - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time .......................................................................................... 7-88
7.13.8 Print - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .................................................................................... 7-88
7.13.9 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp................................................................................................ 7-88
7.13.10 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................. 7-88
7.13.11 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard.................................... 7-88
7.13.12 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy....................................................... 7-88
7.13.13 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ................................................................................... 7-88
7.13.14 Print - Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay ............................................................................ 7-88
7.13.15 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-88
7.13.16 Send - Direct Input - E-mail ............................................................................................................. 7-88
7.13.17 Send - Direct Input - PC (SMB)........................................................................................................ 7-88
7.13.18 Send - Direct Input - FTP................................................................................................................. 7-89
7.13.19 Send - Direct Input - WebDAV......................................................................................................... 7-89
7.13.20 Send - Job History........................................................................................................................... 7-89
7.13.21 Send - LDAP Search - Search ......................................................................................................... 7-89
7.13.22 Send - LDAP Search - Advanced Search........................................................................................ 7-89
7.13.23 Send - Document Settings - Resolution .......................................................................................... 7-89
7.13.24 Send - Document Settings - File Type............................................................................................. 7-89
7.13.25 Send - Document Settings - Color .................................................................................................. 7-89
7.13.26 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Settings .......................................................................... 7-89
7.13.27 Send - Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting............................................................ 7-89
7.13.28 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption...................................................................... 7-89
7.13.29 Send - Communication Settings - Digital Signature........................................................................ 7-89
7.13.30 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time.................................................................... 7-89
7.13.31 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .............................................................. 7-89
7.13.32 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp.......................................................................... 7-90
7.13.33 Send - Application - Send & Print.................................................................................................... 7-90
7.13.34 Send - Application - Stamp Element ............................................................................................... 7-90
Secondary Field ............................................................................................................................... 7-90
Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 7-90
Density ............................................................................................................................................. 7-90
Number Type ................................................................................................................................... 7-91
Print Position.................................................................................................................................... 7-91
7.13.35 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-92
7.13.36 Application - Register Overlay ......................................................................................................... 7-92
7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box)............................................................................. 7-93
7.14.1 Overview of the Fax Retransmit User Box....................................................................................... 7-93
7.14.2 Print - Proof Print ............................................................................................................................. 7-93
7.14.3 Send - Fax........................................................................................................................................ 7-93
7.14.4 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-94
7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) ........................................................... 7-95
Contents-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.15.1 Overview of the Password Encrypted PDF User Box...................................................................... 7-95
7.15.2 Print/Save −Print/Save..................................................................................................................... 7-95
7.15.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-95
7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box)....................................................................................... 7-96
7.16.1 Overview of the ID & Print User Box................................................................................................ 7-96
Viewing documents.......................................................................................................................... 7-96
7.16.2 Print - Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-97
7.16.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-97
7.17 External Memory (System User Box) .......................................................................................... 7-98
7.17.1 External memory device .................................................................................................................. 7-98
Supported external memory devices............................................................................................... 7-98
Connecting the external memory device ......................................................................................... 7-98
7.17.2 External memory screen .................................................................................................................. 7-99
Entering a file path ........................................................................................................................... 7-99
Selecting a file.................................................................................................................................. 7-99
Printing encrypted PDF data............................................................................................................ 7-99
Moving to the parent folder.............................................................................................................. 7-99
Opening a folder .............................................................................................................................. 7-99
Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-99
Document Details........................................................................................................................... 7-100
7.17.3 Print - Basic ................................................................................................................................... 7-100
Copies............................................................................................................................................ 7-100
Color .............................................................................................................................................. 7-100
Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-100
Binding Position ............................................................................................................................. 7-100
Finishing......................................................................................................................................... 7-100
Paper.............................................................................................................................................. 7-101
7.17.4 Print- Application ........................................................................................................................... 7-101
Stamp/Composition - Date/Time................................................................................................... 7-101
Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................. 7-101
Stamp/Composition - Stamp......................................................................................................... 7-101
Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................................................... 7-101
Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard...................................................................... 7-101
Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy................................................................ 7-101
Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ............................................................................................ 7-101
7.17.5 Filing Settings−Save in User Box................................................................................................... 7-102
7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) ................................................................................................. 7-103
7.18.1 Operating environment .................................................................................................................. 7-103
7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Print ......................................................................................................................... 7-104
Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-104
Check printing preferences............................................................................................................ 7-104
7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Save......................................................................................................................... 7-105
Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-105
8 User Box Settings
8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings..................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.1 User mode ......................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.2 Administrator Settings ....................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2 User mode settings......................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.1 Creating a User Box........................................................................................................................... 8-6
Public, Personal, or Group User Box................................................................................................. 8-6
Delete Empty User Box(es) (Administrator Settings) ......................................................................... 8-7
Bulletin Board User Box..................................................................................................................... 8-7
Relay User Box .................................................................................................................................. 8-9
8.2.2 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting................................................................................... 8-10
Default Tab....................................................................................................................................... 8-10
Shortcut key..................................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.3 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Link File Error Notification ................................................................ 8-11
8.2.4 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Proxy Server Use.............................................................................. 8-11
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Contents-9
8.2.5 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Print Settings .................................................................................... 8-12
Basic - Print ..................................................................................................................................... 8-12
Basic - Color .................................................................................................................................... 8-12
Basic - Paper ................................................................................................................................... 8-12
Basic - Finishing............................................................................................................................... 8-13
Application - Margin......................................................................................................................... 8-13
Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 8-13
Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 8-13
Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 8-13
Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect................................................. 8-13
Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard .................................................. 8-13
Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy ............................................ 8-13
Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ......................................................................... 8-14
8.3 Administrator Settings.................................................................................................................. 8-15
8.3.1 User Box permissions...................................................................................................................... 8-15
User types........................................................................................................................................ 8-15
Public User Box and Personal or Group User Box.......................................................................... 8-15
8.3.2 Creating a User Box......................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.3.3 Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box ................................................................................ 8-16
8.3.4 Creating Bulletin Board User Box.................................................................................................... 8-16
8.3.5 Creating Relay User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-16
8.3.6 Creating Annotation User Box ......................................................................................................... 8-17
8.3.7 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-19
Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 8-19
Max. No. Of Use Boxes ................................................................................................................... 8-19
Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-19
8.3.8 User Box Setting.............................................................................................................................. 8-20
Delete Unused User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-20
Delete Secure Print Documents....................................................................................................... 8-20
Auto Delete Secure Document ........................................................................................................ 8-21
Encrypted PDF Delete Time............................................................................................................. 8-21
ID & Print Delete Time...................................................................................................................... 8-22
Document Hold Setting.................................................................................................................... 8-22
External Memory Function Settings................................................................................................. 8-23
Allow/Restrict User Box................................................................................................................... 8-23
ID & Print Delete after Print Setting.................................................................................................. 8-24
Document Delete Time Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-24
ID & Print Settings............................................................................................................................ 8-25
8.3.9 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ............................................................................................................. 8-25
8.3.10 User Box Administrator Setting ....................................................................................................... 8-26
Setting User Box administrator........................................................................................................ 8-26
Logging in to this machine as the User Box administrator.............................................................. 8-26
Administrator's available functions .................................................................................................. 8-26
8.3.11 Security Details ................................................................................................................................ 8-27
Security Print Only ........................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.3.12 HDD Settings ................................................................................................................................... 8-27
Check HDD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-27
Overwrite HDD Data......................................................................................................................... 8-28
Overwrite All Data ............................................................................................................................ 8-29
HDD Lock Password........................................................................................................................ 8-30
Format HDD..................................................................................................................................... 8-31
HDD Encryption Setting................................................................................................................... 8-31
8.3.13 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 8-32
Apply Stamps................................................................................................................................... 8-32
9 Web Connection
9.1 Using Web Connection................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.1 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.2 Accessing Web Connection............................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.3 Web browser cache ........................................................................................................................... 9-4
For Internet Explorer .......................................................................................................................... 9-4
Contents-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
For Netscape Navigator ..................................................................................................................... 9-4
For Mozilla Firefox.............................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.1.4 Online help function ........................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2 Login and logout ............................................................................................................................. 9-5
9.2.1 Login and logout flows....................................................................................................................... 9-5
When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled............................................................. 9-5
When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled ................................................................... 9-7
9.2.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 9-8
9.2.3 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 9-9
Login options ..................................................................................................................................... 9-9
Logging in as a public user .............................................................................................................. 9-10
Logging in as a registered user........................................................................................................ 9-11
Logging in to administrator mode.................................................................................................... 9-12
Display mode in administrator mode ............................................................................................... 9-14
Logging in as a User Box administrator........................................................................................... 9-15
9.3 Page Configuration....................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.4 User Mode Overview .................................................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.1 Information ....................................................................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.2 Job ................................................................................................................................................... 9-19
9.4.3 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-19
9.4.4 Direct Print ....................................................................................................................................... 9-20
9.4.5 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-21
9.4.6 Customize ........................................................................................................................................ 9-22
9.5 Handling a document in a User Box............................................................................................ 9-23
9.5.1 Listing the documents saved in a User Box .................................................................................... 9-23
Open User Box ................................................................................................................................ 9-23
File List............................................................................................................................................. 9-24
9.5.2 Printing a document......................................................................................................................... 9-25
9.5.3 Sending a document to another machine........................................................................................ 9-28
9.5.4 Downloading document data to your computer .............................................................................. 9-31
9.5.5 Moving or copying a document to another User Box...................................................................... 9-34
9.5.6 Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 9-35
9.6 Administrator Mode Overview ..................................................................................................... 9-37
9.6.1 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 9-37
9.6.2 System Settings............................................................................................................................... 9-38
9.6.3 Security ............................................................................................................................................ 9-39
9.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track................................................................................................. 9-39
9.6.5 Network............................................................................................................................................ 9-40
9.6.6 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-41
9.6.7 Printer Settings ................................................................................................................................ 9-42
9.6.8 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-43
9.6.9 Fax Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 9-44
9.6.10 Setting for each purpose ................................................................................................................. 9-45
10 Appendix
10.1 Error message list......................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.2 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 10-4
11 Index
11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3
11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-6
1 Introduction
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1-3
1.1 Welcome 1
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and simple
troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this product
and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary.
1.1.1 User's guides
Printed manual Overview
[Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]
This manual describes operating procedures and the
functions that are most frequently used in order to enable
you to begin using this machine immediately.
This manual also contains notes and precautions that
should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine.
Please be sure to read this manual before using this
machine.
This manual describes details on trademarks and
copyrights.
• Trademarks and copyrights
User's guide DVD manuals Overview
[User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations
and the settings of this machine.
• Specifications of originals and copy paper
• Copy function
• Maintaining this machine
• Troubleshooting
[User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures
of the enlarge display mode.
• Copy function
• Scanning function
• G3 fax function
• Network fax function
[User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions.
• Printer function
• Setting the printer driver
[User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on the boxed functions using
the hard disk.
• Saving data in user boxes
• Retrieving data from user boxes
• Transferring and printing data from user boxes
[User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations]
This manual describes details on transmitting scanned
data.
• E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, Web-
DAV TX, Web Services
• G3 fax
• IP Address Fax, Internet Fax
[User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function
that transmits faxes directly from a computer.
• PC-FAX
[User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for
each function using the network connection.
• Network settings
• Settings using Web Connection
1 Welcome
1-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
1.1
1.1.2 User's Guide
This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators.
It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations,
and various setting methods of this machine.
Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance
work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual.
Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative.
[User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become
available by registering the optional license kit and by
connecting to an application.
• Web browser function
• Image panel
• PDF Processing Function
• Searchable PDF
• My panel and My address functions
User's guide DVD manuals Overview
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1-5
1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1
1.2 Conventions used in this manual
1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual
Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information.
The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine.
To use this machine safely
7 WARNING
- This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury.
7 CAUTION
- This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury
or property damage.
NOTICE
This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents.
Follow the instructions to avoid property damage.
Procedural instruction
0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite
for a procedure.
1 This format number "1" represents the first step.
2 This format number represents the order of serial steps.
% This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural
instruction.
% This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item.
This symbol indicates a desired page.
The operation
procedures are
described using
illustrations.
1 Conventions used in this manual
1-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
1.2
dReference
This symbol indicates a reference.
View the reference as required.
Key symbols
[ ]
Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of a user's guide are indicated by these brackets.
Bold text
Key names, part names, product names and option names on the control panel are indicated in bold text.
1.2.2 Original and paper indications
Original and paper sizes
The following explains the indication for originals and paper described
in this manual.
When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the
width and the X side the length.
Original and paper indications
w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the
width (Y).
v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the
width (Y).
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1-7
1.3 To check the function you want to use 1
1.3 To check the function you want to use
This manual contains details on setting up the functions.
Understanding Operation Flow
This manual provides a chapter "User Box Operation Flow" that describes how to use the major functions of
this machine. The flow charts in the chapter will help you understand the general flow of operations such as
saving and printing data. Clicking the link in the flow chart takes you to the relevant function setting pages
where you can see more detail.
Using Menu Tree
Various functions can be configured for this machine. For information on what button to select to find specific
setting items and the list of items that can be configured, refer to the Menu tree pages. In the menu tree pages,
there is a hierarchy of functions under each button. Clicking the link in the menu tree takes you to the
relevant function setting pages where you can see more details.
1 To check the function you want to use
1-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
1.3
2 User Box Function Overview
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2-3
2.1 User Box functions 2
2 User Box Function Overview
2.1 User Box functions
The User Box functions allow you to save document data to the machine's internal hard disk and later print
them. Documents that can be saved are data scanned for copying and saved scan data. To save data to a
box, create the box, and then save the data to the specified box. The saved data can be printed, sent by
E-mail, transferred via FTP, or sent to a computer as may be necessary. Using the User Box functions enables
you to save the effort involved in scanning originals repeatedly or saving data to each computer.
2.1.1 Available User Box functions
Saving documents
Data can be saved to the following boxes.
*1 For details on how to send documents for print job from a computer and save them in the User Box, refer
to the [User's Guide Print Operations].
User Box Description Reference
Public/Personal/Group
User Boxes (*1)
Save a document copied or scanned using this machine.
You can also save a document that was print-instructed
through a computer connected to a network. Some User
Authentication or Account Track settings restrict users
who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group
User Box.
p. 6-3
Annotation User Box Save document data to be printed and sent with an image
of the date/time or an annotation number to documents
saved in Scan mode.
p. 6-3
External Memory This item appears when an external memory device is installed.
• You can save all scanned documents directly in an external
memory connected to this machine.
• You can save a document stored in a User Box in an
external memory.
• You can save a file stored in an external memory in a
User Box.
p. 6-3
Mobile/PDA Save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA in the
Public, Personal, or Group User Box.
p. 7-105
2 User Box functions
2-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
2.1
1 Mobile/PDA
2 Fax
3 Computer
4 FTP server, etc.
5 Original
6 External Memory
Using documents
Use the document data saved in boxes. Depending on the box, you can use the data as follows:
2 4 5
6
1 3
User Box Description Reference
Public/Personal/Group
User Boxes (*1)
Print and send saved documents. You can also select multiple
documents for printing/transmission. Some User Authentication
or Account Track settings restrict users who
can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User
Box.
p. 7-9
Bulletin Board User Box This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed.
You can print a document saved in the Bulletin Board User
Box.
p. 7-81
Polling TX User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed.
You can print documents sent via polling.
p. 7-82
Secure Document User
Box (*3)
Print saved documents. Enter an ID and password for
printing.
p. 7-83
Memory RX User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed.
You can confirm and print the fax document received
though the memory RX setting.
p. 7-86
Annotation User Box Print or transmit document data saved in Scan mode with
an image of the date/time or an annotation number.
p. 7-87
Fax Retransmit User Box
(*2)
This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed.
With this User Box, you can resend a saved document or
print it for confirmation.
p. 7-93
Password Encrypted
PDF User Box (*4)
Print a saved password encrypted PDF document. Encrypted
PDF files saved in an external memory and sent for
print jobs are also saved in this box. The predefined password
is required for printing.
p. 7-95
ID & Print User Box This item appears when user authentication settings are
configured. You can log in as a user and print a document
sent for print jobs from the printer driver.
p. 7-96
External Memory This item appears when an external memory device is installed.
You can print documents saved in an external
memory connected to this machine.
p. 7-98
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2-5
2.1 User Box functions 2
*1 For details on how to send documents for print job from a computer and save them in the User Box, refer
to the [User's Guide Print Operations].
*2 For details on polling transmission, polling reception, memory reception, and file retransmission, refer to
the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
*3 For details on how to save documents to the Secure Document User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print
Operations].
*4 For print instruction of an encrypted PDF, refer to the Direct Print manual or the direct print in the
Web Connection online help.
1 Fax
2 Computer
3 E-mail, etc.
4 FTP server, etc.
5 Cellular phone or PDA
6 External memory
7 Printout
Cellular Phone or PDA Print a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. You
can save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA in
the Public, Personal, or Group User Box.
p. 7-104
User Box Description Reference
4
6
7
1 2 3
5
2 User Box functions
2-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
2.1
Organizing documents
Organize documents by renaming the saved document, changing the boxes where they are saved, or duplicating
or deleting them.
1 Mobile/PDA
2 External Memory
User Box Delete Edit
Name
Move Copy Save
in
User
Box
Save
in USB
memory
(when
external
memory
is
connected)
Document
Details
Public/Personal/Group User
Boxes
o o o o − o o
Bulletin Board User Box o − − − − − −
Polling TX User Box o − − − − − −
Secure Document User Box o o − − − − o
Memory RX User Box o o − − − − o
Annotation User Box o o − − − − o
Fax Retransmit User Box o − − − − − o
Password Encrypted PDF
User Box
o − − − − − o
ID & Print User Box o − − − − − o
External Memory, Mobile/
PDA
− − − − o − o
2
1
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2-7
2.1 User Box functions 2
2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions
Before using the User Box functions, the following settings should be configured.
Registering a User Box
Save the User Box where documents will be registered. Configure boxes by using the machine's touch panel
or by using Web Connection from a Web browser on a computer on the network.
Reference
- The following User Boxes are configurable.
– Public/Personal/Group User Boxes(p. 8-6)
– Bulletin Board User Box (when using the bulletin board function) (p. 8-7)
– Annotation User Box (p. 8-17)
When using this machine as a relay device
If the optional Fax Kit is installed, and you want to use this machine for relaying fax transmission, create a
Relay User Box for saving documents temporarily before they are relayed. (p. 8-9)
To create a Relay User Box, specify in advance the group containing fax numbers of relay destinations.
The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception
If the optional Fax Kit is installed, and you do not want to print while receiving data, configure the memory
reception settings.
dReference
For details on how to configure memory reception settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network
Fax Operations].
2 Information
2-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
2.2
2.2 Information
This section describes information you should know before using the User Box functions.
2.2.1 User authentication
To use this machine, some devices have been preset so that you must enter an account or user name and a
password. For details on the account or user name available for using the devices, contact your administrator.
MFP authentication
Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the
control panel.
External server authentication
Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the
control panel.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2-9
2.2 Information 2
Account track authentication
Enter the account name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key
on the control panel.
Reference
- When user authentication is enabled, the only the boxes accessible by the logged in users are displayed.
For details, refer to page 2-11.
- If a user enters an incorrect password a specified number of times when Mode 2 is selected in Prohibited
Functions When Authentication Error in Administrator Settings, the user is locked, and cannot use
the control panel. For details on how to disable Prohibit Functions When Authentication Error, contact
your administrator.
- If Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the login
procedure.
- When you use the optional Authentication Unit for authentication, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]
for the login procedure.
2.2.2 Restriction of box registration
Public/Personal/Group User Boxes
The User Box functions provide Public User Boxes, which can be used by more than one person, Personal
User Boxes, which can be used only by a single person, and Group User Boxes, which can be used by the
users who are logged in as members of the User Box owner account.
The following lists the limitations on those User Boxes:
- Before saving documents, create a User Box to save data.
- Up to 1,000 User Boxes can be created.
- Up to 200 documents can be saved in a single User Box.
- A total of 10,000 pages can be saved in all User Boxes.
- A total of 3,000 documents can be saved in all User Boxes.
Bulletin Board User Box
Reference
- Up to 10 Bulletin Board User Boxes can be created.
- Only one document can be saved in a single Bulletin Board User Box.
Polling TX User Box
Only one document can be saved in a single User Box.
Memory RX User Box
Up to 500 documents can be saved in the Memory RX User Box.
2 Information
2-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
2.2
Relay User Box
Reference
- Up to 5 Relay User Boxes can be created.
- Only one document can be saved in a single Relay User Box.
2.2.3 Restriction of file name
Name document data to be saved.
Reference
- The names can contain up to 30 characters.
- You can edit the names after the documents have been saved.
- Press this button to specify the name when saving data. Otherwise, a predefined name is applied to the
data.
The following elements are combined to create a name. The following describes elements of an example document
name "C36C_1011102315230".
Item Description
C This character indicates the mode when the document is saved. "S" appears
for documents saved in the Fax/Scan mode screen or the User Box
screen.
C: Copy
S: Fax/Scan, User Box
P: Print
36C-1 This represents the name of the device that scanned the data. The factory
default is "(product name)". You can change this name in [Device Name] in
[Administrator/ Machine Settings] in Administrator Settings. Use up to 10
characters.
11102315230 This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day, hour and minute when
the data was scanned. If a series of documents are scanned at the same
time (minute), serial numbers are attached to the last digits.
_0001 This indicates the page when multi-page data is scanned. This numeral
does not appear in the Document Name column, but is added automatically
as part of the name when the file is transmitted. Consider this part for
FTP or other transmission when a server has restriction regarding file
names.
.TIF This is the extension for the specified data format. The characters do not
appear in the Document Name column, but is added automatically as part
of the name when the file is transmitted.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2-11
2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2
2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes
When you apply user authentication and account track settings, the accessible User Boxes and the permissions
change as shown in the following. Configure the user authentication and account track settings according
to the desired functions.
2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled
Reference
- Users can access all Public User Boxes.
- User Boxes created by users and administrators are Public User Boxes.
- Users cannot create any User Boxes when the Allow/Restrict User Box is set to Restrict in Administrator
Settings.
2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled
Reference
- Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created.
- The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users.
- Press this button to set up a User Box administrator.
- A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes and all Personal User Boxes.
- If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication
methods, all Personal User Boxes become Public User Boxes.
Create and access
Public User
Box
User 1
User 2
Access allowed
Personal User
Box of user 2
Personal User
Box of user 1
Public User Box
User Box
administrator
2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes
2-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
2.3
2.3.3 When only account track is enabled
Reference
- Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Group User Boxes of accounts that the user belongs
to.
- If you delete authentication data by canceling account track settings or changing authentication methods,
all Group User Boxes become Public User Boxes.
2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized
As the account for users has been registered in advance, users cannot access Group User Boxes of accounts
that they do not belong to.
Account B
Public User Box
Account A
Access allowed
Group User Box
of account A
Group User Box
of account B
Account A Account B
User 1 User 2
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2-13
2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2
Reference
- Users can access all Public User Boxes, only Group User Boxes of the account that the user belongs
to, and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created.
- The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users.
- Press this button to set up a User Box administrator.
- A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes, all Personal User Boxes and all Group User
Boxes.
- If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication
methods, all Personal User Boxes and all group boxes become Public User Boxes.
User 1
User 2
Account A
Account B
Public User Box
Personal User
Box of user 1
Group User Box
of account A
Personal User
Box of user 2
Group User Box
of account B
Access allowed
User Box
administrator
2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes
2-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
2.3
2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized
As the account for a user has not been registered in advance, a user must enter an account name and password
when logging in. Each time a user logging in, the user can access the Group User Boxes of a different
account by as a member of the account.
Reference
- Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created.
- The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users.
- A user can access Group User Boxes of an account simply by entering an account name and password
of the account when logging in.
- Press this button to set up a User Box administrator.
- A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes, all Personal User Boxes and all Group User
Boxes.
- If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication
methods, all Personal User Boxes and all group boxes become Public User Boxes.
Account A Account B
User 1
User 1
Access allowed
Access permitted through entry of account name and password
User Box
administrator
Public User Box
Personal User
Box of user 1
Group User Box
of account A
Group User Box
of account B
3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal
Display
3 Control panel
3-2 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
3.1
3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display
3.1 Control panel
Use the control panel for User Box mode operation. The following describes the buttons and switches in the
control panel.
No. Name Description
1 Touch Panel Various screens and messages are displayed. Configure the various settings
by directly touching the panel.
2 Power Indicator Lights up in blue when the machine is turned on with the main power
switch.
3 Sub Power Switch Press this switch to turn on/off machine operations, including copying,
printing and scanning. When turned off, the machine enters an energy
conservation state.
4 Power Save Press this key to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power
Save mode, the indicator on the Power Save key lights up in green and
the touch panel goes off. To exit from Power Save mode, press the Power
Save key again.
5 Mode Memory Press this key to register (store) the desired copy/scan settings as a program
or to recall a registered copy/scan program.
6 Utility/Counter Press this key to display the Utility screen and the Meter Count screen.
7 Reset Press this key to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered
using the control panel and touch panel.
8 Interrupt Press this key to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt
mode, the indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and the message
"Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt
mode, press the Interrupt key again.
9 Stop Pressing the Stop key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation.
1
2
5
4
6
3
7
8
9
1413 10
15
16
17
18
12 11
19
20
21
22
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-3
3.1 Control panel 3
7 CAUTION
- Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise the touch panel may be scratched or damaged.
Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make
a selection in the touch panel.
10 Proof Copy Press this key to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing
a large number of copies. You can check the finishing state on the touch
panel by pressing this key before scanning or copying.
• This key is not available when saving documents by pressing the
User Box key.
• To check the preview image when saving in a User Box, press the
Fax/Scan key. For checking preview procedure, refer to the [User's
Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
11 Start Press this key to start scanning. When this machine is ready to begin a
scan operation, the indicator on the Start key lights up in blue. If the indicator
on the Start key lights up in orange, scan operation cannot be
started. Press this key to restart a stopped job.
12 Data Indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when
data is being printed.
13 C Press this key to erase a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom
ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad.
14 Keypad Press this key to enter the number of copies, zoom ratio, and various
other settings.
15 Guidance Press this key to display the Guidance screen. From this screen, you can
view descriptions of the various functions and details of operations.
16 Enlarge Display Press this key to enter Enlarge Display mode. If you use Authentication
Manager for authentication, the Enlarge Display screen is not available.
17 Accessibility Press this key to display the screen for configuring settings for user accessibility
functions.
18 Access If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press
this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication)
or the account name and password (for account track) in order to
use this machine. Press this key to log off from the machine as well.
19 Brightness adjustment
dial
Use this dial to adjust the brightness of the touch panel.
20 User Box Press this key to enter User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box
mode, the indicator on the User Box key lights up in green.
21 Fax/Scan Press this key to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan
mode, the indicator on the Fax/Scan key lights up in green. For details
on the fax and scan functions, refer to the [User's Guide Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
22 Copy Press this key to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy
mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the Copy
key lights up in green. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
No. Name Description
3 Touch panel
3-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
3.2
3.2 Touch panel
3.2.1 Screen component
Icons that appear in the touch panel
Icons indicating the status of this machine may appear in the icon display area. The following icons may be
displayed.
No. Name Description
1 Message display area Displays the status of the machine and details on operation procedures.
2 Functions/settings display
area
Displays tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various
functions. Use this area to configure various functions. Press
a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for configuring
the settings.
3 Icon display area Displays icons, which indicate the status of jobs and the machine,
and shortcut keys.
4 Left panel Displays various buttons, such as [Job List] to display the jobs that
are currently being performed/queued (waiting) to be performed,
and [Check Job] to display the result of the specified settings. For
details on the display and description of the left panel, refer to
page 3-5.
5 Toner supply indicators Show the amount of toner remaining for yellow (Y), magenta (M),
cyan (C), and black (K).
4
5
1
2
3
Icon Description
Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode.
Indicates that the machine is receiving data, regardless of the current mode.
Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation, a print operation
or a scan operation. Press this icon to view a screen containing a warning
code.
If the warning screen has been closed while a warning occurs, press this button to
display the warning screen again.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-5
3.2 Touch panel 3
3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel
In the left panel of the touch panel, there are buttons for checking the status of jobs and the configuration of
the machine. The following buttons are available in the left panel in the User Box mode.
Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or
the machine requires maintenance. Press this icon to display the message, and then
perform the replacement or maintenance procedure.
Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server.
Indicates that there is no paper in the paper tray.
Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray.
If the optional Image Controller IC-412 v1.1 is installed, pressing this icon displays
the setting screen for the Image Controller IC-412 v1.1.
Indicates that the enhanced security mode is enabled.
Indicates that an external memory device is connected to the machine.
Indicates that a nonstandard external memory has been connected to this machine,
therefore, USB connection is not enabled.
Indicates that the job is in the waiting-for-redial status because, for example, the recipient's
line is busy when sending with the G3 Fax or IP Address Fax function.
Icon Description
No. Name Description
1 [Job List] Press this button to check the job currently being performed and the job
log.
2 [Check Job] Press this button to check information of the selected User Box, and various
settings of the scan, print and transmission functions.
3 [Preview] Press this button to check the preview image of a saved document.
1
2
3
3 Touch panel
3-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
3.2
Job List
A command to perform an operation such as saving data to a User Box, or printing or sending saved documents
is called a job. Select [Job List] to display the job currently being performed.
Job List - Delete
Press this button to delete the job in process to cancel the operation. Select the job from the job list, and then
press [Delete]. Check the message that appears, and delete the job.
No documents in a User Box will be deleted even if the job currently being run is deleted.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-7
3.2 Touch panel 3
Job List - Job Details
Press this button to view the list of jobs being performed and the job log for confirmation. There are the following
four types of jobs:
Item Description
[Print] Lists print jobs for copying, computer printing, and received faxes.
[Send] Lists scanner and fax transmission jobs.
[Receive] Lists fax reception jobs.
[Save] Lists jobs with documents being saved in User Boxes.
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the
user who stored the document.
Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving/queued/printing/printing
stopped/print error/deleting).
Document Name: File name being printed.
Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed.
[ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at
one time, press these buttons to display other jobs.
[Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job.
[Increase Priority] Press this button to change the priority of the job.
• If you set Changing Job Priority in Administrator Settings to "Restrict",
you cannot specify the output priority of the jobs.
• If the setting is specified so that the current print job can be interrupted,
printing is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing
of the interrupted job restarts automatically once printing for the job
given priority is finished.
[Release Held Job] Press this button to change the settings of a stored job, or print or delete
the job.
[Check Job Set.] Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either
[ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings.
[Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name,
output tray, stored time, number of original pages and number of copies
for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete].
3 Touch panel
3-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
3.2
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
- To view scanned images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings
in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the
user who stored the document.
Document Name: File name being printed.
Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed.
Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted
due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled).
[ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at
one time, press these buttons to display other jobs.
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished
Jobs]/[All Jobs]
Switch to display the job type.
[Detail] Press this button to check the job result, error details, registration
source/user name, file name, output tray, stored time, number of original
pages and number of copies for the selected job.
[Scanned Image] Select the job to display the scanned image.
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
Address Type: Displays the destination type (including fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC
(SMB), WebDAV, and TWAIN). "TWAIN" appears for the job that is sent via
Web service.
Status: Displays the status of the job (sending/queued/dialing/pending for
redial/deleting).
Address: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of
the recipient's machine.
Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
[ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at
one time, press these buttons to display other jobs.
[Timer TX Job] Displays the status of the reserved transmission in the memory. To delete
a job, press [Delete].
[L1][L2] These buttons appear when two fax kits are installed. Press one of these
buttons. The job list of the selected line appears.
[Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job.
[Redial] Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting To Redial", to perform
redialing.
[Check Job Set.] Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either
[ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-9
3.2 Touch panel 3
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
- To view scanned images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings
in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
[Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name,
destination type, destination, stored time, communication, number of original
pages and external server information for the selected job. To delete a
job, press [Delete].
• The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears
only when using external server authentication.
• [Type] is displayed only when the destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP
address fax.
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
Address Type: Displays the destination type (including fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC
(SMB), WebDAV, and TWAIN). "TWAIN" appears for the job that is sent via
Web service.
Address: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of
the recipient's machine.
Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted
due to error/deleted by user). "Error detected" is also displayed for
broadcasting.
[ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at
one time, press these buttons to display other jobs.
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished
Jobs]/[All Jobs]
Switch to display the job type.
[Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You
can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list
screens.
[Detail] Press this button to check the result, error details, registration source/user
name, file name, destination type, destination, stored time, communication,
number of original pages and external server information for the selected
job.
• The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears
only when using external server authentication.
• [Type] is displayed only when the destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP
address fax.
[Scanned Image] Select the job to display the scanned image.
Item Description
3 Touch panel
3-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
3.2
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the
user who stored the document.
Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving/dialing (Polling
RX)/queued/printing/printing stopped/print error/saving to memory/deleting).
Document Name: Displays the name of the received or saved document.
Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org.: The number of original pages that were received.
[ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at
one time, press these buttons to display other jobs.
[Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job.
[Redial] Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting To Redial", to perform
redialing.
[Forward] Forwards the fax received and stored in the memory (in-memory proxy reception).
Specify the recipients either by selecting destinations registered
in the address book or by entering directly.
[Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name,
output tray, stored time, transmission time, and number of original pages
for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete].
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the
user who stored the document.
Document Name: Displays the name of the received or saved document.
Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted
due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled).
[ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at
one time, press these buttons to display other jobs.
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished
Jobs]/[All Jobs]
Switch to display the job type.
[Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You
can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list
screens.
[Detail] Press this button to check the job result, error details, registration
source/user name, file name, output tray, stored time and number of original
pages for the selected job.
[Received Image] Select the job to display the received image.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-11
3.2 Touch panel 3
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
- To view received images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings
in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
- To view saved images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings
in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the
user who stored the document.
Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving, saving to memory, deleting).
Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document.
Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
[ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at
one time, press these buttons to display other jobs.
[Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job.
[Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name,
User Box, stored time, and number of original pages for the selected job.
To delete a job, press [Delete].
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the
user who stored the document.
Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document.
Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted
due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled).
[ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at
one time, press these buttons to display other jobs.
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished
Jobs]/[All Jobs]
Switch to display the job type.
[Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You
can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list
screens.
[Detail] Press this button to check the result, error details, registration source/user
name, file name, destination User Box, stored time and number of original
pages for the selected job.
[Saved Image] Select the job to display the saved image.
3 Touch panel
3-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
3.2
User Box information
Displays the User Box information when you select a User Box.
Use/File - Detail
Press [Detail] on the lower left of the Use Document screen to check the time stored, user name, document
name, the number of pages, and job number of the selected document.
Reference
- When you select multiple documents, use [ ][ ] to switch pages.
dReference
For checking preview image, refer to page 3-14.
Use/File - Check Job Settings
Select [Send] or [Bind TX] in the Send tab to display the address entry screen. [Check Job Settings] is displayed
on the lower left of the screen.
Reference
- Press [Check Job Settings] to check the following settings.
– Destination Settings
– Document Setting Contents
– Communication Settings (Not displayed when Combine is enabled.)
– Check E-Mail Settings
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-13
3.2 Touch panel 3
Use/File - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings
Displays the list of destinations that are registered in the machine.
Reference
- To add a directly entered destination to the address book, select the destination, and press [Store Address].
- To check the detailed information of the destination, select a destination, and press [Details].
- To delete a destination, select one you want to delete, and then press [Delete].
dReference
For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
Use/File - Check Job Settings - Document Setting Contents
View the list of resolution, file type, and color settings.
3 Touch panel
3-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
3.2
Use/File - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings
You can check the line settings and transmission method settings. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to
check the settings.
Use/File - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings
Check the document name, subject, From address and message body to send E-mail messages.
Preview
Check the preview image of the selected document when using or filing documents. Press [Preview] to select
one document. The image of the first page is displayed in the left panel.
Reference
- For a document with multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be viewed.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-15
3.2 Touch panel 3
Preview
Press [Detail] to enlarge the preview image.
Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2 times, 4 times or 8 times.
To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of
the image.
Preview (Print/Combine)
Preview the page image of printing result by pressing the [Preview] - [Detail] in the left panel when you have
selected [Print] or [Combine].
Reference
- For a document with multiple pages, images of all pages can be viewed.
Item Description
[ Prev. Page]/
[Next Page ]
If the saved document contains multiple pages, use these buttons to switch the display
to another page.
[Zoom] Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2
times, 4 times or 8 times. To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the
scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image.
[Rotate Image] : Rotates the currently displayed page by 180 degrees to show the image.
[Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages.
• You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated.
• [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages.
• [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages.
• [Select All]: Select images in all pages.
• [Rotation Angle]: Click [180°] to rotate a page.
[View Finishing] Displays the specified settings as icons and text in the preview image. Cancel [View
Finishing] to erase the icons and text so that only the image appears in the screen.
3 Touch panel
3-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
3.2
Preview (Send/Bind TX)
Preview the page image of sending result by pressing the [Preview] - [Detail] in the left panel when you have
selected [Send] or [Bind TX].
Item Description
[Scan] Displays the preview for E-mail TX/PC (FTP)/File TX (SMB)/File TX (WebDAV) operations.
[Fax] Press this button to display the preview for G3 fax, IP address fax, or Internet fax
operations.
[ Prev. Page]/
[Next Page ]
If the saved document contains multiple pages, use these buttons to switch the display
to another page.
[Zoom] Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2
times, 4 times or 8 times. To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the
scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image.
[Rotate Image] When [Scan] is selected in [Preview]
: Rotates the currently displayed page 90 degrees anti-clockwise to show the image.
: Rotates the currently displayed page 90 degrees clockwise to show the image.
[Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages.
• You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated.
• [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages.
• [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages.
• [Select All]: Select images in all pages.
• [Rotation Angle]: Select [Left 90°], [Right 90°], or [180°] as the rotation angle.
When the destination is a fax, an image is sent at 180 degrees if [Left 90°] is selected
in [Rotation Angle] and at 0 degrees if [Right 90°] is selected.
If TIFF or JPEG is selected as the file format to read a long original, the rotation mode
may not be specified.
When [Fax] is selected in [Preview]
: Rotates the currently displayed page by 180 degrees to show the image.
[Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages.
• You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated.
• [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages.
• [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages.
• [Select All]: Select images in all pages.
• [Rotation Angle]: Click [180°] to rotate a page.
[Delete Page] Displayed when the saved document contains multiple pages while [Send] is selected.
You can select multiple images in the page to be deleted.
[Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages.
[Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages.
All pages cannot be deleted.
[View Finishing] View the finishing image with the configured settings, including printing the data, applied.
When you cancel [View Finishing], only the image appears in the screen.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-17
3.2 Touch panel 3
Reference
- If you select [Bind TX], the Delete Page function becomes unavailable.
- If you select [Send] for multiple documents, the rotate page and delete page functions become unavailable.
3 Touch panel
3-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
3.2
4 User Box Operation Flow
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-3
4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes 4
4 User Box Operation Flow
4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes
This section describes the steps for saving documents in Public User Boxes.
Press the User Box key in the control panel
Select the desired User Box, and then press [Save
Document]
Configure the document name (p. 6-5), scan settings
(p. 6-6) and original settings (p. 6-19)
4 Saving documents in User Boxes
4-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.1
Reference
- When saving an original with an embedded password, the password entry screen appears. Enter the
password and press [OK] to start saving.
- You cannot save an original with copy guard embedded.
Load the original
Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-5
4.2 Printing documents from a User Box 4
4.2 Printing documents from a User Box
This section describes the steps for printing documents saved in Public User Boxes.
Press the User Box key in the control panel
Select the desired User Box, and then press
[Use/File]
Select the [Print] tab
Select documents
4 Printing documents from a User Box
4-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.2
If you have selected a single document, press
[Print] (p. 7-6)
When selecting multiple documents and printing
them using added functions, press [Combine]
(p. 7-7)
Configure the printing order (bind order) (p. 7-8)
Configure basic and application settings (p. 7-9,
p. 7-16)
Configure basic and application settings (p. 7-9,
p. 7-16)
To confirm the contents, display the preview
(p. 3-15)
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-7
4.2 Printing documents from a User Box 4
Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel
4 Sending documents from a User Box
4-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.3
4.3 Sending documents from a User Box
This section describes the steps for sending documents saved in Public User Boxes.
Press the User Box key in the control panel
Select the desired User Box, and then press
[Use/File]
Select the [Send] tab
Select documents
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-9
4.3 Sending documents from a User Box 4
If you have selected a single document, press
[Send]. (p. 7-33)
When selecting multiple documents and specifying
the file type or stamp, press [Bind TX] (p. 7-33)
Configure the sending order (bind order) (p. 7-8)
Specify the destination
Address Book Direct Input Job History (The job
history of fax, Internet
fax, or IP address fax is
not displayed when
Bind TX is selected. )
Address Search
Also specify a scan/fax program. For details on scan/fax programs, refer to the [User's Guide Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
4 Sending documents from a User Box
4-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.3
Configure document, communication, and application
settings (p. 7-47)
Configure document, communication, and application
settings (p. 7-47)
To confirm the contents, display the preview
(p. 3-16)
Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-11
4.4 Saving a document in an external memory 4
4.4 Saving a document in an external memory
This section describes the steps for saving scanned images in the external memory.
Press User Box in the control panel while the external
memory is connected to this machine
Connect the external memory to this machine, and
then press [Save a document to External Memory.]
Press [Save Document]
Press [User Box]
Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [External
Memory], then [OK]
4 Saving a document in an external memory
4-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.4
Reference
- When saving an original with an embedded password, the password entry screen appears. Enter the
password and press [OK] to start saving.
- You cannot save an original with copy guard embedded.
- A function to save a document in external memory is set to OFF (not saved) in the factory setting. In
addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is
enabled. To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document
in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-23.
Configure the document name (p. 6-5), scan settings
(p. 6-6) and original settings (p. 6-19)
Load the original
Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-13
4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box 4
4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box
This section describes the steps for saving a document stored in the external memory to a User Box.
Press User Box in the control panel while the external
memory is connected to this machine
Connect the external memory to this machine, and
then press [Save a document from External Memory
to a User Box.]
Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [External
Memory], then [Use/File]
Press the [Filing Settings] tab
Select a document, and then press [Save to User
Box]
4 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box
4-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.5
Reference
- A function to save documents in an external memory is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by factory default.
In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is
enabled. To save a document from the external memory into a User Box, change the setting to enable
you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-23.
Specify the User Box and document name
(p. 7-102)
Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-15
4.6 Printing a document from an external memory 4
4.6 Printing a document from an external memory
This section describes the steps for printing documents saved in the external memory.
Press User Box in the control panel while the external
memory is connected to this machine
Connect the external memory to this machine, and
then press [Print a document from External Memory.]
Select the [System User Box] tab, and then press
[External Memory]
Press [Use/File]
Select a file, and then press [Print] (p. 7-99)
4 Printing a document from an external memory
4-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.6
Reference
- A function to save documents in an external memory is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by factory default.
In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is
enabled. To save a document from the external memory into a User Box, change the setting to enable
you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-23.
Configure print settings (p. 7-100)
Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-17
4.7 Filing documents in a User Box 4
4.7 Filing documents in a User Box
This section describes the steps for filing documents saved in Public User Boxes.
Press the User Box key in the control panel
Select the desired User Box, and then press
[Use/File]
Select the [Filing Settings] tab
Select documents, and then select a function
(p. 7-63)
4 Filing documents in a User Box
4-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.7
dReference
To delete the documents, refer to page 7-64.
To rename the documents, refer to page 7-64.
To move the documents to other User Boxes, refer to page 7-64.
To copy the documents to other User Boxes, refer to page 7-65.
To save a document in the external memory, refer to page 7-65.
To check information of the documents or preview the documents, refer to page 7-68.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-19
4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA 4
4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA
This section describes the steps to print a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA.
Press the User Box key in the control panel
Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [Mobile/
PDA], then [Use/File]
Press [Print List]
To check printing preferences, press [Check Print
Settings]
4 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA
4-20 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.8
dReference
To configure print settings from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 8-12.
Enter the PIN code displayed in the control panel to
the cellular phone or PDA (p. 7-103)
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-21
4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box 4
4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User
Box
This section describes the steps to save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA to a User Box.
Press the User Box key in the control panel
Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [Mobile/
PDA], then [Use/File]
Press [Save in User Box]
Select the desired User Box, and then press [OK]
4 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box
4-22 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.9
Enter the PIN code displayed in the control panel to
the cellular phone or PDA (p. 7-104)
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-23
4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4
4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode
This section describes the configuration and settings for the functions available in the User Box mode.
4.10.1 Save Document
Public, Personal, or Group User Box
The following shows the menu tree for saving documents in Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes.
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
[User Box] (p. 6-5)
[Document Name] (p. 6-5)
[Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6)
[Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7)
[Resolution] (p. 6-7)
[File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8)
[Encryption] (p. 6-9)
[Outline PDF] (p. 6-11)
[Scan Setting] (p. 6-11)
[Density] (p. 6-12)
[Color] (p. 6-12)
[Scan Size] (p. 6-13)
[Image Adjustment]
[Background Removal] (p. 6-14)
[Sharpness] (p. 6-15)
[Application] [Frame Erase] (p. 6-15)
[Book Copy] (p. 6-16)
[Separate Scan] (p. 6-18)
[Original Settings] [Special Original]
(p. 6-19)
[Mixed Original]
[Z-Folded Original]
[Long Original]
[Direction Settings]
[Original Direction] (p. 6-19)
[Binding Position]
(p. 6-20)
[Auto]
[Top]
[Left]
[Despeckle] (p. 6-20)
4 Menu tree of the User Box mode
4-24 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.10
System User Box
The following shows the menu tree for saving documents in System User Boxes.
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
[Annotation User
Box]
[User Box] (p. 6-5)
[Document Name] (p. 6-5)
[Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6)
[Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7)
[Resolution] (p. 6-7)
[File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8)
[Encryption]
(p. 6-9)
[Outline PDF]
(p. 6-11)
[Scan Setting]
(p. 6-11)
[Density] (p. 6-12)
[Color] (p. 6-12)
[Scan Size] (p. 6-13)
[Image Adjustment]
[Background Removal]
(p. 6-14)
[Sharpness]
(p. 6-15)
[Application] [Frame Erase]
(p. 6-15)
[Book Copy]
(p. 6-16)
[Separate Scan] (p. 6-18)
[Original Settings] [Special Original]
(p. 6-19)
[Mixed Original]
[Z-Folded Original]
[Long Original]
[Direction Settings]
[Original Direction]
(p. 6-19)
[Binding Position]
(p. 6-20)
[Despeckle] (p. 6-20)
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-25
4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4
[External Memory] [User Box] (p. 6-5)
[Document Name] (p. 6-5)
[Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6)
[Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7)
[Resolution] (p. 6-7)
[File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8)
[Encryption]
(p. 6-9)
[Outline PDF]
(p. 6-11)
[Scan Setting]
(p. 6-11)
[Density] (p. 6-12)
[Color] (p. 6-12)
[Scan Size] (p. 6-13)
[Image Adjustment]
[Background Removal]
(p. 6-14)
[Sharpness]
(p. 6-15)
[Application] [Frame Erase]
(p. 6-15)
[Book Copy]
(p. 6-16)
[Separate Scan] (p. 6-18)
[Original Settings] [Special Original]
(p. 6-19)
[Mixed Original]
[Z-Folded Original]
[Long Original]
[Direction Settings]
[Original Direction]
(p. 6-19)
[Binding Position]
(p. 6-20)
[Despeckle] (p. 6-20)
[Mobile/PDA] [Save in User Box] (p. 7-103)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
4 Menu tree of the User Box mode
4-26 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.10
4.10.2 Use/File
Print (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes)
The following shows the menu tree for using or filing documents in Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes,
and configuring print settings. The following describes items available using the framed buttons.
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
[Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-9)
[Print] (p. 7-9) [1-Sided]
[2-Sided]
[Color] (p. 7-10) [Full Color]
[Black]
[Use Existing Color Setting]
[Finishing]
(p. 7-10)
[Sort] (p. 7-11)
[Group] (p. 7-11)
[Offset] (p. 7-11)
[Staple] (p. 7-11)
[Punch] (p. 7-11)
[Fold/Bind]
(p. 7-12)
[Half-Fold]
[Center Staple &
Fold]
[Combine]
(p. 7-13)
[Combine Pages]
[Combine Direction]
[Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting]
[Manual]
[Full Size]
[Minimal]
[Fixed Zoom]
[User Preset Zoom]
[Page Margin]
(p. 7-16)
[Margin Position]
[Adjust Value]
[Image Shift]
(p. 7-16)
[Vertical Shift]
[Horizontal Shift]
[Change Back
Shift]
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-27
4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4
[Sheet/Cover/
Chapter Insert]
[Cover Sheet]
(p. 7-18)
[Front Cover]
[Back Cover]
[Insert Sheet]
(p. 7-19)
[Insert Paper]
[Insert Type]
[Chapters]
(p. 7-20)
[Chapter Paper]
[Stamp/Composition]
(p. 7-21)
[Date/Time]
(p. 7-21)
[Date Format]
[Time Format]
[Pages]
[Print Position]
[Text Details]
[Page Number]
(p. 7-22)
[Starting Page
Number]
[Page Number
Type]
[Starting Chapter
Number]
[Insert Sheet Setting]
(p. 7-23)
[Print Position]
[Text Details]
[Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Stamp Type/Preset
Stamps]
[Pages]
[Text Size]
[Text Color]
[Print Position]
[Copy Security] [Copy Protect]
(p. 7-25)
[Copy Guard]
(p. 7-26)
[Password Copy]
(p. 7-27)
[Stamp Repeat]
(p. 7-28)
[Stamp Repeat
Type] (p. 7-29)
[Detail Settings]
(p. 7-29)
[Position] (p. 7-29)
[Header/Footer]
(p. 7-30)
[Recall Header/
Footer]
[Mode Check]
[Registered Overlay]
(p. 7-31)
[Recall Overlay
Image]
[Pages]
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
4 Menu tree of the User Box mode
4-28 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.10
[Combine] [Copies:] (p. 7-9)
[Print] (p. 7-9) [1-Sided]
[2-Sided]
[Color] (p. 7-10) [Full Color]
[Black]
[Use Existing Color Setting]
[Finishing]
(p. 7-10)
[Offset] (p. 7-11)
[Staple] (p. 7-11)
[Punch] (p. 7-11)
[Fold/Bind]
(p. 7-12)
[Half-Fold]
[Center Staple &
Fold]
[Continuous Print] (p. 7-15)
[Page Margin]
(p. 7-16)
[Margin Position]
[Adjust Value]
[Image Shift]
(p. 7-16)
[Vertical Shift]
[Horizontal Shift]
[Change Back
Shift]
[Stamp/Composition]
[Date/Time]
(p. 7-21)
[Date Format]
[Time Format]
[Pages]
[Print Position]
[Text Details]
[Page Number]
(p. 7-22)
[Starting Page
Number]
[Page Number
Type]
[Starting Chapter
Number]
[Print Position]
[Text Details]
[Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Stamp Type/Preset
Stamps]
[Pages]
[Text Size]
[Text Color]
[Print Position]
[Copy Security]
(p. 7-24)
[Copy Protect]
(p. 7-25)
[Copy Guard]
(p. 7-26)
[Password Copy]
(p. 7-27)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-29
4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4
Send (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes)
The following shows the Use/File - Send menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The following
describes items available using the framed buttons.
[Stamp Repeat]
(p. 7-28)
[Stamp Repeat
Type] (p. 7-29)
[Detail Settings]
(p. 7-29)
[Position] (p. 7-29)
[Header/Footer]
(p. 7-30)
[Recall Header/
Footer]
[Mode Check]
[Registered Overlay]
(p. 7-31)
[Recall Overlay
Image]
[Pages]
[Document Details]
[Preview] (p. 7-68)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
[Send] [Address Book] [Search] (p. 7-37)
[Direct Input] [Fax] (p. 7-40) [Fax Number]
[E-Mail] (p. 7-40)
[Internet Fax]
(p. 7-41)
[RX Ability (Destination)]
(p. 7-41)
[IP Address Fax]
(p. 7-42)
[Address]
[Port Number]
[Destination Machine
Type]
[PC (SMB)]
(p. 7-42)
[Host Name]
[File Path]
[User Name]
[Password]
[Reference]
4 Menu tree of the User Box mode
4-30 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.10
[FTP] (p. 7-43) [Host Name]
[File Path]
[User Name]
[Password]
[Detailed Settings]
[WebDAV]
(p. 7-44)
[Host Name]
[File Path]
[User Name]
[Password]
[Detailed Settings]
[Job History] (p. 7-45)
[Address Search]
(p. 7-45)
[Search] (p. 7-46)
[Advanced Search] (p. 7-46)
[Document Settings]
[Resolution] (p. 7-47)
[File Type]
(p. 7-48)
[File Type]
(p. 7-48)
[Encryption]
(p. 7-49)
[Stamp Composition]
(p. 7-51)
[Outline PDF]
(p. 7-51)
[Scan Setting]
(p. 7-52)
[Color] (p. 7-52) [Use Existing
Color Setting]
[Full Color]
[Gray Scale]
[Black]
[Communication
Settings]
[Line Settings]
(p. 7-53)
[Overseas TX]
(p. 7-53)
[ECM OFF]
(p. 7-54)
[V.34 OFF]
(p. 7-54)
[Check Dest. &
Send] (p. 7-54)
[Select Line]
(p. 7-54)
[E-Mail Settings]
(p. 7-55)
[Document Name]
(p. 7-55)
[Subject] (p. 7-55)
[From] (p. 7-56)
[Body] (p. 7-56)
[URL Notification
Setting] (p. 7-57)
[Address Book]
[Detail Search]
[Direct Input]
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-31
4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4
[Communication
Method Settings]
(p. 7-58)
[Timer TX]
(p. 7-58)
[Password TX]
(p. 7-59)
[F-Code TX]
(p. 7-59)
[E-Mail Encryption] (p. 7-60)
[Digital Signature] (p. 7-60)
[Fax Header Settings] (p. 7-60)
[Application] [Stamp/Composition]
[Date/Time]
(p. 7-21)
[Page Number]
(p. 7-22)
[Stamp] (p. 7-23)
[Header/Footer]
(p. 7-30)
[Send & Print]
(p. 7-62)
[Copies:]
[Simplex/Duplex]
[Staple]
[Bind TX] [Address Book] [Search] (p. 7-37)
[Direct Input] [E-Mail] (p. 7-40)
[PC (SMB)]
(p. 7-42)
[Host Name]
[File Path]
[User Name]
[Password]
[Reference]
[FTP] (p. 7-43) [Host Name]
[File Path]
[User Name]
[Password]
[Detailed Settings]
[WebDAV]
(p. 7-44)
[Host Name]
[File Path]
[User Name]
[Password]
[Detailed Settings]
[Job History] (p. 7-45)
[Address Search]
(p. 7-45)
[Search] (p. 7-46)
[Advanced Search] (p. 7-46)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
4 Menu tree of the User Box mode
4-32 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.10
Filing Settings (for public/personal/group User Boxes)
The following shows the Use/File - Filing Settings menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The
following describes items available using the framed buttons.
[Document Settings]
[File Type]
(p. 7-48)
[File Type]
(p. 7-48)
[Encryption]
(p. 7-49)
[Stamp Composition]
(p. 7-51)
[Outline PDF]
(p. 7-51)
[Scan Setting]
(p. 7-52)
[Communication
Settings]
[E-Mail Settings]
(p. 7-55)
[Document Name]
(p. 7-55)
[Subject] (p. 7-55)
[From] (p. 7-56)
[Body] (p. 7-56)
[URL Notification
Setting] (p. 7-57)
[Address Book]
[Detail Search]
[Direct Input]
[E-Mail Encryption] (p. 7-60)
[Digital Signature] (p. 7-60)
[Application] [Stamp/Composition]
[Date/Time]
(p. 7-21)
[Page Number]
(p. 7-22)
[Stamp] (p. 7-23)
[Header/Footer]
(p. 7-30)
[Send & Print] [Copies:]
[Simplex/Duplex]
[Staple]
[Document Details]
[Preview] (p. 7-68)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-33
4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4
Application (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes)
The following shows the File/Use - Application menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The following
describes items available using the framed buttons.
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
[Delete] (p. 7-64)
[Edit Name] (p. 7-64)
[Move] (p. 7-64)
[Copy] (p. 7-65)
[Save to External Memory.] (p. 7-65)
[Document Details]
[Preview] (p. 7-68)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
[Edit Document] [Delete Page] (p. 7-70)
[Rotate Page] (p. 7-71)
[Move Page]
(p. 7-73)
[Preview] (p. 7-75)
[Preview /Set Range] (p. 7-75)
[Register Overlay]
(p. 7-77)
[Overlay Image]
[Edit] [New] (p. 7-78)
[Overwrite] (p. 7-79)
[Detail Settings]
(p. 7-80)
[Density]
[Color]
[Document Details]
[Preview]
4 Menu tree of the User Box mode
4-34 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.10
System User Box
The following shows the Use/File menu tree for System User Boxes.
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
[Bulletin Board User Box] (p. 7-81)
[Polling TX User Box] (p. 7-82)
[Secure Document
User Box]
[Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-84)
[Print] (p. 7-84) [1-Sided]
[2-Sided]
[Color] (p. 7-10) [Full Color]
[Black]
[Use Existing
Color Setting]
[Finishing]
(p. 7-10)
[Sort]
[Group]
[Offset]
[Staple]
[Punch]
[Fold/Bind]
(p. 7-12)
[Combine]
(p. 7-13)
[Combine Pages]
[Combine Direction]
[Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting]
[Manual]
[Full Size]
[Minimal]
[Fixed Zoom]
[User Preset
Zoom]
[Page Margin]
(p. 7-16)
[Margin Position]
[Adjust Value]
[Image Shift]
[Sheet/Cover/
Chapter Insert]
(p. 7-17)
[Cover Sheet]
[Insert Sheet]
[Chapters]
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-35
4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4
[Stamp/Composition]
(p. 7-21)
[Date/Time]
[Page Number]
[Stamp]
[Copy Security]
[Stamp Repeat]
[Header/Footer]
[Registered Overlay]
[Filing Settings]
(p. 7-85)
[Delete]
[Edit Name]
[Document Details]
[Preview] (p. 7-68)
[Compulsory
Memory RX User
Box]
[Print] (p. 7-86)
[Filing Settings]
(p. 7-86)
[Delete]
[Edit Name]
[Document Details]
[Preview] (p. 7-68)
[Annotation User
Box]
[Print-Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-9)
[Print] (p. 7-9) [1-Sided]
[2-Sided]
[Color] (p. 7-10) [Full Color]
[Black]
[Use Existing
Color Setting]
[Finishing]
(p. 7-10)
[Sort]
[Group]
[Offset]
[Staple]
[Punch]
[Fold/Bind]
(p. 7-12)
[Combine]
(p. 7-13)
[Combine Pages]
[Combine Direction]
[Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting]
[Manual]
[Full Size]
[Minimal]
[Fixed Zoom]
[User Preset
Zoom]
[Page Margin]
(p. 7-16)
[Margin Position]
[Adjust Value]
[Image Shift]
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
4 Menu tree of the User Box mode
4-36 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.10
[Sheet/Cover/
Chapter Insert]
[Cover Sheet]
(p. 7-18)
[Insert Sheet]
(p. 7-19)
[Chapters]
(p. 7-20)
[Stamp/Composition]
(p. 7-21)
[Date/Time]
(p. 7-21)
[Page Number]
(p. 7-22)
[Stamp] (p. 7-23)
[Copy Security]
(p. 7-24)
[Stamp Repeat]
(p. 7-28)
[Registered Overlay]
(p. 7-31)
[Send-Send] [Address Book] (p. 7-37)
[Direct Input] [E-Mail] (p. 7-40)
[PC (SMB)]
(p. 7-42)
[FTP] (p. 7-43)
[WebDAV]
(p. 7-44)
[Job History] (p. 7-45)
[Address Search]
(p. 7-45)
[Search] (p. 7-46)
[Advanced
Search] (p. 7-46)
[Document Settings]
[Resolution]
(p. 7-47)
[File Type]
(p. 7-48)
[Color] (p. 7-52)
[Communication
Settings]
[E-mail Settings]
(p. 7-55)
[URL Notification
Setting] (p. 7-57)
[E-Mail Encryption]
(p. 7-60)
[Digital Signature]
(p. 7-60)
[Application] [Stamp/Composition]
(p. 7-21)
[Send & Print]
(p. 7-62)
[Stamp Element]
(p. 7-90)
[Filing Settings]
(p. 7-92)
[Delete]
[Edit Name]
[Application] [Register Overlay] (p. 7-77)
[Document Details]
[Preview] (p. 7-68)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-37
4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4
[Fax Retransmit
User Box]
[Print] [Proof Print] (p. 7-93)
[Send] [Fax] (p. 7-93)
[Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-94)
[Document Details]
[Preview]
[Password Encrypted
PDF User
Box]
[Print/Save] [Print/Save] (p. 7-95)
[Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-95)
[Document Details]
[ID & Print User
Box]
[Print] [Print] (p. 7-97)
[Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-97)
[Document Details]
[Preview] (p. 7-68)
[External Memory] [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-100)
[Color] (p. 7-100) [Full Color]
[Black]
[Print] (p. 7-100) [1-Sided]
[2-Sided]
[Binding Position]
(p. 7-100)
[Top]
[Left]
[Right]
[Finishing]
(p. 7-10)
[Sort]
[Group]
[Offset]
[Staple]
[Punch]
[Fold/Bind]
[Paper] (p. 7-101)
[Stamp/Composition]
[Date/Time]
(p. 7-21)
[Page Number]
(p. 7-22)
[Stamp] (p. 7-23)
[Copy Security]
(p. 7-24)
[Stamp Repeat]
(p. 7-28)
[Filing Settings] [Save to User
Box]
[User Box]
[Document Name]
[Document Details]
[Mobile/PDA] [Print List] [Check Print Settings] (p. 7-104)
[Save in User Box] (p. 7-105)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
4 Menu tree of the User Box mode
4-38 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
4.10
5 Accessing the User Box mode
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5-3
5.1 Accessing the User Box mode 5
5 Accessing the User Box mode
5.1 Accessing the User Box mode
Before starting this procedure, turn this machine on. When this machine is ready to copy data, the basic settings
screen appears. To access the User Box mode, press the User Box key in the control panel.
The User Box mode window appears. Lightly press the desired button in the window to display menus or
functions. Then select the target one.
5 User Box Operation Menu
5-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
5.2
5.2 User Box Operation Menu
Accessing the User Box mode enables you to select the operation menus below.
5.2.1 Save Document
Scan the original loaded on this machine and save it in a User Box. You can specify the name or image quality
of an original when saving it.
dReference
For details on the Save Document function, refer to page 6-4.
For details on the Save Document menu structure, refer to page 4-23.
5.2.2 Use/File
Print or send a document saved in a User Box. When printing a document, you can specify the number of
sets or page margins. When sending a document, you can specify the file type. If necessary, you can rename
or move a document saved in a User Box, or copy a document to another User Box.
dReference
For details on the Use/File function, refer to page 7-3.
For details on the Use/File menu structure, refer to page 4-26.
6 Save Document
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-3
6.1 Save Document Overview 6
6 Save Document
6.1 Save Document Overview
6.1.1 Functions
Save Document enables you to directly specify a destination User Box when saving a document in the User
Box mode. Using Save Document, document are saved in the same way as when scanned data is saved.
Public/Personal/Group User Boxes
You can save a document copied or scanned using this machine. You can also save a document that was
print-instructed through a computer connected to a network. Some User Authentication or Account Track
settings limit users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box.
Annotation User Box
If you want to print or send a document with the date and time or filing number image, save the document in
the Annotation User Box. To use this box, select the [System User Box] tab, and then press [Annotation User
Box].
External Memory
You can directly save a scanned document in the external memory connected to this machine. To use this
function, check that the external memory is connected to the USB connector of this machine, select the [System
User Box] tab, and then press [External Memory]. Otherwise, on the screen that is displayed when the
external memory device has been connected to the USB connector, press [Save a document to External
Memory.].
Reference
- A function to save a document to the external memory or to save a document stored in the external
memory to a User Box is set to OFF (cannot be saved) in the factory default. In addition, it is set to OFF
(cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document
in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings.
For details, refer to page 8-23.
dReference
For information on the available external memory, refer to page 7-98.
6 Save Document Overview
6-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.1
6.1.2 Initial Window of Save Document
Public/Personal/Group User Boxes
Select the [Public], [Personal], or [Group] tab to display a list of User Boxes you can save a document in.
Specify the desired User Box.
System User Box
Select the [System User Box] tab to display a list of User Boxes you can save a document in. Specify the
desired User Box.
Reference
- If [Annotation User Box] is selected, further specify the desired User Box.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-5
6.1 Save Document Overview 6
6.1.3 Save Document window
The available setting items in the Save Document screen are as follows.
Reference
- For the external memory, you cannot change the destination User Box.
- To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator
Settings. For details, refer to page 8-23.
Item Description
[User Box] For Public, Personal, Group and Annotation User Boxes, you can change the destination
User Box for saving a document. To change the User Box, press [User Box]
and select a User Box.
• If there is no User Box with the specified number, a new Public User Box is automatically
created.
[Document
Name]
Press this button to display a keyboard to enter a document name. Enter the document
name in the control panel.
[Scan Settings] Configure detailed settings for scanning the document. For details, refer to
page 6-6.
[Original Settings] Configure the detailed settings for the original type and original direction. For details,
refer to page 6-19.
6 Scan Settings
6-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.2
6.2 Scan Settings
Press [Scan Settings] in the Save Document tab to configure the detailed scan settings.
6.2.1 Basic - Original Type
Select the original type based on the original contents. The available original types are as follows.
If you select [Text/Photo] or [Photo], you can also specify the photo type.
Item Description
[Text] Original that consists of only text.
[Text/Photo] Original that consists of both text and photos (halftone).
[Photo] Original that consists of only photos (halftone).
[Dot Matrix Original]
Original with faint-printing in whole.
[Copied Paper] Original with even density that was printed using a copier or printer.
Item Description
[Photo Paper] Select this setting for a photo printed on printing paper.
[Printed Photo] Select this setting for printed photos such as in books or magazines.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-7
6.2 Scan Settings 6
6.2.2 Basic - Simplex/Duplex
Select whether to scan one or both sides of the original.
6.2.3 Basic - Resolution
Select the resolution for scanning.
Reference
- The amount of data increases depending on the selected resolution, and you may not be able to save
data in an external memory. If you cannot save data, reduce the resolution and retry saving it.
Item Description
[1-Sided] Scans one side of the original.
[2-Sided] Scans both sides of the original.
[Cover + 2-Sided] Scans the first page of the original as a cover in the single-sided mode, and also
scans the remaining pages in the double-sided mode.
6 Scan Settings
6-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.2
6.2.4 Basic - File Type
Select the file type to save scanned data.
File Type
The available file types are as follows.
dReference
You can specify the compression format when saving a TIFF file in color. For details, refer to the [User's Guide
Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
You cannot specify some file formats depending on the Color settings. The following shows the combinations
of the File Type and Color settings.
Reference
- Even if you have selected the file type when saving a document in a User Box, you must specify the file
type when downloading the data of the document.
- If you select [JPEG], [Page Separation] is automatically selected and set to [1 Every X Page(s)] in Scan
Setting.
Item Description
[PDF] Saves data in PDF format.
[Compact PDF] Further compressed PDF file. This format is useful when saving a scanned full color
data.
[TIFF] Saves data in TIFF format.
[JPEG] Saves data in JPEG format.
[XPS] Saves data in XPS format.
[Compact XPS] Saves data in further compressed XPS file.
Auto Color Full Color Gray scale Black
PDF o o o o
Compact
PDF
o o o −
TIFF o o o o
JPEG o o o −
XPS o o o o
Compact
XPS
o o o −
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-9
6.2 Scan Settings 6
Encryption
If the [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified.
Reference
- You cannot check the contents of an encrypted document in the preview screen.
Encryption - Detail Settings
Configure the detailed permission settings when the document permission is specified on the Encryption
screen.
Item Description
Encryption Level Select the encryption level.
[Password] Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data (up to 32 characters). For
confirmation, enter the password twice.
[Document Permissions]
Enter the password necessary to change document permissions (up to 32 characters).
For confirmation, enter the password twice.
6 Scan Settings
6-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.2
Press [Forward ] to further configure Changes Allowed settings.
Item Description
[Printing Allowed] Select whether to allow or restrict printing data. [Low Resolution] appears when the
Encryption Level is set to [High level].
[Enable copying
of text, images
and other content]
Select whether to allow or restrict extracting text images.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-11
6.2 Scan Settings 6
Outline PDF
Configure this item when [Compact PDF] is selected for the file type. This function performs outline processing
for characters, ensuring a smooth display image. It is also available when editing data using an application
such as Adobe Illustrator.
dReference
This function enables you to specify the accuracy of outline processing when creating outline PDF data. For
details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
Scan Setting
Specify whether to save all pages of a document to one file, or to save each page to one file.
Reference
- If you select [Page Separation] when saving a document in a User Box, the selection of Page Separation
is stored, and then the document is saved as a [Multi Page] file.
- The selection of Page Separation is enabled when sending data to an E-Mail, PC (SMB), or FTP destination.
Item Description
[Changes Allowed]
Select the permission level about changes to the document, including signing, entering,
or commenting data.
Item Description
[Multi Page] Creates all the scanned originals as one file. This item cannot be specified together
with [JPEG].
[Page Separation] Separates the scanned data to save every specified number of pages to one file. Use
the keypad to enter the number of pages to be saved in one file.
[E-mail Attachment
Method]
Specify the method to use to attach a file to an E-mail when Page Separation is selected.
• [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail]: Attaches all files to one E-mail.
• [One (1) File per E-Mail]: Attaches one file to one E-mail.
6 Scan Settings
6-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.2
6.2.5 Basic - Density
Adjust the density for the scanned document.
6.2.6 Basic - Color
Specify whether to scan original in color or black-and-white.
Some color settings may not be available, depending on the selected File Type settings. The following shows
the combinations of the File Type and Color settings.
Item Description
[Auto Color] Automatically detects the color of the original and scans it to fit the original setting.
[Full Color] Scans the original in full color.
[Gray Scale] Select this setting for originals with high-level halftone such as black-and-white photos.
[Black] Select this setting for originals with distinct black and white areas, such as line drawings.
Auto Color Full Color Gray scale Black
PDF o o o o
Compact
PDF
o o o −
TIFF o o o o
JPEG o o o −
XPS o o o o
Compact
XPS
o o o −
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-13
6.2 Scan Settings 6
6.2.7 Scan Size
Select the paper size of the original to be scanned.
Standard size
Press [Auto] to automatically detect the size of the first page in the original when scanning. To scan the original
with a predetermined paper size, select that size.
Custom Size
Enter the dimensions of a custom size other than the standard sizes.
Reference
- X-direction: Enter a value from 2 to 7 inches (30.0 to 432.0 mm).
- Y-direction: Enter a value from 2 to 11-11/16 inches (30.0 to 297.0 mm).
Photo Size
Select the 3 e 5 or 2-1/4 e 3-1/4 size for photographs.
6 Scan Settings
6-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.2
6.2.8 Image Adjustment
Adjust the background density or sharpness for the scanned document.
Background Removal
Adjust the background density of the scanned original. When scanning a colored-paper original, the background
color may be scanned resulting in the entire image becoming dark. To avoid this, you can adjust the
background density. Select the background removal method, and specify the level. To automatically adjust
the density, press [Auto].
Reference
- To prevent the dark part in the back side from being scanned as shade, select [Bleed Removal].
- To scan an original with the colored background such as a map, select [Paper Discoloration Adj].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-15
6.2 Scan Settings 6
Sharpness
This settings allows you to sharpen character edges or other borders for the scanned document.
6.2.9 Application - Frame Erase
Configure the setting for erasing frames on a two-page spread.
Reference
- If you have specified the frame width to be erased in the Frame Erase setting of the Book Copy function,
the same value is automatically configured for this [Frame Erase] function.
- To erase all frames with the same width, specify a numeric value between 1/16 and 2 inches (0.1 and
50.0 mm) under [Frame].
- To individually specify the top, left, right, and bottom widths, press the desired button and specify a
numeric value for that side.
- To not erase frames, press [None].
6 Scan Settings
6-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.2
6.2.10 Application - Book Copy
Configure settings to scan a two-page spread. Settings include scanning method, binding positions and
erasing unwanted areas. For paper size of the original, select the size of the spread.
Book copy method
Select the scanning method.
Book Erase - Frame Erase
Configure the setting for erasing frames on a two-page spread.
Reference
- If you have specified the frame width to be erased in the Frame Erase function, the same value is automatically
configured for this [Frame Erase] setting of the Book Copy function.
- To erase all frames with the same width, specify a numeric value between 1/16 and 2 inches (0.1 and
50.0 mm) under [Frame].
- To individually specify the top, left, right, and bottom widths, press the desired button and specify a
numeric value for that side.
- To not erase frames, press [None].
Item Description
[Book Spread] Scans a two-page spread as a single page.
[Separation] Scans a two-page spread as two pages (left and right).
[Front Cover] Scans the first page as a front cover.
[Front + Back
Covers]
Scans the first page as a front cover, the second page as a back cover, and the third
and subsequent pages as a body.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-17
6.2 Scan Settings 6
Book Erase - Center Erase
Configure settings to erase the shaded part around the binding position in the center of the original.
Reference
- Use the keypad or press [-] or [+] to enter a numeric value between 1/16 and 1-3/16 inches (0.1 and
30.0 mm).
Binding Position
If you have selected Separation, Front Cover, or Front + Back Covers, press [Binding Position], and then select
the binding position.
6 Scan Settings
6-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.2
6.2.11 Separate Scan
The scan operation can be divided into several sessions by types of originals, for example, when all pages of
originals cannot be loaded into the ADF, when the originals are placed on the original glass, or when singlesided
originals and double-sided originals are mixed. Press [Separate Scan] to highlight the display.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-19
6.3 Original Settings 6
6.3 Original Settings
Specify the type of original that is loaded, for example, if it contains mixed page sizes or Z-folded originals.
Under Original Settings, you can select two or more items at the same time.
6.3.1 Special Original
The available setting items are as follows.
6.3.2 Direction Settings - Original Direction
Select the orientation of the original. After the document is scanned, the data is processed so that it is correctly
oriented.
Item Contents
[Mixed Original] Select this setting when loading originals with different sizes together into the ADF.
The scanning speed will be lowered because the size of each page is detected before
it is scanned.
[Z-Folded Original]
Select this setting to detect the size of a Z-folded original by the length fed through
the ADF.
[Long Original] Select this setting for originals that are longer than the standard size.
6 Original Settings
6-20 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
6.3
6.3.3 Direction Settings - Binding Position
Select the binding position of the original when it has punched holes or is stapled. When a double-sized original
is scanned, the binding position is corrected on the back side.
6.3.4 Despeckle
Reduces the influence of a dirt of the slit glass upon the scanned image when loading an original in the ADF.
Reference
- Specifying Despeckle will drop the scanning speed.
- If the slit glass is too dirty, clean it. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
Item Description
[Auto] Sets the binding position to the long side if the size is 11-11/16 inches (297 mm) or
smaller, or the short side otherwise.
[Top] Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding position at the top.
[Left] Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding position at the top.
7 Use/File
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-3
7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations 7
7 Use/File
7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations
7.1.1 Functions of Use/File
Printing a document
You can print a document that was saved in a User Box in the Copy, Fax/Scan, print instruction, or Fax reception
mode. You can add finishing settings such as the number of copies or 2-sided print settings when
printing the document. In addition, you can specify Combine to print two or more documents at the same
time.
Sending
You can distribute a document that was saved in a User Box in the Copy, Fax/Scan, print instruction, or Receive
mode, for example, by E-mail or fax. You can add finishing or transmission settings when distributing
the document. You can also specify Bind TX to select two or more documents and distribute them at the
same time.
Filing
You can perform various document filing operations such as moving or copying documents between User
Boxes. You can also save a document stored in a User Box in the external memory.
Application settings
You can move or rotate pages in saved documents, or register overlay images.
7 Overview of the Use/File operations
7-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.1
7.1.2 Detail of the Use Document screen
Select the User Box where you want to print and distribute documents. The following screen is displayed.
This section describes the setting items, pointing to the Public User Box as an example.
No. Name Description
1 [Print] Configure settings to print the selected documents. (p. 7-6)
2 [Send] Configure the destination and other settings to send the selected documents.
(p. 7-33)
3 [Filing Settings] Rename, move, or copy the selected documents. (p. 7-63)
4 [Application] Edit the selected document on a page-basis or register overlay images.
(p. 7-69)
5 [Save Document] Select this tab to display the Save Document screen. The Use/File settings
you have configured are canceled.
6 − Displays the number and name of the specified User Box.
7 − Displays a list of the documents saved in the User Box.
8 [ ][ ] If the specified User Box contains seven or more documents, use [ ] or
[ ] to scroll up or down the list.
9 [Select All] Press this button to select all documents in the specified User Box.
10 [Reset] Press this button to reset all documents in the User Box.
11 [Detail View]/[Thumbnail
View]
Press this button to switch the display format of saved documents.
[Thumbnail View]: A reduced image of the first page, number of pages,
and document name of each document are displayed.
[Detail View]: The time stored, user name, and document name of each
document are displayed. Every time you press the [Time Stored] column
header, the documents are sorted in ascending or descending order of
the time stored alternately.
12 Print Settings/Transmission
Settings/ Filing
Settings/
Application Settings
Configurable items for the selected tab are displayed.
13 [Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of
the document.
4
6
7
1 2 3
11
12
9
10
13
5
8
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-5
7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations 7
7.1.3 If a password is specified for a User Box
If a password is specified for a User Box, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password, and press
[OK].
7 Print
7-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.2
7.2 Print
7.2.1 Overview of the Print tab
Description of the Print tab
Select the [Print] tab to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Print] are as follows.
dReference
For details on other items, refer to page 7-4.
Print
Press [Print] to display the following screen. In the Print screen, the two categories of the configurable items
are provided: [Basic] and [Application].
No. Name Description
1 [Print] Configure settings to print the selected documents. If you have selected
multiple documents, the document print setting function is not available.
(p. 7-7)
2 [Combine] Configure the printing order or other setting to print two or more document
selected. (p. 7-8)
2
1
No. Name Description
1 [Basic] Configure the basic settings such as the number of copies and 1-Sized
or 2-Sized printing.
1 2
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-7
7.2 Print 7
Combine
Press [Combine], and then configure Combine settings to display the following screen. In the Combine
screen, two categories of the configurable items are provided: [Basic] and [Application].
7.2.2 Print
In the Print - Print Details screen, configure or change the following functions.
Reference
- Fold/Bind can be configured when the optional Finisher is installed.
- The punch settings can be configured when the Punch Kit is installed on the optional Finisher.
2 [Application] Configure the more complicated settings such as the page margin and
stamp.
No. Name Description
No. Name Description
1 [Basic] Configure the basic settings such as the number of copies and 1-Sized
or 2-Sized printing.
2 [Application] Configure the more complicated settings such as the page margin and
stamp.
1 2
Item Description
[Copies:] Specify the number of copies.
[Print] Select either 1-Sided Print or 2-Sided Print.
[Color] Configure color settings to print documents.
[Finishing] Configure settings such as for sorting or grouping, stapling, punching, or folding or
center stapling.
[Combine] Configure settings to print multiple (2, 4, or 8) pages on one page when printing a
multi-page document. Specify the number of sheets per page and the combination
order.
[Zoom] Configure settings to enlarge or reduce an image when printing documents. Select
the magnification.
[Page Margin] The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. You can shift the image part
according to the page margin.
[Sheet/Cover/
Chapter Insert]
Configure settings to insert a cover sheet, insert sheets between selected pages, or
insert sheets for separating chapters.
[Stamp/Composition]
Configure settings to print the determined items such as date and time or stamp.
7 Print
7-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.2
7.2.3 Combine
Document Order
After selecting documents, press [Combine] to display the document order selection screen. Documents will
be printed in the order they are displayed in this screen. When this screen appears, the documents are displayed
in the order they were selected.
Reference
- To change the order, select a reorder source document, then a reorder destination document.
If a document has a watermark at the head, the same watermark is also printed for the second and subsequent
documents.
If a document does not have a watermark at the head, no watermark is printed even when it is specified for
some of the second and subsequent documents.
Configurable items to combine and print documents
In the Combine - Print Details screen, configure or change the settings for the following functions.
Reference
- Fold/Bind can be configured when the optional Finisher is installed.
- The punch settings can be configured when the Punch Kit is installed on the optional Finisher.
- When combining and printing document, you cannot select the Sort, or Group function.
Item Description
[Copies:] Specify the number of copies.
[Print] Select either 1-Sided Print or 2-Sided Print.
[Color] Configure color settings to print documents.
[Finishing] Configure settings such as for offsetting, stapling, punching, or folding or center stapling.
[Continuous Print] Configure this item when [2-Sided] is selected in [Print]. Specify whether, after printing
an odd-page document, to print the first page of the next document on the back
side of the last page of the first document.
[Page Margin] The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. You can shift the image part
according to the page margin.
[Stamp/Composition]
Configure settings to print the determined items such as date and time or stamp.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-9
7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7.3.1 Copies
Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. The allowable range is 1 to 9999.
Reference
- To reset the setting to 1, press the [C] key on the control panel.
7.3.2 1-Sided/2-Sided
Select whether to print one side or both sides of sheets of paper.
7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.3
7.3.3 Color
Configure color settings to print documents.
Reference
- [Full Color]: Prints a document in full color.
– You can print documents saved in this machine in full color even if they are saved in black and white.
- [Black]: Prints a document in black and white.
- [Use Existing Color Setting]: Prints a document with the color settings used when it was saved.
7.3.4 Finishing
Configure sorting, grouping, finishing and other settings.
dReference
When the finisher is installed, you can change the ejection method in Administrator Settings. For the Offset
function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-11
7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
Sort/Group
Selecting Sort feeds copies by set. Selecting Group feeds copies by page.
Offset
Select Yes to sort sheets by set or page so that the user knows where the document is separated. When the
finisher is installed, the printed sheets are fed while shifting them for each separation. When the finisher is not
installed, the printed sheets are fed while alternately sorting them.
Staple
Printed sheets are stapled at a corner or two points.
Staple - Position Setting
If you select the type of stapling, specify the position. The following screen shows an example of [2 Position].
Punch
Printed sheets are punched for filing.
7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.3
Punch - Position Setting
Specify hole positions.
Fold/Bind
Configure the following settings when a finisher is installed.
Item Description
[Half-Fold] Folds printed sheets of paper before being fed.
[Center Staple &
Fold]
Staples printed sheets of paper at two center points and folds them in two before
being fed.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-13
7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
Select the desired function.
7.3.5 Combine
A multi-page original is combined and printed on one page.
Item Description
[2in1] Combines a 2-page original into one page.
[4in1] Combines a 4-page original into one page. You can select the combining order of
original pages.
[8in1] Combines An 8-page original into one page. You can select the combining order of
original pages.
7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.3
7.3.6 Zoom
The images can be enlarged or reduced when they are printed. Specify the magnification.
Reference
- Regardless of the Use Existing Color Setting or Original Type setting, you can print documents saved
in A4 v size in enlarged A3 w size. To rotate and enlarge the image as shown in the example, you must
previously set [Enlargement Rotation] to [Allow] in the Utility menu. For details on the enlargement rotation,
refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
Item Description
[Existing Setting] Prints A document with the magnification that was specified when it was saved.
[Manual] Specify the magnification between 25.0% and 400.0% on a 0.1% basis. Use the
keypad to directly enter the magnification.
[Full Size] Prints a document with the size specified when it was saved, without being enlarged
or reduced.
[Minimal] Reduces a document slightly to leave margin around the image.
[+][-] Press this button to adjust the zoom ratio of the image on a 0.1% basis.
[Fixed Zoom] Specify the fixed magnification that is preset in this machine. This setting is useful
when enlarging or reducing documents to a standard size.
[User Preset
Zoom]
In addition to fixed magnifications, preset frequently used magnifications in advance
and use them later.
• You can preset up to three magnifications.
dReference
For details on presetting magnifications, refer to the [User's Guide Copy
Operations].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-15
7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
7.3.7 Continuous Print
You can select this setting if you have selected 2-Sided printing when combining and printing documents.
Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined and printed. When printing in 2-Sided
mode, select whether, if printing a document ends on the front side of a sheet of paper, to start printing of
the next document on the back side of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet.
Reference
- [Yes]: The next document is printed continuously from the back side of the last page of the previous
document.
- [No]: The next document is printed from the front side of a new sheet.
7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.4
7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7.4.1 Page Margin
The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. It can assure a punching or stapling space.
Page Margin
Image Shift
When a page margin is created, the image can be shifted according the position of the margin. You can specify
the shift length to move the image to the left, right, top, or bottom within 1/16 to 10 inches (0.1 to 250.0
mm) to fit the page margin position.
Reference
- Specify the page margin width on a 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) basis by pressing [-] or [+].
- To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [No Shift].
Item Description
[Margin Position] Select the margin position.
[Auto Zoom]: A page margin position along the long side of the paper is selected if
the original length is 11-11/16 inches (297 mm) or less. A page margin is created
along the short side of the paper if the original length exceeds 11-11/16 inches (297
mm).
[Top]: Select this setting to position a margin on the top.
[Left]: Select this setting to position a margin on the left.
[Right]: Select this setting to position a margin on the right.
[Adjust Value] Specify the width of a page margin between 1/16 and 3/4 inches (0.1 and 20.0 mm).
To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [None].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-17
7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
Image Shift - Change Back Shift
To create a page margin in 2-Sided printing mode, press [Change Back Shift] to specify the image shift length
on the back side. You can specify the shift length to move the image to the left, right, top, or bottom within
1/16 to 10 inches (0.1 to 250.0 mm) to fit the page margin position.
Reference
- Specify the page margin width on a 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) basis by pressing [-] or [+].
- To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [No Shift].
7.4.2 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert
You can configure the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet, or Chapters function.
Item Description
[Cover Sheet] Prints documents with front and back covers.
[Insert Sheet] Inserts colored sheets or other type of paper before the specified pages when documents
are printed.
[Chapters] Configure this setting when printing documents in 2-Sided printing mode. Documents
are printed while pages are fed so that the specified pages, the first page of
each chapter for example, necessarily turns to the front side.
7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.4
7.4.3 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet
Documents are printed with front and back covers.
The available setting items are as follows.
The following shows the front and back cover settings.
Item Description
[Front Cover]/
[Back Cover]
Configure settings for front and back covers. For details, refer to the table below.
[Paper] Select a paper tray in the following cases.
• When [Front (Copy)] or [Front (Blank)] is selected for [Front Cover]
• When [Back (Copy)] or [Back (Blank)] is selected for [Back Cover]
Item Description
Front Cover
None A front cover is not attached to a document.
Front
(Copy)
The first page of a document is printed on the front cover sheet. The second
page is printed on the back side of the front cover sheet when [2-Sided] printing
is selected.
Front
(Blank)
A blank sheet is inserted before the first page of a document.
Back Cover
None A back cover is not attached to a document.
Back
(Copy)
The last page of a document is printed on the back cover sheet. The last two
pages are printed on the front and back sides of the back cover sheet when
[2-Sided] printing is selected.
Back
(Blank)
A blank sheet is inserted after the last page of a document.
ABC COVERABC
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-19
7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
Reference
- Load the front and back cover sheets in the tray in advance.
- To add cover sheet setting when printing the document that you copied and saved in a User Box, either
one of the following conditions must have been satisfied when you saved the document.
– A paper tray was specified
– Cover Sheets were configured
7.4.4 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet
Colored sheets or other type of paper are inserted before the specified pages when documents are printed.
You can configure the setting to insert sheets into up to 30 positions in an original of up to 999 pages.
The available setting items are as follows.
Select [Copy] or [Blank] in Insert Type. Configure the setting as follows depending on whether you select 1-
Sided or 2-Sided printing. Example: When page "6" is specified
Item Description
Page specification/[
Sort]
Specify a page you want to insert a sheet into. Press a page button, and use the keypad
to enter the desired page number. To sort the entered pages in ascending order,
press [Sort].
[Insert Paper] Select a tray to load the sheets to be inserted. Check that sheets are loaded with the
same size and orientation as for the printing paper.
[Insert Type] Specify whether to print a document on the inserted sheets (Copy) or leave them
blank (Blank). For details, refer to the table below.
Item Description
[Copy] (when 1-
Sided is selected)
A sheet is inserted as the sixth sheet and the sixth page of the document is printed
on that sheet.
[Copy] (when 2-
Sided is selected)
The back side of the third sheet is left blank. A specified sheet is inserted as the
fourth sheet and the sixth and seventh pages of the document are printed on that
sheet.
7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-20 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.4
7.4.5 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters
You can configure this setting when printing documents in 2-Sided printing mode. Documents are printed
while pages are fed so that the specified pages, the first page of each chapter for example, necessarily turns
to the front side. You can configure the setting to insert sheets into up to 30 positions in an original of up to
999 pages.
The available setting items are as follows.
[Blank] (when 1-
Sided is selected)
A specified sheet is inserted after the sixth page.
[Blank] (when 2-
Sided is selected)
A specified sheet is inserted as the fourth sheet. When you specify an odd pages,
the back side of the inserted sheet is left blank.
Item Description
Item Description
Page specification/[
Sort]
Specify front-sided pages. Press a page button, and use the keypad to enter the desired
page number. To sort the entered pages in ascending order, press [Sort].
[Chapter Paper] To copy document data on chapter sheets, select [Copy Insert] and select a chapter
paper tray. Check that sheets are loaded with the same size and orientation as for
the printing paper.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-21
7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
7.4.6 Stamp/Composition
In Stamp/Composition screen, you can configure the following functions.
7.4.7 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time
The date and time of printing are printed on the pages.
Item Description
[Date/Time] The date and time of printing are printed on the pages.
[Page Number] A page number is printed on all pages of a document.
[Stamp] A preset character string such as "URGENT" is printed on pages.
[Copy Protect] Hidden text is printed on all pages to prevent unauthorized copying.
[Copy Guard] A stamp is printed on all pages as a copy guard.
[Password Copy] A document is printed with an embedded password on all pages to prevent unauthorized
copying.
[Stamp Repeat] Text or an image is repeatedly printed on all pages.
[Header/Footer] A header or footer is printed on pages.
• This item is not displayed when the header or footer is not registered.
dReference
For details on how to register a header or footer, refer to the [User's
Guide Copy Operations] or [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network
Fax Operations].
[Registered Overlay] A registered image is overlaid on printed pages.
• This item is not displayed when no overlay image is registered.
dReference
For details on how to register an overlay image, refer to page 7-77.
Item Description
[Date Format] Select the format for the date.
[Time Format] Specify whether to add the time, and select the format to display the time.
[Pages] Select whether to print the date and time on all pages or the first page only.
[Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position].
Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a
value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm).
[Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed.
• Text Color: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or
magenta.
• Text Size: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt.
• Text Type: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica.
7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-22 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.4
7.4.8 Stamp/Composition - Page Number
The page number is printed on all pages of the document.
Settings
Item Description
[Starting Page
Number]
Specify the starting page number.
[Starting Chapter
Number]
Specify the starting chapter number.
[Page Number
Type]
Select the format to display a page number.
[Insert Sheet Setting]
Specify whether to print a page number on an inserted sheet. For the available settings,
refer to page 7-23.
[Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position].
Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a
value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm).
[Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed.
• [Text Color]: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan,
or magenta.
• [Text Size]: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt.
• [Text Type]: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-23
7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
Insert Sheet Setting
Specify whether to print a page number on inserted sheets.
7.4.9 Stamp/Composition - Stamp
A preset character string such as "URGENT" is printed on pages.
Item Description
[Cover
Sheet]
[Print on Front and
Back Cover]
A page number is printed on the front and back covers.
[Print on Back Cover
only]
A page number is not printed on the front cover.
[Do not print Page
Number]
A page number is printed on neither the front cover nor the back
cover.
[Insert
Sheet
(Copy)]
[Print Page #] A page number is printed on inserted copy sheets.
[Do Not Print #] A page number is not printed on inserted copy sheets.
[Skip the Page(s)] Inserted copy sheets are not counted. Page numbers are not
printed.
[Insert
(Blank)]
[Do Not Print #] Page numbers are not printed on inserted blank sheets.
[Skip the Page(s)] Inserted blank sheets are not counted. Page numbers are not
printed.
Item Description
[Stamp Type/Preset
Stamps]
Select a stamp type such as URGENT, PLEASE REPLY, or DO NOT COPY.
Pages Select whether to print the date and time on all pages or the first page only.
7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-24 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.4
7.4.10 Stamp/Composition -Copy Security -Copy Protect
Hidden text is printed on all pages to prevent unauthorized copying. When a document printed with copy protection
text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated throughout the pages of the copies so that
the reader knows that it is a copy.
Configure the setting for the copy protect to be applied. You can apply up to eight strings or stamps. If you
set the angle of strings or stamps to 45 degrees (or -45 degrees), however, the number of areas in which you
can place strings or stamps is limited to 4.
In the Copy Protect screen, you can configure the following settings.
[Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal or Standard.
[Text Color] Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta.
[Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position].
Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a
value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm).
Item Description
Item Description
[Copy Protect
Type]
Select a type of copy protect to be printed.
[Detail Settings] Press this button to specify the color, density, and text size of copy protect to be
printed.
[Position] Press this button to specify the angle and printing order of copy protect to be printed.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-25
7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
Copy Protect Type
Detail Settings
Press [Detail Settings] to specify the text color, density, background pattern, and other items.
Position
In the Copy Protect setting screen, press [Position] to specify the print position by angling the selected stamp
or leaving a space.
Configure the following settings.
- Setting an angle of the copy protect within the area (+45 degrees/0 degrees/-45 degrees)
- Inserting a space between copy protects
- Reordering printing order of copy protect
- Deleting the copy protect or space
Item Description
[Registered
Stamp]
Press this button to apply the stamp images that were pre-registered with the utility
software.
• Use Copy Protection Utility to register stamps. For details, refer to the relevant
utility software manual.
• Registered stamps may require multiple areas depending on their contents.
[Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private
as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area.
[Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered.
• [Date Format] requires one area.
• [Time Format] requires one area.
[Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control
number the document was registered with.
• [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires
one area.
• [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial
number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment
of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative.
• [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution
control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number,
and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format.
Item Description
[Text/Background
Color]
Select the text and background colors from black, magenta, or cyan.
[Density] Select the density from the light, standard, or dark.
[Copy Protect
Pattern]
Select the pattern and contrast to be applied when the copy is reproduced. Select
the patter from Emboss Text or Emboss Background.
[Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large.
[Pattern Overwrite]
Select pattern printing from Front (Overwrite) or Back.
[Background Pattern]
Select the background pattern from eight types.
Item Description
[Change Pos./Delete]
Select a copy protect to be changed, and then press [Change Position]/[Insert
Space]/[Delete].
7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-26 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.4
7.4.11 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard
To prevent unauthorized copying, this function prints a text such as "Invalid Copy" or "Private" or information
such as Date/Time on all pages of paper as a copy guard (copy inhibit information) when printing. A page
with a copy guard printed on it cannot be copied or saved in a User Box.
Configure the setting for the copy guard to be applied. You can apply up to 6 copy guards.
For Copy Guard, you can configure the following settings.
Copy Guard Type
Item Description
[Copy Guard
Type]
Select a type of copy guard.
[Detail Settings] Specify the color, pattern, and text size of the selected copy guard.
REPORT
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
REPORT
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
REPORT
Item Description
[Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private
as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area.
[Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered.
• [Date Format] requires one area.
• [Time Format] requires one area.
[Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control
number the document was registered with.
• [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires
one area.
• [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial
number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment
of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative.
• [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution
control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number,
and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-27
7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
Detail Settings
Press [Detail Settings] to specify the text color, contrast, background pattern, and other items.
7.4.12 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy
To prevent unauthorized copying, this function configures stamp settings for a text such as "Invalid Copy" or
"Private" or information such as Date/Time on all pages of paper, and prints with an embedded password.
When a sheet of paper with an embedded password is copied, scanned, or saved in a User Box, the currently
running job is suspended, and the password entry screen is displayed. In this case, enter the password to
carry out the desired operation.
To enable Password Copy, select [Yes], and press [Password] to specify the password.
Reference
- For confirmation, enter the password twice in the control panel.
If a password is specified, you can configure a stamp. You can apply up to 6 stamps.
Item Description
[Text/Background
Color]
Select the text and background colors from black, magenta, or cyan.
[Copy Guard Pattern]
Specify the contrast of a copy guard. [Emboss Background] is selected for the pattern.
[Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large.
[Background Pattern]
Select the background pattern from eight types.
Item Description
[Stamp Type] Select the type of stamps.
[Detail Settings] Specify the color, pattern, and text size of the selected stamp.
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
REPORT REPORT
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
REPORT
7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-28 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.4
Stamp Type
Detail Settings
Press [Detail Settings] to specify the text color, contrast, background pattern, and other items.
7.4.13 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat
Text or an image is repeatedly printed on all pages. Copy Protect stamps are used to prevent recopying.
However, Stamp Repeat stamps can be recopied.
You can apply up to eight strings or stamps. If you set the angle of strings or stamps to 45 degrees (or -45
degrees), however, the number of areas in which you can place strings or stamps is limited to 4.
In the Stamp Repeat screen, you can configure the following settings.
Item Description
[Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private
as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area.
[Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered.
• [Date Format] requires one area.
• [Time Format] requires one area.
[Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control
number the document was registered with.
• [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires
one area.
• [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial
number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment
of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative.
• [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution
control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number,
and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format.
Item Description
[Text/Background
Color]
Select the text and background colors from black, magenta, or cyan.
[Password Copy
Pattern]
Specify the contrast of a pattern. [Emboss Background] is selected for the pattern.
[Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large.
[Background Pattern]
Select the background pattern from eight types.
Item Description
[Stamp Repeat
Type]
Select a type of stamp repeat to be printed.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-29
7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
Stamp Repeat Type
Detail Settings
Press [Detail Settings] to specify the text color, density, and other items.
Position
In the Stamp Repeat setting screen, press [Position] to determine the print position of the stamp, for example,
by angling the stamp or leaving a space.
Configure the following settings.
- Setting an angle of the stamp repeat within the area (+45 degrees/0 degrees/45 degrees)
- Inserting a space between stamp repeats
- Reordering printing order of stamp repeat
- Deleting the stamp repeat or space
[Detail Settings] Specify the color, density, and text size of stamp repeat to be printed.
[Position] Select the angle or printing order of stamp repeat to be printed.
Item Description
Item Description
[Registered
Stamp]
Press this button to apply the stamp images that were pre-registered with the utility
software.
• Use Copy Protection Utility to register stamps. For details, refer to the relevant
utility software manual.
• Registered stamps may require multiple areas depending on their contents.
[Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private
as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area.
[Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered.
• [Date Format] requires one area.
• [Time Format] requires one area.
[Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control
number the document was registered with.
• [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires
one area.
• [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial
number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment
of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative.
• [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution
control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number,
and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format.
Item Description
[Text Color] Select the text and background colors from black, magenta, or cyan.
[Density] Select the density from the light, standard, or dark.
[Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large.
[Pattern Overwrite]
Select pattern printing from [Front (Overwrite)], [Transparent], or [Back].
Item Description
[Change Pos./Delete]
Select Stamp Repeat to be changed, and press [Change Position]/[Insert
Space]/[Delete] to specify.
7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-30 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.4
7.4.14 Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer
Configure settings to insert the header or footer. To insert the header or footer, you must register their contents
in Administrator Settings in advance. Press Check/Change Temporarily to temporarily change and print
the contents of the registered header and footer.
dReference
For details on how to register the header or footer, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations].
Check/Change Temporarily
In the Header/Footer setting screen, press [Check/Change Temporarily] to change the registered header or
footer.
Item Description
[Recall Header/
Footer]
Select the desired ones from the registered headers and footers.
[Check/Change
Temporarily]
Press this button to check or change the selected header or footer. For details, refer
to page 7-30.
[Reset] Press this button to cancel the use of the temporarily changed header or footer.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-31
7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
7.4.15 Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay
Settings
A registered image is overlaid and printed on the specified pages. Select [Yes] to use an overlay image.
Reference
- Overlay images can be registered in Copy mode as well as in User Box mode. An overlay image that
was registered in Copy mode can be used for printing a document in the User Box. An overlay image
that was registered from an image in the User Box can be used in Copy mode.
dReference
For details on how to register an overlay image, refer to page 7-77.
Item Description
[Header Settings],
[Footer Settings]
Specify whether to print the header and footer. Press [Print] to configure the following
setting.
• [Text]: Specify a header or footer text in the touch panel.
• [Date/Time]: Configure the date and time settings for the header or footer.
• [Other]: Configure setting to add the distribution control number, job number, or
serial number to the header or footer. The serial number is assigned at the time
of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative.
[Pages] Select whether to print the header and footer on all pages or the first page only.
[Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed.
• [Text Color]: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan,
or magenta.
• [Text Size]: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt.
• [Text Type]: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica.
Item Description
[Recall Overlay
Image]
Specify whether to print a registered overlay image on the front or back side. Press
an item to select an overlay image and configures its setting. For details, refer to
page 7-32.
[Pages] Select whether to print the selected overlay image on all pages or the first page only.
7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-32 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.4
Overlay Setting
Select an overlay image and configure it settings. You can also preview the image.
Reference
- The following shows three methods for composing an overlay.
– [Transparent]: Increases the brightness of the overlay image to be superimposed. This setting prevents
an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image.
– [Background Composition (Original)]: Composes the original as the background. The overlay image is
superimposed on the original when they are printed.
– [Back]: Composes the overlay image as the background. The original is superimposed on the overlay
image when they are printed.
Item Description
[Thumbnail
View]/[Display
Name]
In the thumb-nail view, you can check overlay images. In the Display Name mode,
you can check overlay images using their file names. Select the desired overlay image.
[Detail Settings] Press this button to specify how to compose an overlay image.
• [Density]: Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay image (using a value
between 20 to 100%).
• [Color]: Select the color of overlay image from full color, black, red, blue, green,
yellow, cyan, or magenta.
• [Composition]: Select Transparent, Background Composition (Original) or Back
to specify how to compose an overlay image.
[Image Details] Press this button to check the details of the overlay image including the preview image,
size, and color.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-33
7.5 Send 7
7.5 Send
7.5.1 Overview of the Transmission Settings
You can use the following functions to send a document saved in a User Box. Using these functions enables
you to easily send data by only registering destinations in this machine without transferring data via computers.
Description of the Send tab
Press [Send] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Transmission Settings] are as
follows.
dReference
For details on other items, refer to page 7-4.
Item Description
Fax Sends document data by fax.
E-mail Sends document data as an attachment file of an E-mail.
Internet Fax Sends document data as an attachment file of an E-mail via an intranet or Internet.
IP Address Fax Sends document data to the destination specified with the IP address (host name)
or E-mail address of the destination.
PC (SMB) Sends document data to the shared folder in the specified computer.
FTP Sends document data to the specified FTP server.
WebDAV Sends document data to the specified server via network.
No. Item Description
1 [Send] Configure the destination and other settings to send the selected documents.
If you have selected multiple documents, [Document Settings]
and [Application] are not available. (p. 7-35)
2 [Bind TX] Configure the printing order or other setting to print two or more document
selected. (p. 7-36)
1
2
7 Send
7-34 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.5
Send
Press [Send] to display the following screen. You can configure transmission destination and additional functions.
Bind TX
Press [Bind TX] to display the following screen after specifying the bind order. Some destination types or
function are not displayed since multiple documents are sent.
No. Item Description
1 Configure the destinations
Configure the destinations. (p. 7-37)
2 Configure the functions
Configure the functions that can be added when transmitting documents.
(p. 7-47)
1
2
No. Item Description
1 Configure the destinations
Configure the destinations. (p. 7-37)
2 Configure the functions
Configure the functions that can be added when transmitting documents.
(p. 7-47)
1
2
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-35
7.5 Send 7
7.5.2 Transmission Settings
Press [Send] to specify destinations and functions that can be added when transmitting documents.
Reference
- [Direct Input] is not displayed when Manual Destination Input is set to Restrict in [Security Settings] in
Administrator Settings.
No. Item Description
1 [Address Book] Press this button to select the recipient from the pre-registered destinations.
2 [Direct Input] Press this button to directly enter unregistered destinations.
3 [Job History] Select the recipients from the transmission log.
4 [Address Search] Press this button to search for the registered address when the LDAP
server is used.
5 [Group] Press this button to list the registered group addresses.
6 [Search] Press this button to search the address book for destination.
7 [Document Settings] Press this button to specify the resolution, file type, or color when sending
a document.
8 [Communication Settings]
Press this button to configure communication settings.
9 [Application] Press this button to specify additional functions such as Stamp or Page
Print.
1 2 3 4
9
5
6
7 8
7 Send
7-36 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.5
7.5.3 Combine
Document Order
After selecting documents, press [Bind TX] to display the binding order selection screen. Documents will be
printed in the order they are displayed in this screen. When this screen appears, the documents are displayed
in the order they were selected.
Reference
- To change the order, select a reorder source document, then a reorder destination document.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-37
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7.6.1 Address Book - Search
Search for transmission destinations. The following methods are available to search for the registered destinations.
Address Type
Press this button to search for the destination by address type that was specified when the destination is
registered.
dReference
For details on the [Default Address Book] setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations].
The [Search] screen is displayed when you press [Search] if [Default Address Book] is set to [Index] in [User
Settings] - [Custom Display Settings] - [Scan/Fax Settings] in the Utility menu.
No. Item Description
1 [Address Type] Registers addresses by registered type.
1
7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-38 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.6
Index
The Index screen appears by index that was specified when they were registered.
The [Index] screen is displayed when you press [Search] if [Default Address Book] is set to [Address Type] in
[User Settings] - [Custom Display Settings] - [Scan/Fax Settings] in the Utility menu.
Detail Search
Enter the address name or a part of the address to search for the destination address. Select either [Name]
or [Address], and enter an index.
No. Item Description
1 [Index] Displays addresses by registered index.
1
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-39
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
Detail Search - Search options
In the Detail Search screen, select a condition to display search options. Select the additional search conditions,
and press [OK].
Reference
- To configure whether to display the search option screen and options displayed on that screen, use
[Search Option Settings] in the setting menu. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
7.6.2 Direct Input
Directly enter an unregistered destination as a recipient.
Reference
- When Manual Destination Input is set to Individual Management in [Security Settings] in Administrator
Settings, Direct Input is not available except for Fax.
7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-40 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.6
7.6.3 Direct Input - Fax
Enter the fax number in the touch panel.
Next Destination
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.
When the Confirm Address (TX) function is specified:
You are prompted to enter the fax number again after pressing [OK]. Enter the fax number, and press [Start].
Reference
- [Next Destination] can be selected on the second input screen.
dReference
For details on the Confirm Address (TX) function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations].
7.6.4 Direct Input - E-mail
Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel.
Reference
- You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail
messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings.
For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
Next Destination
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-41
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
7.6.5 Direct Input - Internet Fax
Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel.
Reference
- You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail
messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings.
For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
Next Destination
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.
Receiver RX Ability
Select settings that are receivable in the Internet Fax destination. You can select multiple receivable settings.
Item Description
[Compression
Type]
Select JPEG Color, JPEG (Grayscale), MMR, MR, or MH.
[Paper Size] Select A3, B4 or A4.
[Resolution] 600e600 dpi (Ultra Fine), 400e400 dpi (Super Fine), 200e200 dpi (Fine), or 200e100
dpi (Standard).
7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-42 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.6
7.6.6 Direct Input - IP Address Fax
Enter the IP Address Fax destination.
7.6.7 Direct Input - PC (SMB)
Directly enter the PC (SMB) address.
Host Name
Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel.
File Path
Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel.
User Name
Enter the login user name in the touch panel.
Password
Enter the login user password in the touch panel.
Item Description
[Address] Enter the IP address (host name) or E-mail address of the destination.
[Port Number] Use the keypad to enter the sending port number (using a value from 1 to 65535).
[Destination Machine
Type]
Select [Color] when the destination machine supports color printing.
[Next Destination] Press this button to continuously specify another destination.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-43
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
Reference
Check the folder information on the destination computer.
Next Destination
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.
7.6.8 Direct Input - FTP
Directly enter the FTP address.
Host Name
Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel.
File Path
Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel.
User Name
Enter the login user name in the touch panel. Press [Anonymous] to enter "anonymous".
Password
Enter the login user password in the touch panel.
Detail Settings
Press this button to configure the more detailed settings.
Next Destination
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.
Item Description
[Port Number] Enter a port number.
[PASV] Specify whether to use the PASV mode.
[Proxy] Specify whether to use a proxy server.
7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-44 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.6
7.6.9 Direct Input - WebDAV
Directly enter the WebDAV destination.
Host Name
Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel.
File Path
Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel.
User Name
Enter the login user name in the touch panel.
Password
Enter the login user password in the touch panel.
Detail Settings
Press this button to configure the more detailed settings.
Next Destination
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.
Item Description
[Port Number] Enter a port number.
[Proxy] Specify whether to use a proxy server.
[SSL Settings] Specify whether to use SSL for sending.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-45
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
7.6.10 Job History
Job History displays the latest five fax destinations that this machine have sent faxes to. You can select destinations
from this history.
7.6.11 Address Search
The [Address Search] tab is displayed when the LDAP server is configured in Administrator Settings.
Reference
- For details on the LDAP server setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator] - Enabling
LDAP.
- The display position of [Address Search] tab varies depending on user settings. For details, refer to the
[User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-46 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.6
7.6.12 LDAP Search - Search
Enter a search keyword and press [Start Search] to search for the destination address in the specified LDAP
server.
7.6.13 LDAP Search - Advanced Search
Specify multiple search conditions to search for the target address.
Name
Enter the name in the touch panel.
E-mail Addr.
Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel.
Fax Number
Enter the fax number in the touch panel.
Last Name
Enter the last name in the touch panel.
First Name
Enter the first name in the touch panel.
City
Enter the city name in the touch panel.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-47
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
Company Name
Enter the company name in the touch panel.
Department
Enter the department in the touch panel.
OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH
Select the search condition from OR, AND, STARTS WITH, or ENDS WITH. When not specifying any conditions,
press [No].
7.6.14 Overview of the Document Settings
Configure document settings such as the resolution or file type.
7.6.15 Document Settings - Resolution
Select the resolution for sending faxes.
Reference
- This function is not available when performing Bind TX.
7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-48 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.6
7.6.16 Document Settings - File Type
Specify the file type of data being transmitted.
File Type
The available file types are as follows.
Reference
- JPEG cannot be selected when binding and sending multiple documents.
- If you select JPEG, [Page Separation] is automatically selected and set to [1 Every X Page(s)] in Scan
Setting.
- You can specify the compression format when saving a TIFF file in color. For details, refer to the [User's
Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
Item Description
[PDF] Saves data in PDF format.
[Compact PDF] Further compressed PDF file.
[TIFF] Saves data in TIFF format.
[JPEG] Saves data in JPEG format.
[XPS] Saves data in XPS format.
[Compact XPS] Saves data in further compressed XPS file.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-49
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
Encryption
If the [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified.
Encryption - Detail Settings
Configure the detailed permission settings when the document permission is specified in [Encryption].
Item Description
[Encryption Level] Select the encryption level.
[Password] Configure this item when you select the password for the encryption type. Enter the
password necessary to open encrypted data (up to 32 characters). For confirmation,
enter the password twice.
[Document Permissions]
Configure this item when you select the password for the encryption type. Enter the
password necessary to change document permissions (up to 32 characters). For
confirmation, enter the password twice.
7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-50 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.6
Press [Forward ] to further configure Changes Allowed settings.
Item Description
[Printing Allowed] Select whether to allow or restrict printing data. [Low Resolution] appears when the
Encryption Level is set to [High level].
[Enable copying
of text, images
and other content]
Select whether to allow or restrict extracting text images.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-51
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
Stamp Composition
Press this button to select how to compose the contents to be added in Stamp/Composition.
Outline PDF
Outline PDF can be selected when Compact PDF is selected for the file type. This function performs outline
processing for characters, ensuring a smooth display image. It can also be edited using an application such
as Adobe Illustrator.
dReference
This function enables you to specify the accuracy of outline processing when creating outline PDF data. For
details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
Item Description
[Changes Allowed]
Select the permission level about changes to the document, including signing, entering,
or commenting data.
Item Description
[Image] Select this setting to insert the text as an image.
[Text] Select this setting to insert the text as text.
• The date, time, page number, header, or footer is composed as text.
• The stamp is composed as an image.
7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-52 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.6
Scan Setting
Specify a collection of data.
7.6.17 Document Settings - Color
Configure color settings to send documents. Data that has been saved using this machine contains the full
color data even if it is saved in gray scale or black and white; therefore, it can be changed to full color when
it is sent.
Reference
- This function is not available when performing Bind TX.
- A document that has been saved in gray scale or black and white using a different machine does not
contain the full color data; therefore, it cannot be changed to full color when it is sent.
Item Description
[Multi Page] Creates all the scanned originals as one file. This item cannot be specified together
with the JPEG file type.
[Page Separation] Separates the scanned data to save every specified number of pages to one file. Use
the keypad to enter the number of pages to be saved in one file.
• [Page Separation] cannot be selected when binding and sending multiple documents.
[E-mail Attachment
Method]
Specify the method to use to attach a file to an E-mail when Page Separation is selected.
• [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail]: Attaches all files to one E-mail.
• [One (1) File per E-Mail]: Attaches one file to one E-mail.
Item Description
[Use Existing
Color Setting]
Sends documents with the color setting used when they were saved.
[Full Color] Sends documents in full color.
[Gray Scale] Sends documents in gray scale.
[Black] Sends documents in black and white.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-53
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
7.6.18 Overview of the Communication Settings
Configure communication lines, digital signature, and other communication settings.
7.6.19 Communication Settings - Line Setting
Description of Line Settings
Configure line settings for fax transmission.
Overseas TX
Faxes are sent to locations with poor communication conditions at a lower baud rate.
Reference
- This function cannot be used together with the following functions.
– Polling TX
– Polling RX
– Bulletin board
7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-54 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.6
ECM OFF
The Error Correction Mode (ECM) is turned off when sending data. ECM is an error correction mode defined
by ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Fax machines
equipped with the ECM feature communicate with each other, confirming that the data sent is free of
errors. Thus, communication can be made free from disturbances due to line noises, etc. If noises frequently
occur, it may take a slightly long time to complete a communication compared with ECM OFF. After sending
has been ended, this machine automatically returns to ECM ON.
Reference
- This machine sends faxes in ECM ON unless ECM OFF is specified.
- This function cannot be used together with the following functions.
– Polling RX
– Polling TX
– V.34 OFF
– Bulletin board registration
– Bulletin board polling reception
V.34 OFF
V34 is a communication mode used for super G3 fax communication. When the remote machine or this machine
is connected to a telephone line via PBX, however, you may not establish a communication in the super
G3 mode depending on telephone line conditions. In this case, it is recommended that you turn V34 off to
send data. After sending has been completed, this machine automatically returns to the V34 mode.
Reference
- This function cannot be used together with the following functions.
– Polling RX
– Polling TX
– Bulletin board registration
– Bulletin board polling reception
– ECM OFF
Check Dest. & Send
The specified fax number is compared with the remote fax number (CSI) and data is sent only when those
fax numbers match. If they do not match, the communication will fail; therefore preventing a sending error.
Reference
- To use the Check Dest. & Send, you must register the local fax number in the remote machine in advance.
Select Line
You can specify [Line 1] or [Line 2] for sending data when two optional Fax Kit are installed. Specify the line
used for transmission. If you select [Not Set], either Line 1 or Line 2 whichever is not busy is used for transmission.
If both lines are idle, Line 1 is used first.
Reference
- You cannot specify a line when [Line 2 Setting] is set to [RX Only] in [Multi Line Settings]. For details on
the Multi Line Usage function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
- To use two lines as external and extension lines, be sure to specify the line to be used. If you select [Not
Set], a sending failure may occur.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-55
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
7.6.20 Communication Settings - E-Mail Settings
E-mail Settings
Specify the document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages.
Document Name
The name of the file to be saved is displayed. This document name can also be specified in the [File Document]
screen. The document name whichever is specified later will be applied to this column. You can enter
up to 30 characters.
Subject
The text specified in the Utility menu is automatically displayed. To change the contents, press [Direct Input].
You can enter up to 64 characters.
7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-56 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.6
From
Displays the E-mail address of the administrator specified in the Utility menu.
Reference
- The E-mail address of this machine is used for Internet faxing.
- You cannot directly enter the address when [Change the "From" Address] is set to Restrict in Administrator
Settings - [System Settings] - [Restrict User Access] - [Restrict Access to Job Settings]. For details
on the [Change the "From" Address] setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network
Fax Operations].
Body
The E-mail body specified in the Utility menu is displayed. To change the contents, press [Direct Input]. You
can enter up to 256 characters.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-57
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
7.6.21 Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting
URL Notification
Use the URL Notification function to specify the E-mail address to be notified about the completion of a job
and data location. The URL contains information for linking to a User Box. Click the link in the text to directly
move to the User Box screen.
Reference
- A destination for the User Box in the main unit, FTP, PC (SMB), and WebDAV operation can be specified
for the destination in URL Notification Setting.
- URL Notification Setting does not function when sending E-mails or faxes.
- If the authentication mode or User Box password is enabled, the password input screen corresponding
to each respective authentication status appears. On completion of all authentication processing, the
User Box screen appears.
Detail Search
You can search for E-mail addresses from the registered destinations. Enter the address name or a part of
the address to search for the destination address. Select either [Name] or [Destination], and enter an index.
Direct Input
Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel.
Reference
- You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail
messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings.
For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-58 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.6
7.6.22 Communication Settings - Communication Method Settings
Specify how to send or receive data.
Timer transmission (Timer TX)
Specify the sending time. Transmitting faxes in discount telephone rate hours such as late at night or early in
the morning will reduce the cost. Use the keypad to specify the communication starting time.
Reference
- It is specified in hours and minutes.
- You cannot specify the date.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-59
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
Password transmission (Password TX)
Use this function to send a document by attaching a password. If the recipient's fax machine is set to closed
network reception, the sender's fax machine should transmit the same password as used for the closed network
reception.
Reference
- You can use this function only when the remote machine is our model and supports the closed network
reception (with password) function.
- Use the keypad to enter the password.
F-Code transmission (F-Code TX)
This function allows you send documents to a specific User Box of the remote machine by entering the SUB
address and the password. F-Code TX can be used for the confidential transmission and relay transmission
functions.
Reference
- To use the F-Code for transmission, the remote machine must support the F-Code function.
Item Description
Confidential TX Documents are sent to the Confidential RX User Box of the remote machine. Enter
the destination User Box number in the SUB Address box and the confidential transmission
password in the Password box.
Relay TX Documents are sent to the Relay Distribution User Box of the remote machine when
the remote machine supports the relay distribution function. Enter the Relay Distribution
User Box number in the SUB Address box and the password in the Password
box.
7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-60 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.6
7.6.23 Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption
This item is displayed when [S/MIME Communication Settings] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings - [Network
Settings] - [E-Mail Settings]. Specify whether to encrypt E-mails to be sent from this machine.
dReference
For details on the S/MIME Communication Settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
7.6.24 Communication Settings - Digital Signature
This item is displayed when [S/MIME Communication Settings] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings - [Network
Settings] - [E-Mail Settings]. Select whether to add a digital signature to E-mails to be sent from this
machine.
Reference
- You may not be able to add a digital signature or you may be forced to add a digital signature depending
on the S/MIME communication settings.
dReference
For details on the S/MIME Communication Settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
7.6.25 Communication Settings - Fax Header Settings
Specify whether to attach sender information (TTI) when sending documents. Select the sender name from
the sender name list.
Reference
- To register the contents of the header information to be added to the original, use [Header Information]
in the Utility menu. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
- To register how the header information will be added, use [Header/Footer Position] in the Utility menu.
For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-61
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7
7.6.26 Overview of the Application settings
Configure the other settings (Stamp/Composition, and Send & Print) that are available for sending documents.
7.6.27 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21.
7.6.28 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22.
7.6.29 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23.
7.6.30 Application - Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-30.
7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)
7-62 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.6
7.6.31 Application - Send & Print
Specify whether to print documents while being sent. Also configure print settings.
Item Description
[Copies:] Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can
be specified.
[Simplex/Duplex] Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided.
[Staple] Select whether to staple the printed sheets.
[Staple - Position
Setting]
If you select the type of stapling, specify the position.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-63
7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7
7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes)
7.7.1 Overview of the Filing Settings
You can rename or delete documents saved in a Public, Personal, or Group User Box so that the documents
in the box are organized. The available functions are as follows.
Description of the Filing Settings tab
Press [Filing Settings] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Filing Settings] are as
follows.
dReference
For details on other items, refer to page 7-4.
Item Description
Delete Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed or
sent.
Edit Name Renames a saved document.
Move Moves the data of a saved document to another Public, Personal, or Group User
Box.
Copy Copies the data of a saved document to another Public, Personal, or Group User
Box.
Save in external
memory
Saves a document from a User Box into the external memory, which is connected
to this machine.
Document Details Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a
preview image.
No. Item Description
1 [Delete] Deletes the selected document.
2 [Edit Name] Renames the selected document.
3 [Move] Configure settings to move the selected document.
4 [Copy] Configure settings to copy the selected document.
5 [Save to External
Memory.]
Saves the selected document in the external memory.
2
3
4
5
1
Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes)
7-64 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.7
7.7.2 Deleting documents
You can delete unnecessary files, for example the files you have already printed. You can select multiple files
and delete them at the same time. After checking document details, press [Delete].
7.7.3 Edit Name
Renames a saved document. Enter a new name in the touch panel.
Reference
- The new document name will be used as the file name when it is set. Note that when you rename the
document that you plan to send, consider the naming and other conditions forced by the destination
server.
- If necessary, you can rename the document just before you send it.
7.7.4 Moving documents
Move a saved document to another User Box. For the destination User Box, a Public, Personal, or Group
User Box can be selected. Select the destination User Box, check document data, and then press Start on
the control panel or [Start] in the touch panel.
Reference
- The contents displayed in a Personal or Group User Box vary depending on the logged in user.
- You do not need to enter the password even if it is specified in the destination User Box.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-65
7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7
7.7.5 Copy
Copy the data of a saved document to another User Box. For the destination User Box, a Public , Personal,
or Group User Box can be selected. Select the destination User Box, check document data, and then press
Start on the control panel or [Start] in the touch panel.
Reference
- The contents displayed in a Personal or Group User Box vary depending on the logged in user.
- You do not need to enter the password even if it is specified in the destination User Box.
7.7.6 Save in external memory
You can save a document stored in a User Box to the external memory. Pressing [Document Settings], to
configure the settings of a document to be saved.
Reference
- For information on the external memory, refer to page 7-98.
- Multiple documents can be saved collectively.
- A document cannot be renamed while it is being saved. Before saving a document, change the file
name as appropriate.
Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes)
7-66 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.7
Document Settings
You can specify the resolution, file type, and color of the document to be saved. If you select multiple documents,
settings are reflected in all documents.
Document Settings - Resolution
Select the resolution of the document to be saved.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-67
7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7
Document Settings -File Type
When specifying the file type, select [Yes]. The available setting items are as follows.
Document Settings - Color
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-52.
Item Description
[File Type] Select the file type for the file to be saved.
[Encryption] If the PDF or Compact PDF is selected for the file format, the encryption level can
be specified. For details, refer to page 7-49.
[Outline PDF] Configure this item when you select Compact PDF for the file type. For details, refer
to page 7-51.
Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes)
7-68 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.7
7.7.7 Document Details
Check the details of a saved document in the touch panel.
Displaying detailed information
Select a document, and press [Document Details] to check. The following information is displayed.
Preview
In the Document Details screen, press [Preview] to check the preview image of the saved document. You can
view the image at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. After you have changed the display
size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image to view to the desired portion.
Reference
- For a document with multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be viewed.
Item Description
[Registered Time] Displays the date and time the document was registered.
[User Name] Displays the user name or mode (SCAN, COPY, or PRINT) by which the document
was registered.
[Document
Name]
Displays the name of the document.
[No. of Pages] Displays the number of pages in the document.
[Job No.] Displays the job number when the document was registered.
[ ][ ] If multiple documents are selected, use [ ] or [ ] to switch them.
[Preview] Press this button to change to the Preview screen. For details, refer to page 7-68.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-69
7.8 Application 7
7.8 Application
7.8.1 Overview of the Application settings
You can edit a document saved in a Public, Personal, or Group User Box by changing the order of or delete
pages in the document. You can also register the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed
data. The available functions are as follows.
Description of the Application tab
Press [Application] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Application Settings] are
as follows.
dReference
For details on other items, refer to page 7-4.
Item Description
Edit Document Deletes, rotates, or moves the selected page.
Register Overlay Registers the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed data.
Document Details Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a
preview image.
No. Item Description
1 [Edit Document] Deletes, rotates, or moves the selected page.
2 [Register Overlay] Registers the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed
data.
1
2
7 Application
7-70 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.8
7.8.2 Edit Document
Select a document and press [Edit Document]. The Edit Document screen is displayed. To view the image of
a document page before editing it, press the [Preview /Set Range]. For details, refer to page 7-75.
Edit Document - Delete Page
You can delete a specific page from a saved document. For example, you can delete blank pages to reduce
the amount of data.
0 If you delete the only page of a document, the whole document will be deleted.
0 You will be unable to undo the deletion or restore the deleted pages because they are overwritten when
they are deleted. If you will need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the
document in advance. For details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-65.
1 Select a page to be deleted, and then press [Delete Page].
% To select only odd pages, press [Odd Page].
% To select only even pages, press [Even Page].
% After selecting [Odd Page] or [Even Page], you can use a page key to select the desired page or
cancel the selection.
2 Check that the specified page has been deleted from the screen.
% At this time, the specified page is not deleted from document data.
% In this example, the specified pages (pages 1, 3, and 4) have been deleted.
3 To completely delete the pages, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel.
% To cancel the deletion, press [Cancel] to return to the Application screen.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-71
7.8 Application 7
4 Check the information of the displayed screen. To delete the pages, select [Save].
% To cancel the deletion, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen.
The selected pages are deleted and the document is saved.
Edit Document - Rotate Page
You can rotate the specified pages in a saved document. When a double-sided original has been scanned,
the top and bottom may be reversed page by page or the orientation may be different depending on the original
orientation. In this case, you can rotate selected pages so that the whole document will be viewed more
easily.
0 You will be unable to restore the pages because they are overwritten when they are rotated. If you will
need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the document in advance. For
details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-65.
1 Select a page to be rotated, and then press [Rotate Page].
% To select only odd pages, press [Odd Page].
% To select only even pages, press [Even Page].
% After selecting [Odd Page] or [Even Page], you can use a page key to select the desired page or
cancel the selection.
The preview images of the selected pages are displayed together with the rotation setting screen.
7 Application
7-72 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.8
2 While checking the preview image, select the rotation angle.
% You can select a rotation angle from left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180 degrees.
% In this example, [Left 90°] is selected.
3 Press [OK].
4 If you are sure to rotate the selected pages, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel.
% In the example, the specified pages (pages 1 and 2) have been rotated.
% At this time, the document data is not changed.
5 Check the information of the displayed screen. To rotate the pages, select [Save].
% To cancel the rotation, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen.
The selected pages are rotated and the document is saved.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-73
7.8 Application 7
Edit Document - Move Page
You can change the order of the pages within a saved document by moving the specified pages.
0 You cannot rotate the only page of a document.
0 You will be unable to restore the pages because they are overwritten when they are moved. If you will
need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the document in advance. For
details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-65.
0 You can directly enter the page number you want the selected page move to. This is useful when a document
consists of many pages. For details, refer to page 7-75.
1 Select a page to be moved, and then press [Move Page].
% Only one page can be moved at a time. To move two or more pages, repeat the above steps for
each of the pages you want to move.
% The example demonstrates how to move page 6 to between pages 2 and 3.
The destination setting screen is displayed.
2 While checking the screen, select the moving position.
% To move the selected page to the beginning of the document, press [Top].
% To move the selected page to the end of the document, press [Last Page].
% To move the selected page to between pages, press between them.
3 Press [OK].
7 Application
7-74 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.8
4 If you are sure to move the selected page, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel.
% At this time, the document data is not changed.
5 Check the information of the displayed screen. To move the page, select [Save].
% To cancel the movement, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen.
The selected page is moved and the document is saved.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-75
7.8 Application 7
Preview/Set Range
You can specify a range of pages and check preview images when the selected document consists of multiple
pages. You can also change the display size.
Preview/Specify by Input
This item is displayed when [Move Page] is selected. When too many pages are saved, specify the destination
page by entering the page number. The following shows a procedure to specify the destination of the move
operation.
1 In the Move Page screen, press [Preview].
The Preview/Specify by Input screen is displayed.
Item Description
[ Prev. Page] Moves to the previous page.
[Next Page ] Press this button to move to the next page.
[Zoom] You can view the image at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. After
you have changed the display size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the
bottom of the image to view to the desired portion.
[Set Page Range] Specify the range of pages to be checked.
Use the keypad to enter a number in [From:] and [To:] respectively. Then press [Display
Page] to preview the specified starting or ending page.
To set [From:] or [To:] to the page being previewed, select the button and then press
[Match Display].
7 Application
7-76 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.8
2 Display the previous or next page of the destination.
% Press [ Prev. Page] or [Next Page ], or use the keypad to enter a page number and press [View].
% You can use [Zoom] to view the selected pages at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal
size. After you have changed the display size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom
of the image to view to the desired portion.
3 Specify the insertion position.
% To move before the displayed page, press [Before].
% To move after the displayed page, press [After].
4 Press [OK].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-77
7.8 Application 7
7.8.3 Register Overlay
Register a document saved in a User Box as an overlay image. You can overlay the selected image to a printed
document using [Stamp/Composition] in the Print tab. This function is useful when you want to print the
images (such as company or product logos) that are not provided by this machine (stamps and page numbers
are those provided by this machine).
Reference
- You can register up to 100 overlay images.
- When you select a multi-page document, the first page is registered as an overlay image.
7 Application
7-78 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.8
Register Overlay - New
Register a new overlay image.
1 Select a document and press [Register Overlay].
2 Press an unregistered image button and press [New].
3 Enter the name of the overlay image to be registered, and press [OK].
% You can enter up to 16 characters.
4 Press [Start].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-79
7.8 Application 7
Register Overlay - Overwrite
You can overwrite the registered overlay image with new one.
1 Select a document and press [Register Overlay].
2 Press the image button to be overwritten, and press [Overwrite].
3 Check the displayed message, and press [Overwrite].
4 Press [Start].
The overlay image is overwritten.
7 Application
7-80 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.8
Detail Settings
Configure the density or color of the newly registered or overwritten overlay image.
% Select the button of a target overlay image, and press [Detail Settings]. After configuring settings, press
[OK].
Item Description
[Density] Specify the density of the image. Use the keypad to enter the density using a value
between 20 and 100%.
[Color] Specify the color of the overlay image.
[Full Color]: Prints a document in full color.
[Black]: Prints a document in black and white.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-81
7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box) 7
7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box)
7.9.1 Overview of the Bulletin Board User Boxes
The Bulletin Board User Box is used to register a browsing document. A document registered in the Bulletin
Board User Box is sent by the polling transmission function when a polling request is issued from the remote
machine.
7.9.2 Bulletin Board User Box screen
Select the [Bulletin Board User Box] in the [System] tab to display registered Bulletin Board User Boxes. Select
the Bulletin Board User Box that contains the document registered in this machine.
7.9.3 Printing a document in a Bulletin Board User Box
You can print a document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box. Check the preview or information of the document,
press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel.
7.9.4 Deleting a document in the Bulletin Board User Box
You can save only one document in one Bulletin Board User Box. To register a new document in the Bulletin
Board User Box, delete the existing document, and send a new document to the Bulletin Board User Box.
To delete the document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box, check its registration time or source, and press
[Delete].
7 Polling TX User Box (System User Box)
7-82 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.10
7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box)
7.10.1 Overview of the Polling Transmission User Boxes
The Polling TX User Box is used to save a document to be sent in response to a request from a receiver. The
process of saving a specific document in the Polling TX User Box is called polling transmission.
7.10.2 Printing a document in the Polling TX User Box
You can print a document saved in the Polling TX User Box. Check the preview or information of the document,
press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel.
Reference
- You can register a document in the Polling TX User Box as an overlay image. For details on how to register
an overlay image, refer to page 7-78.
7.10.3 Deleting a document in the Polling TX User Box
You can save only one document in the Polling TX User Box. To register a new document in the Polling TX
User Box, delete the existing document, and perform polling transmission of a new document. To delete the
document saved in the Polling TX User Box, check its registration time or source, and press [Delete].
dReference
For details on the polling transmission procedure, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-83
7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7
7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box)
7.11.1 Overview of the Secure Document User Box
The Secure Document User Box is used to save a document that was printed with the specified ID and password.
To print a document, you must enter the ID and password. The authentication procedure varies depending
on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error setting in Administrator Settings - [Security
Settings] - [Security Details]. For details, contact the administrator of this machine.
dReference
For details on how to save a secure document, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations].
7.11.2 Authentication procedure 1
Follow the procedure below when Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error is set to [Mode 1] in [Security
Settings] - [Security Details] of Administrator Settings.
7.11.3 Authentication procedure 2
Follow the procedure below when Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error is set to [Mode 2] in [Security
Settings] - [Security Details] of Administrator Settings.
Reference
- If [Mode 2] is selected, enter the password for each document even when the ID is the same. This is
because you need to select the document first before entering the password. Therefore, the security
level in this mode is higher than mode 1.
Press [Secure Document User Box]
Enter the ID of the secure document
Enter the password of the secure document
A list of documents appears
Select the document to be printed, and configure print settings
Press [Secure Document User Box]
Enter the ID of the secure document
A list of documents appears
Select the document to be printed, and enter the password of the secure document
7 Secure Document User Box (System User Box)
7-84 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.11
7.11.4 Print - Printing
You can add some functions to a document saved in the Secure Document User Box when printing the document.
Copies
Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified.
Print
Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided.
Color
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-10.
Finishing
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-10.
Combine
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-13.
Zoom
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-14.
Page Margin
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-16.
Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-17.
Stamp/Composition
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-85
7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7
7.11.5 Filing Settings
You can handle a document saved in the Secure Document User Box.
Reference
- To delete all documents in the Secure Document User Box at a time, select [User Box Settings] - [Delete
Secure Print Documents] in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-20.
The available setting items are as follows.
Item Description
[Delete] Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed.
[Edit Name] Renames a saved document.
[Document Details]
Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a
preview image.
7 Memory RX User Box (System User Box)
7-86 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.12
7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box)
7.12.1 Overview of the Memory RX User Box
The Memory RX User Box is used to save a received document in the memory and print it as required. When
memory reception is enabled, a received document is automatically saved in the Memory RX User Box. To
check a document saved in the Memory RX User Box, select [Compulsory Memory RX User Box] in the [System
User Box] tab, and then enter the password that was specified when memory reception was enabled.
dReference
For details on how to specify the password for memory reception settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
7.12.2 Print
Select a document to be printed, and press [Print]. After the specified document has been printed, data is
deleted automatically.
7.12.3 Filing Settings
You can handle a document saved in the Memory RX User Box.
The available setting items are as follows.
Item Description
[Delete] Deletes a document that does not need to be printed.
[Edit Name] Renames a saved document.
[Document Details]
Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a
preview image.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-87
7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7
7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box)
7.13.1 Overview of the Annotation User Box
Annotation User Boxes are used to automatically assign a number to a saved documents and add the number
when printing or sending the document. You can pre-register the number to be assigned when creating the
User Box and change it when printing or sending documents. For the functions you can configure when printing
or sending documents, refer to page 7-9 and the sections that follow. Select [Annotation User Box] in the
[System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. The registered Annotation User Boxes are displayed.
Reference
- Go to Administrator Settings to register the Annotation User Box. For details, refer to page 8-17.
- For the types of numbers that can be printed in Annotation User Boxes, refer to page 7-90.
- To print the numbers specified in the Annotation User Box without saving a document in the User Box,
set Auto Document Delete Time to [Do Not Keep]. This is useful for managing the numbers that are added
to the copied documents. Specify the Auto Document Delete Time when you create an Annotation
User Box. For details, refer to page 8-17.
If you open a User Box, you can configure print and transmission settings.
7.13.2 Print - Basic
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-9.
7.13.3 Print - Page Margin
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-16.
7 Annotation User Box (System User Box)
7-88 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.13
7.13.4 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-18.
7.13.5 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-19.
7.13.6 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-20.
7.13.7 Print - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21.
7.13.8 Print - Stamp/Composition - Page Number
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22.
7.13.9 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23.
7.13.10 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24.
7.13.11 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26.
7.13.12 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27.
7.13.13 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28.
7.13.14 Print - Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-31.
7.13.15 Description of the Send tab
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-33.
7.13.16 Send - Direct Input - E-mail
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-40.
7.13.17 Send - Direct Input - PC (SMB)
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-42.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-89
7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7
7.13.18 Send - Direct Input - FTP
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-43.
7.13.19 Send - Direct Input - WebDAV
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-44.
7.13.20 Send - Job History
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-45.
7.13.21 Send - LDAP Search - Search
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-46.
7.13.22 Send - LDAP Search - Advanced Search
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-46.
7.13.23 Send - Document Settings - Resolution
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-47.
7.13.24 Send - Document Settings - File Type
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-48.
7.13.25 Send - Document Settings - Color
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-52.
7.13.26 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Settings
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-55.
7.13.27 Send - Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-57.
7.13.28 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-60.
7.13.29 Send - Communication Settings - Digital Signature
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-60.
7.13.30 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-61.
7.13.31 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-61.
7 Annotation User Box (System User Box)
7-90 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.13
7.13.32 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-61.
7.13.33 Send - Application - Send & Print
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-62.
7.13.34 Send - Application - Stamp Element
Secondary Field
Add text to a number to be printed. You can enter up to 20 characters.
Date/Time
Select the format for the date and time to be printed.
Density
Select the density for the annotation numbers to be printed.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-91
7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7
Number Type
Select the output format (number of digits) for the annotation numbers to be printed.
Print Position
Select the printing position.
7 Annotation User Box (System User Box)
7-92 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.13
7.13.35 Filing Settings
You can handle a document saved in an Annotation User Box.
The available setting items are as follows.
7.13.36 Application - Register Overlay
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-77.
Item Description
[Delete] Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed.
[Edit Name] Renames a saved document.
[Document Details]
Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a
preview image.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-93
7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box) 7
7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box)
7.14.1 Overview of the Fax Retransmit User Box
The Fax Retransmit User Box is used to save a document, which was unable to be sent after the number of
redials reached the value specified in Line Parameter Settings because the remote machine was busy when
sending the fax for a predetermined time period. With this User Box, you can print for conformation or resend
a saved document later. Select [Fax Retransmit User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File].
A list of saved documents are displayed.
Reference
- Before you can save a document in the Fax Retransmit User Box, you must enable the Fax Retransmit
User Box in the [Fax Settings] of Administrator Settings. For details on settings, refer to the [User's
Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
7.14.2 Print - Proof Print
Before retransmitting a saved document, you can print the document for conformation. Data is not deleted
after being printed. Select a document to be printed, and press [Proof Print]. Check document information,
and press [Start].
7.14.3 Send - Fax
Retransmit a saved document. Select a document, select the [Send] tab, and press [Fax].
Reference
- You can specify a new destination when retransmitting a document. You can specify the new destination
in Address Book, Direct Input, or Job History.
- You can configure transmission settings when you retransmit a saved document. You can also configure
line and fax header settings. For details, refer to page 7-53 and page 7-60.
- After document sending has been completed, data is deleted automatically.
7 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box)
7-94 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.14
7.14.4 Filing Settings - Delete
Stop retransmission and delete the target document. Select a document, select the [Filing Settings] tab, and
press [Delete].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-95
7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) 7
7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box)
7.15.1 Overview of the Password Encrypted PDF User Box
When you use Web Connection or Direct Print to print a PDF file that has been saved with a password
configured, or you print an encrypt PDF data that has been saved in the external memory, the data is automatically
saved in the Password Encrypted PDF User Box. Select [Password Encrypted PDF User Box] in the
[System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. A list of saved documents are displayed.
Reference
- Only password encrypted PDF data saved by the user who is logged in is displayed when User Authentication
is enabled in this machine.
7.15.2 Print/Save −Print/Save
Select a document to be printed or saved, and press [Print/Save]. When printing or saving a document, enter
the password assigned to the PDF file. After printing or saving has been completed, documents in the Password
Encrypted PDF User Box are deleted automatically.
Reference
- Whether to print or save is specified in the direct print instruction issued from your computer. You cannot
change a print instruction to a save instruction or vice versa.
7.15.3 Filing Settings - Delete
You can delete a saved document if it does not need to be printed. Select a document to be deleted, and
press [Delete].
7 ID & Print User Box (System User Box)
7-96 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.16
7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box)
7.16.1 Overview of the ID & Print User Box
Viewing documents
This item appears when user authentication settings are configured. A document saved in this User Box can
be printed by the user of the document when the user is logged in to the machine. When you print a document
from a computer over the network to this machine by entering the user name and password, the document
is temporarily saved in the ID & Print User Box.
% Select [ID & Print User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. A list of saved documents
are displayed.
Reference
- When there are documents saved in the ID & Print User Box, the following buttons are displayed in the
login screen. Enter the user name and password, and press the desired button.
– [Begin Printing]: Press this button to print documents saved in the ID & Print User Box without logging
in to this machine.
– [Print & Login]: Press this button to login to this machine and print the documents saved in the ID & Print
User Box.
– [Login]: Press this button to log in to this machine but not print the documents. After you are logged in,
you can print or delete documents saved in the ID & Print User Box.
- Documents can be saved in the ID & Print User Box even when user authentication is not enabled. In
addition, jobs saved by public users can be saved in the ID & Print User Box. For details, refer to
page 8-25.
- After printing documents has been completed, the data in the ID & Print User Box is deleted automatically.
A confirmation screen for confirming if you are sure to delete the data appears depending on the
settings in Administrator Settings.
dReference
For details on how to print a document from a computer to the ID & Print User Box, refer to the [User's Guide
Print Operations].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-97
7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box) 7
7.16.2 Print - Print
1 Select a document to be printed, and press [Print].
2 Select whether to delete the document after printing.
7.16.3 Filing Settings - Delete
Select a document to be deleted, and press [Delete].
7 External Memory (System User Box)
7-98 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.17
7.17 External Memory (System User Box)
7.17.1 External memory device
Supported external memory devices
Requirements for external memory devices of this machine are as follows.
- USB flash memory device that supports the USB (1.1/2.0) interface
- FAT32-formatted memory device
Connecting the external memory device
0 Use the USB connector on the side that is near the control panel. Do not use the USB connector near
the rear side because it is used for optional devices.
0 Do not disconnect the external memory device while saving a document in the external memory device
or printing a document saved in the external memory device.
0 Do not use the USB device (hard disk or USB hub) other than the USB flash memory device.
0 Do not connect or disconnect the USB memory when the hourglass is being displayed in the control
panel while this machine is active.
0 Do not disconnect the USB memory just after connecting it.
% Connect the external memory device to the USB connector on the side of this machine.
When the external memory device is connected, an icon appears at the bottom of the screen and the
following screen is displayed. If you will immediately use the external memory, select the intended purpose.
When not using the exert memory, select [Close].
Reference
- The intended purpose of the external memory to be displayed varies depending on the administrator
settings.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-99
7.17 External Memory (System User Box) 7
7.17.2 External memory screen
When the external memory device is connected, select [External Memory] to display the folder structure.
Entering a file path
In the touch panel, you can specify the file path to the folder containing the document to be printed. Press
[File Path], and enter the file path.
Reference
- Make sure that the total length of the file path and file name do not exceed 250 characters. If the number
of characters exceeds the limit, the file list is not displayed.
Selecting a file
You can print the following file types: PDF, JPEG, TIFF, and XPS. Select a document of one of these types
from the list.
Reference
- 2-sided printing, punching, or stapling are not supported for JPEG and XPS files.
- Printing is not possible when printing is restricted by Security Settings of a PDF file.
- This machine supports printing of PDF Version 1.6 or earlier.
- Only the files of printable file types are displayed in the list.
- File access fails when the total length of the file path and file name exceeds 250 characters.
- Up to 200 printable files are displayed in the folder of the specified file path. If the folder contains 200
or more files, it may take time to display the file list screen.
Printing encrypted PDF data
To print the encrypted PDF data saved in the external memory device, select the data in the External Memory
screen and print the data. When the print command is issued, the encrypted PDF data in the external memory
is saved in the Password Encrypted PDF User Box of this machine. Access the Password Encrypted PDF
User Box of this machine, and then print the data.
dReference
For the Password Encrypted PDF User Box, refer to page 7-95.
Moving to the parent folder
To move to the parent folder, press [Up].
Opening a folder
To check the contents of a specific folder, press [Open].
Print
Select a document to be printed, and press [Print]. The Print Details screen is displayed.
7 External Memory (System User Box)
7-100 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.17
Document Details
You can check the modification date, file name, and other properties of the selected document.
7.17.3 Print - Basic
Press [Print] to display the following screen.
Copies
Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified.
Color
Specify whether to print the document in color or black and white.
Print
Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided.
Binding Position
When you select 2-Sided in [Print], select the binding position.
Finishing
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-10.
Reference
- 2-sided printing, punching, or stapling are not supported for JPEG and XPS files.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-101
7.17 External Memory (System User Box) 7
Paper
Select a tray to load printing paper.
7.17.4 Print- Application
Stamp/Composition - Date/Time
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21.
Stamp/Composition - Page Number
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22.
Stamp/Composition - Stamp
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23.
Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24.
Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26.
Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27.
Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28.
7 External Memory (System User Box)
7-102 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.17
7.17.5 Filing Settings−Save in User Box
This function saves a document stored in the external memory in a User Box. Specify the User Box and document
name, and press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel.
Item Description
[User Box] Select the Public, Personal, or Group User Box to save data in.
[Document
Name]
Specify the name of the document to be saved.
• If you select multiple files, you cannot specify the document name.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-103
7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7
7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box)
This function enables you to print a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA via a Bluetooth communication
or to save such a document in a User Box.
7.18.1 Operating environment
The cellular phones and PDAs that can be connected to this machine and the printable file must satisfy the
following conditions.
Reference
- To print documents from a cellular phone or PDA, the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 is required.
The settings for enabling a Bluetooth communication are also required. Contact your service representative
in advance.
- If you cannot access the link file when attempting to print an XHTML file, the document will either not
be printed or will be printed in a black frame depending on the setting in [User Settings] − [Cellular
Phone/PDA Setting] − [Link File Error Notification].
- To access the link file for printing an XHTML file, [WebDAV Settings] of this machine is required.
- To use a proxy for connection, register a proxy server in [Administrator Settings] - [Network Settings] -
[WebDAV Settings] - [WebDAV Client Settings] - [Host Address], and set [User Settings] - [Cellular
Phone/PDA Setting] - [Proxy Server Use] to [ON].
- The communication speed may drop or communication may be interrupted due to obstacles, signal
quality, magnetic field or static electricity.
- Protected documents and image data may not be sent depending on the security setting of the cellular
phone or PDA.
Communication
protocol
Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR
Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP/BIP/HCRP
Supporting file
type
PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo
• For XHTML file types, the machine supports the character code of UTF-8/Shift-
JIS/ISO-8859 and the link file extensions of JPEG/JPG/PNG.
• This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.9.
7 Mobile/PDA (System User Box)
7-104 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.18
7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Print
Reference
- To save a file stored in a cellular phone or PDA in a User Box, or to print such a file, configure the appropriate
setting in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to page 8-25. To use a Bluetooth
communication, the Bluetooth setting must be enabled in this machine. For details, refer to
[User's Guide Network Administrator].
- When user authentication is specified on this machine, even a registered user cannot print a document
unless printing from a cellular phone or PDA is allowed in the machine setting. For user authentication,
contact the administrator of this machine.
Entering the PIN code
If you enter the 4-digit PIN code from a cellular phone or PDA, a connection is established, and data is sent
to this machine to be printed.
Reference
- Check the PIN code in the instruction manual or in the setting instructions of the cellular phone or PDA.
Check printing preferences
You can check the overview of the settings to print the received data.
dReference
To configure print settings, select [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] in the Utility menu. For details, refer to
page 8-12.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-105
7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7
7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Save
Entering the PIN code
If you enter the 4-digit PIN code from a cellular phone or PDA, a connection is established, and data is sent
to this machine to be saved in a User Box.
Reference
- Check the PIN code in the instruction manual or in the setting instructions of the cellular phone or PDA.
7 Mobile/PDA (System User Box)
7-106 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
7.18
8 User Box Settings
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-3
8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings 8
8 User Box Settings
8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings
The following shows the menus and items used to configure User Box settings in the Utility menu.
8.1.1 User mode
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
1 [One-Touch/User
Box Registration]
2 [Create User
Box] (p. 8-6)
1 [Public/Personal
User Box] (p. 8-6)
[New]
[Edit]
[Delete]
2 [Bulletin Board
User Box] (p. 8-7)
[New]
[Edit]
[Delete]
3 [Relay User Box]
(p. 8-9)
[New]
[Edit]
[Delete]
2 [User Settings] 2 [Custom Display
Settings]
3 [User Box Settings]
(p. 8-10)
[Default Tab]
[Shortcut Key 1]
[Shortcut Key 2]
[Cellular
Phone/PDA Setting]
[Link File Error Notification] (p. 8-11)
[Proxy Server Use] (p. 8-11)
[Print] (p. 8-12) [Print]
[Color]
[Paper]
[Finishing]
[Page Margin]
[Stamp/Composition]
8 Menu tree of User Box Settings
8-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.1
8.1.2 Administrator Settings
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
1 [System Settings]
0 [User Box Settings]
(p. 8-20)
1 [Delete Unused User Box] (p. 8-20)
2 [Delete Secure Print Documents]
(p. 8-20)
3 [Auto Delete Secure Document]
(p. 8-21)
4 [Encrypted PDF Delete Time] (p. 8-21)
5 [ID & Print Delete Time] (p. 8-22)
6 [Document Hold Setting] (p. 8-22)
7 [External Memory
Function Settings]
(p. 8-23)
[Save Document]
[Print Document]
[External Memory
Document Scan]
8 [Allow/Restrict User Box] (p. 8-23)
9 [ID & Print Delete after Print Setting]
(p. 8-24)
0 [Document Delete Time Setting]
(p. 8-24)
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-5
8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings 8
3 [One-Touch/User
Box Registration]
2 [Create User
Box] (p. 8-16)
1 [Public/Personal
User Box] (p. 8-6)
[New]
[Edit]
[Delete]
[Delete Empty
User Box(es)]
(p. 8-7)
2 [Bulletin Board
User Box] (p. 8-7)
[New]
[Edit]
[Delete]
3 [Relay User Box]
(p. 8-9)
[New]
[Edit]
[Delete]
4 [Annotation
User Box]
(p. 8-17)
[New]
[Edit]
[Delete]
4 [Maximum
Number of User
Boxes] (p. 8-19)
[Max. No. of Use Boxes]
[Maximum Number of User Boxes]
4 [User Authentication/
Account
Track]
2 [User Authentication
Settings]
1 [Administrative
Setting]
[ID & Print Settings]
(p. 8-25)
9 [System Connection]
5 [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] (p. 8-25)
0 [Security Settings]
2 [User Box Administrator Setting] (p. 8-26)
4 [Security Details]
[Secure Print Only] (p. 8-27)
6 [HDD Settings] 1 [Check HDD Capacity] (p. 8-27)
2 [Overwrite HDD
Data] (p. 8-28)
[Overwrite Method]
[Encryption Priority]
[Overwrite Priority]
3 [Overwrite All Data] (p. 8-29)
4 [HDD Lock Password] (p. 8-30)
5 [Format HDD] (p. 8-31)
6 [HDD Encryption Setting] (p. 8-31)
8 [Stamp Settings] 1 [Apply Stamps]
(p. 8-32)
[Printing]
[Sending]
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
8 User mode settings
8-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.2
8.2 User mode settings
8.2.1 Creating a User Box
Public, Personal, or Group User Box
Create a Public, Personal, or Group User Box. You can configure the following items when create a User Box.
Reference
- To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit].
- If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number.
- To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete].
Page (1/2)
Item Description
[User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box
number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box
number between 1 and 999999999.
[User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel
(up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you
to create User Boxes with the same name.
[Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and
enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters).
[Index] Select the index type.
[Type] Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or
Account Track settings.
If [Personal] is selected, specify the owner user. To select the owner user,
use the owner user change page.
If [Group] is selected, specify the owner account. To select the owner account,
use the Change Owner screen.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-7
8.2 User mode settings 8
Page (2/2)
Delete Empty User Box(es) (Administrator Settings)
Automatically searches for and deletes an empty User Box if the Public, Personal, or Group User Box is created
in Administrator Settings. Press [Delete Empty User Box(es)] in the Create User Box screen.
Bulletin Board User Box
Create a Bulletin Board User Box. You can create up to 10 Bulletin Board User Boxes. The available setting
items are as follows.
Reference
- To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit].
- If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number.
- To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete].
Item Description
[Auto Document Delete
Time]
Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or
last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically.
• In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of
days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis
in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours.
• When not deleting a document, select [Save].
• Depending on the settings in Administrator Settings, you may not be
able to operate.
[Confidential RX] This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. Select whether to
add the confidential RX function to a User Box. When adding the confidential
RX function, enter the confidential RX password.
• For confirmation, enter the confidential RX password again.
8 User mode settings
8-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.2
Page (1/2)
Page (2/2)
Item Description
[User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box
number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box
number between 1 and 999999999.
[User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel
(up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you
to create User Boxes with the same name.
[Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and
enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters).
[Type] Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or
Account Track settings.
If [Personal] is selected, specify the owner user. To select the owner user,
use the owner user change page.
If [Group] is selected, specify the owner account. To select the owner account,
use the Change Owner page.
Item Description
[Auto Document Delete
Time]
Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or
last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically.
• In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of
days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis
in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours.
• When not deleting a document, select [Save].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-9
8.2 User mode settings 8
Relay User Box
You can create up to five Relay User Boxes. The creation and editing setting items are as follows.
Reference
- To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit].
- If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number.
- To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete].
dReference
For details on how to register the header or footer, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations].
Item Description
[User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box
number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box
number between 1 and 999999999.
[User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel
(up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you
to create User Boxes with the same name.
[Relay Destination] Select a relay destination to send data from the Relay User Box. Pre-register
the relay destination as a group destination.
• When registering a group destination as a relay destination, be sure to
set Abbreviation Dial in the group destination in advance.
[Relay TX Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Relay TX Password],
and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters).
8 User mode settings
8-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.2
8.2.2 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting
You can customize the User Box screen to fit your operating environment.
Default Tab
Specify the User Box page to be displayed after pressing [User Box] key on the control panel.
Reference
- [Public]: Displays the Public User Box page.
- [Personal]: Displays the Personal User Box page when User Authentication is enabled.
- [System]: Displays the System User Box page.
- [Group]: Displays the Group User Box page when Account Track is enabled.
Shortcut key
This function enables you to add up to two shortcut keys in the area on the lower right of the page. It is available
when registering the frequently used System User Box as a shortcut key.
Reference
- A shortcut key is displayed only in the User Box mode after pressing the [User Box] key. Switching to
the Fax/Scan or Copy mode does not display the target User Box shortcut key.
- If Shortcut Key 1 is configured, [Language Selection] is not displayed.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-11
8.2 User mode settings 8
8.2.3 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Link File Error Notification
This function enables you to specify processing to be performed if you cannot access a link file when attempting
to print an XHTML file from a cellular phone or PDA. (Default: [ON])
- [ON]: Prints a link file in a black frame.
- [OFF]: Does not print a link file part.
8.2.4 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Proxy Server Use
This function enables you to specify whether to use a proxy server to access a link file when printing an
XHTML file from a cellular phone or PDA. (Default: [OFF])
- [ON]: Uses a proxy server.
- [OFF]: Does not use a proxy server.
Reference
- To use a proxy server for connection, register the desired proxy server in [Administrator Settings] - [Network
Settings] - [WebDAV Settings] - [WebDAV Client Settings] - [Proxy Server Address]. For details,
refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator].
8 User mode settings
8-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.2
8.2.5 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Print Settings
When using a cellular phone or PDA to print a document through this machine, configure print settings.
Basic - Print
Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided.
Basic - Color
Select Full Color or Black.
Basic - Paper
Select the printing paper size if the sent data does not contain paper size information.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-13
8.2 User mode settings 8
Basic - Finishing
Specify Fold/Bind, Staple, or Punch.
Application - Margin
Select the margin position.
Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21.
Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22.
Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23.
Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24.
Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26.
Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27.
8 User mode settings
8-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.2
Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat
For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-15
8.3 Administrator Settings 8
8.3 Administrator Settings
8.3.1 User Box permissions
User types
This machine is intended for users of various positions. The User Box function therefore provides [User Box
Administrator] in addition to the administrator of this machine. The following shows the users and their available
User Box types.
Reference
- To log in to this machine as the User Box administrator, execute the following steps when setting User
Authentication.
– Enter "boxadmin" in the User Name box.
– Enter the password specified in page 8-26 in the Password box.
Public User Box and Personal or Group User Box
The following shows the available functions of the (1) Public User Box that can be accessed by all users and
the (2) Personal or Group User Box that can be accessed only by specific users.
*1 The registered users can handle only the User Boxes that were created by them.
*2 The User Box administrator and administrator can handle User Boxes without entering the password even
if it is specified for the User Boxes.
Item Description
Public user When user authentication is disabled, every user is logged in as a public
user.
Registered user User registered by the administrator when User Authentication is enabled.
User Box administrator User who logs in as the User Box administrator when User Authentication
is enabled. This user can access all User Boxes regardless of whether a
password is specified.
Administrator User who manages this machine. This user can create, change, or delete
all User Boxes regardless of whether a password is specified.
Function Create User Box Check, download,
or delete a document
Change User Box
setting
Delete User Box
User Box
type
Public
Personal
or Group
Public
Personal
or Group
Public
Personal
or Group
Public
Personal
or Group
Public user o − o − o − o −
Registered
user
o o o o*1 o o*1 o o*1
User Box administrator
o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2
Administrator o o − − o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2
8 Administrator Settings
8-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.3
8.3.2 Creating a User Box
You can register a new User Box. The following describes the types of the User Boxes that can be registered.
Reference
- Disabling User Authentication or Account Track saves the User Box registered as a Personal or Group
User Box as a Public User Box. The User Box name however remains unchanged.
- When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled, enter the ID and password when logging in to
this machine. After this, be sure to press [Login] or the Access key in the control panel to complete
authentication processing. If authentication is not completed, you cannot create a Personal or Group
User Box.
- When the optional Fax Kit is installed, you can configure confidential RX (F-Code TX) settings as the
Public, Personal, or Group User Box extension function. For details on the confidential RX function, refer
to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
- When the setting for User Authentication is configured, you can specify a User Box administrator. A
User Box administrator can access all Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes.
Reference
- If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create the password that is less than eight characters.
- When the registered User Box password contains less than eight characters, change it to eight characters
before setting Password Rules to ON. For details on Password Rules, refer to the [User's Guide
Copy Operations].
8.3.3 Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box
For details, refer to page 8-6.
8.3.4 Creating Bulletin Board User Box
For details, refer to page 8-7.
8.3.5 Creating Relay User Box
For details, refer to page 8-9.
Item Description
Public User Box Public User Box that can be accessed by everyone.
Personal User Box Personal User Box that can be accessed by only the login user when User
Authentication is enabled.
Group User Box User Box that can be accessed by only the user in the login account when
Account Track is enabled.
Bulletin Board User Box User Box used to perform Bulletin Polling TX or RX with F codes. This item
is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed.
Relay User Box User Box used to save relay data when using this machine as a relay distribution
station to perform relay distribution with F codes. This item is
available when the optional Fax Kit is installed.
Annotation User Box User Box used to print or send a saved document with the date/time or filing
number image. Specify the type of the text to be added when using this
User Box. When registering this User Box, specify the administrator mode.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-17
8.3 Administrator Settings 8
8.3.6 Creating Annotation User Box
Create an Annotation User Box. You can configure the following items when create a User Box.
Reference
- To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit].
- If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number.
- To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete].
Page (1/3)
Reference
- If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create the password that is less than eight characters.
- When the registered User Box password contains less than eight characters, change it to eight characters
before setting Password Rules to ON. For details on Password Rules, refer to the [User's Guide
Copy Operations].
Item Description
[User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box
number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box
number between 1 and 999999999.
[User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel
(up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you
to create User Boxes with the same name.
[Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and
enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters).
8 Administrator Settings
8-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.3
Page (2/3)
Page (3/3)
Item Description
[Count Up] Select whether to count the annotation number by job or by page.
[Secondary Field] Add text to the number to be printed (up to 20 characters).
[Date/Time] Select the format to display the date and time to be printed.
[Density] Select the density of the annotation numbers to be printed.
[Number Type] Select the output format (number of digits) of the annotation numbers to be
printed.
[Print Position] Select the printing position.
[Primary Field] Add any text (up to 40 characters).
Item Description
[Auto Document Delete
Time]
Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or
last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically.
• In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of
days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis
in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours.
• When not deleting a document, select [Save].
• To use a document to give an annotation only without saving or using
it for copying, select [Do Not Keep].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-19
8.3 Administrator Settings 8
8.3.7 Maximum Number of User Boxes
Specify the maximum number of User Boxes that can be created for each user.
Public, Personal, or Group User Box
Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings.
Max. No. Of Use Boxes
To specify the maximum number of User Boxes, select [ON]. To not specify the limit and allow users to create
an infinite number of User Boxes, select [OFF].
Maximum Number of User Boxes
The allowable range of the maximum number of User Boxes is 0 to 1000. Use the keypad to enter the maximum
number of User Boxes, and press [Apply] to determine it.
Reference
- If the maximum number of User Boxes is set to "0", you cannot create new ones.
- When the selected user already sets the number of User Boxes to 3, the allowable range of the maximum
number of User Boxes changes 3 to 1000.
8 Administrator Settings
8-20 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.3
8.3.8 User Box Setting
Delete Unused User Box
Delete a User Box with no document saved, as an unnecessary User Box. To delete a User Box, confirm the
message that appears and select [Yes].
Delete Secure Print Documents
This function deletes all documents saved in the Secure Document User Box. To delete the User Box, confirm
the message and select [Yes].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-21
8.3 Administrator Settings 8
Auto Delete Secure Document
Specify the period from the date/time when a secure document was saved or last retrieved to the date/time
when it is to be deleted automatically.
Reference
- In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or
30 days.
- When not deleting a document, select [Save].
Encrypted PDF Delete Time
Specify the period from the date/time when an encrypted PDF document was saved or last retrieved to the
date/time when it is to be deleted automatically.
Reference
- In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or
30 days.
- When not deleting a document, select [Save].
8 Administrator Settings
8-22 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.3
ID & Print Delete Time
Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved from the ID & Print
User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically.
Reference
- In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or
30 days.
- When not deleting a document, select [Save].
Document Hold Setting
Specify whether to save a document in a User Box when sending or printing it.
Reference
- When deleting a document after printing or sending, select [Yes]. To display a deletion confirmation
screen when printing or sending, select [ON] on the deletion selection screen.
- To delete a document after printing or sending the document, select [No].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-23
8.3 Administrator Settings 8
External Memory Function Settings
Set the function of the external memory connected to this machine to ON or OFF.
Reference
- A function to save a document in external memory is set to OFF (not saved) in the factory setting. It is
also set to OFF (not saved) in the user function setting when User Authentication is enabled. To save a
document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator
Settings.
Allow/Restrict User Box
Specify whether to release functions so that the user can create, edit, or delete a User Box.
Reference
- To enable the user to handle those functions, select [Allow].
- When not enabling the user to handle those functions, select [Prohibit]. Only the administrator can then
create, edit, or delete a User Box.
Item Description
[Save Document] Select whether to save (ON) or not save (OFF) scanned documents or documents
stored in a User Box to the external memory.
[Print Document] Select whether to print (ON) or not print (OFF) documents saved in the external
memory using the [Use/File] function.
[External Memory Document
Scan]
Scan a document in the external memory and select whether to save (ON)
or not save (OFF) it in a User Box.
8 Administrator Settings
8-24 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.3
ID & Print Delete after Print Setting
Select whether to check that the document saved in the ID & Print User Box has been deleted after printed.
Reference
- To check with the user whether to delete the target document, select [Confirm with User].
- To delete the target document without checking with the user after printing, select [Always Delete].
Document Delete Time Setting
This function enables the administrator to specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved
in or retrieved from a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically when the user cannot
specify the document deletion time.
When automatically specifying the document deletion time, select [Yes] and sec the deletion time.
Reference
- In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or
30 days.
- When not deleting a document, select [Save].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-25
8.3 Administrator Settings 8
ID & Print Settings
Configure settings for ID & Print User Box.
Reference
- A public user job is printed or saved when public user printing is enabled.
- A user-unauthorized job is printed or saved when Print without Authentication is enabled.
- For details on printing by public users and Print without Authentication, refer to the [User's Guide Print
Operations].
8.3.9 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting
Select whether to allow or restrict the function for using a cellular phone or PDA.
Item Description
[ID & Print] [ON]: Saves all the Normal Print and Authentication & Print jobs, which
were requested from a registered user, in the ID & Print User Box.
[OFF]: Saves the Authentication & Print job, which was requested from a
registered user, in the ID & Print User Box. The Normal Print job is output
without being saved in the User Box.
[Public User] [Print Immediately]: Outputs a public user job or user-unauthorized job
without saving it in the User Box.
[Save]: Saves a public user job or user-unauthorized job in the ID & Print
User Box.
8 Administrator Settings
8-26 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.3
8.3.10 User Box Administrator Setting
The User Box administrator is available when User Authentication is enabled. If you log in to this machine as
the User Box administrator, you can reference the contents of all the created User Boxes regardless of
whether the password is specified.
Setting User Box administrator
To set a User Box administrator, select [Allow], and press [Password Setting] to register the User Box administrator's
password.
Reference
- For confirmation, enter the password twice.
- If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create the password that is less than eight characters.
- When the registered User Box password is less than eight characters, change it to eight characters before
enable "Password Rules". For details on Password Rules, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
Logging in to this machine as the User Box administrator
Enter the following items in the login screen.
User name: boxadmin
Password: Password determined in the User Box Administrator Setting screen
Administrator's available functions
The following functions are available when you log in as the User Box administrator.
- Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box
- Checking, downloading, or deleting documents saved in all User Boxes
- Changing all User Box settings
- Deleting all User Boxes
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-27
8.3 Administrator Settings 8
8.3.11 Security Details
Security Print Only
Use this setting to specify to enable only Secure Print when issuing the print command from the printer driver.
To print a document, you must enter the ID and password.
8.3.12 HDD Settings
Check HDD Capacity
You can check the occupied and free spaces in the HDD.
8 Administrator Settings
8-28 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.3
Overwrite HDD Data
You can specify how to overwrite and delete HDD data.
When image data saved in the HDD becomes unnecessary, this function overwrites meaningless data in all
areas that contain the image data to destroy the original data. This function also destroys the non-image data
structure to prevent a data leak when the installed HDD has been stolen.
The available setting items are as follows. (Default: Mode 1)
Reference
- When changing Encryption Priority or Overwrite Priority setting, format the HDD after rebooting this machine.
However, be careful that data is erased by formatting the HDD.
- For the data erased by formatting the HDD, refer to page 8-31.
Item Description
[Mode 1] Overwritten with 0x00
[Mode 2] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with letter
"A" (0x61) Verified
[Encryption Priority] Performs encryption processing at a higher security level. In HDD Encryption
Setting, however, data overwriting is performed unlike [Mode 1] or
[Mode 2] setting. Always specify [Encryption Priority].
[Overwrite Priority] In HDD Encryption Setting, however, data overwriting is performed based
on [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] setting.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-29
8.3 Administrator Settings 8
Overwrite All Data
This function overwrites and deletes all data in the total capacity of the HDD.
0 This function is available when disposing of this machine. Before performing this function, be sure to
consult your service representative.
0 While overwriting and deleting data, do not turn the main power switch off and on.
% To overwrite and delete data, select the HDD overwrite method, and press [Delete].
Overwrite and delete processing is performed after this machine has been rebooted.
The available setting items are as follows.
Reference
- It takes approximately 40 minutes to execute Mode 1.
Item Description
[Mode 1] Overwritten with 0x00
[Mode 2] Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 1-byte random
numbers Overwritten with 0x00
[Mode 3] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 1-byte
random numbers Verified
[Mode 4] Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with
0x00 Overwritten with 0xff
[Mode 5] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with
0x00 Overwritten with 0xff
[Mode 6] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with
0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with
0xff Overwritten with specified 512-byte data
[Mode 7] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with
0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with
0xff Overwritten with 0xaa
[Mode 8] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with
0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with
0xff Overwritten with 0xaa Verified
8 Administrator Settings
8-30 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.3
HDD Lock Password
You can specify the password to lock the HDD.
0 Be sure to keep the specified password carefully so that you will never forget it. Forgetting the password
will require a large amount of recovery work.
% Specify the password, and reboot this machine.
The HDD password is specified.
Reference
- Enter the HDD password using 20 characters. Note that all the characters must not be the same.
- If you have already specified the HDD password, [Change] and [Release] appears. You can change or
release the HDD password.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-31
8.3 Administrator Settings 8
Format HDD
This function formats the HDD.
0 To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then turn it on after 10 or
more seconds have elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.
% To format the HDD, select [Yes] to follow the displayed messages. After formatting has been completed,
reboot this machine.
Reference
- Using the Web Connection export function backs up user registration information or address data.
For details, refer to the Web Connection online help.
- The following shows the data deleted by formatting the HDD.
– Program
– Address Book
– Authentication method setting
– User authentication setting
– Account track setting
– User Box
– User Box setting
– Documents in User Boxes
– Confidential User Box setting
– Bulletin Board User Box setting
HDD Encryption Setting
You can configure HDD encryption setting. Specifying a 20-character encryption passphrase for the HDD
prevents the user from easily reading the data saved in the HDD.
0 Be sure to keep the specified encryption passphrase carefully so that you will never forget it.
0 The encryption passphrase setting must be configured by the administrator of this machine.
0 To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then turn it on after 10 or
more seconds have elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.
% Specify the encryption passphrase, and reboot this machine.
The encryption passphrase setting then becomes available.
Reference
- Enter the encryption passphrase using 20 characters. Note that all the characters must not be the
same.
- Encryption passphrase setting becomes available after this machine has been rebooted.
8 Administrator Settings
8-32 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
8.3
8.3.13 Stamp Settings
Apply Stamps
This function applies the predetermined stamp to all documents to be output from this machine, ensuring
security. Specify whether to apply a stamp when printing or sending. To apply stamps, select [Apply], and
then configure settings for the stamp to be added continuously.
Reference
- The following shows the types of the stamps that can be applied to the printed data.
– Date/Time
– Page Number
– Stamp
– Copy Security (Copy Protect, Copy Guard, Password Copy)
– Stamp Repeat
– Header/Footer
– Registered Overlay
- The following shows the types of the stamps that can be applied to the transmitted data.
– Date/Time
– Page Number
– Stamp
– Header/Footer
dReference
For details on the stamp setting, refer to page 7-21.
9 Web Connection
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-3
9.1 Using Web Connection 9
9 Web Connection
9.1 Using Web Connection
Web Connection is a device control utility provided by the HTTP server built in the printer controller. Using
a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, you can change machine settings and check the
status of the machine. Using this utility, you can configure some settings, which are to be handled in the control
panel of this machine, through your computer, and also smoothly enter characters.
9.1.1 Operating environment
9.1.2 Accessing Web Connection
0 Start the Web browser to access Web Connection.
0 If User Authentication is enabled, enter the user name and password. For details, refer to page 9-11.
0 For details on setting the IP address of this machine, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator].
0 Web Connection has two view modes: Flash and HTML. For details, refer to page 9-9.
1 Start the Web browser.
2 Enter the IP address of the machine in the URL field, and then press [Enter].
http:///
Example: When the IP address of this machine is 192.168.1.20:
- http://192.168.1.20/
When IPv6 is set to "ON" while a browser other than Internet Explorer 6 is used:
- Enter the IPv6 address enclosed in brackets ([ ]).
– http://[IPv6 address of the machine]/
Example: When the IPv6 address of this machine is fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16:
- http://[fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16]/
- If IPv6 is set to "ON" while Internet Explorer is used, add "fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f IPv6_MFP_1" to the
hosts file in advance, and specify the address with the domain name.
The main menu or login page appears.
Operating environment
Network Ethernet (TCP/IP)
Applications on computer Web browser:
• Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 6/7/8 (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
• Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
• Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
• Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
• Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
• Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
• Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
Adobe® Flash® Player:
• Plug-in Ver.7.0 or later required to select Flash as the display format.
• Plug-in Ver.9.0 or later required to use the Data Management Utility
(font/macro data management).
9 Using Web Connection
9-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.1
9.1.3 Web browser cache
The Web browser has the cache function; therefore, the latest information may not be shown in the page displayed
using Web Connection. Using the cache function may result in an operation failure. When using
Web Connection, disable the cache function on the Web browser.
Reference
- Some Web browser versions may provide different menus and item names. For details, refer to the Help
for the Web browser.
- With the cache function enabled, timeout occurs in the administrator mode, and after that, how many
time you try to access, just timeout recurs. It results in the control panel of this machine being locked,
and you cannot handle the control panel. In this case, turn the main power off, and then turn it on again.
To avoid this problem, disable the cache function.
For Internet Explorer
1 Select [Internet Options] in the [Tools] menu.
2 In the [General] tab, select [Temporary Internet files] - [Settings].
3 Select [Every visit to the page], and click [OK].
For Netscape Navigator
1 Select [Preferences] in the [Edit] menu.
2 In [Category] on the left, select [Advanced] - [Cache].
3 In [Document in cache is compared to document on network], select [Every time].
For Mozilla Firefox
1 Select [Options] in the [Tools] menu.
2 Select [Privacy], and then click [Settings] in the Private Data section.
3 Select the [Cache] check box under [Private Data] select the [Clear private data when closing Firefox]
check box under [Settings], and then click [OK].
9.1.4 Online help function
After logging in to Web Connection, click ; you can display the online help for the currently configured
function.
Reference
- To display the online help, connect your computer to the Internet.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-5
9.2 Login and logout 9
9.2 Login and logout
9.2.1 Login and logout flows
Accessing with Web Connection displays the login page when User Authentication or Account Track is enabled,
and displays the login page in the public user mode when User Authentication or Account Track is not
enabled. When re-logging in to this machine as a different user or as an administrator, log out once, and log
in again.
When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled
You are automatically logged in as a public user.
To log in as an administrator, log out once.
9 Login and logout
9-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.2
Login as an administrator again.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-7
9.2 Login and logout 9
When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled
If Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the login procedure.
The User Authentication or Account Track page appears. Enter the required items to log in.
To log in as a different user or as an administrator, log out once.
9 Login and logout
9-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.2
9.2.2 Logout
Click [Logout] or [To Login Screen] at the upper right of the window. A logout confirmation page appears.
Click [OK] to return to the login page.
Reference
- The login page that appears differs depending on whether Authentication is enabled in this machine.
- When logged in as a public user, [To Login Screen] appears. When logged in as a registered user or an
administrator, [Logout] appears.
- If timeout occurred because no operation was performed for the specified period during login or if authentication
setting was changed using the control panel while logging in to the user mode, you will automatically
log out of the mode.
- For details on how to specify the timeout period of the user or administrator modes, refer to page 9-39.
Log in again.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-9
9.2 Login and logout 9
9.2.3 Login
Web Connection provides the user or administrator mode depending on how to log in. If necessary, you can
log in to the user mode as an administrator or User Box administrator depending on user authentication or
User Box administrator setting.
Reference
- You can log in as a User Box administrator when the User Box administrator is enabled using the control
panel. For details on the User Box administrator setting, permissions, and password, refer to the
page 8-26.
- Logging in to the user mode as an administrator enables you to perform job deletion processing, which
is not available in the administrator.
- In the login page, select the desired Data Management Utility. For details on Data Management Utility,
refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
Login options
You can select items as required when logging in.
Reference
- If Flash is selected in View Mode, the following items are displayed using Flash.
– Status icons and messages
– Status of [Paper Tray] in [Information] - [Device Information]
– Status of [Job]
Item Description
Language Select the language to display information in.
View Mode Select Flash or HTML.
• To use the read-out software, select HTML.
• In the IPv6 environment, select HTML.
• To select Flash, prepare Flash Player.
User Assist Select the [Display dialog box in case of warning.] check box to display the dialog
box when a warning has occurred or during operation after login.
9 Login and logout
9-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.2
Logging in as a public user
If user authentication is not enabled on the machine, you will be logging in as a public user. In the login page,
select [Public User], and click [Login].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-11
9.2 Login and logout 9
Logging in as a registered user
Specify the registered user name and password to log in when User Authentication is enabled in this machine.
% In the login page, enter the user name and the password, and click [Login].
Reference
- If Account Track is enabled, also enter the account name and password.
- To select a user name from a list, click [User List].
- If External Server Authentication is enabled, select a server.
- To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - [Administrator (User Mode)], and
enter the administrator password.
- If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and a user
enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that user will be locked out and will no
longer be able to use the machine. For details on how to disable Prohibit Functions When Authentication
Error, contact your administrator.
- [User List] is available only when User Name List is set to [ON]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide
Copy Operations].
9 Login and logout
9-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.2
Logging in to administrator mode
To configure the system or network setting, log in to the administrator mode.
1 Select [Administrator] and click [Login].
2 Enter the administrator password in the page that appears, and then click [OK].
% To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator (User Mode)], and enter the
administrator password.
% Logging in to the administrator mode locks the control panel of this machine, and you will not be
able to use it.
% Depending on the status of this machine, you may not be able to log in to the administrator mode.
% If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in the Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2
and an incorrect password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to log
in to the administrator mode. For details on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error parameter,
refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
% The password entry page varies depending on the machine settings.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-13
9.2 Login and logout 9
% You can display the explanation of functions (Help) when necessary. To display Help, select [ON] in
Display Setting.
[On Mouse]: Point the cursor to display Help.
[On Focus]: Select an item to display Help.
9 Login and logout
9-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.2
Display mode in administrator mode
In [System Settings] - [Display Setting], the display mode in the administrator mode can be selected from [Tab
Function Display] or [List Function Display]. This manual shows an example where the [List Function Display]
is set as the display mode.
In either display mode, the available items are the same.
In the default setting, the screen is displayed in [Tab Function Display].
In [Tab Function Display], click the desired icon to change the menu.
In [List Function Display], change the menu from the list box.
Select the desired menu in the drop-down list, click [Display].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-15
9.2 Login and logout 9
Logging in as a User Box administrator
You can log in to the user mode as an administrator to delete a job when User Authentication is enabled in
this machine. If necessary, you can log in to the user mode as a User Box administrator when the User Box
administrator is enabled using the control panel.
% In the login page, select [Administrator] and click [Login].
% To log in to the user mode as a User Box administrator, select [User Box Administrator], and enter
the User Box administrator's password.
Reference
- To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - [Administrator (User Mode)], and
enter the administrator password.
- If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in the Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and
an incorrect password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to log in to the
administrator mode. For details on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error parameter, refer
to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
- The password entry page varies depending on the machine settings.
- You can display the explanation of functions (Help) when necessary. To display Help, select [ON] in Display
Setting.
– [On Mouse]: Point the cursor to display Help.
– [On Focus]: Select an item to display Help.
9 Page Configuration
9-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.3
9.3 Page Configuration
Logging in to Web Connection displays the page that is configured as shown below. This example shows
the items in Information - Device Information.
Reference
- The contents of the Web Connection pages vary depending on the options installed in this machine or
the settings of this machine.
No. Item Description
1 Login user name Displays the current login mode icon and user name (public, administrator,
User Box administrator, registered user, or account).
Click the user name to display the login user name.
2 Status display Displays the status of the printer and scanner sections of this machine
with icons and messages. Clicking the desired icon when an
error occurs displays the information (Consumable Info, Paper
Tray, or user registration page) associated with the icon to enable
you to check the status.
3 Message display Displays the operating status of this machine.
4 [To Login Screen]/ [Logout] Click this button to log out the current mode and log in again. When
logged in as a public user, [To Login Screen] appears. When
logged in as a registered user or an administrator, [Logout] appears.
1 2 3 4
10
5
6
7
8
9
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-17
9.3 Page Configuration 9
5 [Change Password] Click this button to jump to the user password change page. This
button appears only in the user mode page in which you logged in
as a registered user.
6 Help You can display the online help for the currently configured function.
For the specified pages, refer to "Online Assistance" in
page 9-18.
7 Refresh Click this icon to refresh the information displayed in the page.
8 Icon Select the category of the item to be displayed. The following icons
are displayed in the user mode.
• Information
• Job
• User Box
• Direct Print
• Store Address
• Customize
9 Menu Displays information and setting for the selected icon. The menu
that appears in this area varies depending on which icon was selected.
10 Information and settings Displays the details of the item selected in the menu.
No. Item Description
9 User Mode Overview
9-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.4
9.4 User Mode Overview
Logging in to the user mode enables you to configure the following functions.
9.4.1 Information
dReference
You can also check the explanation of the user mode in the Web Connection online help or Web Connection
manual included in the application DVD-ROM. For details on the online help, refer to page 9-4.
Item Description
[Device Information] Enables you to check the components, options, consumables, and meter
counts of this machine.
[Online Assistance] Enables you to check the online assistance about this product.
[Change User Password] Changes the password of the login user.
[Function Permission Information]
Enables you to check the function permission information about the user
or account.
[Network Setting Information]
Enables you to check the network settings of this machine.
[Print Setting Information] Enables you to check the printer controller settings of this machine.
[Print Information] Prints font or configuration information.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-19
9.4 User Mode Overview 9
9.4.2 Job
9.4.3 User Boxes
dReference
For details on how to handle User Boxes, refer to page 9-23.
Item Description
[Current Jobs] Enables you to check the currently executed job or queued jobs.
[Job History] Enables you to check the executed jobs.
[Communication List] Enables you to check the completed transmission and reception jobs.
Item Description
[Open User Box] Opens the currently created User Box (Public, Personal, or Group User
Box) to enable you to print, send, or download a document saved in the
User Box or to change the User Box setting.
[Create User Box] Enables to create a new User Box.
9 User Mode Overview
9-20 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.4
9.4.4 Direct Print
Reference
- [Direct Print] may not be displayed depending on settings in the administrator mode.
[Open System User Box] Displayed when the optional Fax Kit is installed. This function opens the
System User Box (Bulletin Board, Polling TX, Memory RX, or Relay User
Box) to enable you to handle a document saved in the User Box or change
the User Box setting.
[Create System User Box] Displayed when the optional Fax Kit is installed. This function enables you
to create a new Bulletin Board or Relay User Box.
Item Description
Item Description
[Direct Print] Specify a file saved in the computer to print it using this machine. If necessary,
you can select [Application Setting] to save a document in the specified
User Box.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-21
9.4 User Mode Overview 9
9.4.5 Store Address
[Store Address] may not be displayed depending on settings in the administrator mode.
Item Description
[Address Book] Enables you to check the address book registered in this machine or to
register and change an address.
[Group] Enables you to check the group address book registered in this machine
or to register and change an address.
[Program] Enables you to check the program address book registered in this machine
or to register and change an address.
[Temporary One-Touch] Enables you to check the temporary program address book registered in
this machine or to register and change an address.
[Subject] Enables you to register or change up to 10 subjects when sending E-mails.
[Text] Enables you to register or change up to 10 body messages when sending
E-mails.
9 User Mode Overview
9-22 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.4
9.4.6 Customize
Enables you to specify the initial page after logging in.
Item Description
[Option] Enables you to configure the settings displayed in the initial page after logging
in to this machine.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-23
9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9
9.5 Handling a document in a User Box
The [Open User Box] menu supports the following functions.
- Listing the documents saved in a User Box
- Printing a document
- Sending a document to another machine
- Downloading and saving document data in your computer
- Moving or copying a document to another User Box
- Deleting a document
9.5.1 Listing the documents saved in a User Box
Logging in displays a list of the User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes) created in the accessed
MFP.
Open User Box
Select the target User Box name in the User Box list. Otherwise, enter the User Box number and password,
and click [OK].
Reference
- Selecting a User Box name with a password displays the password entry page.
"Open User Box" is displayed as shown below depending on the User Authentication or Account Track settings.
- [Open User Box(Public)]: Displayed when User Authentication is not enabled.
- [Open User Box(Public/Personal)]: Displayed when User Authentication is enabled.
- [Open User Box(Public/Group)]: Displayed when Account Track is enabled.
- [Open User Box(Public/Group/Personal)]: Displayed when User Authentication and Account Track are
enabled.
Item Description
[User Box Number] Enter the number of the User Box to be opened.
[User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password.
9 Handling a document in a User Box
9-24 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.5
File List
Selecting a User Box displays its basic information and also lists the documents saved in the User Box.
Item Description
[Search from Index] Displays a list of User Boxes for each index, which was selected when creating
a User Box.
[Page (Display by 50 cases)]
When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired
page to change the display.
[User Box List] Displays the User Box number, User Box name, User Box type, and creation
date and time. A User Box with a password is displayed by a keyshaped
icon.
Item Description
[User Box Settings] Click this button to change the User Box name, index, extension, or password
setting.
[Delete User Box] Click this button to delete the displayed User Box.
• Deleting a User Box erases all the documents saved in the User Box.
Thumbnail View To view a thumbnail image for each document, click [ON]. When you do not
view thumbnail images, click [OFF].
Specify operation Select the target operation, for example, printing, moving, copying, or deleting
a document, sending to another machine, or downloading to your
computer. For details, refer to page 9-25.
[Changes the display] Select the target operation, and click this button to display the "Select"
check box for the document that can be handled by the target function.
Select Displays a check box for the document that can be handled by the selected
function.
Thumbnail Displays the image of the first page when the thumbnail image display
function is enabled.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-25
9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9
Reference
- If 11 or more documents are saved, [Page (Display by 10 cases)] is displayed.
9.5.2 Printing a document
1 Select [Specify operation] - [Print], and click [Changes the display].
The select check box is displayed for printable documents.
Document Name Displays a document name.
Number of Originals Displays the number of originals in a document.
[Edit Name] Click this button to rename a document.
Item Description
9 Handling a document in a User Box
9-26 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.5
2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Print Setting].
3 Configure print settings.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-27
9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9
% If multiple documents are selected while Combine is set to [OFF], Basic Setting and Application Setting
will become unavailable.
% [Save Print Settings] is not displayed when multiple documents are selected.
4 Click [OK].
Printing starts.
5 Click [OK].
You then return to the File List page.
Item Description
[Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function enables
you to change the printing order. Click the target document, and select
[Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo].
When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail
View].
[Combine] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function prints the
selected documents as one.
[Basic Setting] Configure the number of sets, 2-sided printing, color, and finishing settings.
[Application Setting] Configure more detailed setting such as Page Margin or Stamp. When using
this function, click [Display].
[Save Print Settings] Select whether to save print setting.
9 Handling a document in a User Box
9-28 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.5
9.5.3 Sending a document to another machine
1 Select [Specify operation] - [Send to other device], and click [Changes the display].
The select check box is displayed for documents that can be sent.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-29
9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9
2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [TX Setting].
9 Handling a document in a User Box
9-30 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.5
3 Configure send settings.
Item Description
[Specify destination] Click [Search from List] to select the destination in the address book. When
checking the destination list, click [Check Destination].
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-31
9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9
% If multiple documents are selected while Combine is set to [OFF], File Type, Communication Settings,
or Application Setting will become unavailable.
4 Click [OK].
Sending starts.
5 Click [OK].
You then return to the File List page.
9.5.4 Downloading document data to your computer
1 Select [Specify operation] - [Download to PC], and click [Changes the display].
The select check box is displayed for available documents.
[Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function enables
you to change the sending order. Click the target document, and select
[Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo].
When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail
View].
[Bind TX] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function sends the
selected documents as one.
[File Type] Specify the file type and encryption contents for a file to be sent.
[Communication Setting] Configure E-mail settings or specify the URL notification destination. When
using this function, click [Display].
[Application Setting] Configure more detailed setting such as Stamp or Send & Print. When using
this function, click [Display].
Item Description
9 Handling a document in a User Box
9-32 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.5
2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Download Setting].
3 Configure settings.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-33
9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9
4 Click [OK].
5 When [Preparation for download has been completed] has appeared, click [Download].
The File Download page appears.
6 Click [Save].
7 Specify the saving place and file name, and click [Save].
8 Click [Back].
You then return to the File List page.
Item Description
[Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function collects
pages in the order in which they are displayed, and prints them as one document.
If necessary, you can change that order. Click the target document,
and select [Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo].
When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail
View].
[File Format] Select the file type for the file to be saved.
[Page Range] Download all pages or specify the range of successive pages.
9 Handling a document in a User Box
9-34 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.5
9.5.5 Moving or copying a document to another User Box
1 Select [Specify operation] - [Move/Copy], and click [Changes the display].
The check box for selecting an available document is displayed.
2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Move/Copy Setting].
% You cannot select multiple documents.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-35
9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9
3 Configure settings.
4 Click [OK].
This moves or copies the document.
5 Click [OK].
You then return to the File List page.
9.5.6 Deleting a document
1 Select [Specify operation] - [Delete], and click [Changes the display].
The check box for selecting an available document is displayed.
Item Description
[User Box Number] Select the User Box to move or copy a document from the User Box List.
[Copy] Select this check box to copy a document to the target User Box.
9 Handling a document in a User Box
9-36 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.5
2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Delete].
% To select or unselect all documents, select the [Check/Uncheck] check box.
3 Check the document name to be deleted, and click [OK].
% When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View].
4 Click [OK].
This deletes a document(s), and returns you to the File List page.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-37
9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9
9.6 Administrator Mode Overview
Logging in to the administrator mode enables you to use the following functions.
dReference
For details on the administrator mode, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
The administrator modes are classified into two display modes: [Tab Function Display] and [List Function Display].
This manual shows an example where the [List Function Display] is set as the display mode. For details,
refer to page 9-14.
9.6.1 Maintenance
Item Description
[Meter Count] Enables you to check the meter count of this machine.
[ROM Version] Enables you to check the ROM version.
[Import/Export] Saves (exports) setting information of this machine as a file, or writes (imports)
it from a file to this machine.
[Status Notification Setting] Configure the function to be reported to a registered user when an error
has occurred in this machine. Specify the destination and items to notify a
registered user of an error.
[Total Counter Notification
Setting]
Configure the setting to notify the target user of the total counter by E-mail,
and register the E-mail address of the destination.
[Date/Time Setting] Specify the date and time displayed in this machine.
[Timer Setting] Configure Power Save or Weekly Timer Setting in this machine.
[Network Error Code Display
Setting]
Specify whether to display the network error code.
9 Administrator Mode Overview
9-38 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.6
9.6.2 System Settings
Reference
- To use this machine as a scanner with the application software under TWAIN, install the dedicated driver
software TWAIN. For details, refer to the TWAIN driver manual in the DVD supplied together with this
machine.
[Reset] Clears all settings for the network, controller and destinations.
[License Settings] Allows you to issue a license and enable functions. Also, a request code
can be issued.
[Edit Font/Macro] Adds font or macro.
[Job Log] Allows you to create and download log data of the jobs that were executed
in this machine.
Item Description
Item Description
[Machine Setting] Changes the registration information of this machine.
[Register Support Information]
Specify support information (such as contact name, corporate URL, or online
manual URL) of this machine. To display this information, select [Information]
- [Online Assistance].
[Network TWAIN] Specify the time to release the operation lock when scanning (excluding
push-scanning). If necessary, configure settings to enable saving or reading
a document in or from the external memory.
[User Box Setting] Define the User Box functions such as deleting an unnecessary User Box
or specifying the document deletion time. If necessary, configure settings
to enable saving or reading a document in or from the external memory.
[Stamp Settings] Register a header or footer.
[Blank Page Print Settings] Specify whether to print contents configured in [Stamp/Composition] on
blank pages.
[Skip Job Operation Settings]
Specify whether to skip a job.
[Flash Display Setting] Specify whether to allow or restrict the flash display.
[System Connection Setting]
Configure the automatic setting of Prefix/Suffix or the setting for printing
data in a cellular phone.
[Display Setting] Select the display mode in the administrator mode from [Tab Function Display]
or [List Function Display].
[Outline PDF Setting] Specify whether to outline text.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-39
9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9
9.6.3 Security
[Administrator Password Setting] is not displayed when:
- The SSL certificate is not installed
- Enhanced Security Mode is set to "ON"
- [Mode using SSL/TLS] is set to [None] in [Security] - [PKI Settings] - [SSL Setting] even though a device
certificate is already registered
9.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track
Item Description
[PKI Settings] Register device certificates and configure the SSL, protocol, or external
certificate settings.
[Certificate Verification
Settings]
Specify the items to validate a certificate.
[Address Reference Setting]
When giving destination access permission, specify a reference allowed
group name or access allowed level.
[Restrict User Access] Specify the function to restrict user operations.
[Copy Security] Specify whether to use the copy guard or password copy function.
[Auto Logout] Specify the time to automatically log out the administrator or user mode.
[Administrator Password
Setting]
Specify the password to log in to the administrator mode.
9 Administrator Mode Overview
9-40 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.6
9.6.5 Network
Item Description
[General Settings] Configure the User Authentication or Account Track setting in this machine.
To enable authentication, configure the number of assigned
counters or the When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum setting.
[User Authentication Setting]
When enabling User Authentication, register the target user or configure
user setting.
[Account Track Settings] When enabling Account Track, register and edit the target account.
[External Server Settings] When enabling external server authentication, register the external server.
[Public User Box Setting] Specify the upper limit of the number of User Boxes.
[User/Account Common
Setting]
Specify whether to print data in single color or two-color mode.
[Scan to Home Settings] Configure the setting to send a file to the Home folder.
[Scan to Authorized Folder
Settings]
Configure settings to restrict manual TX destinations.
Item Description
[TCP/IP Setting] Configure the TCP/IP setting when connecting this machine via network.
[E-mail Setting] Configure the settings to send or receive E-mails (including Internet fax),
and specify the extension function such as E-mail authentication.
[LDAP Setting] Configure the settings to register the LDAP server.
[IPP Setting] Configure the IPP print setting.
[FTP Setting] Configure the settings to use this machine as an FTP client or server.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-41
9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9
9.6.6 User Boxes
Logging in to the administrator mode enables you to handle a User Box without entering the password when
opening it.
[SNMP Setting] Configure SNMP settings.
[SMB Setting] Configure the SMB client, WINS, or SMB print setting.
[Web Service Settings] Configure the settings to perform scanning or printing using Web services.
[Bonjour Setting] Configure Bonjour settings.
[NetWare Setting] Configure NetWare settings.
[AppleTalk Setting] Configure AppleTalk settings.
[Network Fax Setting] Configure the direct SMTP TX or direct SMTP RX settings.
[WebDAV Settings] Configure the WebDAV settings.
[OpenAPI Setting] Configure the OpenAPI settings.
[TCP Socket Setting] Configure the TCP Socket settings to have a data communication between
this machine and the application software in your computer.
[IEEE802.1x Authentication
Setting]
Configure IEEE802.1X authentication settings.
[LLTD Setting] Select whether to enable or disable LLTD.
[SSDP Settings] Configure the SSDP settings.
[Bluetooth Setting] Select whether to enable or disable Bluetooth.
• To enable a Bluetooth communication, contact your service representative
in advance.
Item Description
Item Description
[Open User Box] Opens the currently created User Box (Public, Group, or Personal User
Box) to enable you to change the User Box setting.
• Document operations are not available in the administrator mode.
• User Box operations are available even if a password is specified for
the target User Box.
[Create User Box] Enables to create a new User Box.
9 Administrator Mode Overview
9-42 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.6
9.6.7 Printer Settings
[Open System User Box] Open the System User Box (Bulletin Board, Relay, or Annotation User Box)
to enable you to handle a document saved in the User Box or change the
User Box setting.
• The Bulletin Board and Relay User Boxes are available when the optional
Fax Kit is installed.
[Create System User Box] Create a new Bulletin Board, Relay, or Annotation User Box.
Item Description
Item Description
[Basic Setting] Specify the default values of the printer.
[PCL Setting] Specify the default values in the PCL mode.
[PS Setting] Specify the default values in the PS mode.
[TIFF Setting] Specify the paper to print TIFF images.
[XPS Settings] Configure the XPS print settings.
[Interface Setting] Specify the timeout period of the interface.
[Direct Print Settings] Configure the settings to enable direct printing using Web Connection.
[Assign Account to Acquire
Device Info]
Select whether to specify a password to obtain device information through
the printer driver. If [ON] is selected, specify the password.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-43
9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9
9.6.8 Store Address
Item Description
[Address Book] Enables you to check the address book registered in this machine or to
register and change an address.
[Group] Enables you to check the group address book registered in this machine
or to register and change an address.
[Program] Enables you to check the program address book registered in this machine
or to register and change an address.
[Temporary One-Touch] Enables you to check the temporary program address book registered in
this machine or to register and change an address.
[Subject] Registers up to 10 subjects when sending E-mails.
[Text] Registers up to 10 body messages to be used when sending E-mails.
[Application Registration] Registers application settings and server addresses when using the applications
such as RightFax Server registered in the external server. Registering
applications and servers enables you to automatically connect to the
server of the selected application.
• [Application Registration] is not displayed when the optional Fax Kit is
installed.
[Prefix/Suffix] Registers Prefix or Suffix to be added as destination information when Emailing.
9 Administrator Mode Overview
9-44 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.6
9.6.9 Fax Settings
Item Description
[Header/Footer Position] Configure the setting to print the sender or receiving information.
[Line Parameter Setting] Specify the fax line such as Dialing Method.
[TX/RX Settings] Configure the paper, User Box, and other settings for sending or receiving
data.
[Function Setting] Configure the fax settings for Memory RX or Network Fax.
[PBX Connection Setting] Specify the outside line at PBX connection.
[Report Settings] Configure the setting for a report, for example, Activity Report, to be output
when sending or receiving data.
[Multi Line Settings] Specify the parameters and functions of the extended line.
• This item is displayed when a line is extended.
[Network Fax Setting] Configure the setting to use network fax.
[Header Information] Registers sender information and fax number when sending data.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-45
9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9
9.6.10 Setting for each purpose
Configure the settings according to the instructions shown in the window for items requiring multiple settings.
The available setting items are as follows.
- Configure the settings for sending a scanned document
- Configure the network print settings
- Restrict users using this machine
Reference
- As the setting procedure proceeds, its progress flow is displayed on the left.
- If setting is cancelled, you will return to the Setting for each purpose page after the items that were configured
before cancellation have been applied.
9 Administrator Mode Overview
9-46 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
9.6
10 Appendix
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10-3
10.1 Error message list 10
10 Appendix
10.1 Error message list
If an error message appears, perform the corresponding operation described below.
dReference
For details on the network settings, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator].
Message Cause and remedy
Unable to connect to the network.
Make sure that the network cable is correctly connected. In addition,
make sure that Network Settings in Administrator Settings have been
correctly configured.
The address for the communication
method cannot be selected
since the number of
addresses has exceeded the
maximum allowed for broadcasting.
The number of destinations specified exceeds the number possible
for a broadcast transmission. Reduce the number of broadcast destinations,
or send the transmission in multiple batches.
Document could not be saved in
user box due to insufficient HDD
capacity. Check log.
The hard disk is full. Delete unnecessary data, and then try saving the
data again.
The number of registered user
boxes has reached the max. allowance.
The number of registered user boxes has reached the maximum allowed.
The number of User Boxes that can be registered has reached
the maximum number possible.
The number of documents
saved in the User Box has
reached its maximum.
The number of documents saved in the User Box has reached its
maximum. The number of documents that can be saved in a User Box
has reached the maximum number possible.
The number of programmed
jobs has reached the max. allowance.
Wait until a programmed
job is completed.
The number of jobs that can be programmed has reached the maximum
number possible. Wait until a job has been completed, or delete
a current job.
10 Glossary
10-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
10.2
10.2 Glossary
Term Description
10Base-T/100Base-
TX/1000Base-T
A set of specifications under the Ethernet standards.
Those cables that consist of twisted copper wire pairs are used. The transmission
speed of 10Base-T is 10 Mbps, of 100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T
is 1000 Mbps.
Adobe® Flash® Software or its file format developed by Adobe Systems Inc. (formerly by Macromedia,
Inc.), used to create a content by compiling vector-graphic animations
and sounds. The software allows handling interactive contents using keyboard or
mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact and accessed from a Web
browser with dedicated plug-in software.
Anonymous FTP While normal FTP sites are protected by an account name and password, this
type of FTP site can be used by anyone without a password by simply entering
anonymous as the account name.
Authentication &
print
A function that allows you to print the job sent from the printer driver during user
authentication.
Auto IP A function to obtain an IP address automatically.
If one fails to get an IP address via DHCP, the auto IP gets an IP address from the
space of "169.254.0.0".
bit The abbreviation for binary digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity)
handled by a computer or printer. A bit uses only a 0 or a 1 to indicate data.
Bitmap Font A font using a collection of dots to present characters. Jagged edges are conspicuous
for the larger size Bitmap Font characters.
BMP The abbreviation for bitmap. This is a file format for saving image data. (The file
extension is ".bmp".) Commonly used on Windows platforms. BMP covers the
color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). BMP
images are not suitable for compressed storage.
Byte A byte indicates a unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or
printer.
A byte consists of eight bits.
Compact PDF A compression method for minimizing the data size using the PDF format, used
for digitalizing color documents. Compact PDF allows high compression performance
by identifying the text and image regions, and applying the resolution
and compression method optimized for each region. The compact PDF method
can be selected in this machine when using the scanning function to digitalize
documents.
Contrast The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image
(light/dark variation). "Low contrast" indicates an image with little light/dark variation,
while "High contrast" an image with large light/dark variation.
Default An initial setting. The settings selected in advance and enabled when the machine
is turned on, or the settings selected in advance and enabled when the function
is activated.
Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a "gateway" to access computers
on different LANs.
Density The amount of density of an image.
Density Compensation
A color tone correction function used for output devices such as printers and displays.
DHCP The acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. used for a client computer
on the TCP/IP network to load network configuration automatically from a
server. Just using a DHCP server to centrally manage IP addresses of the DHCP
clients enables you to construct a network without IP address conflicts or other
troubles.
Dither A method of presenting the quasi-shading of gray using black and white colors.
This method is easier to process than error diffusion, but may stir some unevenness
on the image.
DNS The acronym for Domain Name System. DNS allows for obtaining the IP address
corresponding to a host name in network environments. This system enables a
user to access other computers on the network by specifying host names instead
of elusive and non-intuitive IP addresses.
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10-5
10.2 Glossary 10
DPI (dpi) The acronym for Dots Per Inch. A unit of resolution used for printers and scanners.
This indicates the number of dots used to represent an inch. The higher this
value, the higher the resolution.
Driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral device.
Ethernet A standard for LAN transmission lines.
File extension Characters added to a file name for the recognition of the file format. The file extension
is added after a dot of a file name, for example, ".bmp" or ".jpg".
FTP The acronym for File Transfer Protocol. This is a protocol used for transferring
files via the Internet, an intranet or other TCP/IP network.
Gradation The shading levels of an image. Larger number of the levels can reproduce
smoother transition of the shading.
Gray scale A form of presenting monochrome image by using the gradation information shifting
from black to white.
Halftone A method for presenting the shading of an image by using different sizes of black
and white dots.
Hard disk A large capacity storage device for storing data. The data is retained even after
the power is turned off.
HTTP The acronym for HyperText Transfer Protocol. This is a protocol used to send or
receive data between a Web server and a client (such as a Web browser). HTTP
can exchange files such as images, sounds, and movies that are associated with
documents, including their presentation formats and other information.
Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers, or other software
on to a computer.
IP Address An address or a code used to identify an individual network device on the Internet.
IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4), a protocol widely used today, adopts a 32-
bit number for an IP address separated into four sections. An example of an IPv4
IP address is: 192.168.1.10. On the other hand, IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6),
the next generation protocol, adopts 128-bit IP addresses. An IP address is assigned
to every computer or other device connected to the Internet.
JPEG The acronym for Joint Photographic Experts Group, One of the file formats used
to save image data. (The file extension is ".jpg".) The compression ratio is generally
1/10 to 1/100. JPEG is an effective method to compress photographs and
other natural images.
Kerberos A network authentication system used for Windows 2000 or later, used as the Active
Directory authentication. Kerberos arranges an authentic site within the network
to provide two-phase authentication processes of users login and the use
of network resources, allowing users to be securely and efficiently authenticated.
LAN The acronym for Local Area Network. This is a network constructed by connecting
computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring buildings.
LDAP The acronym for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, a protocol used to access
a database that can manage E-mail addresses and environmental information
of network users on the Internet, intranet, or other TCP/IP network.
Memory A storage device used for storing data temporarily. Some types of memory retain
data even after the power is turned off, while others not.
Multi Page TIFF A TIFF file that contains multiple pages.
OS The acronym for Operating System. This is base software used to control the system
of a computer. Windows, MacOS, or UNIX is an OS.
PASV The abbreviation for PASsiVe, a mode used to connect to an FTP server from
within a firewall. If this mode is not selected, the firewall regards the access as
unauthorized and blocks the connection, disabling any file transmission.
PDF The acronym for Portable Document Format. This is an electronically formatted
document with file extension of ".pdf". PDF is based on the PostScript format.
You can use the free Adobe Reader software to view PDF documents.
Pixel The smallest constitutional unit of an image.
Pixel indicates an image pixel, the smallest constitutional unit of an image.
Term Description
10 Glossary
10-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
10.2
Plug and play A mechanism used to immediately detect a peripheral device when it is plugged
into a computer, and search for an appropriate driver automatically, so that the
device becomes operable.
Port Number A number used to identify the transmission port assigned to each process running
on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be used by multiple
processes.
PPI The acronym for Pixels Per Inch, Measuring unit for resolution, particularly for
monitors and scanners. It indicates how many pixels are contained per inch.
Preview A function allowing you to view an image before being processed for printing or
scanning.
Print job A print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device.
Printer driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a printer.
Property Attribute information. When using a printer driver, various functions can be specified
in the file properties. By using properties of a file, you can check the attribute
information about the file.
Protocol A rule enabling a computer to communicate with other computers or peripherals.
Proxy server A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection between each client
and different servers to effectively ensure security over the entire system for Internet
connections.
Resolution The resolution value indicates how much detail of an object can be reproduced
precisely on an image or a print matter.
Scanning The reading of an image in scanner operation by moving aligned image sensors
step by step. The direction of moving image sensors is called the main scanning
direction, and the direction of image sensors alignment is called the sub-scanning
direction.
Screen frequency The density of dots used to create the image.
Single-page TIFF A TIFF file that contains only a single page.
SMB The acronym for Server Message Block. This is a protocol for sharing files and
printers mainly over the Windows network.
SSL/TLS The acronym for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security, an encoding
method used to securely transmit data between the Web server and a browser.
Subnet mask A value used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks). This
is used to identify how many higher-order bits of an IP address are used for the
network address.
TCP/IP The acronym for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. It is a de facto
standard protocol widely used for the Internet. An IP address is used to identify
each network device.
Thumbnail A function of displaying the content of an image or document file by a small image
(image displayed when the file is opened).
TIFF The acronym for Tagged Image File Format, One of the file formats used for saving
image data. (The file extension is ".tif".) By using the "tag" indicating the data
type, information for various image formats can be saved in a single image data.
TWAIN An interface standard defined for between imaging devices including scanners
and digital cameras and applications including graphics software. To use a
TWAIN compatible device, a relevant TWAIN driver is required.
Uninstallation To delete software installed on a computer.
USB The acronym for Universal Serial Bus. This is a general-purpose interface defined
for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices with a computer.
Web browser Software used to view Web pages. Typical Web browsers include Internet Explorer
and Netscape Navigator.
Term Description
11 Index
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 11-3
11.1 Index by item 11
11 Index
11.1 Index by item
Numerics
1-sided/2-sided 7-9
A
Accessing 9-3
Address book - search 7-37
Address search 7-45
Address type 7-37
Administrator settings 8-4, 8-15
Allow/restrict user box 8-23
Annotation user box 6-3, 7-87, 8-17
Application 7-61, 7-69
Application - book copy 6-16
Application - frame erase 6-15
Apply stamps 8-32
Auto delete secure document 8-21
B
Background removal 6-14
Basic - color 6-12
Basic - density 6-12
Basic - file type 6-8
Basic - original type 6-6
Basic - resolution 6-7
Basic - simplex/duplex 6-7
Bind TX 7-34
Binding position 6-17
Body 7-56
Book copy method 6-16
Book erase - center erase 6-17
Book erase - frame erase 6-16
Bulletin board user box 7-81, 8-7
C
Cellular phone/PDA setting 8-12, 8-25
Chapters 7-20
Check dest. & send 7-54
Check HDD capacity 8-27
Check printing preferences 7-104
Check/change temporarily 7-30
City 7-46
Color 7-10, 7-67
Combine 7-7, 7-13
Communication method settings 7-58
Communication settings 7-53
Company name 7-47
Continuous print 7-15
Control panel 3-2
Copies 7-9
Copy 7-65
Copy guard type 7-26
Copy protect 7-24
Cover sheet 7-18
Creating a user box 8-6, 8-16
Custom display settings 8-10
Custom size 6-13
Customize 9-22
D
Date/time 7-21
Default tab 8-10
Delete empty user box(es) (Administrator settings)
8-7
Delete page 7-70
Delete secure print documents 8-20
Delete unused user box 8-20
Deleting documents 7-64
Density 7-90
Department 7-47
Despeckle 6-20
Detail 3-10
Detail search 7-38, 7-57
Detail settings 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-43, 7-44,
7-80
Digital signature 7-60
Direct input 7-39, 7-57
Direct print 9-20
Direction settings - binding position 6-20
Direction settings - original direction 6-19
Displaying detailed information 7-68
Document delete time setting 8-24
Document details 7-68, 7-100
Document hold setting 8-22
Document name 7-55
Download 9-31
E
ECM OFF 7-54
Edit document 7-70
Edit name 7-64
E-mail 7-40
E-mail addr. 7-46
E-mail encryption 7-60
E-mail settings 7-55
Encrypted PDF data 7-99
Encrypted PDF delete time 8-21
Encryption 6-9, 7-49
Encryption - detail settings 6-9, 7-49
Entering the PIN code 7-104
Error message list 10-3
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 11-4
11.1 Index by item 11
External memory 4-11, 4-15, 6-3, 7-98
External memory function settings 8-23
F
Fax 7-40
Fax header settings 7-60
Fax number 7-46
Fax retransmit user box 7-93
Fax settings 9-44
F-code transmission 7-59
File list 9-24
File name 2-10
File path 7-42, 7-43, 7-44, 7-99
File type 6-8, 7-48, 7-67
Filing 4-17
Filing settings 7-63
Finishing 7-10
First name 7-46
Fold/bind 7-12
Format HDD 8-31
From 7-56
FTP 7-43
G
Glossary 10-4
Group 7-11
H
HDD encryption setting 8-31
HDD lock password 8-30
HDD settings 8-27
Header/footer 7-30
Host name 7-42, 7-43, 7-44
I
Icons 3-4
ID & print delete after print setting 8-24
ID & print delete time 8-22
ID & print settings 8-25
ID & print user box 7-96
Image adjustment 6-14
Image shift - change back shift 7-17
Index 7-38
Information 9-18
Insert sheet 7-19
Insert sheet setting 7-23
Internet fax 7-41
IP address fax 7-42
J
Job 9-19
Job history 7-45
Job list 3-6
Job list - delete 3-6
Job list - job details 3-7
L
Last name 7-46
LDAP search - advanced search 7-46
LDAP search - search 7-46
Left panel 3-5
Line setting 7-53
Link file error notification 8-11
M
Maintenance 9-37
Maximum number of user boxes 8-19
Memory RX user box 7-86
Menu tree 1-7, 4-23, 8-3
Mobile/PDA 7-103
Move page 7-73
Move/copy 9-34
Moving documents 7-64
N
Name 7-46
Network 9-40
New 7-78
Next destination 7-43, 7-44
Number type 7-91
O
Offset 7-11
Online help 9-4
Operating environment 9-3
OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH 7-47
Organizing documents 2-6
Original settings 6-19
Outline PDF 6-11, 7-51
Overlay setting 7-32
Overseas TX 7-53
Overwrite 7-79
Overwrite all data 8-29
Overwrite HDD data 8-28
P
Page configuration 9-16
Page margin 7-16
Page number 7-22
Paper 7-101
Password 7-42, 7-43, 7-44
Password encrypted PDF user box 7-95
Password transmission 7-59
PC (SMB) 7-42
Photo size 6-13
Polling TX user box 7-82
Position 7-25, 7-29
Preview 3-14, 3-15, 7-68
Preview/set range 7-75
Preview/specify by Input 7-75
Print 7-6, 7-7, 9-25
Print - application 7-16
Print - basic 7-9, 7-100
Print position 7-91
Print/save 7-95
11-5 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
11 Index by item 11.1
Printer settings 9-42
Printing 4-5, 4-15
Proxy server use 8-11
Punch 7-11
Punch - position setting 7-12
R
Receiver RX ability 7-41
Reference 7-43
Register overlay 7-77
Registered overlay 7-31
Relay user box 8-9
Resolution 7-47, 7-66
Rotate page 7-71
S
Save in external memory 7-65
Save in user box 7-102
Saving 4-3, 4-11
Saving documents 2-3, 6-3
Scan setting 6-11, 7-52
Scan settings 6-6
Scan size 6-13
Search options 7-39
Secondary field 7-90
Secure document user box 7-83
Security 9-39
Security details 8-27
Security print only 8-27
Select line 7-54
Send 7-33, 7-34, 9-28
Send & print 7-62
Sending 4-8
Separate scan 6-18
Setting for each purpose 9-45
Sharpness 6-15
Sheet/cover/chapter Insert 7-17
Shortcut key 8-10
Sort 7-11
Special original 6-19
Stamp 7-23
Stamp composition 7-51
Stamp element 7-90
Stamp repeat 7-28
Stamp settings 8-32
Stamp type 7-28
Stamp/composition 7-21
Standard size 6-13
Staple 7-11
Staple - position setting 7-11
Store address 9-21, 9-43
Subject 7-55
System settings 9-38
System user box 6-4
T
Timer transmission 7-58
Touch panel 3-4
U
URL notification setting 7-57
Use/file 7-3
Use/file - check job settings 3-12
Use/file - check job settings - check e-mail settings
3-14
Use/file - check job settings - communication
settings 3-14
Use/file - check job settings - destination settings
3-13
Use/file - check job settings - document setting
contents 3-13
Use/file - details 3-12
User authentication 2-8
User authentication/account track 9-39
User box administrator setting 8-26
User box setting 8-10, 8-20
User boxes 9-19, 9-41
User name 7-42, 7-43, 7-44
Using documents 2-4
V
V.34 OFF 7-54
W
Web browser cache 9-4
Web Connection 9-3
WebDAV 7-44
Z
Zoom 7-14
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 11-6
11.2 Index by button 11
11.2 Index by button
Numerics
1-Sided 6-7
2in1 7-13
2-Sided 6-7
4in1 7-13
8in1 7-13
A
Address Type 7-37
Advanced Search 7-46
All Jobs 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11
Allow/Restrict User Box 8-23
Annotation User Box 7-87, 8-17
Application 7-35
Apply Stamps 8-32
Auto 6-20
Auto Color 6-12
Auto Delete Secure Document 8-21
B
Back (Blank) 7-18
Back (Copy) 7-18
Background Pattern 7-25, 7-27, 7-28
Background Removal 6-14
Bind TX 7-33
Binding Position 6-17, 6-20
Black 6-12, 7-52
Blank 7-20
Body 7-56
Book Copy 6-16
Book Spread 6-16
Bulletin Board User Box 7-81, 8-7
C
Center Erase 6-17
Center Staple & Fold 7-12
Change Pos./Delete 7-25, 7-29
Chapter Paper 7-20
Chapters 7-17
Check HDD Capacity 8-27
Check Job 3-5
Check Job Set. 3-7, 3-8
Check Job Settings 3-12
Check/Change Temporarily 7-30
City 7-46
Color 6-12, 7-52, 7-80
Combine 7-6, 7-7, 7-13
Comm. List 3-9, 3-10, 3-11
Communication Method Settings 7-58
Communication Settings 7-35
Compact PDF 6-8, 7-48
Compact XPS 6-8, 7-48
Company Name 7-47
Compulsory Memory RX User Box 7-86
Continuous Print 7-8, 7-15
Copied Paper 6-6
Copy 7-19, 7-63, 7-65
Copy Guard Pattern 7-27
Copy Protect 7-21, 7-24
Copy Protect Pattern 7-25
Cover + 2-Sided 6-7
Cover Sheet 7-17
Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting 8-10
Custom Size 6-13
D
Date/Time 7-21, 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29, 7-90,
8-18
Default Tab 8-10
Delete 3-6, 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11, 7-63, 7-85, 7-86,
7-92, 7-94, 7-95, 7-97
Delete Page 3-16
Delete Secure Print Documents 8-20
Delete Unused User Box 8-20
Deleted Jobs 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11
Deleting 7-64
Density 6-12, 7-25, 7-29, 7-80, 7-90, 8-18
Department 7-47
Despeckle 6-20
Detail 3-7, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12
Detail Search 7-38
Detail Settings 6-9, 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29,
7-32, 7-43, 7-44, 7-80
Detail View 7-4
Digital Signature 7-60
Display Name 7-32
Do Not Print # 7-23
Do Not Print Page Number 7-23
Document Delete Time Setting 8-24
Document Details 7-4, 7-63, 7-68, 7-69, 7-85,
7-86, 7-92, 7-100
Document Hold Setting 8-22
Document Name 6-5, 7-55
Document Permissions 6-9, 7-49
Document Settings 7-35
Dot Matrix Original 6-6
E
ECM OFF 7-54
Edit Document 7-69
Edit Name 7-63, 7-64, 7-85, 7-86, 7-92
E-mail 7-40
E-mail Addr. 7-46
E-mail Encryption 7-60
E-Mail Settings 7-55
Encrypted PDF Delete Time 8-21
Encryption 6-9, 7-49
Encryption Priority 8-28
Existing Setting 7-14
11-7 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2)
11 Index by button 11.2
External Memory 7-98
External Memory Document Scan 8-23
External Memory Function Settings 8-23
F
Fax 3-16, 7-40, 7-93
Fax Header Settings 7-60
Fax Number 7-46
F-Code transmission 7-59
File Path 7-42, 7-43, 7-44
File Type 6-8, 7-48
Finished Jobs 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11
Finishing 7-7, 7-8
First Name 7-46
Fold/Bind 7-12
Format HDD 8-31
Forward 3-10
Frame Erase 6-15, 6-16
From 7-56
Front (Blank) 7-18
Front (Copy) 7-18
Front + Back Cover 6-16
Front Cover 6-16
FTP 7-43
Full Color 6-12, 7-52
Full Size 7-14
G
Gray Scale 6-12, 7-52
Group 7-35
H
Half-Fold 7-12
HDD Encryption Setting 8-31
HDD Lock Password 8-30
HDD Settings 8-27
Header/Footer 7-21, 7-30
Host Name 7-42, 7-43, 7-44
I
ID & Print Delete after Print Setting 8-24
ID & Print Delete Time 8-22
ID & Print Settings 8-25
ID & Print User Box 7-96
Image 7-51
Image Adjustment 6-14
Image Details 7-32
Image Shift 7-16
Increase Priority 3-7
Index 7-38, 8-6
Insert Paper 7-19
Insert Sheet 7-17
Insert Sheet Setting 7-22
Insert Type 7-19
Internet Fax 7-41
IP Address Fax 7-42
J
Job Details 3-7
Job List 3-5, 3-6
JPEG 6-8, 7-48
L
L1 3-8
L2 3-8
Last Name 7-46
Left 6-20
Line Setting 7-53
Long Original 6-19
M
Manual 7-14
Maximum Number of User Boxes 8-19
Minimal 7-14
Mixed Original 6-19
Mode 1 8-28
Mode 2 8-28
Move 7-63
Moving documents 7-64
Multi Page 6-11, 7-52
N
Name 7-46
New 7-78
Next Destination 7-42, 7-43, 7-44
Next Page 3-15, 3-16, 7-75
Number Type 7-91, 8-18
O
OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH 7-47
Original Direction 6-19
Original Settings 6-5, 6-19
Original Type 6-6
Other 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29
Overseas TX 7-53
Overwrite 7-79
Overwrite All Data 8-29
Overwrite Priority 8-28
P
Page Margin 7-7, 7-8, 7-16
Page Number 7-21, 7-22
Page Separation 6-11, 7-52
Paper 7-101
Password 6-9, 7-42, 7-43, 7-44, 7-49, 8-6, 8-8,
8-17
Password Copy Pattern 7-28
Password Encrypted PDF User Box 7-95
Password transmission 7-59
Pattern Overwrite 7-25, 7-29
PC (SMB) 7-42
PDF 6-8, 7-48
Photo 6-6
Photo Size 6-13
ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 11-8
11.2 Index by button 11
Polling TX User Box 7-82
Position 7-24, 7-25, 7-29
Position Setting 7-11
Preset Stamp 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29
Prev. Page 3-15, 3-16, 7-75
Preview 3-5, 3-14, 7-68
Preview/Set Range 7-75
Preview/Specify by Input 7-75
Primary Field 8-18
Print 7-6, 7-97, 7-99
Print Document 8-23
Print on Back Cover only 7-23
Print on Front and Back Cover 7-23
Print page # 7-23
Print Position 7-21, 7-22, 7-24, 7-91, 8-18
Proof Print 7-93
Public, Personal, or Group User Box 8-6
R
Receiver RX Ability 7-41
Redial 3-8, 3-10
Reference 7-43
Register Overlay 7-69, 7-77, 7-92
Registered Overlay 7-21, 7-31
Registered Stamp 7-25, 7-29
Relay Destination 8-9
Relay TX Password 8-9
Relay User Box 8-9
Release Held Job 3-7
Reset 7-4
Resolution 6-7, 7-47
S
Save Document 7-4, 8-23
Scan 3-16
Scan Settings 6-5
Scan Size 6-13
Search 7-35, 7-37, 7-46
Secondary Field 7-90, 8-18
Secure Document User Box 7-83
Security Print Only 8-27
Select All 7-4
Send & Print 7-62
Separate Scan 6-18
Separation 6-16
Sharpness 6-15
Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert 7-7
Shortcut key 8-10
Simplex/Duplex 6-7
Skip the Page(s) 7-23
Sort 7-19, 7-20
Stamp 7-21, 7-23
Stamp Composition 7-51
Stamp Element 7-90
Stamp Repeat 7-21, 7-28
Stamp/Composition 7-7, 7-8, 7-61
Subject 7-55
T
Text 6-6, 7-51
Text Color 7-24, 7-29
Text Details 7-21, 7-22, 7-31
Text Size 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29
Text/Background Color 7-25, 7-27, 7-28
Text/Photo 6-6
Thumbnail View 7-4, 7-32
TIFF 6-8, 7-48
Timer transmission 7-58
Timer TX Job 3-8
Top 6-20
U
URL Notification Setting 7-57
Use Existing Color Setting 7-52
User Box 6-5
User Box Administrator Setting 8-26
User Box Name 8-6, 8-8, 8-9, 8-17
User Box No 8-8, 8-9, 8-17
User Box No. 8-6
User Box Setting 8-20
User Name 7-42, 7-43, 7-44
V
V.34 OFF 7-54
View Finishing 3-15, 3-16
W
WebDAV 7-44
X
XPS 6-8, 7-48
Z
Z-Folded Original 6-19
Box operations
bizhub C252 Contents-1
Contents
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome............................................................................................ 1-3
1.2 Energy Star®..................................................................................... 1-4
What is an ENERGY STAR® product? .......................................... 1-4
1.3 Trademarks and registered trademarks......................................... 1-5
License information........................................................................ 1-5
OpenSSL Statement ...................................................................... 1-6
1.4 About this manual............................................................................. 1-9
Structure of the manual ................................................................. 1-9
Notation........................................................................................ 1-10
Screens, windows and dialog boxes ........................................... 1-10
1.5 Explanation of manual conventions.............................................. 1-11
Safety advices.............................................................................. 1-11
Sequence of action ...................................................................... 1-11
Tips .............................................................................................. 1-12
Special text markings................................................................... 1-12
1.6 User manuals .................................................................................. 1-13
User manual [Copy Operations]................................................... 1-13
User manual [Network Scanner Operations]................................ 1-13
User manual [Box Operations] ............................. 1-13
User manual [Enlarge Display Operations] .................................. 1-13
User manual [FK-502 Facsimile Operations] ............................... 1-13
User manual [Network Facsimile Operations].............................. 1-13
User manual [Print Operations] .................................................... 1-14
2 Overview of the box functions
2.1 Box functions .................................................................................... 2-3
Types of boxes............................................................................... 2-4
2.2 Available box functions.................................................................... 2-5
Saving documents ......................................................................... 2-5
Moving/copying box documents ................................................... 2-5
Changing a document name.......................................................... 2-5
Deleting a document...................................................................... 2-5
Changing settings .......................................................................... 2-5
Printing a document....................................................................... 2-5
Transmitting a document ............................................................... 2-6
Faxing a document ........................................................................ 2-6
Contents-2 bizhub C252
2.3 Specifying settings for using the box functions ............................. 2-7
Registering and specifying settings for boxes................................ 2-7
3 Saving documents
3.1 Information on saving documents ................................................... 3-3
User authentication......................................................................... 3-3
Registering boxes ........................................................................... 3-5
Naming documents......................................................................... 3-6
3.2 Saving copies in boxes ..................................................................... 3-7
Settings that can be saved and changed ....................................... 3-7
Saving copy documents ................................................................. 3-8
3.3 Saving scans in boxes..................................................................... 3-11
Using a box destination ................................................................ 3-11
To save data to a box destination ................................................ 3-13
To save data to the specified box ................................................ 3-15
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal
user box
4.1 Displaying the box mode screen...................................................... 4-3
Viewing documents saved in boxes ............................................... 4-3
Searching for a box name............................................................... 4-5
4.2 Deleting document data ................................................................... 4-6
To delete data................................................................................. 4-6
4.3 Changing the document name......................................................... 4-7
To change the document name...................................................... 4-7
4.4 Moving document data ..................................................................... 4-8
To move a document...................................................................... 4-8
4.5 Copying document data.................................................................. 4-10
To copy a document..................................................................... 4-10
4.6 Printing document data .................................................................. 4-12
To print a document ..................................................................... 4-14
To change the number of copies.................................................. 4-15
To specify single-sided/double-sided printing ............................. 4-16
Specifying finishing settings ......................................................... 4-17
To specify the finishing settings ................................................... 4-18
To bind the copies at the center (“Fold & Staple” function) ......... 4-20
Adding a binding margin............................................................... 4-21
To specify the page margin settings............................................. 4-22
Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function) .............................. 4-23
To specify the cover mode settings.............................................. 4-24
bizhub C252 Contents-3
Printing the date/time (“Date/Time” function) .............................. 4-26
To specify the “Date/Time” function ............................................ 4-27
Printing page numbers (“Page #” function).................................. 4-29
To specify the “Page #” function ................................................. 4-30
Printing distribution numbers (“Set Numbering” function)........... 4-33
To specify the “Set Numbering” function .................................... 4-34
4.7 Printing a proof copy...................................................................... 4-36
To print a proof copy ................................................................... 4-36
4.8 Combined printing.......................................................................... 4-38
To print a document..................................................................... 4-40
To change the number of copies ................................................. 4-42
To specify single-sided/double-sided printing ............................ 4-43
Specifying finishing settings ........................................................ 4-44
To specify the finishing settings................................................... 4-45
To bind the copies at the center (“Fold & Staple” function)......... 4-47
Printing the date/time (“Date/Time” function) .............................. 4-48
To specify the “Date/Time” function ............................................ 4-49
Adding a binding margin.............................................................. 4-51
To specify the page margin settings............................................ 4-52
Printing distribution numbers (“Set Numbering” function)........... 4-53
To specify the “Set Numbering” function .................................... 4-54
Printing page numbers (“Page #” function).................................. 4-55
To specify the “Page #” function ................................................. 4-56
5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal
user box
5.1 Editing document data..................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Routing .............................................................................................. 5-4
Routing types................................................................................. 5-4
Transmission methods................................................................... 5-5
Available settings ........................................................................... 5-5
To route data.................................................................................. 5-6
5.3 Specifying destinations.................................................................... 5-7
To specify a program as the destination........................................ 5-7
To select a destination from a group ............................................. 5-9
To select a destination from the address book ........................... 5-11
Searching for a destination .......................................................... 5-13
To directly specify the e-mail destination .................................... 5-15
Directly specifying an FTP destination......................................... 5-17
To directly specify an FTP destination......................................... 5-18
Directly specifying an SMB destination ....................................... 5-20
To directly specify an SMB destination ....................................... 5-21
Contents-4 bizhub C252
5.4 Checking settings before routing .................................................. 5-23
Checking the document information ............................................ 5-23
To check information .................................................................... 5-24
Specifying the file format .............................................................. 5-26
To specify the file format .............................................................. 5-27
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6.1 Editing document data...................................................................... 6-3
6.2 Routing ............................................................................................... 6-4
Routing types.................................................................................. 6-4
Transmission methods.................................................................... 6-4
Available settings............................................................................ 6-5
To route data .................................................................................. 6-6
6.3 Specifying destinations..................................................................... 6-8
To specify a program as the destination ........................................ 6-8
To select a destination from a group ............................................ 6-10
To select a destination from the address book ............................ 6-12
Searching for a destination........................................................... 6-14
To directly specify the e-mail destination ..................................... 6-16
Directly specifying an FTP destination.......................................... 6-18
To directly specify an FTP destination.......................................... 6-19
Directly specifying an SMB destination ........................................ 6-21
To directly specify an SMB destination ........................................ 6-22
6.4 Checking settings before routing .................................................. 6-24
Checking the document information ............................................ 6-24
To check information .................................................................... 6-24
Changing the text ......................................................................... 6-26
To change the stamp elements .................................................... 6-27
7 Control panel settings
7.1 Specifying settings from the control panel..................................... 7-3
Utility mode parameters.................................................................. 7-3
Box permissions ............................................................................. 7-3
Additional information..................................................................... 7-4
7.2 Registering boxes.............................................................................. 7-5
Registering public/personal user boxes ......................................... 7-6
To register a box............................................................................. 7-7
7.3 Displaying the administrator setting screen................................. 7-10
To display the administrator setting screen.................................. 7-10
7.4 Specifying user box settings .......................................................... 7-12
To delete unused user boxes ....................................................... 7-12
bizhub C252 Contents-5
7.5 Specifying box administrator settings.......................................... 7-13
To specify the “User Box Admin. Setting” parameter ................. 7-14
7.6 Specifying HDD setting parameters ............................................. 7-16
To check the hard disk capacity .................................................. 7-17
To overwrite temporary data........................................................ 7-18
Overwrite all data ......................................................................... 7-22
To overwrite all data..................................................................... 7-23
To specify the hard disk locking password ................................. 7-25
To specify hard disk encryption................................................... 7-27
To format the hard disk................................................................ 7-30
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8.1 Settings that can be specified using PageScope
Web Connection ............................................................................... 8-3
User mode...................................................................................... 8-3
Administrator mode ....................................................................... 8-4
8.2 Using PageScope Web Connection................................................ 8-5
System requirements ..................................................................... 8-5
Accessing PageScope Web Connection ....................................... 8-6
Structure of pages ......................................................................... 8-7
Web browser cache ....................................................................... 8-9
For Internet Explorer ...................................................................... 8-9
For Netscape Navigator ................................................................. 8-9
8.3 Logging on and logging off............................................................ 8-10
Logging off ................................................................................... 8-10
To log off ...................................................................................... 8-10
Logging on to user mode (public user) ........................................ 8-12
Logging on to user mode (registered user/box administrator) .... 8-14
To log on as a registered user/box administrator ........................ 8-14
Logging on to administrator mode............................................... 8-16
To log on to administrator mode.................................................. 8-16
8.4 Opening a box (User mode) ........................................................... 8-19
Opening boxes............................................................................. 8-19
To open a box .............................................................................. 8-21
Checking box information and downloading documents ............ 8-22
Changing the box settings ........................................................... 8-24
Deleting a box .............................................................................. 8-26
8.5 Creating boxes (User mode).......................................................... 8-27
To create a box ............................................................................ 8-29
Contents-6 bizhub C252
8.6 Opening a box (Administrator mode) ............................................ 8-30
Opening boxes.............................................................................. 8-30
To open a box............................................................................... 8-31
Changing the box settings............................................................ 8-32
Deleting a box............................................................................... 8-34
8.7 Creating boxes (Administrator mode) ........................................... 8-35
To create a box............................................................................. 8-35
8.8 Specifying box administrator settings (Administrator mode) ..... 8-36
9 Appendix
9.1 Error message list ............................................................................. 9-3
9.2 Entering text....................................................................................... 9-4
To type text ..................................................................................... 9-6
List of available characters ............................................................. 9-6
9.3 Glossary.............................................................................................. 9-7
9.4 Index ................................................................................................. 9-11
1 Introduction
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-3
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome
Thank you for choosing a Konica Minolta digital electrophotographic copier.
This User manual contains details on the operations required to use the Box
functions of bizhub C252 and the precautions on their use. Carefully read this
manual before using these functions.
If software (such as PageScope Job Spooler, HDDTWAIN or PageScope Box
Operator) other than that described in this User manual has been installed,
data saved in a box can be used from a computer on the network. Since the
operation differs for each software, refer to the manual for the corresponding
software for details.
After reading this User manual, store it in the designated holder.
In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and safely, carefully
read the "Installation and Operation Precautions" in the User manual [Copy
Operations] before using the machine.
1 Introduction
1-4 bizhub C252
1.2 Energy Star®
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, we have determined that this machine meets
the ENERGY STAR® Guidelines for energy efficiency.
What is an ENERGY STAR® product?
An ENERGY STAR® product has a special feature that allows it to
automatically switch to a "low-power mode" after a period of inactivity. An
ENERGY STAR® product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on
utility bills and helps protect the environment.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-5
1.3 Trademarks and registered trademarks
KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA Logo, and The essentials of imaging
are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS,
INC.
PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA
MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Netscape Communications, the Netscape Communications logo, Netscape
Navigator, Netscape Communicator, and Netscape are trademarks of
Netscape Communications Corporation.
This machine and PageScope Box Operator are based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
Compact-VJE
Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp.
RC4® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the
United States and/or other countries.
RSA® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. RSA
BSAFE® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the
United States and/or other countries.
License information
This product includes RSA BSAFE
Cryptographic software from RSA Security
Inc.
1 Introduction
1-6 bizhub C252
OpenSSL Statement
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior
written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@
openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor
may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission
of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@crypt-Soft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-7
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the
following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all
code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code;
not just the SSL code.
The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the
code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young
should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This
can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@crypt-soft.com)"
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related.
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement:
"This product includes software written by Tin Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
1 Introduction
1-8 bizhub C252
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public
Licence.]
All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-9
1.4 About this manual
This user manual covers the bizhub C252 box functions.
This section introduces the structure of the manual and notations used for
product names, etc.
This manual is intended for users who understand the basic operations of
computers and the machine. For the operating procedures of Windows or
Macintosh operating system and application programs, refer to the
respective manuals.
In addition, software, such as HDDTWAIN and PageScope Box Operator,
which are used with the Box functions of this machine, are also available.
Users of these software should refer to the corresponding manuals on the
User Software CD-ROM.
Structure of the manual
This manual consists of the following chapters.
Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 2 Overview of the box functions
Chapter 3 Saving documents
Chapter 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
Chapter 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box
Chapter 6 Routing a document from the system user box
Chapter 7 Control panel settings
Chapter 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Chapter 9 Appendix
1 Introduction
1-10 bizhub C252
Notation
Screens, windows and dialog boxes
The touch panel screens and PageScope Web Connection windows and dialog
boxes that appear in this manual show a machine with optional ADF
(automatic document feeder) DF-601 installed.
Product name Notation in the manual
bizhub C252 This machine, C252
Microsoft Windows 98 Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Windows NT 4.0
Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP
When the operating systems above are written
together
Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP
Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-11
1.5 Explanation of manual conventions
The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below.
Safety advices
6 DANGER
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in
fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power.
% Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries.
7 WARNING
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in
serious injuries or property damage.
% Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use
of the machine.
7 CAUTION
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in
slight injuries or property damage.
% Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use
of the machine.
Sequence of action
1 The number 1 as formatted here
indicates the first step of a sequence
of actions.
2 Subsequent numbers as formatted
here indicate subsequent steps of a
sequence of actions.
? Text formatted in this style
provides additional assistance.
% Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the
desired results are achieved.
An illustration inserted
here shows what operations
must be performed.
1 Introduction
1-12 bizhub C252
Tips
2
Note
Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to
ensure safe use of the machine.
2
Reminder
Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be
reminded.
!
Detail
Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed
information.
Special text markings
[Stop] key
The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above.
MACHINE SETTING
Display texts are written as shown above.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-13
1.6 User manuals
The following user manuals have been prepared for this machine.
User manual [Copy Operations]
This manual contains details on basic operations and the operating
procedures for the various copy functions.
- Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for copy
functions, including precautions on installation/use, turning the machine
on/off, loading paper, and troubleshooting operations such as clearing
paper misfeeds.
User manual [Network Scanner Operations]
This manual contains details on specifying network settings for standard
equipment and on operations for scanning functions.
- Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for network
functions and for using Scan to E-Mail, Scan to FTP and Scan to SMB.
User manual [Box Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures for using the boxes.
- Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for using
the boxes on the hard disk.
User manual [Enlarge Display Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures for using copy,
network scanner and fax functions in Enlarge Display mode.
- Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures in Enlarge
Display mode.
User manual [FK-502 Facsimile Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures for faxing.
- Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for fax
functions when the fax kit is installed.
User manual [Network Facsimile Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures for network faxing.
- Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for using
the network fax functions (Internet faxing, SIP faxing and IP address
faxing).
1 Introduction
1-14 bizhub C252
User manual [Print Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures using the standard
built-in printer controller.
- For details on the printing functions, refer to user manual (PDF file) on
User Software CD-ROM.
2 Overview of the box
functions
Overview of the box functions 2
bizhub C252 2-3
2 Overview of the box functions
2.1 Box functions
The Box functions allow document data to be saved on the machine’s
internal hard disk and later printed. Documents that can be saved are data
scanned for copying, received faxes, and saved scan data. To save data to
a box, create the box, and then save the data to the specified box.
The saved data can be printed, sent by e-mail, forwarded to an FTP site, or
sent to a computer. If the Box functions are used, documents can easily be
scanned repeatedly and the data can be saved on separate computers.
2 Overview of the box functions
2-4 bizhub C252
Types of boxes
Various types of boxes are available for different uses. With this machine,
1,000 boxes can be created. The boxes can be given any number between
1 and 999,999,999.
- Public/personal user boxes
Two box types can be specified: "Public" and "Personal". Public user
boxes can be used by all users. Access to the box can be controlled by
specifying a password for the box. Personal user boxes can be used by
certain individuals. If user authentication settings have been applied, the
box can only be accessed by users that have logged on.
- System user boxes
These are boxes that were already set up when the machine was
purchased. There are six types of system user boxes. For details on using
the system user boxes, refer to the corresponding user manual.
Box name Description
Bulletin Board User Box This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Documents
can be saved in this box, which can be used like a bulletin
board. Up to 10 additional boxes can be created within
the bulletin board user box. For details, refer to the User manual
[Facsimile Operations].
Polling TX User Box This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Data
can be registered in this box for polling transmissions. For details,
refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations].
Secure Print User Box Confidential documents can be saved in this box. A password
must be entered in order to access the document. Up to 200
documents can be saved. For details, refer to the User manual
[Print Operations].
Memory RX User Box This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Received
fax documents will be saved in this box when “Memory
RX” is set to “ON”.
When a fax that you do not wish to print out is received, it can
be saved and printed when desired. For details, refer to the
User manual [Facsimile Operations].
Annotation User Box This box is used when adding an image of the date/time or
number to document data saved in Scan mode before routing
it.
For details on saving documents in annotation user boxes, refer
to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations].
Re-TX User Box This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. A document
that, even after redialing, could not be sent because the
recipient’s line is busy is temporarily saved in this box. The
saved document can later be sent to the same recipient.
For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations].
Overview of the box functions 2
bizhub C252 2-5
2.2 Available box functions
Saving documents
Copies made using this machine, sent faxes, and scanned document data
can all be saved in boxes. For details on saving using each function, refer to
the pages indicated below or refer to the User manual [Facsimile
Operations].
For copy data, refer to "Saving copies in boxes" on page 3-7.
For scan data, refer to "Saving scans in boxes" on page 3-11.
Faxing: User manual [Facsimile Operations]
Printing: User manual [Print Operations]
Moving/copying box documents
Document data saved in a box can be moved or copied to a different box.
For details, refer to "Moving document data" on page 4-8 and "Copying
document data" on page 4-10.
Changing a document name
The name given to document data can be changed. For details, refer to the
"Changing the document name" on page 4-7.
Deleting a document
Data that has already been printed or is no longer needed can be deleted.
For details, refer to "Deleting document data" on page 4-6.
Changing settings
Before printing document data, settings can be specified, such as the
finishing settings, the binding position and whether or not a cover sheet is
added. For details, refer to "Printing document data" on page 4-12.
Printing a document
Document data saved in Copy mode or saved with the printer driver can be
printed. Each document can be printed separately or up to 10 documents
can be selected and printed together. This is called "combined printing". If
optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data saved from Scan mode
can also be printed. If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data
saved from Scan mode can also be printed.
For details on printing, refer to "Printing document data" on page 4-12. For
details on combined printing, refer to "Combined printing" on page 4-38.
2 Overview of the box functions
2-6 bizhub C252
Transmitting a document
Document data saved in Scan mode can be sent as an e-mail attachment or
to an FTP site or a shared folder on a computer. In addition, a fax document
saved in a box can be routed.
For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations].
Faxing a document
Document data saved in Fax mode can be sent as a fax.
For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations].
Overview of the box functions 2
bizhub C252 2-7
2.3 Specifying settings for using the box functions
Before using the Box functions, the following settings should be specified.
Registering and specifying settings for boxes
Register the boxes where data will be saved.
Boxes can be set up by using the machine’s touch panel or by using
PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser on a computer on the
network.
!
Detail
For registering and specifying settings for recipients, refer to the
following sections.
"Registering boxes" on page 7-5
"Opening a box (User mode)" on page 8-19
2 Overview of the box functions
2-8 bizhub C252
3 Saving documents
Saving documents 3
bizhub C252 3-3
3 Saving documents
3.1 Information on saving documents
Keep in mind the following information before saving documents.
2
Note
For details on saving fax documents, refer to the User manual [Facsimile
Operations]
User authentication
This machine can be set so that an account or user name and a password
must be entered in order to use the machine. Contact the administrator for
details on the account or user name for using the machine.
With user authentication
Type in the user name and password, and then press the [Access] key.
3 Saving documents
3-4 bizhub C252
With account track
Type in the account name and password, and then press the [Access] key.
2
Note
With user authentication, the only boxes that are displayed are those that
can be accessed by the user that is logged on.
With account track, all boxes are considered shared boxes.
If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to
"Mode 2" and a user enters an incorrect password the specified number
of times, that user is locked out and can no longer use the machine.
Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions.
Saving documents 3
bizhub C252 3-5
Registering boxes
Before document data can be saved, a box must be created to save the data
in.
Up to 1,000 boxes can be created.
Up to 200 documents can be saved in a single box.
A total of 9,000 pages can be saved in all boxes.
A total of 3,000 documents can be saved in all boxes.
There are public user boxes, which can be used by more than one person,
and personal user boxes, which can be used only by a single person. For
details on registering boxes, refer to "Registering boxes" on page 7-5 and
"Opening a box (User mode)" on page 8-19.
3 Saving documents
3-6 bizhub C252
Naming documents
Document data that is saved can be given a name.
- The names can contain a maximum of 30 characters.
- The names can also be changed after they are saved.
- The names can be specified when the data is saved; however, if the data
is saved without a name specified, a preset name is applied.
- Names are created by combining the following elements.
As an example, the document name "CKMBT_C25204102315230" is
described.
Element Description
C This letter indicates the mode when the document was saved.
C: Copy
F: Fax
S: Scan
P: Printing
KMBT_C252 This represents the name of the device that scanned the data. The
factory default is "KMBT_C252". This name can be changed with the
"Input Machine Address" parameter on the Administrator/Machine
Setting screen in Administrator mode. A name of up to 10 characters
can be specified.
04102315230 This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day, hour and minutes
when the data was scanned. The last digit is a serial number if
the document is part of a series of scans.
_0001 This indicates the page when multi-page data is scanned. This numeral
does not appear in the Document Name screen; however, it is
added automatically as part of the name when the file is routed. Add
this part to the name according to the naming conditions of the server
to receive files, for example, when sending data by FTP.
.JPG This is the extension for the specified data format. These characters
do not appear in the Document Name screen; however, they are
added automatically as part of the name when the file is routed.
Saving documents 3
bizhub C252 3-7
3.2 Saving copies in boxes
Settings that can be saved and changed
Within the various functions that can be specified before making copies,
there are functions whose settings can be saved and there are functions that
cannot be saved but can be set when printing. The functions whose settings
can be saved and those that can be changed are listed below.
!
Detail
The "Fold & Staple" function can be selected only if optional finisher
FS-603 is installed.
The hole punch function is available only when optional finishers FS-603
and punch kit are installed.
Function type Function Can be saved Can be set when
printing
Number of copies × o
Paper tray selection o ×
Output tray selection o ×
Basic screen settings
Color o ×
Paper o ×
Zoom o ×
Simplex/Duplex o o
Fold & Staple o o
Sort/Group o o
Punch o o
Staple o o
Combine Originals
Combine Originals o ×
Quality/Density Original Type o ×
Density o ×
Background Removal o ×
Application Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert o ×
Edit Color o ×
Page Margin o o
Stamp o o
3 Saving documents
3-8 bizhub C252
Saving copy documents
The following procedure describes how to save a copy document in a box.
1 Press the [Copy] key in the control panel.
2 Touch [Save in User Box].
A screen for selecting a box appears.
3 Select the box where the data is to be saved. Select the tab that
contains the box where the data is to be saved, and then touch the
button for the box. To specify a box number, touch [User Box #], and
then type in the number of the box.
The button for the selected box appears selected.
? Is a password required when saving data?
% It is not necessary to enter the password when saving data, even if
a password has been specified for the box.
Saving documents 3
bizhub C252 3-9
4 Select whether or not a copy will also be printed when the data is
saved. To print a copy, touch [Yes] under "Make copies also?".
5 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document
Name].
6 The default name appears beside "Document Name".
– To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted,
and then type in the new name.
– To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key.
7 After typing in the name, touch [OK].
3 Saving documents
3-10 bizhub C252
8 Touch [OK]. The Copy mode screen appears again.
If the function was set, [Save in User Box] appears selected.
9 Specify the necessary copy settings.
10 Load the document into the optional ADF or place it on the original
glass.
11 Press the [Start] key in the control panel.
– If "Yes" under "Make copies also?" was selected, the scanned
document is copied and the document data is saved in the
specified box.
– If "No" under "Make copies also?" was selected, the scanned
document data is saved in the specified box.
2
Note
For details on the copy settings, refer to the User manual [Copy
Operations].
For details on printing the document saved in a box, refer to "Printing a
document from a public user box/personal user box" on page 4-3.
Saving documents 3
bizhub C252 3-11
3.3 Saving scans in boxes
Scanned images can be saved in boxes. Box destinations can be registered
in the address book, or a box destination can be specified directly.
The following procedure describes how to specify a box as a destination and
how to use the Direct Input tab.
Using a box destination
A destination where a box has been registered is called a "box destination".
Box destinations are saved on the Address Book tab and are indicated by
"B" on their buttons.
The following procedure describes how to save data to a specified box
destination that has already been registered.
3 Saving documents
3-12 bizhub C252
2
Note
If a box destination is used, the document is automatically saved with the
default name.
To specify whether or not the marks indicating the destination type are
displayed, touch [2 User Setting] in the Utility screen, then [2 Display
Setting], then [2 Scan Basic Screen Default Setting], and then specify a
setting for the "Address Type Symbol Display" parameter. For details,
refer to User manual [Copy Operations].
2
Note
E-mail destinations are indicated by "E", FTP destinations are indicated
by "F", and SMB destinations are indicated by "S".
Saving documents 3
bizhub C252 3-13
To save data to a box destination
1 Press the [Scan] key in the control panel.
The Scan mode screen appears.
2 Touch [Address Book].
The registered destinations are displayed.
3 Touch the button for the box where the data is to be saved.
? Why is [LDAP Search] not displayed on the Address Book tab?
% If the "Manual Destination Input" parameter on the Security Details
screen (displayed by touching [Security Setting] on the
Administrator Setting screen) is set to "Restrict", [LDAP Search]
does not appear on the Address Book tab.
4 Specify the necessary scan settings.
5 Load the document into the optional ADF or place it on the original
glass.
3 Saving documents
3-14 bizhub C252
6 Press the [Start] key in the control panel.
The document is scanned and the document data is saved.
!
Detail
For details on the scan settings, refer to the User manual [Network
Scanner Operations].
Saving documents 3
bizhub C252 3-15
To save data to the specified box
Specifying the box where the data is to be saved directly from the control
panel is called "direct input".
1 Press the [Scan] key in the control panel.
The Scan mode screen appears.
2 Touch [Direct Input].
? Why is the Direct Input tab not displayed?
% If the "Manual Destination Input" parameter on the Security Details
screen (displayed by touching [Security Setting] on the
Administrator Setting screen) is set to "Restrict", the Direct Input
tab does not appear.
3 Touch [Save in User Box].
A screen for selecting a box appears.
3 Saving documents
3-16 bizhub C252
4 Select the box where the data is to be saved. Select the tab that
contains the box where the data is to be saved, and then touch the
button for the box. To specify a box number, touch [User Box Number],
and then type in the number of the box.
The button for the selected box appears selected.
? Which box recipients can be specified for a single transmission?
% Only one box recipient can be specified, but multiple e-mail and fax
recipients can be specified.
5 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document
Name].
6 The default name appears beside "Document Name".
– To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted,
and then type in the new name.
– To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key.
Saving documents 3
bizhub C252 3-17
7 After typing in the name, touch [OK].
8 Touch [OK].
The Direct Input tab appears again. The number of the specified box
appears under "Broadcast Destinations".
? Why can’t the name of the document be changed after returning to
the Direct Input tab?
% To change the document name after returning to the Direct Input
tab, touch [Document Name].
9 Specify the necessary transmission settings.
10 Load the document into the optional ADF or place it on the original
glass.
11 Press the [Start] key in the control panel.
!
Detail
For details on the scan settings, refer to the User manual [Network
Scanner Operations].
3 Saving documents
3-18 bizhub C252
4 Printing a document from
a public user
box/personal user box
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-3
4 Printing a document from a public user
box/personal user box
4.1 Displaying the box mode screen
The documents that can be printed from a box are those that were saved in
the box from Copy or Fax mode or during computer printing.
2
Reminder
If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data saved from Scan
mode can also be printed.
Viewing documents saved in boxes
The following procedure describes how to check the list of documents saved
in boxes.
1 Press the [Box] key in the control
panel.
2 From the Public User Box tab or the Personal User Box tab, touch the
button for the desired box.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-4 bizhub C252
? Why does [Personal User Box] not appear?
% The Personal User Box tab displays only boxes registered to the
user that is logged on with user authentication.
3 If a password has been set for the box, type in the password, and then
touch [OK].
– The list of documents saved in the box is displayed.
2
Reminder
If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to
"Mode 2" and a box user enters an incorrect password the specified
number of times, that box is locked out and can no longer use the
machine. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-5
Searching for a box name
The desired box can be searched for by its name.
1 From the screen containing a list of the boxes, touch [Search by Name].
2 The boxes matching the box search text appear.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-6 bizhub C252
4.2 Deleting document data
To delete data
Data that has already been printed or is no longer needed can be deleted.
1 Select the document to be deleted.
2 Touch [Delete].
3 Check the document information that appeared, and then touch [Yes]
to delete the document.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-7
4.3 Changing the document name
To change the document name
The name of the saved document can be changed.
1 Select the document to be renamed.
2 Touch [Edit Name].
3 The current name appears beside "Document Name". Type in the new
name.
4 Touch [OK].
2
Note
The document name is the name of the file sent by e-mail or to an FTP or
SMB server. Specify a document name according to the routing
conditions of the destination server.
The document name can also be changed when the document is sent.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-8 bizhub C252
4.4 Moving document data
2
Note
A document cannot be moved if multiple documents are selected.
To move a document
Document data currently saved in a box can be moved to a different public
user box/personal user box.
1 Select the document to be moved.
2 Touch [Move/Copy].
3 Under "Action", touch [Move].
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-9
4 Touch the button for the box where the document is to be moved.
? Is a password required for moving data to a different box?
% It is not necessary to enter the password when moving data to a
different box, even if a password has been specified for the box.
5 Check the settings, and then touch [OK].
The data is moved.
2
Note
The date and time that the document is moved is recorded under "Time
Stored".
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-10 bizhub C252
4.5 Copying document data
2
Note
A document cannot be copied if multiple documents are selected.
To copy a document
Document data currently saved in a box can be copied to a different public
user box/personal user box.
1 Select the document to be copied.
2 Touch [Move/Copy].
3 Under "Action", touch [Copy].
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-11
4 Touch the button for the box where the document is to be copied.
? Is a password required for copying data to a different box?
% It is not necessary to enter the password when copying data to a
different box, even if a password has been specified for the box.
5 Check the settings, and then touch [OK].
The data is copied into the selected box.
2
Note
The date and time that the document is copied is recorded under "Time
Stored".
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-12 bizhub C252
4.6 Printing document data
A document saved in a box from Copy mode, Fax mode or during computer
printing can be printed. When printing the document, additional settings,
such as those for the number of copies and double-sided printing, can be
specified. In addition, a proof copy can be printed as a sample before
printing or multiple documents can be combined and printed.
!
Detail
For details on printing a proof copy, refer to "Printing a proof copy" on
page 4-36.
!
Detail
For details on combining multiple documents for printing, refer to
"Combined printing" on page 4-38.
The "Fold & Staple" function can be selected only if optional finisher
FS-603 is installed.
The hole punch function is available only when optional finishers FS-603
and punch kit are installed.
2
Note
If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data saved from Scan
mode can be printed.
If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed and data saved from
Scan mode is being printed, [Cover Mode] cannot be selected in the
Change Setting screen.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-13
2
Note
Double-sided printing is available only if optional automatic duplex unit
AD-503 is installed.
Available functions Description Page reference
# of Sets Specifies the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-15
1-Sided/2-Sided Select whether a single-sided or double-sided
copy is to be printed.
p. 4-16
Finishing Select whether to sort or group the documents.
In addition, Staple and Punch settings can also be
specified.
p. 4-18
Fold & Staple Documents can be folded at their center and
bound with staples.
p. 4-20
Page Margin The document can be printed with a binding margin.
p. 4-22
Cover Mode Documents can be printed with cover pages added
to the front and back.
p. 4-24
Stamp The document can be printed with the date/time,
page number or distribution number.
p. 4-26
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-14 bizhub C252
To print a document
1 Select the document to be printed.
2 Touch [Print].
3 Check the document information that appeared.
To check detailed information, touch [ ] or [ ].
4 To specify a setting, such as the number of copies, touch [Change
Setting] under "Print".
5 Press the [Start] key in the control panel.
!
Detail
For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with
"To change the number of copies" on page 4-42.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-15
To change the number of copies
Specify the number of copies to be printed.
The number of copies can be set between 1 and 999.
% Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
– To reset the number of copies to "1", press the [C] (clear) key.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-16 bizhub C252
To specify single-sided/double-sided printing
Specify whether a single-sided or double-sided copy of the document is to
be printed.
% Touch [1-Sided] or [2-Sided].
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-17
Specifying finishing settings
Select whether to sort or group the documents. In addition, Staple and
Punch settings can also be specified.
The following settings can be specified.
Setting Description
Sort Feeds out copies by sets.
Group Feeds out copies by pages.
Offset Separates the sets or pages of the copies.
Staple Staples copies in the corner or at two locations. The stapling
position can also be selected.
Punch Punching holes in copies. The position of the punched
holes can also be selected.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-18 bizhub C252
To specify the finishing settings
1 Touch [Finishing].
2 Touch [Sort] or [Group].
To separate the copies, touch [Offset].
3 Select the desired Staple and Punch settings.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-19
4 To specify the positions of the staples and punched holes, touch
[Position Setting].
5 Touch the button for the desired position.
– If the "Corner" Staple setting is selected
– If the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected
6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-20 bizhub C252
To bind the copies at the center (“Fold & Staple” function)
Documents can be folded at their center and bound with staples.
1 Touch [Fold & Staple].
2 Touch [OK].
2
Note
"Sort" on the Finishing screen is also selected.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-21
Adding a binding margin
The document can be printed with a binding margin.
The following settings can be specified.
Function Description
Page Margin The binding margin can be added to the left side, right side
or top of the page. The width of the binding margin can be
set between 1/16 in and 3/4 in. If "Auto" is selected, a binding
margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the
document length is 11 45/64" or less. If the document
length is more than 11 45/64", a binding margin along the
short side of the paper is selected.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-22 bizhub C252
To specify the page margin settings
1 Touch [Page Margin].
2 Select the desired position for the binding margin, and then touch [-] or
[+] to specify the width of the binding margin.
– The width of the binding margin can be set in 1/16 in increments.
– To set the binding margin to 0 in, touch [None]. Only the binding
position can be specified.
3 Touch [OK].
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-23
Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function)
Documents can be printed with cover pages added to the front and back.
First, load the paper trays with the paper for the front cover page and the
back cover page.
The following settings can be specified.
2
Note
If a setting for the "Cover Mode" function is to be specified when printing
a copied document, either of the following conditions must be met when
saving the document in a user box.
A paper drawer is specified.
A setting is selected for the "Cover Mode" function.
Setting Description
"Front (Copy)" under "Front Cover" The first page of the document is printed onto the paper
for the front cover page. If "2-Sided" was selected, the
second page of the document is printed onto the back of
the front cover page.
"Front (Blank)" under "Front Cover" A blank page is added as the first page of the document.
"Back (Copy)" under "Back Cover" The last page of the document is printed onto the paper
for the back cover page. If "2-Sided" was selected, the
second to last page of the document is printed onto the
back cover page.
"Back (Blank)" under "Back Cover" A blank page is added as the last page of the document.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-24 bizhub C252
!
Detail
Double-sided printing is available only if optional automatic duplex unit
AD-503 is installed.
To specify the cover mode settings
1 Touch [Cover Mode].
2 Select the desired cover page format.
3 Specify the paper trays loaded with the paper for the front cover page
and back cover page.
Touch [Front Cover Paper] or [Back Cover Paper].
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-25
4 Select the paper tray.
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-26 bizhub C252
Printing the date/time (“Date/Time” function)
The printing date and time can be printed on all pages of the document.
Settings can be specified for the following.
The following settings are available under "Pages".
Item Description
Date Type Select the format for the date.
Time Type Select the format for the time.
Pages Specify the pages to be printed on.
Setting Description
Cover Only The date/time is printed only on the cover page.
All Pages The date/time is printed on all pages.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-27
To specify the “Date/Time” function
1 Touch [Stamp].
2 Touch [Date/Time].
3 Under "Date Type", select the format for the date.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-28 bizhub C252
4 Under "Time Type", select the format for the time.
5 Under "Pages", select the pages that the date/time is to be printed on.
6 To change the printing position, touch [Print Position].
7 Select the printing position. To make fine adjustments to the printing
position, touch [Change Adjustment].
8 Specify the adjustment for moving the printing position up and down
and to the left and right.
9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next four screens that appear.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-29
Printing page numbers (“Page #” function)
Page numbers can be printed on all pages of the document.
Settings can be specified for the following.
The following settings can be specified for printing on inserted pages.
Item Description
Start No. Specify the starting chapter and page numbers.
Page No. Type Select the format for the page number.
Insert Sheet Setting Select whether or not page numbers are printed on the inserted
paper.
Setting Description
Cover Mode All Pages The page number is printed on all pages, including the front
and back cover pages.
Except for
Front Cover
The page number is not printed on the front cover page.
Do Not Print
Page #
The page number is not printed on the front and back cover
pages.
Insert (Copy) Print Page # A copied insertion is counted as a page, and the page
number is printed on it.
Do Not Print
Page #
A copied insertion is counted as a page, but the page
number is not printed on it.
Skip the
Page(s)
A copied insertion is not counted as a page, but the page
number is not printed on it.
Insert (Blank) Do Not Print
Page #
A blank insertion is counted as a page, but the page
number is not printed on it.
Skip the
Page(s)
A blank insertion is not counted as a page, and the page
number is not printed on it.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-30 bizhub C252
To specify the “Page #” function
1 Touch [Stamp].
2 Touch [Page #].
3 Under "Start No.", type in the starting page and chapter numbers.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-31
4 Under "Page No. Type", select the page number format.
5 If there are inserted pages, specify whether or not page numbers are
printed on them. Touch [Insert Sheet Setting].
6 Select how page numbers are printed on inserted pages, and then
touch [OK].
7 To change the printing position, touch [Print Position].
8 Select the printing position. To make fine adjustments to the printing
position, touch [Change Adjustment].
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-32 bizhub C252
9 Specify the adjustment for moving the printing position up and down
and to the left and right.
10 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next four screens that appear.
2
Note
The Chapter settings are applied only when "1-1, 1-2 ..." is selected
under "Page No. Type".
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-33
Printing distribution numbers (“Set Numbering” function)
Distribution numbers can be printed on all pages of the document.
Settings can be specified for the following.
The following settings can be selected as the pages to be printed on.
Item Description
Start Number Specify the starting distribution number.
Text Color Select the text color for the distribution numbers.
Pages Specify the pages to be printed on.
Setting Description
Cover Only The distribution number is printed only on the cover page.
All Pages The distribution number is printed on all pages.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-34 bizhub C252
To specify the “Set Numbering” function
1 Touch [Stamp].
2 Touch [Set Numbering].
3 Under "Start Number", use the keypad to specify the starting number.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-35
4 Under "Text Color", select the desired color.
5 Under "Pages", select the pages that the distribution numbers are to
be printed on.
6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-36 bizhub C252
4.7 Printing a proof copy
The contents of the document can be checked.
2
Note
A proof copy cannot be printed if multiple documents are selected. Print
proof copies one document at a time.
To print a proof copy
1 Select the document to be proofed.
2 Touch [Proof Print].
3 Check the document information that appeared.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-37
4 Press the [Start] key in the control panel.
2
Note
Only the first page is printed.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-38 bizhub C252
4.8 Combined printing
Multiple documents can be printed together. Up to 10 documents can be
selected to be printed together.
Additional settings, such as those for the number of copies, can be specified
for the selected document.
!
Detail
For details on changing the settings, refer to descriptions starting with
"To change the number of copies" on page 4-42.
!
Detail
Documents saved in a box and having a front cover, back cover and
blank insertion in addition to Image Repeat and OHP Interleave settings
specified cannot be combined and printed.
Double-sided printing is available only if optional automatic duplex unit
AD-503 is installed.
The "Fold & Staple" function can be selected only if optional finisher
FS-603 is installed.
The hole punch function is available only when optional finishers FS-603
and punch kit are installed.
Available functions Description Page reference
# of Sets Specifies the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-42
1-Sided/2-Sided Select whether a single-sided or double-sided
copy is to be printed.
p. 4-43
Finishing Select whether to sort or group the documents.
In addition, Staple and Punch settings can also
be specified.
p. 4-45
Fold & Staple Documents can be folded at their center and
bound with staples.
p. 4-47
Page Margin The document can be printed with a binding margin.
p. 4-52
Date/Time The printing date and time can be printed on all
pages of the document.
p. 4-49
Set Numbering Distribution numbers can be printed on all pages
of the document.
p. 4-54
Page # Page numbers can be printed on all pages of the
document.
p. 4-56
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-39
2
Note
If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data saved from Scan
mode can be printed.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-40 bizhub C252
To print a document
1 Touch [Combine].
The list of documents appears.
2 Select the document to be printed.
The selected document is highlighted, and its bind number appears on
the right side.
3 Touch [Combine] in the lower-right corner.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-41
4 Check the document information that appeared.
To check detailed information, touch [ ] or [ ].
5 To specify a setting, such as the number of copies of each document,
touch [Print].
6 Press the [Start] key in the control panel.
!
Detail
For details on changing the settings, refer to descriptions starting with
"To change the number of copies" on page 4-42.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-42 bizhub C252
To change the number of copies
Specify the number of copies to be printed.
The number of copies can be set between 1 and 999.
% Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
– To reset the number of copies to "1", press the [C] (clear) key.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-43
To specify single-sided/double-sided printing
Specify whether a single-sided or double-sided copy of the document is to
be printed.
% Touch [1-Sided] or [2-Sided].
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-44 bizhub C252
Specifying finishing settings
Select whether or not the copies are separated. In addition, Staple and
Punch settings can be specified.
The following settings can be specified.
Setting Description
Offset Separates the sets or pages of the copies.
Staple Staples copies in the corner or at two locations. The stapling
position can also be selected.
Punch Punching holes in copies. The position of the punched
holes can also be selected.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-45
To specify the finishing settings
1 Touch [Finishing].
2 To separate the copies, touch [Offset].
3 Select the desired Staple and Punch settings.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-46 bizhub C252
4 To specify the positions of the staples and punched holes, touch
[Position Setting].
5 Touch the button for the desired position.
– If the "Corner" Staple setting is selected
– If the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected
6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-47
To bind the copies at the center (“Fold & Staple” function)
Documents can be folded at their center and bound with staples.
1 Touch [Fold & Staple].
2 Touch [OK].
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-48 bizhub C252
Printing the date/time (“Date/Time” function)
The printing date and time can be printed on all pages of the document.
Settings can be specified for the following.
The following settings are available under "Pages".
Item Description
Date Type Select the format for the date.
Time Type Select the format for the time.
Pages Specify the pages to be printed on.
Setting Description
Cover Only The date/time is printed only on the cover page.
All Pages The date/time is printed on all pages.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-49
To specify the “Date/Time” function
1 Touch [Date/Time].
2 Under "Date Type", select the format for the date.
3 Under "Time Type", select the format for the time.
4 Under "Pages", select the pages that the date/time is to be printed on.
5 To specify the printing position, touch [Print Position].
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-50 bizhub C252
6 Select the printing position. To make fine adjustments to the printing
position, touch [Change Adjustment].
7 Specify the adjustment for moving the printing position up and down
and to the left and right.
8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next four screens that appear.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-51
Adding a binding margin
The document can be printed with a binding margin.
The following settings can be specified.
Function Description
Page Margin The binding margin can be added to the left side, right side
or top of the page. The width of the binding margin can be
set between 1/16 in and 3/4 in. If "Auto" is selected, a binding
margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the
document length is 11 45/64" or less. If the document
length is more than 11 45/64", a binding margin along the
short side of the paper is selected.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-52 bizhub C252
To specify the page margin settings
1 Touch [Page Margin].
2 Select the desired position for the binding margin, and then touch [-] or
[+] to specify the width of the binding margin.
– The width of the binding margin can be set in 1/16 in increments.
– To set the binding margin to 0 in, touch [None]. Only the binding
position can be specified.
3 Touch [OK].
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-53
Printing distribution numbers (“Set Numbering” function)
Distribution numbers can be printed on all pages of the document.
Settings can be specified for the following.
The following settings can be selected as the pages to be printed on.
Item Description
Start Number Specify the starting distribution number.
Text Color Select the text color for the distribution numbers.
Pages Specify the pages to be printed on.
Setting Description
Cover Only The distribution number is printed only on the cover page.
All Pages The distribution number is printed on all pages.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-54 bizhub C252
To specify the “Set Numbering” function
1 Touch [Set Numbering].
2 Under "Start Number", use the keypad to specify the starting number.
3 Under "Text Color", select the desired color.
4 Under "Pages", select the pages that the distribution numbers are to
be printed on.
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-55
Printing page numbers (“Page #” function)
Page numbers can be printed on all pages of the document.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item Description
Start No. Specify the starting chapter and page numbers.
Page No. Type Select the format for the page number.
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-56 bizhub C252
To specify the “Page #” function
1 Touch [Page #].
2 Under "Start No.", type in the starting page and chapter numbers.
3 Under "Page No. Type", select the desired page number format.
4 To specify the printing position, touch [Print Position].
Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4
bizhub C252 4-57
5 Select the printing position. To make fine adjustments to the printing
position, touch [Change Adjustment].
6 Specify the adjustment for moving the printing position up and down
and to the left and right.
7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next four screens that appear.
2
Note
The Chapter settings are applied only when "1-1, 1-2 ..." is selected
under "Page No. Type".
4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box
4-58 bizhub C252
5 Routing a document from
a public user
box/personal user box
Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5
bizhub C252 5-3
5 Routing a document from a public user
box/personal user box
5.1 Editing document data
From the Route tab, document data can be edited in addition to being
routed.
Function Description
Delete Data that has already been sent or is no longer needed can be
deleted.
For details, refer to "Deleting document data" on page 4-6.
Edit Name The name of the saved document can be changed.
For details, refer to "Changing the document name" on
page 4-7.
Move/Copy Document data currently saved in a box can be moved or copied
to a different public user box/personal user box.
For details on moving document data, refer to "Moving document
data" on page 4-8.
For details on copying document data, refer to "Copying document
data" on page 4-10.
5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box
5-4 bizhub C252
5.2 Routing
Document data saved in a box from Scan mode or Fax mode can be sent via
the network. The data can easily be routed by simply registering a
destination with this machine instead of by sending the data through
different computers.
2
Note
Data saved from Fax mode can be sent with the fax image resolution.
Routing types
Document data saved in boxes can be routed in three different ways.
Type Description
E-Mail Direct Input Document data is sent as an e-mail attachment.
File (FTP) Direct Input Document data is uploaded to the specified FTP server.
File (SMB) Direct Input Document data is sent to a shared folder on the specified
computer.
Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5
bizhub C252 5-5
Transmission methods
Select one of the four routing methods according to the desired transmission
purpose and use.
Destinations can be specified using any combination of these methods.
Available settings
The following settings can be specified.
Method Description Page reference
Program Multiple preset routing types are programmed
with this method.
p. 5-7
Group Multiple destinations can be registered
with this method. This is convenient for
always sending data to the same people.
p. 5-9
Address book Select different destinations from
those registered in the address book.
p. 5-11
Direct input With this method, destinations for email
transmissions, FTP transmissions
and SMB transmissions are entered directly
from the control panel. This is
used when routing data to a destination
that is not already registered.
E-mail transmission:
p. 5-15
FTP transmission:
p. 5-18
SMB transmission:
p. 5-21
Setting Description
Destinations Shows the destination number and number of destinations.
Transmission method Select the desired method for specifying the destination.
Document Info. Shows various information, such as the name, date and time
that the transmission document was registered.
File Type Select the format for the file that is to be transmitted.
5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box
5-6 bizhub C252
To route data
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
A screen appears, allowing you to specify the destination.
2 Specify the destination by using the programs and groups.
3 If necessary, check the document information and specify the data
format.
4 Press the [Start] key in the control panel.
2
Note
To change the print settings specified with a program, select the
destination program, and then change the settings.
If there are limitations on the document name due to the destination
server conditions, it may not be possible to send the transmission.
Contact your network administrator for information when specifying the
document name during a transmission.
Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5
bizhub C252 5-7
5.3 Specifying destinations
To specify a program as the destination
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [Select from Program].
5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box
5-8 bizhub C252
3 Touch the button for the program where the data is to be sent.
The button for the selected program appears selected.
4 Touch [OK].
Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5
bizhub C252 5-9
To select a destination from a group
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [Select from Group].
5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box
5-10 bizhub C252
3 Touch the button for the group where the data is to be sent.
The list of the addresses registered in the group appears.
4 Select the destinations.
– To send the data to all addresses in the group, touch [Select All].
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5
bizhub C252 5-11
To select a destination from the address book
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [Select from Address Book].
5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box
5-12 bizhub C252
3 Touch the button for the destination where the data is to be sent.
– The desired destination can be searched for. For details, refer to
"Searching for a destination" on page 5-13.
The button for the selected destination appears selected.
4 Touch [OK].
2
Note
If the "Manual Destination Input" parameter on the Security Details
screen (displayed by touching [Security Setting] on the Administrator
Setting screen) is set to "Restrict", [LDAP Search] does not appear.
Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5
bizhub C252 5-13
Searching for a destination
Follow the procedure described below to search for the desired destination.
- Detail Search
Type in the name of the destination or part of the address to search for
the corresponding address.
- LDAP Search
Search the addresses registered in the LDAP server for the address that
corresponds to the conditions.
To perform a Basic Search, type in the search text. To search with
multiple conditions, perform a Advanced Search.
For a basic search
For an advanced search
5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box
5-14 bizhub C252
2
Reminder
For details on an LDAP search and specifying settings for the LDAP
server, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations].
An LDAP search is possible only if "Select from Address Book" was
selected.
Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5
bizhub C252 5-15
To directly specify the e-mail destination
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [E-Mail Direct Input].
A screen appears, allowing an address to be entered.
5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box
5-16 bizhub C252
3 Type in the e-mail address of the destination.
To specify an additional address, touch [Next Dest.].
4 Touch [OK].
2
Note
Frequently entered user names and domain names can be registered to
be recalled and used again. First, prefixes and suffixes must be
registered in Administrator mode.
Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5
bizhub C252 5-17
Directly specifying an FTP destination
The following settings can be specified for the FTP destination.
To specify more advanced FTP settings, touch [Detail Setting].
Setting Description
Host Name Type in the host name or IP address for the destination.
Destination Folder Type in the path of the destination folder.
User Name Type in the user name for logging on.
Password Type in the password.
Setting Description
Port Number Shows the port number.
PASV mode Select whether or not the PASV (passive) mode is used.
Proxy Select whether or not a proxy server is used.
5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box
5-18 bizhub C252
To directly specify an FTP destination
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [File (FTP) Direct Input].
The Scan to FTP screen appears.
Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5
bizhub C252 5-19
3 Type in the information for the FTP server.
To specify an additional FTP server, touch [Next Dest.], and then enter
the information.
4 Touch [OK].
5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box
5-20 bizhub C252
Directly specifying an SMB destination
The following settings can be specified.
Setting Description
Host Name Type in the host name or IP address for the destination.
Destination Folder Type in the path of the destination folder.
User Name Type in the user name for logging on.
Password Type in the password.
Reference Click to check the structure of the folders on the destination
computer. This can be used to directly specify the destination
folder.
Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5
bizhub C252 5-21
To directly specify an SMB destination
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [File (SMB) Direct Input].
The Scan to SMB screen appears.
5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box
5-22 bizhub C252
3 Type in the destination information.
To specify an additional SMB server, touch [Next Dest.], and then enter
the information.
4 Touch [OK].
Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5
bizhub C252 5-23
5.4 Checking settings before routing
Checking the document information
The following document information can be checked.
Item Description
Time Stored Shows the date and time that the data was saved.
Job No. Shows the number of the registered job.
User Name Shows the name of the user that saved the data.
Document Name Shows the name of the document.
5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box
5-24 bizhub C252
To check information
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [Document Info.].
The Document Info. screen appears. Touch [ ] or [ ] to display the
next screen of document information.
Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5
bizhub C252 5-25
3 Touch [OK].
5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box
5-26 bizhub C252
Specifying the file format
Data can be routed in the following file formats.
In addition, there are settings for specifying how much of the saved data is
converted.
The encryption level can be selected if "File Type" was set to "PDF" or
"Compact PDF". Settings can be specified for the following.
Format Description
PDF Sends data in the PDF format.
TIFF Sends data in the TIFF format.
JPEG Sends data in the JPEG format.
Compact PDF Sends data in the compact PDF format.
Setting Description
Single Page A single file is created for each page of the document.
Multi-Page A single file is created from the entire document.
Item Description
Encryption Level Select the encryption level.
Password Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data. Type
in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type
in the password twice.
Permissions Enter the password necessary to change document permissions.
Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation,
type in the password twice.
Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5
bizhub C252 5-27
To specify the file format
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [File Type].
3 Select the format of the file to be sent and select the scan setting.
5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box
5-28 bizhub C252
4 If "PDF" or "Compact PDF" was selected, touch [Encrypt].
5 Specify the encryption settings.
6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
6 Routing a document from
the system user box
Routing a document from the system user box 6
bizhub C252 6-3
6 Routing a document from the system
user box
6.1 Editing document data
From the Route tab, document data can be edited in addition to being
routed.
!
Detail
For details on creating annotation user boxes and saving documents in
them, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations].
Function Description
Delete Data that has already been sent or is no longer needed can be
deleted.
For details, refer to "Deleting document data" on page 4-6.
Edit Name The name of the saved document can be changed.
For details, refer to "Changing the document name" on
page 4-7.
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6-4 bizhub C252
6.2 Routing
Document data saved in an Annotation User box from Scan mode can be
sent via the network. The data can easily be routed by simply registering a
destination with this machine instead of by sending the data through
different computers.
Routing types
Document data saved in Annotation User boxes can be routed in three
different ways.
Transmission methods
Select one of the four routing methods according to the desired transmission
purpose and use.
Destinations can be specified using any combination of these methods.
Type Description
E-Mail Direct Input Document data is sent as an e-mail attachment.
File (FTP) Direct Input Document data is uploaded to the specified FTP server.
File (SMB) Direct Input Document data is sent to a shared folder on the specified
computer.
Method Description Page Reference
Program Multiple preset routing types are programmed
with this method.
p. 6-8
Group Multiple destinations can be registered
with this method. This is convenient for
always sending data to the same people.
p. 6-10
Address book Select different destinations from
those registered in the address book.
p. 6-12
Direct input With this method, destinations for email
transmissions, FTP transmissions
and SMB transmissions are entered directly
from the control panel. This is
used when routing data to a destination
that is not already registered.
E-mail transmission:
p. 6-16
FTP transmission:
p. 6-19
SMB transmission:
p. 6-22
Routing a document from the system user box 6
bizhub C252 6-5
Available settings
The following settings can be specified.
Setting Description
Destinations Shows the destination number and number of destinations.
Transmission method Select the desired method for specifying the destination.
Document Info. Shows various information, such as the name, date and time
that the transmission document was registered.
Edit Stamp Elements Specify the text to be printed.
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6-6 bizhub C252
To route data
1 On the System User Box tab, touch [Annotation User Box].
– The Annotation User boxes can also be used from the Public User
Box screen. For details on using the boxes from the Public User
Box screen, refer to "Routing" on page 5-4.
2 Select the annotation user box.
Routing a document from the system user box 6
bizhub C252 6-7
3 Select the document, and touch [Route].
– To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all
documents, touch [Reset].
A screen appears, allowing you to specify the destination.
4 Specify the destination by using the programs and groups.
5 If necessary, check the document information and specify the text.
6 Press the [Start] key in the control panel.
2
Note
To change the print settings specified with a program, select the
destination program, and then change the settings.
If there are limitations on the document name due to the destination
server conditions, it may not be possible to send the transmission.
Contact your network administrator for information when specifying the
document name during a transmission.
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6-8 bizhub C252
6.3 Specifying destinations
To specify a program as the destination
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
– To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all
documents, touch [Reset].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [Select from Program].
Routing a document from the system user box 6
bizhub C252 6-9
3 Touch the button for the program where the data is to be sent.
The button for the selected program appears selected.
4 Touch [OK].
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6-10 bizhub C252
To select a destination from a group
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
– To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all
documents, touch [Reset].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [Select from Group].
Routing a document from the system user box 6
bizhub C252 6-11
3 Touch the button for the group where the data is to be sent.
The list of the addresses registered in the group appears.
4 Select the destinations.
– To send the data to all addresses in the group, touch [Select All].
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6-12 bizhub C252
To select a destination from the address book
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
– To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all
documents, touch [Reset].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [Select from Address Book].
Routing a document from the system user box 6
bizhub C252 6-13
3 Touch the button for the destination where the data is to be sent.
– The desired destination can be searched for. For details, refer to
"Searching for a destination" on page 5-13.
The button for the selected destination appears selected.
4 Touch [OK].
2
Note
If the "Manual Destination Input" parameter on the Security Details
screen (displayed by touching [Security Setting] on the Administrator
Setting screen) is set to "Restrict", [LDAP Search] does not appear.
An LDAP search is possible only if "Select from Address Book" was
selected.
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6-14 bizhub C252
Searching for a destination
Follow the procedure described below to search for the desired destination.
- Detail Search
Type in the name of the destination or part of the address to search for
the corresponding address.
- LDAP Search
Search the addresses registered in the LDAP server for the address that
corresponds to the conditions.
To perform a Basic Search, type in the search text. To search with
multiple conditions, perform a Advanced Search.
For a basic search
For an advanced search
Routing a document from the system user box 6
bizhub C252 6-15
2
Reminder
For details on an LDAP search and specifying settings for the LDAP
server, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations].
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6-16 bizhub C252
To directly specify the e-mail destination
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
– To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all
documents, touch [Reset].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [E-Mail Direct Input].
A screen appears, allowing an address to be entered.
Routing a document from the system user box 6
bizhub C252 6-17
3 Type in the e-mail address of the destination.
To specify an additional address, touch [Next Dest.].
4 Touch [OK].
2
Note
Frequently entered user names and domain names can be registered to
be recalled and used again. First, prefixes and suffixes must be
registered in Administrator mode.
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6-18 bizhub C252
Directly specifying an FTP destination
The following settings can be specified for the FTP destination.
To specify more advanced FTP settings, touch [Detail Setting].
2
Note
To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents,
touch [Reset].
Setting Description
Host Name Type in the host name or IP address for the destination.
Destination Folder Type in the path of the destination folder.
User Name Type in the user name for logging on.
Password Type in the password.
Setting Description
Port Number Shows the port number.
PASV mode Select whether or not the PASV (passive) mode is used.
Proxy Select whether or not a proxy server is used.
Routing a document from the system user box 6
bizhub C252 6-19
To directly specify an FTP destination
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [File (FTP) Direct Input].
The Scan to FTP screen appears.
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6-20 bizhub C252
3 Type in the information for the FTP server.
To specify an additional FTP server, touch [Next Dest.], and then enter
the information.
4 Touch [OK].
Routing a document from the system user box 6
bizhub C252 6-21
Directly specifying an SMB destination
The following settings can be specified.
2
Note
To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents,
touch [Reset].
Setting Description
Host Name Type in the host name or IP address for the destination.
Destination Folder Type in the path of the destination folder.
User Name Type in the user name for logging on.
Password Type in the password.
Reference Click to check the structure of the folders on the destination
computer. This can be used to directly specify the destination
folder.
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6-22 bizhub C252
To directly specify an SMB destination
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [File (SMB) Direct Input].
The Scan to SMB screen appears.
Routing a document from the system user box 6
bizhub C252 6-23
3 Type in the destination information.
To specify an additional SMB server, touch [Next Dest.], and then enter
the information.
4 Touch [OK].
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6-24 bizhub C252
6.4 Checking settings before routing
Checking the document information
The following document information can be checked.
2
Note
To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents,
touch [Reset].
To check information
1 Select the document, and touch [Route].
The Route screen appears.
Item Description
Time Stored Shows the date and time that the data was saved.
Job No. Shows the number of the registered job.
User Name Shows the name of the user that saved the data.
Document Name Shows the name of the document.
Routing a document from the system user box 6
bizhub C252 6-25
2 Touch [Document Info.].
The Document Info. screen appears. Touch [ ] or [ ] to display the
next screen of document information.
3 Touch [OK].
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6-26 bizhub C252
Changing the text
Previously specified text or the count is set for annotation user boxes. This
information can be changed while printing.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item Description
Secondery Field Text can be added to the number that is printed. A maximum
of 20 characters can be entered.
Date/Time Select the format for the date and time that is printed.
Density Select the density for the numbers that are printed.
Number Type Select the output format (number of digits) for the numbers
that are printed.
Print Position Select the printing position.
Routing a document from the system user box 6
bizhub C252 6-27
To change the stamp elements
1 Select the document, and then touch [Route].
The Route screen appears.
2 Touch [Edit Stamp Elements].
The Edit Stamp Elements screen appears.
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6-28 bizhub C252
3 Touch the button for the setting to be changed, and then change the
setting.
– Touch [Secondary Field], type in the text to be added, and then
touch [OK].
– Touch [Date/Time], select the format for the date and time to be
printed, and then touch [OK].
Routing a document from the system user box 6
bizhub C252 6-29
– Touch [Density], touch the button for the desired text density, and
then touch [OK].
– Touch [Number Type], select the format for the numbering, and
then touch [OK].
– Touch [Print Position], select the printing position, and then touch
[OK].
6 Routing a document from the system user box
6-30 bizhub C252
2
Note
To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents,
touch [Reset].
7 Control panel settings
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-3
7 Control panel settings
7.1 Specifying settings from the control panel
Various basic settings and advanced parameters for using this machine can
be set from the Utility mode. This chapter describes the procedures for
setting the Utility mode parameters for the Box functions.
2
Note
For details on registering bulletin board user boxes, refer to the User
manual [Facsimile Operations]. For details on registering annotation user
boxes, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations].
Utility mode parameters
The following Utility mode parameters are described in this manual.
Box permissions
Users of various levels can access this machine. Other than machine
administrators, box administrators can use Box functions. The following
types of users can access boxes.
User types
Parameter Description Page reference
One-Touch Registration
New boxes can be created. p. 7-5
Administrator Setting Specify settings for managing the boxes. p. 7-10
p. 7-12
p. 7-13
p. 7-16
Type Description
Public user Users for accessing when user authentication settings have not been
applied
Registered user Users registered by the administrator when user authentication settings
have been applied
Box administrator Users that can access User mode as a box administrator when user authentication
settings have been applied
Administrator Administrator managing the machine
7 Control panel settings
7-4 bizhub C252
Additional information
To log on to User mode as the box administrator, type "boxadmin" as the
user name and type the password specified in "Specifying box administrator
settings" on page 7-13.
Operations that can be performed
*1 Only boxes created by the registered user
*2 Box administrators and administrators can perform operations without
entering the password, even if a password has been set for the box.
2
Reminder
The following operations are performed from PageScope Web
Connection. For details, refer to Chapter 8, "Settings that can be
specified using PageScope Web Connection" on page 8-3.
Operation Create boxes View/download/
delete documents
Change box
settings
Delete boxes
Box type Public
user
boxes
Personal
user
boxes
Public
user
boxes
Personal
user
boxes
Public
user
boxes
Personal
user
boxes
Public
user
boxes
Personal
user
boxes
Public user o × o × o × o ×
Registered
user
o o o o*1 o o*1 o o
Box administrator
o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2
Administrator o*2 × × × o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-5
7.2 Registering boxes
New boxes can be registered.
The following types of boxes can be registered.
2
Note
The mailbox transmission function can be specified for a box.
If user authentication settings have been applied, be sure to type in the
user name and password, and press the "Access" key. If authentication
settings have not been applied, personal user boxes cannot be created.
Type Description
Public User Box Shared box that anyone can use
Personal User Box Box for an individual that can only be accessed by users that
have logged on if user authentication settings have been applied
Bulletin Board User Box Bulletin box registered on the Bulletin Board User Box screen
displayed from the System User Box tab
For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations].
Annotation User Box This box is used when adding an image of the date/time or
number to document data saved in Scan mode before routing
it. The type of text to be added can be specified during routing.
Annotation user boxes are registered in Administrator mode.
For details, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations].
7 Control panel settings
7-6 bizhub C252
Registering public/personal user boxes
The following information can be entered in each screen.
2
Note
If user authentication is canceled after personal user boxes are created,
the personal user boxes become public user boxes.
2
Reminder
If "Password Rules" is set to "ON", a password containing less than 8
characters cannot be registered.
If a box password containing less than 8 characters has already been
registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before
setting "Password Rules" to "ON". For details on the password rules,
refer to the User manual [Copy Operations].
Item Description
User Box No. Touch [User Box No.], and then use the keyboard to type in
the user box number.
Name Touch [Name], and then use the keyboard that appears to
type in the user box name.
Password Touch [Password], and then use the keyboard that appears
to type in the password.
Index Touch [Index], and then select the search characters.
Type Touch [Public] or [Personal].
If [Personal] was selected, the owner name appears. To
change the user, touch [Change Owner], and then select a
different user.
Auto Delete Document Select the time until the document is deleted after it is
saved in the box.
Advanced Functions This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Select
whether or not the confidential reception function is
used with the box. To use the confidential reception function,
type in the password for confidential reception.
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-7
To register a box
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Touch [1 One-Touch Registration].
3 Touch [3 User Box].
The User Box screen appears.
7 Control panel settings
7-8 bizhub C252
4 Touch [1 Public/Personal User Box].
5 Touch [New].
The registration screen 1/2 appears.
6 Specify the desired box settings.
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-9
7 Touch [Fwd.].
The registration screen 2/2 appears.
8 Specify the desired settings.
9 Touch [OK].
10 Touch [Close].
The box is registered.
7 Control panel settings
7-10 bizhub C252
7.3 Displaying the administrator setting screen
To display the administrator setting screen
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Touch [3 Administrator Setting].
– An item in the Utility mode menus
can also be selected by pressing
the key in the keypad for the
number beside the desired
button. For "3 Administrator
Setting", press the [3] key in the
keypad.
3 Type in the password, and then touch [OK].
For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-4.
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-11
4 The Administrator Setting screen appears.
2
Note
If the optional fax kit is not installed, [8 Fax Setting] does not appear.
To quit specifying the Utility mode setting, touch [Exit] in the sub display
area or press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, cancel the Utility mode
by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax,
Scan or Box mode appears.
2
Reminder
If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to
"Mode 2" and an incorrect administrator password is entered the
specified number of times, it is no longer possible to enter Administrator
mode. For details on the "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error"
parameter, refer to the User manual [Copy Operations].
7 Control panel settings
7-12 bizhub C252
7.4 Specifying user box settings
Boxes that are no longer needed should be deleted.
To delete unused user boxes
Boxes containing no saved documents can be deleted as unused boxes.
1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [System Setting].
2 In the System Setting screen, touch [0 User Box Setting].
3 In the User Box Setting screen, touch [1 Delete Unused User Box].
4 To delete the boxes, touch [Yes].
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-13
7.5 Specifying box administrator settings
Select whether or not use by the box administrator is permitted. (The default
setting is "Restrict".)
When logging on as the box administrator, type "boxadmin" as the user
name in the user authentication screen, and then type in the password
specified in step 5.
Relationship with other settings
- If "User Authentication" and "Account Track" are both set to "OFF",
"Allow" cannot be selected.
2
Note
For details on operations that can be performed by box administrators,
refer to "Box permissions" on page 7-3.
2
Reminder
If "Password Rules" is set to "ON", a password containing less than 8
characters cannot be registered.
If a box password containing less than 8 characters has already been
registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before
setting "Password Rules" to "ON". For details on the password rules,
refer to the User manual [Copy Operations].
7 Control panel settings
7-14 bizhub C252
To specify the “User Box Admin. Setting” parameter
1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting].
2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [2 User Box Admin. Setting].
The User Box Admin. Setting screen appears.
3 Touch the button for the desired setting.
– If [Restrict] was selected, continue with step 4.
– If [Allow] was selected, [Password] appears. Skip to step 5 to
specify the password. (The default password is "PASSWORD".)
4 Touch [OK].
Use by the box administrator is restricted. This completes the
procedure for restricting use by the box administrator.
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-15
5 Touch [Password].
A screen appears, allowing the password for the box administrator to
be specified.
6 Type in the password, and then touch [OK].
A screen for retyping the password appears.
7 Type in the password specified in step 6, and then touch [OK].
The password for the box administrator is specified and use by the box
administrator is permitted.
!
Detail
For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-4.
2
Note
To cancel the setting, touch [Cancel].
7 Control panel settings
7-16 bizhub C252
7.6 Specifying HDD setting parameters
Various hard disk operations are available, such as those for erasing data
from the hard disk and for checking the amount of free space on the hard
disk.
The following parameters are available.
!
Detail
The following data is erased when the hard disk is formatted.
Program destinations
Abbreviated destinations
Authentication method settings
User authentication settings
Account track settings
User boxes
Box settings
Documents in boxes
Secure print user box settings
Bulletin board user box settings
Parameter Description
Check HDD Capacity Displays the amount of hard disk space that is used and remaining
Temporary Data Overwrite
Setting
Select either "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" as the method for overwriting
data on the hard disk.
Select whether encrypting or overwriting is given priority when the
security kit is installed.
Overwrite All Data Overwrites all data
HDD Lock Password Specifies the hard disk locking password
HDD Encryption Setting Specify the setting for encrypting the data on the hard disk.
A setting is required only when the security kit is installed.
HDD Formatting Formats the hard disk.
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-17
To check the hard disk capacity
The amount of space on the hard disk can be checked.
1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting].
2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting].
3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [1 Check HDD Capacity].
The Check HDD Capacity screen appears.
4 Touch [Close].
The HDD Setting screen appears again.
7 Control panel settings
7-18 bizhub C252
To overwrite temporary data
The setting for overwriting data on the hard disk can be specified. (The
default setting is "Mode 1".)
This machine destroys data by overwriting all data in the entire area where
an image was stored when that image data on the hard disk is considered
unnecessary. In addition, destroying the structure of data other than image
data prevents the disclosure of the data in case the hard disk is stolen.
Mode 1: Overwritten with 0x00
Mode 2: Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with
the letter "A" (0x61) % Verified
1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting].
2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting].
3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [2 Temporary Data Overwrite Setting].
The Temporary Data Overwrite Setting screen appears.
If the security kit is not installed:
If the security kit is installed:
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-19
4 Select the method for overwriting temporary data.
– Select "Encryption Priority" when performing high-level security
encryption processing. However, data overwriting with encryption
of the hard disk differs depending on whether "Mode 1" or "Mode
2" is selected. Normally, "Encryption Priority" is selected.
– If "Overwrite Priority" is selected, data overwriting with encryption
of the hard disk is performed depending on whether "Mode 1" or
"Mode 2" is selected. Select this setting when the format of the
data written to the hard disk is considered important.
– If the security kit is installed, select "Encryption Priority" or
"Overwrite Priority".
5 Touch [OK].
– If "Encryption Priority" and "Overwrite Priority" was changed,
continue with step 6.
The mode for overwriting temporary data is specified.
7 Control panel settings
7-20 bizhub C252
6 If a message appears, asking whether to reformat the hard disk, touch
[Yes].
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [No].
7 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine.
8 When an error message appears, indicating that the encryption key
does not match, the Administrator Setting screen appears. In this
screen, touch [HDD Format].
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-21
2
Reminder
When turning the main power switch off, then on again, wait at least 10
seconds before turning it on, otherwise the copier may not function
normally.
2
Note
In order to enable the setting specified in the Temporary Data Overwrite
Setting screen, "Overwrite Temporary Data" on the Security Details
screen must be set to "ON".
7 Control panel settings
7-22 bizhub C252
Overwrite all data
The machine can be set to overwrite all data on the hard disk.
With this procedure, all information on this machine is erased.
Before performing this operation, be sure to consult with your service
representative.
The methods for overwriting data are described below.
Setting Description
Mode 1 Overwritten with 0x00
Mode 2 Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers % Overwritten with random 1-byte
numbers % Overwritten with 0x00
Mode 3 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with random 1-
byte numbers % Verified
Mode 4 Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten
with 0xff
Mode 5 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 %
Overwritten with 0xff
Mode 6 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 %
Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff %
Overwritten with 512 bytes of the specified data
Mode 7 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 %
Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff %
Overwritten with 0xaa
Mode 8 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 %
Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff %
Overwritten with 0xaa % Verified
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-23
To overwrite all data
1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting].
2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting].
3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [3 Overwrite All Data].
The Overwrite All Data screen appears.
4 Select the desired method for overwriting data on the hard disk, and
then click [Overwrite].
– The length of time to perform mode 1 is about 40 minutes.
A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to overwrite
the data.
7 Control panel settings
7-24 bizhub C252
5 To overwrite the data, touch [Yes].
– To return to the Overwrite All Data screen without overwriting the
data, touch [No].
The message "Overwriting all data was completed. Turn OFF main SW
and ON" appears.
6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine.
The data on the hard disk is overwritten.
2
Reminder
While the data is being overwritten, do not use the main power switch to
turn the machine off and on.
When turning the main power switch OFF then ON, wait for 10 seconds
or longer before turning it ON again; otherwise the copier may not
function normally.
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-25
To specify the hard disk locking password
The password for locking the hard disk can be specified.
The hard disk locking password is extremely important in order to protect the
data on the hard disk. Keep the password in a safe place so that it will not
be lost.
1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting].
2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting].
3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [4 HDD Lock Password].
– The Register HDD Lock Password screen appears.
– If a hard disk locking password has already been specified, touch
[6 HDD Lock Password] to display a screen that contains the
current password. From the displayed screen, the password can be
changed or the hard disk locking password can be canceled.
4 Type in the password (20 characters long), and then touch [OK].
A screen for retyping the password appears.
5 Type in the password specified in step 4, and then touch [OK].
The message "HDD password is registered. Turn main switch OFF and
ON" appears.
6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine.
The hard disk locking password is set.
7 Control panel settings
7-26 bizhub C252
2
Reminder
Be sure to keep the password in a safe place so that it will not be lost. If
the password is lost, significant restoration operations will be required for
recovery.
2
Note
Do not specify a password that is 20 times the same character.
2
Reminder
Be sure to keep the specified password in a safe place so that it will not
be lost.
When turning the main power switch OFF then ON, wait for 10 seconds
or longer before turning it ON again; otherwise the copier may not
function normally.
!
Detail
For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-4.
2
Note
To cancel the setting, touch [Cancel].
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-27
To specify hard disk encryption
If the security kit is installed, the machine can be set to encrypt the hard disk.
The setting for the "HDD Encryption Setting" parameter must be specified by
the machine’s administrator.
[HDD Encryption Setting] appears when optional security kit SC-503 is
installed.
If the encryption key is specified or changed, data saved on the hard disk
may no longer be available.
1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting].
2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting].
3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Encryption Setting].
The Register Encryption Key screen appears.
4 Type in the encryption key (20 characters long), and then touch [OK].
– The encryption key must contain 20 characters.
– Do not specify an encryption key that is 20 times the same
character.
– Be sure to keep the specified encryption key in a safe place so that
it will not be lost.
The Register Encryption Key screen appears again.
7 Control panel settings
7-28 bizhub C252
5 Type the encryption key specified in step 4, and then touch [OK].
The message "Turn the main switch OFF and ON." appears.
6 Follow the instructions in the screen and use the main power switch to
turn off the machine.
– When turning the main power switch off, then on again, wait at least
10 seconds before turning it on, otherwise the copier may not
function normally.
7 Use the main power switch to turn on the machine.
An error message appears, indicating that the encryption key does not
match.
8 Display the Administrator Setting screen.
– When an error message appears, indicating that the encryption key
does not match, the Administrator Setting screen appears.
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-29
9 In the Encryption Key failure screen, touch [HDD Format].
– If [Reset Encryption Key] is touched, the Register Encryption Key
screen appears. If authentication of the encryption key failed,
specify the encryption key again.
10 Restart the machine.
The hard disk is encrypted.
2
Reminder
When turning the main power switch off, then on again, wait at least 10
seconds before turning it on, otherwise the copier may not function
normally.
7 Control panel settings
7-30 bizhub C252
To format the hard disk
The hard disk can be formatted.
When the hard disk is formatted, the data saved on the hard disk is erased.
1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting].
2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting].
3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [5 HDD Formatting].
A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to format the
hard disk.
4 To format the hard disk, touch [Yes].
– To return to the HDD Setting screen without formatting the hard
disk, touch [No].
A screen appears, indicating that the hard disk is being formatted, and
the hard disk is formatted.
Control panel settings 7
bizhub C252 7-31
5 Restart the machine.
The hard disk is formatted.
2
Reminder
When turning the main power switch off, then on again, wait at least 10
seconds before turning it on, otherwise the copier may not function
normally.
7 Control panel settings
7-32 bizhub C252
8 Specifying settings using
PageScope Web
Connection
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-3
8 Specifying settings using PageScope
Web Connection
8.1 Settings that can be specified using PageScope Web
Connection
PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported by
the HTTP server integrated into the device. Using a Web browser on a
computer connected to the network, machine settings can be specified from
PageScope Web Connection.
When changing settings, operations such as typing text can be performed
more easily from your computer.
The following Box function settings can be specified.
User mode
The following settings can be specified by all users.
2
Note
A password does not need to be entered when logged on as the box
administrator.
Only users logged on as a registered user can monitor or create private
user boxes.
Setting Description
User Box tab Open User Box Operations, for example, to download or delete a
saved document, can be performed after a box
number and password have been specified. In addition,
attributes, such as the box password and
owner, can be changed.
The following boxes can be opened.
• Public/personal user boxes
Create User Box The following boxes can be created.
• Public/personal user boxes
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-4 bizhub C252
Administrator mode
The following more advanced settings can be specified by the administrator.
Setting Description
User Box tab Open User Box Operations, for example, to download or delete a
saved document, can be performed after a box
number has been specified. In addition, attributes,
such as the box password and owner, can be
changed.
The following boxes can be opened.
• Public/personal user boxes
Create User Box The following boxes can be created.
• Public user boxes
User Box Admin.
Settings
Whether or not box administrator settings have
been specified can be viewed.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-5
8.2 Using PageScope Web Connection
System requirements
!
Detail
PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported
by the HTTP server integrated into the printer controller.
Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, machine
settings can be specified from PageScope Web Connection.
For details on the display formats, refer to "Logging on and logging off"
on page 8-10.
Item Operating environment
Network Ethernet (TCP/IP protocol)
Computer applications Compatible Web browsers:
Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver.6 or later recommended (*)
(JavaScript enabled and Cookie enabled),
Netscape Navigator Ver.7.02 or later
(JavaScript enabled and Cookie enabled)
Macromedia® Flash® (plug-in version 7.0 or later required
if “Flash” is selected as the display format)
(*) If Internet Explorer Ver. 5.5 is being used, Microsoft XML
parser MSXML3.X must be installed.
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-6 bizhub C252
Accessing PageScope Web Connection
PageScope Web Connection can be accessed directly from a Web browser.
1 Start the Web browser.
2 In the Address bar, type the IP address of the this machine, and then
press the [Enter] key.
– http:///
Example: If the IP address of this machine is 192.168.1.20
http://192.168.1.20/
!
Detail
When SSL/TLS is enabled, the URL becomes:
https:///
Even if "http://" is entered, the URL at "https://" is automatically
accessed.
2
Note
If user authentication is enabled, a page for entering the user name and
password appears before you can operate the machine.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-7
Structure of pages
The page that appears immediately after PageScope Web Connection is
accessed is called the User mode page. This page appears after logging on
to the application as a public user.
The pages of PageScope Web Connection are constructed as shown below.
!
Detail
For details on logging on, refer to "Logging on and logging off" on
page 8-10.
12
3
11
5 6 10
8
12
4
7
9
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-8 bizhub C252
No. Item Description
1 Konica Minolta logo Click the logo to go to the Konica Minolta
Web site at the following URL.
http://konicaminolta.com/
2 PageScope Web Connection logo Click the logo to display the version information
for PageScope Web Connection.
3 Logon mode The mode (public, registered user or administrator)
of the user that is currently
logged on is displayed.
4 [Logout] button Click to log off from the current mode.
5 Status display The statuses of this machine’s printer
section and scanner section are displayed
using icons.
6 Message display If an error occurred in the machine, the
status of the malfunction/error and other
error information are displayed.
7 Help The page specified in "Online Manual
URL" is displayed.
8 Refresh button Click to update the displayed page.
9 Device name The name of the device currently being
accessed is displayed.
10 Tabs Select the category of the page to be displayed.
The following tabs are displayed
in User mode.
• System
• Job
• User Box
• Print
• Scan
11 Menus Information and settings for the selected
tab are listed. The menu that appears differs
depending on the tab that is selected.
12 Information and settings Details of the item selected from the
menu are displayed.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-9
Web browser cache
The newest information may not appear in the PageScope Web Connection
pages because older versions of pages are saved in the cache for the Web
browser. In addition, the following problems may occur when the cache is
used.
When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web
browser.
2
Note
If the utility is used with the cache enabled and Administrator mode was
timed out, the timeout page may appear even after the utility is accessed
again. In addition, since the machine’s control panel remains locked and
cannot be used, the machine must be restarted. In order to avoid this
problem, disable the cache.
2
Note
The menus and commands may vary depending on the Web browser
version. For details, refer to Help for the Web browser.
For Internet Explorer
1 On the "Tools" menu, click "Internet Options".
2 On the General tab, click [Settings] under "Temporary Internet files".
3 Select "Every visit to the page", and then click [OK].
For Netscape Navigator
1 On the "Edit" menu, click "Preferences".
2 In the "Category" box on the left side of the dialog box, click
"Advanced", then "Cache".
3 Under "Compare the page in the cache to the page on the network:",
select "Every time I view the page".
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-10 bizhub C252
8.3 Logging on and logging off
When PageScope Web Connection is accessed, the page for a public user
appears. In order to log on as a registered user or an administrator when user
authentication is performed, it is necessary to log off first, then log on again.
Logging off
2
Note
When logged on, a timeout occurs and you will automatically be logged
off if no operation is performed for a specified length of time.
The timeout period for User mode and Administrator mode can be
specified in the page that appears by clicking "Authentication (Network
Tab)", then "Auto Logout" in Administrator mode.
To log off
1 Click [Logout] at the upper left of the window.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-11
The user is logged off, and the Login page appears.
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-12 bizhub C252
Logging on to user mode (public user)
There are two procedures for logging on to User mode: one for a registered
user and one for a public user. If user authentication is not performed, log on
as a public user.
1 In the Login page, select "Public User".
– If necessary, select the language and display format.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-13
2 Click [Login].
The User mode page appears.
2
Note
If "Flash" is selected as the display format, the following will appear using
the Flash feature. Flash Player is required to use the Flash feature.
Status icons and messages
Page display when "Input Tray" is selected in the menu below "Device
Information" on the System tab
Page display of the Job tab
If a screen reading software is used, we recommend selecting "HTML" as
the display format.
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-14 bizhub C252
Logging on to user mode (registered user/box administrator)
There are two procedures for logging on to User mode: one for a registered
user and one for a public user. The following procedure describes how to
perform user authentication and log on with a specific user name.
2
Note
Click the icon to the right of the "User Name" box, and then select a user
name from the list.
To log on as a registered user/box administrator
1 In the Login page, type the user name and the password.
– To log on as the box administrator, type "boxadmin" as the user
name and type the password specified in "Specifying box
administrator settings (Administrator mode)" on page 8-36.
– If necessary, select the language and display format.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-15
2 Click [Login].
The User mode page appears.
2
Note
If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to
"Mode 2" and a user enters an incorrect password the specified number
of times, that user is locked out and can no longer use the machine.
Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions.
If a screen reading software is used, we recommend selecting “HTML” as
the display format.
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-16 bizhub C252
Logging on to administrator mode
In order to specify system and network settings, log on to Administrator
mode.
2
Note
When logged on to Administrator mode, the control panel of this machine
is locked and cannot be used.
Depending on the status of the machine, you may not be able to log on
to Administrator mode.
To log on to administrator mode
1 In the Login page, select "Administrator".
– If necessary, select the language and display format.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-17
2 Type in the password for the machine’s administrator, and then click
[OK].
The administrator mode page appears.
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-18 bizhub C252
2
Reminder
If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to
"Mode 2" and an incorrect administrator password is entered the
specified number of times, it is no longer possible to enter Administrator
mode. For details on the "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error"
parameter, refer to the User manual [Copy Operations].
If a screen reading software is used, we recommend selecting “HTML” as
the display format.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-19
8.4 Opening a box (User mode)
Files in boxes used with Box functions can be viewed, downloaded or
deleted.
Opening boxes
The list of boxes currently created and the list of data saved in those boxes
can be viewed.
2
Reminder
If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to
"Mode 2" and a box user enters an incorrect password the specified
number of times, that box is locked out and can no longer use the
machine. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions.
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-20 bizhub C252
Open public/personal user box
Public/personal user box list
Item Description
User Box No. Type in the number of the box to be opened.
User Box Password Type in the password if a password has been set for
the box.
Item Description
Page (Display by 50 cases) If there are more than 50 boxes, specify the page to be
displayed.
Search from Index Displays the list of boxes according the index search
characters selected when the box was created.
Box list Displays the box number, box name, owner’s name
and date/time that the box was created. appears
beside boxes that have a password specified.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-21
To open a box
1 Select the box type, and then click [Next].
2 In the "User Box No." box, type the box number.
3 In the "User Box Password" box, type the password.
4 Click [OK].
A list of the documents saved in the specified box is displayed.
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-22 bizhub C252
Checking box information and downloading documents
The basic box information and the list of documents saved in the box can be
viewed. In addition, documents can be deleted, downloaded, renamed or
moved/copied.
2
Note
The documents that can be downloaded are those saved in Scan mode.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-23
Box detail information
Document list
Item Description
Refresh to the new information Click to display the most recent information.
User Box No. Displays the number of the box.
User Box Name Displays the name of the box.
Index Displays the search characters for the box.
Documentation Auto Delete Time Displays the length of time until documents are deleted
from the box.
[User Box Setting] button Click this button to specify basic box settings.
[Delete User Box] button Click this button to delete the box.
Item Description
Document Name Displays the name of the document.
Time Stored Displays the date/time that the document was registered.
Click this icon to display detailed information for the
document.
Indicates documents that can be downloaded. Click
this icon to download the document to a computer.
Specify the type of data to be downloaded and the
range of pages, and then click [OK].
Click this icon to delete the document.
Click this icon to change the name of the document.
Click this icon to move/copy the document to a different
box.
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-24 bizhub C252
Changing the box settings
To change the box settings, click [User Box Setting] in the Box Detail
Information page.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-25
When changing the box attributes, specify information for the following, and
then click [Apply].
2
Reminder
The following appear with personal user boxes.
User Box Owner is changed.
User Box Type
Owner Name
Item Description
User Box No. Displays the box number. This cannot be changed.
User Box Name Type in a box name of a maximum of 20 characters.
Index Type in the characters used for indexing. To add the
box to the "Main" group, select the check box.
Documentation Auto Delete Time Select the length of time that a document is stored in
the box.
User Box Password is changed. Select this check box to change the password for the
box.
Current Password Type in the current password of a maximum of 8 alphanumeric
characters.
New Password Type in the new password. Enter 8 or less numbers.
The plus sign (+) and quotation mark (“) cannot be
used.
Retype New Password Type in the new password again for confirmation.
User Box Owner is changed. Select this check box to change the box type or the
owner of the box.
User Box Type Select either "Public" or "Personal" as the box type.
Owner Name If "Personal" was selected as the box type, type in an
owner’s name of 64 or less characters.
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-26 bizhub C252
Deleting a box
The currently open box can be deleted.
1 In the Box Detail Information page, click [Delete User Box].
2 Check the displayed information, and then click [OK] to delete the box.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-27
8.5 Creating boxes (User mode)
New boxes can be created.
Specify settings for the following when creating new boxes.
For public/personal boxes
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-28 bizhub C252
Item Description
User Box No. Type in a box number between 1 and 999,999,999. Up
to 1,000 boxes can be created.
User Box Name Type in a box name of a maximum of 20 characters.
User Box Password Type in a password of a maximum of 8 alphanumeric
characters. The plus sign (+) and quotation mark (“)
cannot be used.
Retype User Box Password Type in the password again for confirmation.
Index Type in the characters used for indexing. To add the
box to the "Main" group, select the check box.
User Box Type Select either "Public" or "Personal" as the box type.
Owner Name If "Personal" was selected as the box type, type in an
owner’s name of 64 or less characters.
Documentation Auto Delete Time Select the length of time that a document is stored in
the box.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-29
To create a box
1 Select the type of box to be created, and then click [Next].
2 Specify the necessary settings, and then click [Apply].
2
Reminder
If "Password Rules" is set to "ON", a password containing less than 8
characters cannot be registered.
If a box password containing less than 8 characters has already been
registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before
setting "Password Rules" to "ON". For details on the password rules,
refer to the User manual [Copy Operations].
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-30 bizhub C252
8.6 Opening a box (Administrator mode)
When logged on to Administrator mode, the settings of boxes can be
changed or the boxes can be deleted without the box password being
entered.
Opening boxes
The list of boxes currently created and the list of data saved in those boxes
can be viewed.
Open public/private user box
Public/personal user box list
Item Description
User Box No. Type in the number of the box to be opened.
Item Description
Page (Display by 50 cases) If there are more than 50 boxes, specify the page to be displayed.
Search from Index Displays the list of boxes according the index search characters
selected when the box was created.
Box list Displays the box number, box name, owner’s name and
date/time that the box was created. appears beside boxes
that have a password specified.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-31
To open a box
1 Select the box type, and then click [Next].
2 In the "User Box No." box, type the box number.
3 Click [OK].
A list of the documents saved in the specified box is displayed.
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-32 bizhub C252
Changing the box settings
To change the box settings, click [User Box Setting] in the Box Detail
Information page.
When changing the box attributes, specify information for the following, and
then click [Apply].
Item Description
User Box No. Displays the box number. This cannot be changed.
User Box Name Type in a box name of a maximum of 20 characters.
Index Type in the characters used for indexing. To add the box to
the "Main" group, select the check box.
Documentation Auto Delete Time Select the length of time that a document is stored in the
box.
User Box Password is changed. Select this check box to change the password for the box.
New Password Type in the new password of a maximum of 8 alphanumeric
characters. The plus sign (+) and quotation mark (“) cannot
be used.
Retype New Password Type in the new password again for confirmation.
User Box Owner is changed. Select this check box to change the box type or the owner
of the box.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-33
2
Reminder
The following appear with personal user boxes.
User Box Owner is changed.
User Box Type
Owner Name
2
Reminder
If "Password Rules" is set to "ON", a password containing less than 8
characters cannot be registered.
User Box Type Select either "Public" or "Personal" as the box type.
Owner Name If "Personal" was selected as the box type, type in an owner’s
name of 64 or less characters.
Item Description
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-34 bizhub C252
Deleting a box
The currently open box can be deleted.
1 In the Box Detail Information page, click [Delete User Box].
2 Check the displayed information, and then click [OK] to delete the box.
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8
bizhub C252 8-35
8.7 Creating boxes (Administrator mode)
New boxes can be created. Only shared boxes can be created in
Administrator mode.
To create a box
1 Select the type of box to be created, and then click [Next].
2 Specify the necessary settings, and then click [Apply].
– For details on the settings, refer to "Creating boxes (User mode)"
on page 8-27.
8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8-36 bizhub C252
8.8 Specifying box administrator settings (Administrator
mode)
The box can be checked to see whether or not box administrator settings
have been specified.
!
Detail
The box administrator can monitor documents in public and personal
user boxes without a password.
From the control panel of the machine or the Login page of PageScope
Web Connection, log on with the ID "boxadmin", and then type in the
specified password.
9 Appendix
Appendix 9
bizhub C252 9-3
9 Appendix
9.1 Error message list
If any of the following error messages appear, perform the operations
described below.
Message Cause and remedy
Cannot connect to the
network.
A connection to the network could not be established. Check if the
network cable is correctly connected. In addition, check that the Network
Setting parameters on the Administrator Setting screen have
been correctly specified.
The destination cannot
be selected because the
number of destinations
has exceeded the max.
number of broadcasting
possible.
The number of destinations specified exceeds the number possible
for a broadcast transmission. Reduce the number of broadcast destinations,
or send the transmission in multiple batches.
Image could not be
saved in User Box due to
insufficient capacity in
HDD. Please check Job
History.
The hard disk is full. Delete unnecessary data, and then try saving the
image.
The number of User Box
has reached its maximum.
The number of user boxes that can be registered has reached the
maximum number possible. Delete unnecessary user boxes, and
then try registering new boxes.
The number of documents
in User Box has
reached its maximum.
The number of documents that can be saved in a user box has
reached the maximum number possible. Delete unnecessary documents,
and then try saving the document.
The number of jobs has
reached its maximum.
Please wait until a job is
completed.
The number of jobs that can be programmed has reached the maximum
number possible. Wait until a job has been completed, or delete
a current job.
9 Appendix
9-4 bizhub C252
9.2 Entering text
The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard that appears in
the touch panel for typing in the names of registered accounts and custom
paper sizes. The keypad can also be used to type in numbers.
Any of the following keyboards may appear.
Example
Password input screen:
Screen for entering the name of a custom paper size:
Appendix 9
bizhub C252 9-5
Touching [Shift] switches the keyboard display between lowercase letters
(numbers) and uppercase letters (symbols).
9 Appendix
9-6 bizhub C252
To type text
% Touch the button for the desired character from the keyboard that
appeared.
– To type in uppercase letters or symbols, touch [Shift].
– Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad.
The entered characters appear in the text box.
2
Note
To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key.
!
Detail
To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ] and [ ] to move
the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type
in the desired letter or number.
List of available characters
space
Alphanumeric
characters/
symbols
Appendix 9
bizhub C252 9-7
9.3 Glossary
Term Definition
10Base-T/100Base-
TX/1000Base-T
An Ethernet standard, which is a cable consisting of twisted copper
wire pairs. The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10 Mbps, of
100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps.
anonymous FTP While normal FTP sites are protected by an account name and password,
this type of FTP site can be used by anyone without a password
by simply entering "anonymous" as the account name.
Auto IP A function for automatically acquiring the IP address. If acquisition
of the IP address failed with DHCP, an IP address is acquired from
the address space of 169.254.0.0.
bit Abbreviation for Binary Digit. The smallest unit of information (data
quantity) on a computer or printer. Displays data using 0 or 1.
Bit-mapped Font Fonts that are represented by a set of dots to form the character.
Dithering may occur if the character size is increased.
BMP Abbreviation for Bitmap. A file format for saving image data which
uses the .bmp extension. Commonly used on Windows platforms.
You can specify the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full
color (16,777,216 colors). Images are not usually compressed when
saved.
Byte Unit of information (data quantity) on a computer or printer. Configured
as 1 byte equals 8 bits.
Compact PDF Compression method for reducing the data amount using the PDF
format when converting color documents to data.
The highest compression efficiency is achieved by identifying the
text and image regions and using the resolution and compression
method most appropriate for each region.
The compact PDF format can be selected when converting documents
to data using the scanning functions of this machine.
Contrast The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image
(light/dark variation). An image with little light/dark variation is
said to have a low contrast, and an image with large light/dark variation
is said to have a high contrast.
Default The initial settings. The settings first selected when the machine is
turned on, or the settings first specified when the function is selected.
Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a "gateway" to access
computers not on the same LAN
Density An indication of the amount of darkness in the image
Density Adjustment The function that adjusts the color tones of an output device, such
as a printer or monitor
DHCP Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol in
which a client computer on a TCP/IP network automatically specifies
the network settings from the server. With collective management of
the IP address for DHCP clients on the DHCP server, you can avoid
duplication of an address and you can build a network easily.
Dither A method of using only black and white to create the illusion of different
shades of gray. The process is simpler than with error diffusion;
however, some irregularities may occur.
9 Appendix
9-8 bizhub C252
DNS Abbreviation for Domain Name System. A system that acquires the
supported IP addresses from host names in a network environment.
DNS allows the user to access other computers over a network by
specifying host names, instead of difficult to memorize and understand
IP addresses.
DPI (dpi) Abbreviation for Dots Per Inch. A resolution unit used by printers and
scanners. Indicates how many dots per inch are represented in an
image. The higher the value, the higher the resolution.
Driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral
device.
Ethernet LAN transmission line standard
File Extension The characters added to the file name in order to differentiate file formats.
The file extension is added after a period, for example, ".bmp"
or ".jpg".
FTP Abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol. A protocol for transferring
files over the Internet or an intranet on the TCP/IP network.
Gradation The light and dark levels of an image. As the number increases,
smoother brightness variations can be reproduced.
Grayscale Monochrome image expressive form using the gradation information
from black to white
Halftone The method of producing the light and dark parts of an image
through varying sizes of black and white dots
Hard Disk Large capacity storage device for storing data. The data can be
stored even if the power is turned off.
HTTP Abbreviation for HyperText Transfer Protocol. A protocol used to
send and receive data between a Web server and a client (Web
browser). Documents containing images, recordings, and video clips
can be exchanged with the expressive form information.
Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers
on to a computer
IP Address A code (address) that is used to identify individual network devices
over the Internet. A maximum of three digits for four numbers are
displayed such as 192.168.1.10. IP addresses are assigned to devices,
including computers, which are connected to the Internet.
J2RE Abbreviation for Java 2 Runtime Environment. One type of JavaVirtual
Machine (Java VM) in a program operating environment written
in the object-oriented language Java, developed by Sun Microsystems.
This is required to run applications that were created with
Java.
Java A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems that runs
on most computers regardless of the installed hardware and operating
system. However, in order to run Java applications, an operating
environment called "Java Virtual Machine (Java VM)" is required.
JPEG Abbreviation for Joint Photographic Experts Group. One of the file
formats for saving image data. (The file extension is ".jpg".) The compression
ratio is roughly 1/10 to 1/100. This format uses an effective
method in the compression of continuous-tone images, such as
photographs.
Term Definition
Appendix 9
bizhub C252 9-9
Kerberos A type of network authentication system used by Windows 2000 or
later. Used in Active Directory authentication. Users can be safely
and efficiently authenticated with a two-phase authentication (user
logon and network resource usage) on a dependable site set up on
the network.
LAN Abbreviation for Local Area Network. A network which connects
computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring
buildings.
LDAP Abbreviation for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. On a TCP/IP
network, such as the Internet or an intranet, this protocol is used to
access a database for managing environment information and the email
addresses of network users.
Macromedia® Flash® Software developed by Macromedia, Inc. and used to create data
combining vector-graphic animation and sound, and the format of
this data file. The bidirectional content can be manipulated using a
keyboard and a mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact, and
they can be accessed with the Web browser plug-in.
Memory Storage device for storing data temporally. When the power is
turned off the data may or may not be erased.
Multi-Page TIFF A single TIFF file that contains multiple pages
OS Abbreviation for Operating System. Basic software for controlling
the system of a computer.
PASV Abbreviation for PASsiVe. A mode for connecting to an FTP server
from within a firewall. If this mode is not specified, the firewall will be
considered inaccessible and the connection will be terminated, preventing
the file from being sent.
PDF Abbreviation for Portable Document Format. An electronically formatted
document which uses the .pdf extension. Based on the Post-
Script format, you can use the free Adobe Reader software to view
documents.
Pixel An image pixel. The smallest unit of an image.
Plug-and-play Ability to automatically find and use the appropriate driver when a
peripheral device is connected to a computer
Port Number The number that identifies the transmission port for each process
running on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be
used by multiple processes.
PPI Abbreviation for Pixels Per Inch. Measuring unit for resolution, particularly
for monitors and scanners. This measurement indicates the
number of image pixels contained within 1 inch.
Preview A function that allows you to view an image before processing a print
or scan job
Print Job Print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device
Property Attribute information
When using a printer driver, various functions can be specified in the
file properties.
In the file properties, you can check the attribute information of the
file.
Protocol The rules that allow computers to communicate with other computers
or peripheral devices
Term Definition
9 Appendix
9-10 bizhub C252
Proxy Server A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection between
each client and different servers to effectively ensure security
over the entire system for Internet connections
Resolution Displays the ability to reproduce the details of images and print matter
correctly
Scanning With the scanning operation of the scanner, an image is read while
the row of image sensors is gradually moved. The direction that the
image sensors are moved is called the main scanning direction, and
the direction in which the image sensors are arranged is called the
sub-scanning direction.
Screen Frequency Indicates the density of dots used to create the image
Single-Page TIFF A single TIFF file that contains only a single page
SMB Abbreviation for Server Message Block. A protocol that shares files
and printers over a network and which is mainly used by Microsoft
Windows.
SSL/TLS Abbreviation for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security. The
encoding method for safely transmitting data between the Web server
and browser.
Subnet Mask The unit used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks).
It is used to identify the bits in a network address that are
higher than the IP address.
TCP/IP Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
The de facto standard protocol used by the Internet that uses IP addresses
to identify each network device.
Thumbnail A small image that shows the contents of the image or document file
(the image displayed when the file was opened)
TIFF Abbreviation for Tagged Image File Format. One of the file formats
for saving image data. (The file extension is ".tif".) Depending on the
tag indicating the data type, information for various image formats
can be saved in a single image data.
TWAIN The interface standard for imaging devices, such as scanners and
digital cameras, and for applications, such as graphics software. In
order to use a TWAIN-compliant device, the TWAIN driver is required.
Uninstall To delete software installed on a computer
USB Abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. A general interface standard
for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices to a computer.
Web Browser Software such as Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator for viewing
Web pages
Term Definition
Appendix 9
bizhub C252 9-11
9.4 Index
A
Account name 3-3
Account track 3-3
Address book
destination 5-11, 6-12
Administrator mode 8-4, 8-16
Administrator setting screen 7-10
Administrator settings 7-13
B
Binding 4-20, 4-47
Binding margin 4-21, 4-51
Box administrator 8-14
Box administrator settings 7-13
Box destination 3-11
Box functions 2-5
Box mode screen 4-3
Box name search 4-5
Box registration 7-5
Box types 2-4
C
Center binding 4-20, 4-47
Changing document names from
machine 4-7
Checking document information
from machine 5-23, 6-24
Checking routing
information 5-23, 6-24
Combined printing 4-38
Compact PDF 5-26
Copy number 4-15, 4-42
Copying document data 4-10
Cover mode 4-23
Cover pages 4-23
Creating boxes 7-5
D
Date 4-26, 4-48
Delete unused user box 7-12
Deleting document data 4-6
Destinations 3-11, 5-7, 5-9, 5-11,
5-15, 5-17, 5-20, 6-8, 6-10, 6-12,
6-16, 6-18, 6-21
Direct input 3-15
Document information check from
machine 5-23, 6-24
Document name change from
machine 4-7
Document viewing 4-3
Double-sided/single-sided
printing 4-16, 4-43
E
Editing document data 5-3
E-mail destination 5-15, 6-16
Entering text 9-4
F
File format 5-26
File type 5-26
Finishing settings 4-17, 4-44
FTP destination 5-17, 6-18
G
Glossary 9-7
Group destination 5-9, 6-10
H
Hard disk capacity 7-17
Hard disk password 7-25
Hard disk settings 7-16
HDD settings 7-16
L
Login 8-12, 8-14, 8-16
Logout 8-10
9 Appendix
9-12 bizhub C252
M
Margin setting 4-22, 4-52
Moving document data 4-8
Multiple document printing 4-38
N
Number of copies 4-15, 4-42
O
Overwrite 7-18
Overwrite all data 7-22
Overwriting data 7-22
P
Page # 4-29, 4-55
Page margin 4-22, 4-52
PageScope Web Connection 8-5
Password 3-3, 7-25
Personal user
box 4-3, 5-3, 7-6
Printing document data 4-12
Printing document data from public
user box/personal user box 4-3
Program destination 5-7, 6-8
Proof copy 4-36
Public user 8-12
Public user box 4-3, 5-3, 7-6
R
Registered user 8-14
Registering boxes 7-5
Routing document data 5-6, 6-6
Routing document data from public
user box/personal user box 5-3
Routing information check 6-24
Routing information
check 5-23
Routing transmission
methods 5-5, 6-4
Routing types 5-4, 6-4
S
Sample copy 4-36
Saving copy documents 3-7
Saving document data to specified
box 3-15
Saving scans 3-11
Searching for box names 4-5
Single-sided/double-sided
printing 4-16, 4-43
SMB destination 5-20, 6-21
Stapling 4-20, 4-47
T
Test print 4-36
Text entry 9-4
Time 4-26, 4-48
Transmission methods 5-5, 6-4
U
User authentication 3-3
User box administrator setting 7-14
User manual/CD-ROM 1-13
User mode 8-3
User name 3-3
V
Viewing document data 4-3
W
Web browser cache
Copy operations
bizhub C252 Contents-1
Contents
1 Introduction
Energy Star®.................................................................................. 1-3
What is an ENERGY STAR® product? .......................................... 1-3
1.1 Trademarks and registered trademarks......................................... 1-4
OpenSSL Statement ...................................................................... 1-5
1.2 Available features ............................................................................. 1-8
Selecting the print color ................................................................. 1-8
Automatically selecting the paper.................................................. 1-8
Adjusting copies to the size of the paper ...................................... 1-8
Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios ............... 1-8
Scanning the document in separate batches ................................ 1-8
Center binding................................................................................ 1-9
Sorting copies ................................................................................ 1-9
Stapling copies .............................................................................. 1-9
Punching holes in copies ............................................................. 1-10
Copying multiple document pages onto a single page ............... 1-10
Copying a document containing various page sizes ................... 1-10
Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original .. 1-11
Inserting paper between copies of overhead projector
transparencies.............................................................................. 1-11
Adding a cover page.................................................................... 1-11
Inserting different paper into copies ............................................ 1-12
Inserting pages from a different document at specified
locations in a copy ....................................................................... 1-12
Printing double-sided copies with the specified page
on the front side........................................................................... 1-13
Copying with reversed colors ...................................................... 1-13
Printing a mirror image................................................................. 1-13
Copying with a background color................................................ 1-14
Improving the copy color quality.................................................. 1-14
Separately copying a page spread .............................................. 1-14
Creating booklets from copies of pamphlets............................... 1-14
Repeating copy images ............................................................... 1-15
Printing the enlarged image on multiple pages ........................... 1-15
Making copies for filing................................................................ 1-15
Copying with the page layout of a magazine............................... 1-16
Erasing sections of copies ........................................................... 1-16
Adjusting the image to fit the paper size ..................................... 1-16
Printing distribution numbers or copy protection text
on copies...................................................................................... 1-17
Contents-2 bizhub C252
Managing jobs .............................................................................. 1-17
Programming copy settings.......................................................... 1-17
Checking the copy settings .......................................................... 1-17
Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens ......................... 1-17
Displaying explanations of functions and settings ....................... 1-17
Interrupting a copy job.................................................................. 1-18
Printing a sample copy ................................................................. 1-18
1.3 Adjust color parameters ................................................................. 1-19
1.4 General information about color.................................................... 1-21
1.5 Relationship between hue, brightness and saturation
(color model) .................................................................................... 1-22
1.6 “Red” parameter.............................................................................. 1-23
1.7 “Green” parameter .......................................................................... 1-24
1.8 “Blue” parameter............................................................................. 1-25
1.9 “Color Balance” parameter (CMYK color adjustment) ................ 1-26
1.10 “Brightness” parameter .................................................................. 1-28
1.11 “Contrast” parameter...................................................................... 1-29
1.12 “Saturation” parameter................................................................... 1-30
1.13 “Sharpness” parameter .................................................................. 1-31
1.14 “Hue” parameter.............................................................................. 1-32
1.15 “Copy Density” parameter.............................................................. 1-33
1.16 “Single Color” function ................................................................... 1-34
1.17 “2 Color” function............................................................................ 1-35
1.18 “Background Color” function......................................................... 1-36
1.19 “Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function........................................................ 1-37
Monotone copy............................................................................. 1-37
Full-color copy and “Background Color” function........................ 1-38
1.20 “Mirror Image” function.................................................................. 1-39
1.21 Explanation of manual conventions............................................... 1-40
Safety advices............................................................................... 1-40
Sequence of action....................................................................... 1-40
Tips ............................................................................................... 1-41
Special text markings ................................................................... 1-41
1.22 Descriptions and symbols for documents and paper.................. 1-42
“Width” and “Length” ................................................................... 1-42
Paper Orientation.......................................................................... 1-42
bizhub C252 Contents-3
1.23 User manuals .................................................................................. 1-43
User manual [Copy Operations] ........................... 1-43
User manual [Network Scanner Operations]................................ 1-43
User manual [Box Operations] ..................................................... 1-43
User manual [Enlarge Display Operations] .................................. 1-43
User manual [FK-502 Facsimile Operations] ............................... 1-43
User manual [Network Facsimile Operations].............................. 1-43
User manual [Print Operations] .................................................... 1-44
1.24 Legal restrictions on copying........................................................ 1-45
2 Installation and operation precautions
2.1 Safety information ............................................................................ 2-3
Warning and precaution symbols .................................................. 2-3
Meaning of symbols....................................................................... 2-4
Disassemble and modification....................................................... 2-4
Power cord..................................................................................... 2-5
Power source ................................................................................. 2-6
Power plug ..................................................................................... 2-7
Grounding ...................................................................................... 2-7
Installation...................................................................................... 2-8
Ventilation ...................................................................................... 2-9
Actions in response to troubles ..................................................... 2-9
Consumables ............................................................................... 2-10
When moving the machine .......................................................... 2-11
Before successive holidays.......................................................... 2-11
2.2 Regulation notices.......................................................................... 2-12
CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity) for users of the
European Union (EU).................................................................... 2-12
USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY
DEVICES (for U.S.A. users) .......................................................... 2-12
INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD
(ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (for Canada users) ....................................... 2-12
For users in countries not subject to class B regulations............ 2-13
Laser safety.................................................................................. 2-13
Internal laser radiation.................................................................. 2-13
CDRH regulations ........................................................................ 2-14
For European users...................................................................... 2-15
For Denmark users....................................................................... 2-15
For Finland, Sweden users .......................................................... 2-15
For Norway users......................................................................... 2-16
Laser safety labely ....................................................................... 2-17
Ozone release .............................................................................. 2-18
Acoustic noise (for European users only)..................................... 2-18
For EU member states only ......................................................... 2-18
Contents-4 bizhub C252
2.3 Caution notations and labels.......................................................... 2-19
2.4 Space requirements ........................................................................ 2-20
2.5 Operation precautions .................................................................... 2-21
Power source................................................................................ 2-21
Operating environment ................................................................. 2-21
Storage of copies.......................................................................... 2-21
3 Before making copies
3.1 Part names and their functions........................................................ 3-3
Options ........................................................................................... 3-3
Outside of machine......................................................................... 3-6
Inside of machine.......................................................................... 3-12
Finisher FS-603/punch kit PK-501 ............................................... 3-14
Finisher FS-501/job separator JS-601.......................................... 3-16
Saddle stitcher SD-503/mailbin kit MT-501 ................................. 3-18
Finisher FS-514/output tray OT-601/punch kit PK-510................ 3-19
Control panel ................................................................................ 3-22
Basic settings screen (Basic screen) ............................................ 3-25
Icons that appear in the screen .................................................... 3-27
3.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel ....................................... 3-28
To adjust the angle of the control panel ....................................... 3-28
3.3 Turning on the Main Power and the Auxiliary Power................... 3-30
To turn on the machine................................................................. 3-30
To scan during warm-up............................................................... 3-32
To turn off the machine................................................................. 3-34
Automatically canceling the settings
(automatic panel reset) ................................................................. 3-35
Automatically canceling the mode screen
(automatic system reset)............................................................... 3-35
Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode)................... 3-36
Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode)............................ 3-37
Manually conserving energy ......................................................... 3-38
Automatically turning the machine on/off (weekly timer) .............. 3-39
Controlling each user’s use of this machine
(user authentication) ..................................................................... 3-41
Controlling each account’s use of this machine
(account track) .............................................................................. 3-46
3.4 Loading paper into the 1st tray ...................................................... 3-49
To load paper (1st tray) ................................................................. 3-49
3.5 Loading paper into the 2nd, 3rd or 4th tray .................................. 3-55
To load paper (2nd, 3rd or 4th tray) .............................................. 3-55
bizhub C252 Contents-5
3.6 Loading paper into the LCT........................................................... 3-57
To load paper (LCT) ..................................................................... 3-57
3.7 Loading paper into the bypass tray .............................................. 3-59
To load paper (bypass tray) ......................................................... 3-59
4 Basic copy operations
4.1 General copy operation.................................................................... 4-3
To make a copy ............................................................................. 4-3
4.2 Operations that cannot be combined............................................. 4-6
Operations where the setting specified last is given priority ......... 4-6
Operations where the setting specified first is given priority ......... 4-8
4.3 Feeding the document ..................................................................... 4-9
To load the document into the ADF............................................... 4-9
To place the document on the original glass............................... 4-11
Scanning the document in separate batches
(“Separate Scan” setting)............................................................. 4-13
Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass ........... 4-18
4.4 Specifying original settings ........................................................... 4-24
Copying documents of mixed sizes
(“Mixed Original” setting) ............................................................. 4-24
Copying thick documents (“Thick Original” setting) .................... 4-26
Selecting the document orientation
(Original Direction settings) .......................................................... 4-28
To specify an original direction setting ........................................ 4-30
Selecting the position of the binding margin
(Margin settings)........................................................................... 4-32
To specify a margin setting.......................................................... 4-34
To change scan settings for each document............................... 4-36
4.5 Selecting a color setting ................................................................ 4-40
To select a color setting............................................................... 4-41
4.6 Selecting a paper setting............................................................... 4-43
Automatically selecting the paper size
(“Auto Paper Select” setting) ....................................................... 4-44
Manually selecting the desired paper size................................... 4-45
Contents-6 bizhub C252
4.7 Specifying a zoom setting .............................................................. 4-46
Automatically selecting the zoom ratio
(“Auto Zoom” setting) ................................................................... 4-46
Specifying the same zoom ratio as the document
(“×1.0” setting) .............................................................................. 4-48
Slightly reducing the copy (“Minimal” setting) .............................. 4-49
Selecting a preset zoom ratio (enlarge and reduce settings) ....... 4-50
Typing In the zoom ratio (XY Zoom setting).................................. 4-51
Typing In separate X and Y zoom ratios
(independent zoom settings) ........................................................ 4-53
Selecting a stored zoom ratio....................................................... 4-56
Storing the desired zoom ratio ..................................................... 4-57
4.8 Selecting the document and copy type settings
(Simplex/Duplex settings)............................................................... 4-59
To select single-sided copies ....................................................... 4-60
To select double-sided copies ..................................................... 4-62
4.9 Selecting the quality of the document........................................... 4-65
Loading documents with small print or photos
(Original Type settings) ................................................................. 4-65
To specify an original type setting ................................................ 4-67
4.10 Specifying the density settings ...................................................... 4-70
Adjusting the print density (Density settings)................................ 4-71
Adjusting the background density
(Background Removal settings).................................................... 4-73
Adjusting the reproduction quality of text..................................... 4-75
4.11 Selecting a combine originals setting ........................................... 4-77
Copying multiple document pages onto a single page
(Combine Originals) ...................................................................... 4-79
4.12 Selecting finishing settings ............................................................ 4-81
Separating copies by sets (“Sort” setting).................................... 4-84
Separating copies by pages (“Group” setting) ............................. 4-86
Stapling copies (Staple settings) .................................................. 4-88
To bind copies with staples .......................................................... 4-91
Punching holes in copies (Punch settings) ................................... 4-93
To punch holes in copies.............................................................. 4-94
4.13 Specifying center binding............................................................... 4-96
To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”):
Finisher FS-603............................................................................. 4-99
To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”):
Finisher FS-514........................................................................... 4-101
bizhub C252 Contents-7
4.14 Scanning the next document to be copied while a copy job
is being printed (next job reservation) ........................................ 4-103
To reserve a copy job ................................................................ 4-103
4.15 Stopping scanning/printing ......................................................... 4-105
To stop scanning/printing .......................................................... 4-105
4.16 Deleting a stopped job................................................................. 4-106
To delete a stopped job............................................................. 4-106
5 Additional copy operations
5.1 Checking the copy settings (Mode Check) .................................... 5-3
To check the settings..................................................................... 5-3
To change the settings................................................................... 5-5
5.2 Printing a proof copy to be checked (Proof Copy) ........................ 5-6
To make test prints ........................................................................ 5-6
5.3 Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode) ........................................ 5-9
To interrupt a copy job................................................................... 5-9
5.4 Registering copy programs (Mode Memory) ............................... 5-11
To store a copy program ............................................................. 5-11
To delete a copy program............................................................ 5-14
5.5 Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory) ........ 5-15
To recall a stored job ................................................................... 5-15
5.6 Displaying function descriptions (Help)........................................ 5-18
Overview of Help Screens............................................................ 5-18
To display the Main Help Menu screen ....................................... 5-22
To display the Help screen while specifying a setting ................. 5-24
5.7 Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode) .............. 5-25
Displaying the Accessibility Setting Screen................................. 5-25
To set the “Key Repeat Start/Interval Time” function .................. 5-25
To set the “Enlarge Display Timer Setting” function.................... 5-28
To set the “Message Display Time” function............................... 5-31
To set the “Sound Setting” function ............................................ 5-33
To set the “Touch Panel Adj.” function........................................ 5-36
To set the “Auto Reset Notification” function .............................. 5-38
To set the “Enlarge Display Confirmation Screen” function ........ 5-41
Contents-8 bizhub C252
6 Troubleshooting
6.1 When the message “malfunction detected.” appears
(call technical representative) .......................................................... 6-3
To call the technical representative ................................................ 6-5
6.2 When the message “Misfeed detected.” appears.......................... 6-6
Location of Paper misfeed.............................................................. 6-6
Paper misfeed indications .............................................................. 6-8
To clear a paper misfeed in the bypass tray................................. 6-10
To clear a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit................. 6-11
To clear a paper misfeed in the 1st tray ....................................... 6-12
To clear a paper misfeed in the 2nd tray ...................................... 6-13
To clear a paper misfeed in a paper tray (3rd or 4th tray) ............ 6-14
To clear a paper misfeed in the LCT............................................. 6-15
To clear a paper misfeed in the right-side door............................ 6-16
To clear a paper misfeed in the fusing unit................................... 6-19
To clear a banner paper misfeed.................................................. 6-22
To clear a paper misfeed in the ADF ............................................ 6-27
To clear a paper misfeed in finisher FS-501................................. 6-31
To clear a paper misfeed in finisher FS-603................................. 6-35
To clear a paper misfeed in the finisher FS-514........................... 6-39
To clear a paper misfeed in the mailbin........................................ 6-42
To clear a paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher............................ 6-44
6.3 When the message “Replenish paper.” appears.......................... 6-46
To replenish paper ........................................................................ 6-46
6.4 When the message “... Not enough remaining memory.”
appears............................................................................................. 6-47
Memory becomes full while scanning........................................... 6-47
Memory becomes full while queuing a job ................................... 6-48
6.5 When “Please replace following unit(s).” appears ....................... 6-49
6.6 When the message “Need to replace XXXX.” appears................ 6-50
6.7 Simple troubleshooting................................................................... 6-52
Main unit ....................................................................................... 6-52
ADF ............................................................................................... 6-55
Finisher ......................................................................................... 6-55
6.8 Main messages and their remedies............................................... 6-56
bizhub C252 Contents-9
7 Specifications
7.1 Specifications ................................................................................... 7-3
bizhub C252................................................................................... 7-3
Automatic duplex unit .................................................................... 7-6
Option specifications ..................................................................... 7-6
Automatic document feeder DF-601 ............................................. 7-6
Paper feed cabinet PC-103 ........................................................... 7-7
Paper feed cabinet PC-203 ........................................................... 7-8
Paper feed cabinet PC-403 ........................................................... 7-8
Finisher FS-603.............................................................................. 7-9
Punch kit PK-501 ......................................................................... 7-10
Finisher FS-501............................................................................ 7-10
Job separator JS-601 .................................................................. 7-11
Finisher FS-514............................................................................ 7-11
Punch kit PK-510 ......................................................................... 7-12
Saddle stitcher SD-503................................................................ 7-12
Output tray OT-601...................................................................... 7-12
Mailbin kit MT-501 ....................................................................... 7-13
8 Copy paper/original documents
8.1 Copy paper........................................................................................ 8-3
Possible paper sizes ...................................................................... 8-3
Paper types and paper capacities ................................................. 8-5
Special paper ................................................................................. 8-6
Precautions for paper .................................................................... 8-8
Paper storage................................................................................. 8-8
Auto tray switch feature ................................................................. 8-9
Order for Selecting the Paper trays ............................................... 8-9
8.2 Selecting the paper settings.......................................................... 8-10
To automatically detect the paper size
(“Auto Paper Select” setting) ....................................................... 8-10
To specify a paper size (set size settings).................................... 8-12
To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings) .... 8-15
To store a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings)........ 8-18
To specify a setting for oversized paper
(Oversized Paper settings) ........................................................... 8-22
To specify a setting for special paper .......................................... 8-25
To print double-sided copies manually........................................ 8-27
Contents-10 bizhub C252
8.3 Original documents......................................................................... 8-29
Documents that can be loaded into the ADF ............................... 8-29
Precautions for loading documents into the ADF......................... 8-31
Documents that can be placed on the original glass ................... 8-31
Precautions for positioning documents on the original glass....... 8-32
9 Application functions
9.1 Inserting paper between overhead projector transparencies
(“OHP Interleave” function) .............................................................. 9-3
To copy using the “OHP Interleave” function................................. 9-4
9.2 Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function) ................................ 9-7
To copy using the “Cover Mode” function ..................................... 9-8
9.3 Inserting different paper into copies
(“Insert Sheet” function) ................................................................. 9-11
To copy using the “Insert Sheet” function.................................... 9-13
9.4 Inserting copies of a different document for a specified page
(“Insert Image” function)................................................................. 9-16
To copy using the “Insert Image” function ................................... 9-17
9.5 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side
(“Chapters” function) ...................................................................... 9-21
To copy using the “Chapters” function ........................................ 9-22
9.6 Scanning documents with different settings and
printing copies all together (“Program Job” function)................. 9-25
To copy using the “Program Job” function .................................. 9-26
9.7 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread
(“Book Copy” function) ................................................................... 9-30
To copy using the “Book Copy” function ..................................... 9-31
9.8 Copying pamphlets (“Booklet Original” function) ........................ 9-36
To copy using the “Booklet Original” function.............................. 9-37
9.9 Tiling copy images (“Image Repeat” function) ............................. 9-40
To copy using the “Image Repeat” function................................. 9-41
9.10 Copying an enlarged image on multiple pages
(“Poster Mode” function) ................................................................ 9-45
To copy using the “Poster Mode” function .................................. 9-45
9.11 Copying with the page layout of a magazine
(“Booklet” function)......................................................................... 9-51
To copy using the “Booklet” function ........................................... 9-52
9.12 Copying with image colors inversed
(“Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function)...................................................... 9-54
To copy using the “Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function......................... 9-55
bizhub C252 Contents-11
9.13 Copying in a mirror image (“Mirror Image” function).................. 9-56
To copy using the “Mirror Image” function.................................. 9-56
9.14 Adding a background color to copies
(“Background Color” function)...................................................... 9-60
To copy using the “Background Color” function ......................... 9-60
9.15 Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters) ...... 9-63
To adjust the Adjust Color parameters ........................................ 9-64
Checking the Print Result of the Adjust Color Settings
(Sample Copy).............................................................................. 9-66
To make sample copies ............................................................... 9-67
9.16 Adding filing margins to copies (“Page Margin” function) ......... 9-68
To copy using the “Page Margin” function .................................. 9-69
9.17 Erasing specified areas of copies (“Erase” function).................. 9-71
To copy using the “Erase” function ............................................. 9-71
9.18 Adjusting the image to fit the paper
(Image Adjustment settings).......................................................... 9-73
To copy using the Image Adjustment settings............................. 9-74
9.19 Printing the Date/Time, page number or distribution number on
copies (Stamp functions) ............................................................... 9-77
Printing the Date/Time (“Date/Time” function)............................. 9-78
To copy using the “Date/Time” function...................................... 9-78
Printing the page number (“Page #” function) ............................. 9-81
To copy using the “Page #” function ........................................... 9-81
Printing the distribution number (“Set Numbering” function) ...... 9-85
To copy using the “Set Numbering” function .............................. 9-85
Printing copy protection text (“Copy Protect” function) .............. 9-87
To copy using the “Copy Protect” function ................................. 9-87
10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying
waste containers
10.1 Replacing the toner cartridge ....................................................... 10-3
To replace the toner cartridge...................................................... 10-6
10.2 Replacing the staples..................................................................... 10-9
To replace the staple cartridge for finisher FS-501 ................... 10-10
To replace the staple cartridge for finisher FS-603 ................... 10-13
To replace the staple cartridge in the finisher FS-514............... 10-17
To replace the staple cartridge in saddle stitcher...................... 10-19
Contents-12 bizhub C252
10.3 Clearing a staple jam .................................................................... 10-22
To clear jammed staples in finisher FS-501 ............................... 10-24
To clear jammed staples in finisher FS-603 ............................... 10-26
To clear jammed staples in the finisher FS-514 ......................... 10-32
To clear jammed staples in the saddle stitcher .......................... 10-36
10.4 Emptying the waste containers.................................................... 10-39
To empty the hole-punch waste container for finisher
FS-603 ........................................................................................ 10-42
To empty the hole-punch waste container for finisher
FS-514 ........................................................................................ 10-43
10.5 Replacing the waste toner box .................................................... 10-44
To replace the waste toner box .................................................. 10-46
11 Care of the machine
11.1 Cleaning ........................................................................................... 11-3
Housing......................................................................................... 11-3
Original glass ................................................................................ 11-3
Control panel ................................................................................ 11-4
Document transfer belt ................................................................. 11-5
Original cover pad......................................................................... 11-6
Paper Take-Up roller..................................................................... 11-6
Electrostatic charger wire ............................................................. 11-7
Print head...................................................................................... 11-8
11.2 Viewing counters (Meter Count) .................................................... 11-9
Viewing counters .......................................................................... 11-9
To view the counters..................................................................... 11-9
Viewing the coverage rate .......................................................... 11-11
To view the coverage rate........................................................... 11-11
11.3 When the message “Preventive maintenance time.”
appears........................................................................................... 11-12
bizhub C252 Contents-13
12 Managing jobs (Job List)
12.1 Overview of the Job List screen.................................................... 12-3
Jobs ............................................................................................. 12-3
Multi-Job feature.......................................................................... 12-4
Job list screens ............................................................................ 12-5
12.2 Performing operations on jobs...................................................... 12-8
To delete a job ............................................................................. 12-8
To check the job settings........................................................... 12-10
Displayed information ................................................................ 12-11
To check the job details............................................................. 12-12
To display current jobs (held jobs and active jobs lists) ............ 12-13
To display Job History ............................................................... 12-14
To print a sample copy of a stored job ...................................... 12-15
To print a stored job................................................................... 12-17
To increase priority for printing .................................................. 12-19
13 Utility
13.1 Overview of utility mode parameters............................................ 13-3
List of registration information and parameters ........................... 13-3
13.2 Selecting a destination register .................................................. 13-23
Scan ........................................................................................... 13-23
Fax ............................................................................................. 13-23
User box..................................................................................... 13-24
Displaying the destination register screen................................. 13-25
13.3 Specifying user settings............................................................... 13-27
System setting ........................................................................... 13-27
Display setting............................................................................ 13-30
Initial setting............................................................................... 13-32
Copier setting............................................................................. 13-33
Scanner setting .......................................................................... 13-35
Printer setting............................................................................. 13-35
Displaying the Utility Setting screen .......................................... 13-36
13.4 Specifying administrator settings ............................................... 13-38
System setting ........................................................................... 13-38
Administrator/machine setting................................................... 13-49
One-Touch registration .............................................................. 13-49
User authentication/account track............................................. 13-50
Network setting.......................................................................... 13-53
Copier setting............................................................................. 13-54
Printer setting............................................................................. 13-55
Contents-14 bizhub C252
Fax setting .................................................................................. 13-55
System connection ..................................................................... 13-56
Security setting ........................................................................... 13-56
Displaying the Administrator Setting screen............................... 13-61
13.5 Overview of weekly timer settings............................................... 13-63
Requisite ..................................................................................... 13-63
13.6 Adjusting the printer ..................................................................... 13-64
Adjusting the starting print position at the
leading edge position.................................................................. 13-64
Adjusting the starting print position at the left edge................... 13-66
Adjusting the starting print position for the second side............ 13-68
Adjusting printing according to the media.................................. 13-70
13.7 Adjusting the finisher (FS-603) ..................................................... 13-73
Adjusting the center stapling position ........................................ 13-73
Adjusting the center folding position .......................................... 13-75
13.8 Adjusting the finisher (FS-514) ..................................................... 13-77
Adjusting the center folding position .......................................... 13-77
Adjusting the center stapling position ........................................ 13-81
Adjusting the horizontal punch position ..................................... 13-84
Adjusting the angle of punched holes ........................................ 13-87
13.9 Adjusting the color registration ................................................... 13-89
Adjusting the color registration for yellow, magenta
and cyan ..................................................................................... 13-89
13.10 Adjusting the gradation levels...................................................... 13-92
Requisite ..................................................................................... 13-92
13.11 Authentication method ................................................................. 13-95
User authentication and account track....................................... 13-95
When user authentication and account track
are synchronized......................................................................... 13-96
When user authentication and account track
are used separately..................................................................... 13-97
To select an authentication method ........................................... 13-98
13.12 User authentication setting ........................................................ 13-102
Administrative setting—user name list ..................................... 13-102
Default function permission ...................................................... 13-104
To specify the default function permissions ............................. 13-104
Authenticating public users ...................................................... 13-106
User registration ....................................................................... 13-107
User counter ............................................................................. 13-113
To check the counter ................................................................ 13-115
bizhub C252 Contents-15
13.13 Account track setting................................................................. 13-117
Account track registration........................................................ 13-117
Account track counter.............................................................. 13-122
To check the counter ............................................................... 13-124
13.14 Password rules ........................................................................... 13-125
Conditions of the password rules ............................................ 13-125
13.15 Enhanced security settings ....................................................... 13-127
13.16 Viewing the status of the consumables.................................... 13-131
Displaying the unit life indicator screen ................................... 13-131
14 Appendix
14.1 Entering text.................................................................................... 14-3
To type text .................................................................................. 14-5
List of available characters .......................................................... 14-5
14.2 Glossary........................................................................................... 14-6
14.3 Index .............................................................................................. 14-12
Contents-16 bizhub C252
1 Introduction
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-3
1 Introduction
Thank you for choosing this machine.
This manual contains details on the operation of the various functions of the
machine, precautions on its use, and basic troubleshooting procedures. In
order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully
read this manual before using the machine. After reading the manual, store
it in the designated holder so that it can easily be referred to when questions
or problems arise during operation.
The illustrations used in this manual may appear slightly different from views
of the actual equipment.
Energy Star®
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, we have determined that this machine meets
the ENERGY STAR® Guidelines for energy efficiency.
What is an ENERGY STAR® product?
An ENERGY STAR® product has a special feature that allows it to
automatically switch to a "low-power mode" after a period of inactivity. An
ENERGY STAR® product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on
utility bills and helps protect the environment.
1 Introduction
1-4 bizhub C252
1.1 Trademarks and registered trademarks
KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA Logo, and The essentials of imaging
are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS,
INC.
PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA
MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Netscape Communications, the Netscape Communications logo, Netscape
Navigator, Netscape Communicator, and Netscape are trademarks of
Netscape Communications Corporation.
This machine and PageScope Box Operator are based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
Compact-VJE
Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp.
RC4® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the
United States and/or other countries.
RSA® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. RSA
BSAFE® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the
United States and/or other countries.
License information
This product includes RSA BSAFE
Cryptographic software from RSA Security
Inc.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-5
OpenSSL Statement
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior
written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@
openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor
may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission
of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@crypt-Soft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
1 Introduction
1-6 bizhub C252
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the
following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all
code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code;
not just the SSL code.
The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the
code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young
should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This
can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@crypt-soft.com)"
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related.
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement:
"This product includes software written by Tin Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-7
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public
Licence.]
All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies
1 Introduction
1-8 bizhub C252
1.2 Available features
Selecting the print color
The color used to print copies can be specified, for example, the copy can
be printed in full color or in black and white.
For details, refer to "Selecting a color setting" on page 4-40.
Automatically selecting the paper
The most appropriate paper size can automatically be selected based on the
size of the loaded document and the specified zoom ratio.
For details, refer to "Automatically selecting the paper size (“Auto Paper
Select” setting)" on page 4-44.
Adjusting copies to the size of the paper
The most appropriate zoom ratio can automatically be selected based on the
size of the loaded document and the specified paper size.
For details, refer to "Automatically selecting the zoom ratio (“Auto Zoom”
setting)" on page 4-46.
Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios
By specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, copies of the
document can be resized as desired.
For details, refer to "Typing In separate X and Y zoom ratios (independent
zoom settings)" on page 4-53.
Scanning the document in separate batches
A document with a large number of pages can be divided and scanned in
separate batches. Double-sided copies can be produced by using the
original glass or the document pages can be alternately loaded onto the
original glass or into the ADF, and then all pages can be copied together as
a single job.
For details, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate
Scan” setting)" on page 4-13 and "Scanning a multi-page document from
the original glass" on page 4-18.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-9
Center binding
Copies can be folded at their center and bound with staples.
For details, refer to "To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher
FS-603" on page 4-99.
Sorting copies
The finishing method for copies can be selected.
For details, refer to "Separating copies by sets (“Sort” setting)" on
page 4-84, "Separating copies by pages (“Group” setting)" on page 4-86.
Stapling copies
Multi-page documents can be copied and stapled together.
For details, refer to "Stapling copies (Staple settings)" on page 4-88.
1 Introduction
1-10 bizhub C252
Punching holes in copies
Holes for filing can be punched in the copies.
For details, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on
page 4-93.
Copying multiple document pages onto a single page
Multiple pages of the document can be printed together on a single page.
For details, refer to "Copying multiple document pages onto a single page
(Combine Originals)" on page 4-79.
Copying a document containing various page sizes
A document with various page sizes can be scanned and copied together.
For details, refer to "Copying documents of mixed sizes (“Mixed Original”
setting)" on page 4-24.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-11
Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original
The copies can be adjusted according to the image quality of the document.
For details, refer to "Loading documents with small print or photos (Original
Type settings)" on page 4-65 or "Adjusting the print density (Density
settings)" on page 4-71.
Inserting paper between copies of overhead projector transparencies
In order to prevent overhead projector transparencies from becoming stuck
to each other, a page (interleaf) can be inserted between the transparency
copies.
For details, refer to "Inserting paper between overhead projector
transparencies (“OHP Interleave” function)" on page 9-3.
Adding a cover page
Cover pages can be added to copies, or copies can be made using different
paper (for example, colored paper) for only the cover pages.
For details, refer to "Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function)" on
page 9-7.
1 Introduction
1-12 bizhub C252
Inserting different paper into copies
Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted for specified pages
in the copies.
For details, refer to "Inserting different paper into copies (“Insert Sheet”
function)" on page 9-11.
Inserting pages from a different document at specified locations in a
copy
A document scanned later can be inserted for specified pages in a document
scanned earlier for copying.
For details, refer to "Inserting copies of a different document for a specified
page (“Insert Image” function)" on page 9-16.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-13
Printing double-sided copies with the specified page on the front side
Double-sided copies can be printed with the specified pages on the front
side.
For details, refer to "Specifying pages to be printed on the front side
(“Chapters” function)" on page 9-21.
Copying with reversed colors
A document can be copied with the light- and dark-colored areas of the
document image inversed. With Color setting "Full Color", copies are printed
with the hues and brightness inversed. With Color setting "Black" or "Single
Color", copies are printed with the hues inversed.
For details, refer to "Copying with image colors inversed (“Neg-/Pos.
Reverse” function)" on page 9-54.
Printing a mirror image
A document can be copied in its mirror image.
For details, refer to "Copying in a mirror image (“Mirror Image” function)" on
page 9-56.
2
1 Introduction
1-14 bizhub C252
Copying with a background color
A document can be copied using one of the 18 colors available as the color
of the background (blank areas).
For details, refer to "Adding a background color to copies (“Background
Color” function)" on page 9-60.
Improving the copy color quality
You can adjust color copies to the quality for the desired image.
For details, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color
parameters)" on page 9-63.
Separately copying a page spread
A page spread, such as in an open book or catalog, can be copied onto
separate pages.
For details, refer to "Producing separate copies of each page in a page
spread (“Book Copy” function)" on page 9-30.
Creating booklets from copies of pamphlets
Pamphlets with their staples removed can be copied and bound with staples.
For details, refer to "Copying pamphlets (“Booklet Original” function)" on
page 9-36.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-15
Repeating copy images
A document image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper.
For details, refer to "Tiling copy images (“Image Repeat” function)" on
page 9-40.
Printing the enlarged image on multiple pages
A single document page can be automatically split into parts with each part
printed enlarged.
For details, refer to "Copying an enlarged image on multiple pages (“Poster
Mode” function)" on page 9-45.
Making copies for filing
Copies can be printed with a filing margin so they can easily be stored in filing
binders.
For details, refer to "Adding filing margins to copies (“Page Margin”
function)" on page 9-68.
1 Introduction
1-16 bizhub C252
Copying with the page layout of a magazine
Copies can be made with the pages arranged in a layout for center binding,
such as for a magazine.
For details, refer to "Copying with the page layout of a magazine (“Booklet”
function)" on page 9-51.
Erasing sections of copies
Areas, such as the shadows of punched holes and transmission information
in received faxes, can be erased in copies.
For details, refer to "Erasing specified areas of copies (“Erase” function)" on
page 9-71.
Adjusting the image to fit the paper size
When the copy paper is larger than the original document, copies can be
printed so that the document image fills the paper.
For details, refer to "Adjusting the image to fit the paper (Image Adjustment
settings)" on page 9-73.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-17
Printing distribution numbers or copy protection text on copies
Pages numbers or copy protection text (hidden text that prevents improper
copying) can be printed on copies, or each copy set can be printed with
distribution numbers.
For details, refer to "Printing the Date/Time, page number or distribution
number on copies (Stamp functions)" on page 9-77.
Managing jobs
The print status of copy jobs can be checked and the jobs can be managed.
For details, refer to "Managing jobs (Job List)" on page 12-3.
Programming copy settings
Frequently used copy settings can be programmed and recalled to be used
with other copy jobs.
For details, refer to "Registering copy programs (Mode Memory)" on
page 5-11.
Checking the copy settings
Screens showing the current copy settings can be displayed. From these
screens, the copy settings can also be changed.
For details, refer to "Checking the copy settings (Mode Check)" on page 5-3.
Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens
The text and buttons in the touch panel can be displayed in a larger size that
is easier to read, allowing basic operations to be easily performed.
For details, refer to the Enlarge Display Operations of the User manual.
Displaying explanations of functions and settings
The name and function of parts and details of functions and settings appears
in the Help screens.
For details, refer to "Displaying function descriptions (Help)" on page 5-18.
1 Introduction
1-18 bizhub C252
Interrupting a copy job
The copy job being printed can be interrupted in order for a different copy
job to be printed.
For details, refer to "Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode)" on page 5-9.
Printing a sample copy
Before printing a large number of copies, a single sample copy can be
printed so that it can be checked.
For details, refer to "Printing a proof copy to be checked (Proof Copy)" on
page 5-6.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-19
1.3 Adjust color parameters
This section provides copy samples that are a helpful reference for setting
the wide variety of parameters, functions and settings available with this fullcolor
copier.
Section Description Section Description
General Information
About Color
Provides information
on hue, brightness
and saturation
(p. 1-21)
"Contrast" Parameter Provides information
on the adjustment
of the contrast
level (p. 1-29)
"Red" Parameter Provides information
on the adjustment
of the red
hues (p. 1-23)
"Saturation" Parameter Provides information
on the adjustment
of the
vividness (p. 1-30)
"Green" Parameter Provides information
on the adjustment
of the green
hues (p. 1-24)
"Sharpness" Parameter Provides information
on the adjustment
of the
sharpness of text
(p. 1-31)
"Blue" Parameter Provides information
on the adjustment
of the blue
hues (p. 1-25)
"Hue" Parameter Provides information
on the adjustment
of the hue
(p. 1-32)
"Color Balance" Parameter
Provides information
on the adjustment
of the density
of the colors CMYK
(p. 1-26)
"Copy Density" Parameter
Provides information
on the adjustment
of the copy
density (p. 1-33)
"Brightness" Parameter Provides information
on the adjustment
of the
brightness (p. 1-28)
"Single Color" Function Provides information
on copying with
a single selected
color (monotone)
(p. 1-34)
1 Introduction
1-20 bizhub C252
* Since the print samples provided are photographs, they may slightly differ in color with actual
color copies.
"2 Color" Function Provides information
on copying using
only black and
one selected color
(p. 1-35)
"Neg-/Pos. Reverse"
Function
Provides information
on copying a
document with the
light- and darkcolored
areas of the
image inversed
(p. 1-37)
"Background Color"
Function
Provides information
on copying with
the selected background
color
(p. 1-36)
"Mirror Image" Function Provides information
on producing a
copy in the mirror
image of the original
document
(p. 1-39)
Section Description Section Description
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-21
1.4 General information about color
Everybody has an idea of what hue an
object has, for example, an apple is red,
a lemon is yellow, and the sky is blue.
Hue is the tint by which the color of an
is classified as red, yellow, blue, etc.
Brightness is the degree of lightness in
which makes it a light color or a dark
color. For example, when comparing the
yellow of a lemon and the yellow of a
grapefruit, it is obvious that the yellow of
the lemon is brighter. But what about
when comparing the yellow of a lemon
and the red of a bean? Obviously, the
yellow of the lemon is brighter.
Brightness is the this degree of lightness
that enables comparison regardless of
the hue.
What makes the difference between the
By saying that the lemon is a more vivid
difference between the two colors is stated
yellow of a lemon and the yellos of a pear?
yellow and the pear is a duller yellow, the
in terms of saturation,as opposed to
brightness. As opposed to hue and
brightness, saturation is the characteristic
that indicates the degree of vividness.
1 Introduction
1-22 bizhub C252
1.5 Relationship between hue, brightness and saturation
(color model)
Hue, brightness and saturation are the elements that we call the "three
attributes of color". We can think of their affects using the solid object shown
in figure 1, where the outer edge is the hue, the vertical axis is the brightness,
and the horizontal axis from the center is the saturation.
Assigning colors to the solid object, representing the three attributes of color,
shown in figure 1 produces the color model shown in figure 2. Although the
level of saturation differs for each hue and degree of brightness, creating a
complex color model, we can get a better understanding of the conditions
under which the hue, brightness and saturation vary.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-23
1.6 “Red” parameter
This parameter can be used to adjust the degree of red in the image to one
of 19 levels.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality
(Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63.
1 Introduction
1-24 bizhub C252
1.7 “Green” parameter
This parameter can be used to adjust the degree of green in the image to one
of 19 levels.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality
(Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-25
1.8 “Blue” parameter
This parameter can be used to adjust the degree of blue in the image to one
of 19 levels.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality
(Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63.
1 Introduction
1-26 bizhub C252
1.9 “Color Balance” parameter (CMYK color adjustment)
By mixing the four toner colors (yellow, magenta, and cyan in addition to
black) in a full-color copy, the colors of the document can be reproduced.
Changing the amount of each color of toner enables the tints in the copy to
be finely adjusted. Each color can be adjusted to any of 19 levels.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality
(Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63.
Adjusting the black tinge
Increasing the amount of black
Decreasing the amount of black
Black
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-27
Y
G
B
R
M C
1 Introduction
1-28 bizhub C252
1.10 “Brightness” parameter
This parameter can be used to finely adjust the brightness of the image to
one of 19 levels.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality
(Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-29
1.11 “Contrast” parameter
This parameter can be used to finely adjust the image to one of 19 levels
between soft/smooth and crisp.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality
(Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63.
1 Introduction
1-30 bizhub C252
1.12 “Saturation” parameter
This parameter can be used to finely adjust the vividness of the image to one
of 19 levels.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality
(Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-31
1.13 “Sharpness” parameter
This parameter can be used to adjust the amount of contours in text and
images to one of 7 levels.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality
(Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63.
1 Introduction
1-32 bizhub C252
1.14 “Hue” parameter
This parameter can be used to finely adjust the hue of the image to one of 19
levels.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality
(Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-33
1.15 “Copy Density” parameter
This parameter can be used to finely adjust the light and shading of the
image to one of 19 levels.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality
(Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63.
1 Introduction
1-34 bizhub C252
1.16 “Single Color” function
This function allows you to copy a document using only one of the 21 colors
available.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Selecting a color setting" on
page 4-40.
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Red
Green
Orange
Pumpkin
Yellow
Green
Teal
Blue
Aquamarine
Pink
Purple
Plum
Maroon
Copper
Red
Forest
Green
Brown
Camel
Sepia 2
Sepia 1
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-35
1.17 “2 Color” function
This setting allows you to produce copies with the black areas of the
document printed in black and the color areas of the document printed in one
of the six colors available.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Selecting a color setting" on
page 4-40.
Yellow
Magenta
Red Cyan
Green
Blue
HAPPY
BIRTHDAY
HAPPY
BIRTHDAY
HAPPY
BIRTHDAY
HAPPY
BIRTHDAY
HAPPY
BIRTHDAY
HAPPY
BIRTHDAY
HAPPY
BIRTHDAY
1 Introduction
1-36 bizhub C252
1.18 “Background Color” function
This function allows you to copy a document using one of the 18 colors
available as the color of the background (blank areas).
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adding a background color to
copies (“Background Color” function)" on page 9-60.
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Red
Green
Orange
Pumpkin
Yellow
Green
Teal
Blue
Aquamarine
Pink
Purple
Plum
Maroon
Forest Green
Brown
Camel
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-37
1.19 “Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function
This function allows you to copy a document with the light-colored areas and
the dark-colored areas of the image inversed.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Copying with image colors
inversed (“Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function)" on page 9-54.
Monotone copy
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Red
Green
Orange
Pumpkin
Yellow
Green
Teal
Blue
Aquamarine
Pink
Purple
Plum
Maroon
Copper
Red
Forest
Green
Brown
Camel
Sepia 2
Sepia 1
1 Introduction
1-38 bizhub C252
Full-color copy and “Background Color” function
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-39
1.20 “Mirror Image” function
This function allows you to copy a mirror image of the original document.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Copying in a mirror image
(“Mirror Image” function)" on page 9-56.
1 Introduction
1-40 bizhub C252
1.21 Explanation of manual conventions
The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below.
Safety advices
6 DANGER
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in
fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power.
% Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries.
7 WARNING
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in
serious injuries or property damage.
% Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use
of the machine.
7 CAUTION
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in
slight injuries or property damage.
% Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use
of the machine.
Sequence of action
1 The number 1 as formatted here
indicates the first step of a sequence
of actions.
2 Subsequent numbers as formatted
here indicate subsequent steps of a
sequence of actions.
? Text formatted in this style
provides additional assistance.
% Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the
desired results are achieved.
An illustration inserted
here shows what operations
must be performed.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-41
Tips
2
Note
Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to
ensure safe use of the machine.
2
Reminder
Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be
reminded.
!
Detail
Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed
information.
Special text markings
[Stop] key
The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above.
MACHINE SETTING
Display texts are written as shown above.
1 Introduction
1-42 bizhub C252
1.22 Descriptions and symbols for documents and paper
The use of words and symbols in this manual are explained below.
“Width” and “Length”
Whenever paper dimensions are
mentioned in this manual, the first value
always refers to the width of the paper
(shown as "Y" in the illustration) and the
second to the length (shown as "X").
Paper Orientation
Lengthwise (w)
If the width (Y) of the paper is shorter than
the length (X), the paper has a vertical or
portrait orientation, indicated by w.
Crosswise (v)
If the width (Y) of the paper is longer than
the length (X), the paper has a horizontal or
landscape orientation, indicated by v.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-43
1.23 User manuals
The following User manuals have been prepared for this machine.
User manual [Copy Operations]
This manual contains details on basic operations and the operating
procedures for the various copy functions.
- Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for copy
functions, including precautions on installation/use, turning the machine
on/off, loading paper, and troubleshooting operations such as clearing
paper misfeeds.
User manual [Network Scanner Operations]
This manual contains details on specifying network settings for standard
equipment and on operations for scanning functions.
- Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for network
functions and for using Scan to E-Mail, Scan to FTP and Scan to SMB.
User manual [Box Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures for using the boxes.
- Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for using
the boxes on the hard disk.
User manual [Enlarge Display Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures for using copy,
network scanner and fax functions in Enlarge Display mode.
- Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures in Enlarge
Display mode.
User manual [FK-502 Facsimile Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures for faxing.
- Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for fax
functions when the fax kit is installed.
User manual [Network Facsimile Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures for network faxing.
- Refer to this User manual for details on operating procedures for using
the network fax functions (Internet faxing, SIP faxing and IP address
faxing).
1 Introduction
1-44 bizhub C252
User manual [Print Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures using the standard
built-in printer controller.
- For details on the printing functions, refer to user manual (PDF file) on
User Software CD-ROM.
Introduction 1
bizhub C252 1-45
1.24 Legal restrictions on copying
Certain types of documents must never be copied with the purpose or intent
to pass copies of such documents off as the originals.
The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to
responsible copying.
Financial Instruments
- Personal checks
- Traveler’s checks
- Money orders
- Certificates of deposit
- Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
- Stock certificates
Legal Documents
- Food stamps
- Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
- Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies
- Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
- Passports
- Immigration papers
- Motor vehicle licenses and titles
- House and property titles and deeds
General
- Identification cards, badges, or insignias
- Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner
In addition, it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or
foreign currencies, or works of art without permission of the copyright owner.
When in doubt about the nature of a document, consult with legal counsel.
!
Detail
In order to prohibit the illegal reproduction of certain documents, such as
paper currency, this machine is equipped with a counterfeit prevention
feature.
Due to the counterfeit prevention feature that this machine is equipped
with, images may be distorted.
1 Introduction
1-46 bizhub C252
2 Installation and operation
precautions
Installation and operation precautions 2
bizhub C252 2-3
2 Installation and operation precautions
2.1 Safety information
This section contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance
of this machine. To achieve optimum utility of this device, all operators
should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual.
Please read the following section before connecting the machine to the
supply. It contains important information related to user safety and
preventing equipment problems.
Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Make sure you observe all of the precautions appear in each section of this
manual.
KM_Ver.01E_C
2
Note
Some parts of the contents of this section may not correspond with the
purchased product.
Warning and precaution symbols
The following indicators are used on the warning labels or in this manual to
categorize the level of safety warnings.
7 WARNING
Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
7 CAUTION
Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
2 Installation and operation precautions
2-4 bizhub C252
Meaning of symbols
Disassemble and modification
7 WARNING
Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
Symbol Meaning Example Meaning
A triangle indicates a danger
against which you should take
precaution.
This symbol warns against possible
causes of burns.
A diagonal line indicates a prohibited
course of action.
This symbol warns against dismantling
the device.
A black circle indicates an imperative
course of action.
This symbol indicates you must
unplug the device.
Warning Symbol
• Do not attempt to remove the covers and panels which have
been fixed to the product. Some products have a high-voltage
part or a laser beam source inside that could cause an
electrical shock or blindness.
• Do not modify this product, as a fire, electrical shock, or
breakdown could result. If the product employs a laser, the
laser beam source could cause blindness.
Installation and operation precautions 2
bizhub C252 2-5
Power cord
7 WARNING
Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
Warning Symbol
• Use only the power cord supplied in the package. If a power
cord is not supplied, only use the power cord and plug that
is specified in POWER CORD INSTRUCTION. Failure to use
this cord could result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Use the power cord supplied in the package only for this machine
and NEVER use it for any other product. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not scratch, abrade, place a heavy object on, heat, twist,
bend, pull on, or damage the power cord. Use of a damaged
power cord (exposed core wire, broken wire, etc.) could result
in a fire or breakdown.
Should any of these conditions be found, immediately turn
OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power
outlet, and then call your authorized service representative.
2 Installation and operation precautions
2-6 bizhub C252
Power source
7 WARNING
Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
7 CAUTION
Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
Warning Symbol
• Use only the specified power source voltage. Failure to do
that could result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having the same
configuration as the plug. Use of an adapter leads to the
product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage,
current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available, the customer shall ask
qualified electrician for the installation.
• Do not use a multiple outlet adapter nor an extension cord in
principle. Use of an adapter or an extension cord could cause
a fire or electrical shock.
Contact your authorized service representative if an extension
cord is required.
• Consult your authorized service representative before connecting
other equipment on the same wall outlet. Overload
could result in a fire.
Caution Symbol
• The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible.
Otherwise you can not pull out the power plug when an emergency
occurs.
Installation and operation precautions 2
bizhub C252 2-7
Power plug
7 WARNING
Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
7 CAUTION
Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
Grounding
7 WARNING
Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
Warning Symbol
• Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with a wet hand,
as an electrical shock could result.
• Plug the power cord all the way into the power outlet. Failure
to do this could result in a fire or electrical shock.
Caution Symbol
• Do not tug the power cord when unplugging. Pulling on the
power cord could damage the cord, resulting in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Remove the power plug from the outlet more than one time a
year and clean the area between the plug terminals. Dust that
accumulates between the plug terminals may cause a fire.
Warning Symbol
• Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet that is
equipped with a grounding terminal.
2 Installation and operation precautions
2-8 bizhub C252
Installation
7 WARNING
Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
7 CAUTION
Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
Warning Symbol
• Do not place a flower vase or other container that contains
water, or metal clips or other small metallic objects on this
product. Spilled water or metallic objects dropped inside the
product could result in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown.
Should a piece of metal, water, or any other similar foreign
matter get inside the product, immediately turn OFF the power
switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and
then call your authorized service representative.
Caution Symbol
• After installing this product, mount it on a secure base. If the
unit moves or falls, it may cause personal injury.
• Do not place the product in a dusty place, or a site exposed
to soot or steam, near a kitchen table, bath, or a humidifier.
A fire, electrical shock, or breakdown could result.
• Do not place this product on an unstable or tilted bench, or
in a location subject to a lot of vibration and shock. It could
drop or fall, causing personal injury or mechanical breakdown.
• Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes of this product.
Heat could accumulate inside the product, resulting in a
fire or malfunction.
• Do not use flammable sprays, liquids, or gases near this
product, as a fire could result.
Installation and operation precautions 2
bizhub C252 2-9
Ventilation
7 CAUTION
Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
Actions in response to troubles
7 WARNING
Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
Caution Symbol
• Always use this product in a well ventilated location. Operating
the product in a poorly ventilated room for an extended
period of time could injure your health. Ventilate the room at
regular intervals.
Warning Symbol
• Do not keep using this product, if this product becomes inordinately
hot or emits smoke, or unusual odor or noise. Immediately
turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord
from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service
representative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical
shock could result.
• Do not keep using this product, if this product has been
dropped or its cover damaged. Immediately turn OFF the
power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet,
and then call your authorized service representative. If you
keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock could result.
2 Installation and operation precautions
2-10 bizhub C252
7 CAUTION
Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
Consumables
7 WARNING
Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
7 CAUTION
Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
Caution Symbol
• The inside of this product has areas subject to high temperature,
which may cause burns.
When checking the inside of the unit for malfunctions such as
a paper misfeed, do not touch the locations (around the fusing
unit, etc.) which are indicated by a "Caution HOT" caution
label.
Warning Symbol
• Do not throw the toner cartridge or toner into an open flame.
The hot toner may scatter and cause burns or other damage.
Caution Symbol
• Do not leave a toner unit or drum unit in a place within easy
reach of children. Licking or ingesting any of these things
could injure your health.
• Do not store toner units and PC drum units near a floppy disk
or watch that are susceptible to magnetism. They could
cause these products to malfunction.
Installation and operation precautions 2
bizhub C252 2-11
When moving the machine
7 CAUTION
Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
Before successive holidays
When the optional Fax Kit FK-502 is not installed:
7 CAUTION
Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property.
% Do not ignore this safety advices.
Caution Symbol
• Whenever moving this product, be sure to disconnect the
power cord and other cables. Failure to do this could damage
the cord or cable, resulting in a fire, electrical shock, or
breakdown.
• When moving this product, always hold it by the locations
specified in the user manual or other documents. If the unit
falls it may cause severe personal injury. The product may
also be damaged or malfunction.
Caution Symbol
• Unplug the product when you will not use the product for
long periods of time.
2 Installation and operation precautions
2-12 bizhub C252
2.2 Regulation notices
CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity) for users of the European Union
(EU)
This product complies with the following EU directives:
89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC directives.
This declaration is valid for the area of the European Union.
This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX)
cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely
to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under
CISPR rules and local rules.
USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES
(for U.S.A. users)
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which
case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
7 WARNING
The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and
any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are
subject to FCC control.
Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the
manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations.
% This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100
Base-TX) cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded
cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and
is prohibited under FCC rules.
INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003
ISSUE 4) (for Canada users)
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
Installation and operation precautions 2
bizhub C252 2-13
For users in countries not subject to class B regulations
7 WARNING
Interference with radio communications:
% This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.
% This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100
Base-TX) cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded
cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and
is prohibited under CISPR rules and local rules.
Laser safety
This is a digital machine which operates using a laser. There is no possibility
of danger from the laser provided the machine is operated according to the
instructions in this manual.
Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within protective
housing, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase
of user operation.
This machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product: This means the machine
does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
Internal laser radiation
7 WARNING
This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser
beam.
% The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in
the print head unit.
% The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM:
Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any
circumstances.
Specification
Maximum Average Radiation
Power
8.0 μW at the laser aperture of the print head unit
Wavelength 775-800 nm
2 Installation and operation precautions
2-14 bizhub C252
CDRH regulations
This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation
Performance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of
1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United
States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of
Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not
produce hazardous laser radiation.
The label shown on page 2-13 indicates compliance with the CDRH
regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United
States.
7 CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
% This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode
is 10 mW and the wavelength is 775-800 nm.
Laser Aperture of the
Print Head Unit
Print Head
Installation and operation precautions 2
bizhub C252 2-15
For European users
7 CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
% This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode
is 10 mW and the wavelength is 775-800 nm.
For Denmark users
7 ADVARSEL
Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af
funktion.
% Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af
funktion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der
opfylder IEC 60825-1 sikkerheds kravene.
Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 10 mW og
bølgelængden er 775-800 nm.
For Finland, Sweden users
LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
7 VAROITUS
Tämä on puolijohdelaser.
% Laitteen Käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla
tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle
näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin sunrin teho on 10 mW ja aallonpituus
on 775-800 nm.
2 Installation and operation precautions
2-16 bizhub C252
7 VARNING
Det här är en halvledarlaser.
% Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning
specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som
överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 10 mW
och våglängden är 775-800 nm.
7 VAROITUS
Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle
lasersäteilylle.
% Älä katso säteeseen.
7 VARNING
Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är
urkopplad.
% Betrakta ej strålen.
For Norway users
7 ADVARSEL!
Dette en halvleder laser.
% Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne
bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som
overskrider grensen for laser klass 1.
Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 10 mW og
bølgelengde er 775-800 nm.
Installation and operation precautions 2
bizhub C252 2-17
Laser safety labely
A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the machine, as shown
below.
* Only for the U.S.A.
2 Installation and operation precautions
2-18 bizhub C252
Ozone release
7 CAUTION
Locate the Machine in a Well Ventilated Room
% A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of
this machine. An unpleasant odor may, however, be created in poorly
ventilated rooms during extensive machine operations. For a
comfortable, healthy, and safe operating environment, it is
recommended that the room well ventilated.
7 ATTENTION
Une quantité d’ozone négligable est dégagée pendant le
fonctionnement de l’appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement.
Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut être ressentie dans les pièces dont
l’aération est insuffisante et lorsque une utilisation prolongée de l’appareil
est effectuée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement
réunissant des conditions de confort, santé et de sécurité, il est préférable
de bien aérer la pièce ou se trouve l’appareil.
% Placer l’appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée.
Acoustic noise (for European users only)
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV: Der höchste
Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779.
For EU member states only
This symbol means: Do not dispose of this
product together with your household
waste!
Please refer to the information of your local
community or contact our dealers
regrading the proper handling of end-oflife
electric and electronic equipments.
Recycling of this product will help to
conserve natural resources and prevent potential negative consequences for
the environment and human health caused by inappropriate waste handling.
This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) Directive.
Installation and operation precautions 2
bizhub C252 2-19
2.3 Caution notations and labels
Safety precaution notations and labels appear on this machine at the
following positions.
Be very careful that an accident does not occur when operations such as
removing paper misfeeds are performed.
It is illegal to copy
certain types of
documents. Never
copy such documents.
Do not alter or remove
any covers or panels
attached to this
machine, otherwise
you may be exposed
to laser radiation.
Do not burn used
imaging units. Toner
expelled from the fire
is dangerous.
Do not burn used
toner cartridges.
Toner expelled from
the fire is dangerous.
CAUTION
CAUTION
WARNING
Do not burn the used
waste-toner box.
Toner expelled from
the fire is dangerous.
CAUTION
Do not position the used
waste-toner box so that
it is standing on end or
tilted, otherwise toner
may spill.
WARNING
WARNING
The area around the
fusing unit is extremely
hot. Touching any part
other than those
indicated may result in
burns.
CAUTION
2 Installation and operation precautions
2-20 bizhub C252
2.4 Space requirements
To ensure that machine operation, consumables replenishing, part
replacement, and regular maintenance can easily be performed, adhere to
the recommended space requirements detailed below.
2
Reminder
Be sure to allow a clearance of 100 mm (4 in.) or more at the back of this
machine for the ventilation duct.
C252+DF-601+FS514+PC-403+SD-503+OT-601
Unit: mm (inch)
190
(7-1/2)
1212
(47-3/4)
341
(13-1/2)
394
(15-1/2)
755
(29-3/4)
100
(4)
312
(12-1/4)
1208
(47-1/2)
Installation and operation precautions 2
bizhub C252 2-21
2.5 Operation precautions
To ensure the optimum performance of this machine, observe the
precautions described below.
Power source
The power source requirements are as follows.
- Voltage fluctuation: Maximum ± 10% (at 220 to 240 V AC)
- Frequency fluctuation: Maximum ± 3 Hz (at 50 Hz)
– Use a power source with as little voltage or frequency fluctuations as
possible.
Operating environment
The environmental requirements for correct operation of the machine are as
follows.
- Temperature: 10°C (50°F) to 30°C (86°F) with fluctuations of no more than
10°C (18°F) within an hour
- Humidity: 15% to 85% with fluctuations of no more than 20% within an
hour
Storage of copies
To store copies, follow the recommendation listed below.
- Copies that are to be kept for a long time should be kept where they are
not exposed to light in order to prevent them from fading.
- Adhesive that contains solvent (e.g., spray glue) may dissolve the toner
on copies.
- Color copies have a thicker layer of toner than normal black-and-white
copies. Therefore, when a color copy is folded, the toner at the fold may
peel off.
2 Installation and operation precautions
2-22 bizhub C252
3 Before making copies
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-3
3 Before making copies
3.1 Part names and their functions
Options
1 2
3
4
8 7 6 5
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
3 Before making copies
3-4 bizhub C252
No. Part Name Description
1 Automatic Document Feeder
DF-601
Automatically feeds one document sheet at a time
for scanning, and automatically turns over doublesided
documents for scanning
Referred to as the "ADF" throughout the manual.
2 Original Cover OC-501 Presses down on the loaded document to keep it in
place
Referred to as the "original cover" throughout the
manual.
3 Working Table WT-501 Provides an area to temporarily place a document
or other materials
4 Fax Multi Line ML-501 Installed to increase the telephone lines available
for faxing
5 Desk DK-502 Allows this machine to be set up on the floor
Referred to as the "desk" throughout the manual.
6 Paper Feed Cabinet PC-103 The top tray can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of
paper, and the bottom tray can be used as storage.
Referred to as the "single paper feed cabinet"
throughout the manual.
7 Paper Feed Cabinet PC-203 Both the top and bottom trays can each be loaded
with up to 500 sheets of paper.
Referred to as the "double paper feed cabinet"
throughout the manual.
8 Paper Feed Cabinet PC-403 Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of paper
Referred to as the "LCT" throughout the manual.
9 Finisher FS-514 Feeds out finished printed pages. The "Sort" setting
(separating by copy set), "Group" setting (separating
by page), and Staple settings (corner
stapling and two-point stapling) are available.
10 Output Tray OT-601 Copy output tray installed onto the finisher FS-514
and used for separating printed pages
Referred to as the "optional finishing tray" throughout
the manual.
11 Punch Kit PK-501 Allows hole punching to be used if installed onto
finisher FS-603
12 Mailbin Kit MT-501 Installed onto the finisher FS-514 to divide printed
pages and feed them into the appropriate tray assigned
to a specific individual or group (only with
computer printing)
Referred to as the "mailbin" throughout the manual.
13 Saddle Stitcher SD-503 Installed onto the finisher FS-514 to allow copies to
be bound or folded at the center
Referred to as the "saddle stitcher" throughout the
manual.
14 Finisher FS-603 Feeds out printed pages. The "Offset" setting (separating),
Staple settings (stapling), and "Fold & Staple"
function (binding) are available.
• In order to install the finisher, the main unit must
be installed on the desk, on the LCT, on the single
paper feed cabinet, or on the double paper
feed cabinet.
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-5
* Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are internal options and therefore are not shown in the
illustration.
2
Reminder
In order to maintain the functionality and quality of the machine, be sure
to use the desk or paper feed cabinet when installing the machine on the
floor.
2
Note
Either FS-501 or FS-603 can be installed on this machine as options. A
kit is required in order to install FS-501 or FS-603. For details, contact
your technical representative.
15 Punch Kit PK-510 Allows hole punching to be used if installed onto
finisher FS-514
16 Finisher FS-501 Finishes printed pages according to the selected
Output setting (sorting or stapling), then feeds out
the pages
• In order to install the finisher, the main unit must
be installed on the desk, on the LCT, or on the
single paper feed cabinet or the double paper
feed cabinet.
17 Job Separator JS-601 Copy exit tray installed on finisher FS-501
Referred to as the "job separator" throughout the
manual.
18 Main unit The document is scanned by the scanner section,
and the scanned image is printed by the printer
section.
Referred to as the "machine", the "main unit", or
the "C252" throughout the manual.
19 Fax Kit FK-502* Allows this machine to be used as a fax machine
20 Mount Kit MK-706* Required to mount the fax kit and local interface kit
21 Mount Kit MK-704* Installed when using this machine as a fax machine
22 Scan Accelerator Kit SA-501* Creates images at high speed when sending scans,
and allows scan jobs saved in boxes to be printed.
23 Local Interface Kit EK-702* Used for making a local connection between this
machine and the computer
24 Dehumidifer Heater 1C* Installed in the paper feed cabinet or desk to prevent
humidity from collecting in the paper
25 Security Kit SC-503* Installed to encode the data saved on the hard disk
so that the hard disk can be used more safely.
No. Part Name Description
3 Before making copies
3-6 bizhub C252
Outside of machine
* The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional original cover
and LCT installed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-7
No. Part Name Description
1 Original cover pad Presses down on the loaded document to keep it in
place
2 Automatic duplex unit Turns over the paper for double-sided printing
3 Multiple bypass tray Used when printing onto paper with a size not loaded
into a paper tray or onto thick paper, overhead
projector transparencies, postcards, envelopes or
label sheets
Holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper, 20 sheets of
thick paper, overhead projector transparencies,
postcards or label sheets, or 10 envelopes
Referred to as the "bypass tray" throughout the
manual. (See p. 3-59.)
4 LCT Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of plain paper
5 Tray release button Pressed in order to pull out the paper tray for the
LCT
6 2nd tray Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper
(See p. 3-55.)
7 1st tray Can be loaded with up to 250 sheets of plain paper,
can be set to different paper sizes, and can be loaded
with up to 20 sheets of thick paper, overhead
projector transparencies, postcards, label sheets,
or envelopes (See p. 3-49.)
8 Front door Opened when replacing a toner cartridge or turning
the main power switch on and off. (See p. 10-6.)
9 Copy exit tray Collects printed pages
3 Before making copies
3-8 bizhub C252
* The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional ADF and double
paper feed cabinet installed.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
12 10 11 12
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-9
No. Part Name Description
10 Document feed tray Loaded with documents facing up (See p. 4-9.)
11 Document exit tray Collects documents that have been scanned
12 Misfeed-clearing cover Opened when clearing document misfeeds
13 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Pressed to turn on/off machine operations, for example,
for copying, printing or scanning
When turned off, the machine enters a state where
it conserves energy.
14 Automatic duplex unit release lever
Used to open the automatic duplex unit door when
clearing paper misfeeds
15 Automatic duplex unit door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
automatic duplex unit
16 Upper right-side door release lever
Used to open the upper right-side door
17 Center right-side door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the
2nd tray
18 Center right-side door release lever
Used to open the center right-side door
19 Lower right-side door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the 3rd
or 4th trays or from the LCT
20 Lower right-side door release lever
Used to open the lower right-side door when clearing
paper misfeeds
21 4th tray/storage tray Used for storage when the single paper feed cabinet
is installed
Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper
when the double paper feed cabinet is installed
(See p. 3-55.)
22 3rd tray Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper
(See p. 3-55.)
23 Control panel Used to specify the various settings (See p. 3-22.)
24 Adjustable document guide Adjusted to the width of the document (See p. 4-9.)
3 Before making copies
3-10 bizhub C252
* The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional ADF, LCT, fax
multi line and dehumidifier heater installed.
25
27
28
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
29
39
38
26
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-11
No. Part Name Description
25 ADF connector Used for connecting the ADF hookup cord
26 Filter 1 Collects the toner dust generated in the machine
27 Power connector Used for connecting the power cord
28 Dehumidifier heater power switch Used to turn the dehumidifier heater on and off.
Turning on the dehumidifier heater reduces moisture
in the paper. This switch is used when the optional
dehumidifier heater is installed.
29 Filter 2 Collects the toner dust generated in the machine
30 TEL jack 2 Used for connecting a telephone
31 LINE jack 2 Used for connecting a general subscriber line. This
jack is used when the optional fax multi line is installed.
32 TEL jack 1 Used for connecting a telephone
33 LINE jack 1 Used for connecting the general subscriber line
34 IEEE1284 port (type C) Used for connecting the parallel cable from the
computer
35 USB port (type B)
USB 2.0/1.1-compliant
Used for connecting a USB cable from the computer
36 Internal controller port Used for connecting the internal controller
37 Network connector
(10 Base-T/100 Base -TX)
Used for connecting the network cable when this
machine is used for network printing and network
scanning
38 Ozone filter Collects the ozone generated in the machine
39 Finisher connector Used for connecting the finisher hookup cord
3 Before making copies
3-12 bizhub C252
Inside of machine
No. Part Name Description
1 Original glass Place a document on the glass so that it can be
scanned. (See p. 4-11.)
2 Document transfer belt Feeds the document loaded into the ADF
3 Fusing unit cover Opened when clearing paper misfeeds in the fusing
unit
4 M2 release levers Used when printing on envelopes. Used when
clearing paper misfeeds in the fusing unit.
5 Main unit right-side door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from inside
the main unit
6 Unlocking knob Used when removing the imaging units
7 Imaging unit Creates the print image
8 Charger-cleaning tool Used to clean the electrostatic charger wire, for example,
when incorrect copies are produced (See
p. 11-7.)
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
9 8
10
13
11
12
14
15
16
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-13
9 Print head glass cleaning tool Used to clean the surface of the print head glass,
for example, when replacing the imaging unit
10 Waste toner box Collects used waste toner
11 Waste toner box release lever Used when removing the waste toner box
12 Main power switch Used to turn the machine on and off (See p. 3-30)
13 Total counter Shows the total number of pages that have been
printed
14 Locking tab Used when removing the toner cartridges
15 Toner cartridges There are four toner cartridges: cyan (C), magenta
(M), yellow (Y) and black (K). The combination of the
four toners generates full-color images.
16 Document scales Position the document so that it is aligned with the
scales. Also, use the scales to measure the loaded
document. (See p. 4-11.)
No. Part Name Description
3 Before making copies
3-14 bizhub C252
Finisher FS-603/punch kit PK-501
No. Part Name Description
1 Exit tray 1 Collects printed pages
2 Upper door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds (See
p. 6-35.)
3 Horizontal transport unit cover Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the
horizontal transport unit (See p. 6-35.)
4 Hole-punch waste container Removed when emptying hole-punch waste that
has accumulated from using the Punch settings
(See p. 10-42.)
5 Misfeed-clearing guide Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 6-35.)
6 Right-side door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 6-35.)
2
3
4
5
7 6
1
13
12
10
11
9 8
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-15
* Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are installed within the finisher and therefore are not shown in
the illustration.
7 Exit tray 2 Collects copies printed using the "Fold & Staple"
setting
8 Misfeed-clearing dial in folding
section
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds in the folding
section (See p. 6-35.)
9 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stapler unit when clearing
jammed staples or replacing the staple cartridge
(See p. 10-13, p. 10-26.)
10 Misfeed-clearing dial 1 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 6-35.)
11 Misfeed-clearing dial 2 Turned when clearing jammed staples or replacing
the staple cartridge, or for moving the staple cartridge
holder out to the front (See p. 10-26.)
12 Stapler unit Pulled out when clearing jammed staples or replacing
the staple cartridge (See p. 10-13, p. 10-26.)
13 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed
staples or when replacing the staple cartridge (See
p. 10-13, p. 10-26.)
14 Punch kit* Punches holes for filing printed pages when punch
kit PK-501 is installed onto finisher FS-603
No. Part Name Description
3 Before making copies
3-16 bizhub C252
Finisher FS-501/job separator JS-601
No. Part Name Description
1 Front door FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 6-31.)
2 Misfeed-clearing dials FN5 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 6-31.)
3 Exit tray 2 Collects printed pages
4 Exit tray 1 Collects printed pages
5 Exit tray 3 Feeds out printed pages when job separator JS-
601 is installed onto finisher FS-501
6 Job separator cover Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
job separator (See p. 6-31.)
7 Misfeed-clearing guide FN3 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 6-31.)
13
7 8
1
2
3
4
5 6
9
10
11
12
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-17
8 Misfeed-clearing guide FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 6-31.)
9 Upper cover FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 6-31.)
10 Horizontal transport unit cover Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the
horizontal transport unit (See p. 6-31.)
11 Misfeed-clearing guide FN7 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 6-31.)
12 Stapler Used to staple pages
13 Jammed-staple-clearing dial Turned when clearing jammed staples or replacing
the staple cartridge, or for moving the stapler to the
center (See p. 10-10, p. 10-24.)
No. Part Name Description
3 Before making copies
3-18 bizhub C252
Saddle stitcher SD-503/mailbin kit MT-501
Saddle stitcher SD-503
Mailbin kit MT-501
No. Part name Description
1 Copy output tray Collects copies
2 Misfeed-clearing door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within
the finisher
No. Part name Description
3 Mailbins Collects printed pages
4 Misfeed-clearing door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds
5 Lever [FN7] Opened when clearing paper misfeeds
4
3
5
2
1
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-19
Finisher FS-514/output tray OT-601/punch kit PK-510
1
13
2
3 4 5 6 7
12 11 10 9 8
3 Before making copies
3-20 bizhub C252
Finisher FS-514
Output tray OT-601
Punch kit PK-510
Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are installed within the finisher and therefore
are not shown in the illustration.
No. Part name Description
1 Output tray 1 Collects copies that are fed out
2 Output tray 2 Collects copies that are fed out
3 Dial [FN6] Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher
4 Dial [FN5] Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher
5 Dial [FN4] Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher
6 Dial [FN2] Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher
7 Lever [FN1] Raised when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher
8 Hole-punch waste container Removed when emptying hole-punch waste
that has accumulated from using the punch settings
9 Lever [FN3] Lowered when clearing paper misfeeds within
the finisher
10 Stapler Moved to the front when clearing jammed staples
11 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stapler when replacing the
staple cartridge or clearing jammed staples
12 Dial Turned to move the stapler to the front when
clearing jammed staples
No. Part name Description
13 Optional output tray Collects copies
No. Part name Description
14 Punch Kit* Punches holes for filing printed pages when
punch kit PK-510 is installed onto finisher FS-
514
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-21
Precautions for using the finisher:
- When moving the finisher, do not grab the exit tray.
- Do not place objects below the output trays of the finisher.
- Do not place objects on top of the saddle stitcher or mailbin kit.
3 Before making copies
3-22 bizhub C252
Control panel
No. Part Name Description
1 [Power Save] key Press to enter Low Power mode. While the machine
is in Low Power mode, the indicator on the [Power
Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel
goes off. To cancel Low Power mode, press the
[Power Save] key again.
2 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages.
Specify the various settings by directly touching the
panel.
3 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings
have been applied, press this key after entering the
user name and password (for user authentication)
or the account name and password (for account
track) in order to use this machine.
4 [Box] key Press to enter Box mode.
While the machine is in Box mode, the indicator on
the [Box] key lights up in green. For details, refer to
the Box Operations of the User manual.
5 [Fax] key Press to enter Fax mode.
While the machine is in Fax mode, the indicator on
the [Fax] key lights up in green.
For details, refer to the Facsimle Operations and
the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual.
6 [Scan] key Press to enter Scan mode.
While the machine is in Scan mode, the indicator on
the [Scan] key lights up in green.
For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations
of the User manual.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
9
10
11
12
21 20 1918 17 15 13
22
23
24
16 14
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-23
7 [Copy] key Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine
is in Copy mode.)
While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator
on the [Copy] key lights up in green.
8 [Reset] key Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings)
entered in the control panel and touch panel.
9 [Interrupt] key Press to enter Interrupt mode.
While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator
on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and the
message "Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the
touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the
[Interrupt] key again.
10 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Press to turn on/off machine operations, for example,
for copying, printing or scanning. When turned
off, the machine enters a state where it conserves
energy.
11 [Stop] key Press the [Stop] key during copying to stop the
copy operation.
12 [Start] key Press to start copying. When this machine is ready
to begin copying, the indicator on the [Start] key
lights up in green. If the indicator on the [Start] key
lights up in orange, copying cannot begin.
Press to restart a stopped job. For details on jobs,
refer to "Managing jobs (Job List)" on page 12-3.
13 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on
with the main power switch
14 Data indicator Flashes in green while a print job is being received
Lights up in green while a print job is queued to be
printed or while it is printing
15 [Proof Copy] key Press to print a single sample copy to be checked
before printing a large number of copies. (See
p. 5-6.)
16 Keypad Use to type in the number of copies to be produced.
Use to type in the zoom ratio.
Use to type in the various settings.
17 [C] (clear) key Press to erase a value (such as the number of copies,
a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad.
18 [Mode Check] key Press to display screens showing the specified settings.
19 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the Meter Count screen and the
Utility screen.
20 [Mode Memory] key Press to register the desired copy settings as a program
or to recall a registered copy program. (See
p. 5-15.)
21 Contrast dial Use to adjust the contrast of the touch panel.
22 [Enlarge Display] key Press to enter Enlarge Display mode.
No. Part Name Description
3 Before making copies
3-24 bizhub C252
2
Reminder
Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be
scratched or damaged.
Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or
pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel.
23 [Accessibility] key Press to display the screen for specifying user accessibility
functions.
24 [Help] key Press to display the Main Help Menu screen, where
descriptions of the various functions and details of
operations can be displayed. (See p. 5-18.)
No. Part Name Description
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-25
Basic settings screen (Basic screen)
When the machine is ready to begin making copies after being turned on, the
Basic screen appears.
To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly touch the desired button
in the touch panel.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
2 3
1
10
9 8 7 6
5
4
2 3
10
5
9
8
6
7
4
3 Before making copies
3-26 bizhub C252
!
Detail
The Basic screen (TYPE1 or TYPE2) that appears can be set with the
"Copy Initial Screen Setting" parameter in the Display Setting screen
(displayed from the User Setting screen). The arrangement of the buttons
and screens differ with TYPE1 and TYPE2; however, the functions that
can be set are the same. As a default, "TYPE1" is selected. This manual
contains descriptions of procedures using the Basic screen that appears
when "TYPE1" is selected.
For details on switching between the two types of Basic screens, refer to
"Display setting" on page 13-30.
If settings have been changed from the factory defaults, the tab for the
screen containing the changed settings appears framed with a solid line.
No. Item Name Description
1 Sub display area The results of operations and settings are displayed.
2 [Job List] button Jobs currently being performed or waiting to be
performed are displayed.
Various commands for checking and managing
jobs are available. (See p. 12-3.)
3 Message display area The status of the machine and details on operations
that must be performed are displayed here.
4 Functions/settings display Tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing
various functions are displayed.
Touch a tab or button to display the corresponding
screen for specifying the settings.
5 Image display An image of the specified settings, such as stapling
and hole punching, are displayed.
6 [Finishing] button Touch to specify settings for collating, uncollating,
stapling, or hole punching. (See p. 4-81.)
7 [Fold & Staple] button Touch to specify the function for folding and binding
pages.
8 [Save in User Box] button Touch to save the data of scanned image in a box.
Various commands are available to specify the box
where the data is to be saved and whether or not
the data is printed when it is saved. For details, refer
to the Box Operations of the User manual.
9 [Separate Scan] button Touch to scan the document in separate batches.
A document scanned in different batches can be
treated as a single copy job. (See p. 4-13.)
10 Icon display area Icons indicating the status of jobs and the machine
are displayed.
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-27
Icons that appear in the screen
Icon Description
Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current
mode
Indicates that this machine is receiving data, regardless of the current
mode
Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation,
a print operation or a scan operation
Touch this icon to view a screen containing a warning code.
If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, touch this
button to display the warning screen again.
Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray
Indicates that not much paper remains in the paper tray
Indicates that "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON"
3 Before making copies
3-28 bizhub C252
3.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel
The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles.
Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation.
To adjust the angle of the control panel
1 Pull the control panel release lever
toward you, and then push down on
the control panel.
The control panel stops at the middle
position.
1 Upper position (base position)
2 Middle position
3 Lower position
Control panel release lever
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-29
2 To adjust the control panel to an
even steeper angle, pull the control
panel release lever toward you, and
then push down on the control panel.
The control panel stops at the lower
position.
3 To return the control panel to the
upper position, pull the control panel
release lever toward you, and then
pull up on the control panel.
3 Before making copies
3-30 bizhub C252
3.3 Turning on the Main Power and the Auxiliary Power
This machine has two power controls: the main power switch and the
[Power] (auxiliary power) key.
To turn on the machine
The main power switch turns on/off all functions of the machine. Normally,
the main power switch is turned on.
The [Power] (auxiliary power) key turns on/off machine operations, for
example, for copying, printing or scanning. When the [Power] (auxiliary
power) key is turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves
energy.
1 Open the machine’s front door, and
then set the main power switch to [ | ].
2 Close the front door.
3 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power)
button.
Check that the touch panel is turned
on.
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-31
!
Detail
When the control panel is turned on by pressing the [Power] (auxiliary
power) button, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, and a
screen indicating that the machine is starting up appears.
After a few seconds, the message "Now warming up. Ready to scan."
appears on the touch panel, and the indicator on the [Start] key lights up
in green, indicating that a job can now be queued.
The default settings are those that are selected immediately after the
machine is turned on (the power switch is set to “n”) and before any
setting is specified from the control panel or touch panel, and those that
are selected when the [Reset] key is pressed to cancel all settings
specified from the control panel or touch panel. The default settings can
be changed. For details, refer to "Initial setting" on page 13-32.
The factory default settings are the settings that were selected when this
machine was sent from the factory.
2
Note
A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the
[Power] (auxiliary power) key is pressed. For details, refer to "To scan
during warm-up" on page 3-32.
After the machine has finished warming up, the scanned image will be
printed.
The machine takes about 110 seconds to warm up at normal room
temperature (23°C) when the control panel is turned on using the [Power]
(auxiliary power) key after the machine is turned on using the main power
switch.
3 Before making copies
3-32 bizhub C252
To scan during warm-up
1 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) button.
The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange.
? How is the machine turned on?
% For details on turning on the machine, refer to "To turn on the
machine" on page 3-30.
2 Check that the message "Now warming up. Ready to scan." appears
on the touch panel
.
– After the warm-up message is displayed, the Basic screen appears.
The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in green.
3 Position the document to be copied.
? How is the document positioned?
% For details on positioning the document to be copied, refer to
"Feeding the document" on page 4-9.
4 Specify any necessary copy settings.
5 Using the keypad, specify the desired number of copies.
? How is the number of copies specified?
% For details on specifying the number of copies, refer to "General
copy operation" on page 4-3.
6 Press the [Start] key.
The document is scanned, and the job is added to the list of queued
jobs.
7 Check that the document has finished being scanned, and then
position the next document.
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-33
8 Specify new copy settings and the desired number of copies, and then
press the [Start] key.
– After the machine has finished warming up, the jobs will
automatically be printed in the order that they were queued.
? How is the printing of a job stopped?
% Press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to "Stopping
scanning/printing" on page 4-105.
!
Detail
While the machine is warming up to begin printing after it is turned on
using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key, copy settings can be specified
and a document can be scanned to reserve a copy job. After the machine
has finished warming up, the copies are automatically printed.
The print order can be changed or jobs can be deleted from the Current
Jobs list of the Job List screen. For details, refer to "Managing jobs (Job
List)" on page 12-3.
3 Before making copies
3-34 bizhub C252
To turn off the machine
1 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) button.
– Check that the touch panel is turned off.
2 Open the machine’s front door.
3 Set the main power switch to [o].
4 Close the front door.
2
Reminder
When the main power switch is turned off, then on again, wait at least 10
seconds to turn it on after turning it off. If there is no wait period between
turning the main power switch off, then on again, the machine may not
function properly.
Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power]
(auxiliary power) key while it is making copies or printing, otherwise a
paper misfeed may occur.
Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power]
(auxiliary power) key while it is scanning or sending or receiving data,
otherwise all scanned data or transmission data will be deleted.
Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch while a queued
job or stored data is waiting to be printed, otherwise the jobs will be
deleted.
!
Detail
The following are cleared when the main power switch and [Power]
(auxiliary power) key are turned off.
Settings that have not been programmed
Jobs queued to be printed
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-35
Automatically canceling the settings (automatic panel reset)
If the [Reset] key is not pressed and no operation is performed for a specified
length of time, settings that have not been programmed, such as the number
of copies, are cleared and return to their default settings.
This is the automatic panel reset operation.
As the factory default, the automatic panel reset operation is performed after
1 minute.
!
Detail
The length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed
and whether or not it is performed can be set from the Utility mode. For
details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38.
Whether or not the automatic panel reset operation is performed when
there is a change of user can be set from the Utility mode. For details,
refer to "System setting" on page 13-38.
Automatically canceling the mode screen (automatic system reset)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the screen is
automatically changed to that for the mode given priority.
This is the automatic system reset operation.
As the factory default, the Copy mode screen is displayed after 1 minute.
!
Detail
The mode screen that is displayed when the automatic system reset
operation is performed can be changed from the Utility mode. For details,
refer to "System setting" on page 13-38.
3 Before making copies
3-36 bizhub C252
Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the touch panel
goes off and the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves
energy.
This is the Low Power mode.
The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode.
As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode after 15 minutes.
To recover from Low Power mode
1 Press the [Power Save] key.
2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up.
– The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has
finished warming up, it is ready to begin printing (within 30 seconds
at normal room temperature (23°C)).
2
Note
As the factory default, pressing the [Power Save] key causes the machine
to enter Low Power mode. Settings in the Administrator mode can be
changed to put the machine in Sleep mode instead. For details, refer to
"System setting" on page 13-38.
The Low Power mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the
control panel or by touching the touch panel.
!
Detail
The length of time until the machine enters Low Power mode can be
changed. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-27,
page 13-38.
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-37
Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the machine
automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy.
Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low
Power mode, the machine must warm up when Sleep mode is canceled to
begin printing again, therefore taking more preparation time than Low Power
mode.
As the factory default, the machine enters Sleep mode after 30 minutes.
To recover from Sleep mode
1 Press the [Power Save] key.
2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up.
– The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has
finished warming up, it is ready to begin printing (within 110
seconds at normal room temperature (23°C)).
2
Note
The Sleep mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control
panel or by touching the touch panel.
!
Detail
As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode if no
operation is performed for 15 minutes, and then the machine enters
Sleep mode after 30 minutes have elapsed.
The length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode can be changed.
For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-27, page 13-38.
3 Before making copies
3-38 bizhub C252
Manually conserving energy
The machine can be manually set to an energy conservation mode.
% Press the [Power Save] key (or press
the [Power] (auxiliary power) button).
– As the factory default, the
machine enters Low Power
mode.
!
Detail
Whether the machine enters Low Power mode or Sleep mode when the
[Power Save] key is pressed can be set from the Administrator mode. For
details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38.
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-39
Automatically turning the machine on/off (weekly timer)
The machine can be set to automatically enter Sleep mode according to a
usage schedule determined by the administrator or limitations on the use of
the machine can be specified.
This is the weekly timer.
Follow the procedure described below to use the machine while the weekly
timer is being used.
1 Press the [Power Save] key.
? How is the weekly timer set?
% For details on setting the weekly
timer, refer to "System setting"
on page 13-38.
2 Type in the password (up to 8 digits) for non-business hours.
? How is the password for non-business hours specified?
% For details on specifying the password for non-business hours,
refer to "System setting" on page 13-38.
3 Touch [OK].
The message "Access restricted due to weekly timer. Input amount of
time prior to entering Sleep Mode." appears on the touch panel.
3 Before making copies
3-40 bizhub C252
4 Using the keypad, type in the length of time until the machine enters
Sleep mode again.
Specify a length of time between 5 minutes and 9 hours and 59
minutes.
? How can a single digit be input?
% First, type in "0". If a minutes setting of less than 5 is entered, the
setting changes to 5 minutes. In addition, a minutes setting of 60 or
more cannot be specified.
5 Touch [OK].
The message "Ready to copy." appears on the touch panel.
2
Note
As the factory default, the weekly timer is not set.
If the message "Access restricted due to weekly timer. Input amount of
time prior to entering Sleep Mode." or "Access restricted due to weekly
timer. Input password to interrupt timer." appears after the [Power]
(auxiliary power) key is pressed, the weekly timer is set.
!
Detail
During the set time, the copy operations can be performed as usual.
From the Password for Non-Business Hours screen (displayed from
Administrator mode), the machine can be set so that the screen for
entering the password for non-business hours is not displayed.
The default setting for the "Password for Non-Business Hours"
parameter is "OFF" (the screen is not displayed).
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-41
Controlling each user’s use of this machine (user authentication)
If user authentication settings have been specified by the administrator, only
users that have been registered can use this machine.
0 When user authentication has been set, only users that enter passwords
for specified accounts can use this machine.
0 Contact your administrator for account passwords.
0 A total of 1000 users and accounts can be registered.
1 Touch [User Name].
– If "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON", [Public User Access]
and [List] do not appear.
3 Before making copies
3-42 bizhub C252
– If "Active Directory" was selected for external server authentication,
[Domain Name] appears with the name of the default server. Touch
[Domain Name] to display the names of servers registered with
"Active Directory", and then select the desired server. For details on
specifying settings for an external server, refer to "To select an
authentication method" on page 13-98.
2 Type in the user name, and then touch [OK].
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-43
3 Touch [Password].
4 Type in the password, and then touch [OK].
5 Press the [Access] key.
The Basic screen appears.
6 Make copies using the desired copy settings.
3 Before making copies
3-44 bizhub C252
7 When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key.
A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off.
8 Touch [Yes].
The user authentication screen appears again.
!
Detail
For details on specifying user authentication settings, refer to "User
authentication/account track" on page 13-50.
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-45
2
Note
The user authentication settings can be used together with the account
track settings. If the "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track"
parameter is set to "Synchronize", complete user authentication, and
then log on by using the account track input screen.
User authentication settings can be specified using the User
Authentication Setting parameters in Administrator mode, available from
the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator.
If a list of user names can be displayed, the desired user name can be
selected from the list. Touch [List], touch the button for the desired user
name to select it, and then touch [OK].
Users who have no access to a user name and password can touch
[Public User Access] to use this machine. For details on specifying public
user settings, refer to "To select an authentication method" on
page 13-98 and "Authenticating public users" on page 13-106.
If account track settings have been applied, the account track screen
appears. However, if "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track"
has been set to "Synchronize", the account track screen does not appear
if the users and accounts are synchronized.
3 Before making copies
3-46 bizhub C252
Controlling each account’s use of this machine (account track)
If account track has been set by the administrator, only users of registered
accounts can use this machine. In addition, the number of prints produced
with each account can be controlled.
This is account track.
0 When account track has been set, only users that enter passwords for
specified accounts can use this machine.
0 Contact your administrator for account passwords.
0 A total of 1000 users and accounts can be registered.
1 Touch [Account Name].
– If the Administrator mode settings have been set to "Password
Only", touch [Input], and then continue with step 4.
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-47
2 Type in the account name, and then touch [OK].
3 Touch [Password].
4 Type in the password, and then touch [OK].
3 Before making copies
3-48 bizhub C252
5 Press the [Access] key.
The Basic screen appears.
6 Make copies using the desired copy settings.
7 When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key.
A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off.
8 Touch [Yes].
The account track screen appears again.
!
Detail
If "Account Track Input Method" on the General Settings screen of
Administrator mode was set to "Password Only", log on is possible by
only entering the password. For details, refer to "User
authentication/account track" on page 13-50.
The accounts can be managed using the User Authentication Setting and
Account Track Setting functions in Administrator mode, available from
the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator.
For details on specifying account track settings, refer to "User
authentication/account track" on page 13-50.
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-49
3.4 Loading paper into the 1st tray
To load paper (1st tray)
1 Pull out the 1st tray.
2 Press down on the paper-lifting plate
until it locks into place.
3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size
of paper to be loaded.
? How is non-standard sized paper
loaded?
% First load the paper, and then
adjust the lateral guides to the
size of the loaded paper.
Paper-lifting
plate
Paper take-up
roller
Lateral guide
3 Before making copies
3-50 bizhub C252
4 For paper exceeding A3 size, adjust
the trailing-edge guides as shown in
the illustration.
5 Load the paper into the tray so that
the side of the paper to be printed on
(the side facing up when the package
was unwrapped) faces up.
– Load letterhead paper so that the
side to be printed on faces down.
? How is curled paper loaded?
% Flatten the paper before loading
it.
? How many sheets of paper and
other media can be loaded?
% No more than 250 sheets of plain
paper can be loaded. No more than 20 sheets of thick paper,
overhead projector transparencies, postcards, label sheets or
envelopes can be loaded.
% Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of the stack
is higher than the , mark.
6 Close the 1st tray.
– If envelopes are loaded, continue with step 7.
Trailing-edge guide
, mark
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-51
7 Pull up the upper right-side door
release lever, and then open the
upper right-side door.
8 Push up the fusing unit cover.
9 Push down the left and right release
levers M2 to the position.
10 Close the fusing unit cover.
11 Close the upper right-side door.
– After printing envelopes, return the left and right M2 release levers
to their center positions.
M2
3 Before making copies
3-52 bizhub C252
!
Detail
When loading paper exceeding A3 size into the 1st tray, the paper can
have a width up to 311.1 mm and a length up to 457.2 mm.
For details on specifying the paper size for the 1st tray, refer to "To
specify a paper size (set size settings)" on page 8-12.
If special paper is loaded, the paper type setting must be specified. For
details, refer to "To specify a setting for special paper" on page 8-25.
2
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your
hands.
If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded paper, the
paper size will not be correctly detected. Be sure to adjust the lateral
guides to the size of the loaded paper.
Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is
removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed,
otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a paper misfeed may
occur.
When loading envelopes, load them in the w orientation with the flap side
down, as shown in the illustration. If the envelopes are loaded with the
flap side up, a paper misfeed may occur. The flap side of envelopes
cannot be printed on.
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-53
When loading overhead projector transparencies, load them in the v
orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load overhead projector
transparencies in the w orientation.
When loading postcards, load them in the w orientation, as shown in the
illustration. Do not load postcards in the v orientation.
3 Before making copies
3-54 bizhub C252
Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces
down.
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-55
3.5 Loading paper into the 2nd, 3rd or 4th tray
To load paper (2nd, 3rd or 4th tray)
1 Pull out the paper tray.
2 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper to be loaded.
3 Load the paper into the tray so that
the side of the paper to be printed on
(the side facing up when the package
was unwrapped) faces up.
Lateral
guide
Film
, mark
3 Before making copies
3-56 bizhub C252
– Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down.
? How is curled paper loaded?
% Flatten the paper before loading it.
? How many sheets of paper can be loaded?
% No more than 500 sheets of plain paper can be loaded. In addition,
no more than150 sheets of thick paper can be loaded.
% Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of the stack
is higher than the , mark.
4 Close the paper tray.
2
Reminder
If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded paper, the
paper size will not be correctly detected. Be sure to adjust the lateral
guides to the size of the loaded paper.
For details on the paper that can be loaded into the 2nd tray, 3rd tray and
4th tray, refer to "Copy paper/original documents" on page 8-3.
Be careful not to touch the film.
2
Note
To print on overhead projector transparencies and envelopes, use the
bypass tray or the 1st tray.
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-57
3.6 Loading paper into the LCT
To load paper (LCT)
0 If the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned off, even while the main
power switch is on, the LCT cannot be pulled out, even after the tray
release button is pressed. Be sure that the machine is turned on with the
[Power] (auxiliary power) key.
1 Press the tray release button.
2 Pull out the LCT.
3 Load the paper into the right side of
the LCT so that the side of the paper
to be printed on (the side facing up
when the package was unwrapped)
faces up.
? How is curled paper loaded?
% Flatten the paper before loading
it.
Film , mark
3 Before making copies
3-58 bizhub C252
4 Load the paper into the left side of
the LCT so that the side of the paper
to be printed on (the side facing up
when the package was unwrapped)
faces up.
– Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down.
5 Close the LCT.
2
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the film.
Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher
than the , mark.
For details on the paper that can be loaded into the LCT, refer to "Copy
paper/original documents" on page 8-3.
2
Note
If the machine has entered Low Power mode or Sleep mode, the LCT
cannot be pulled out, even after the tray release button is pressed. Be
sure to first cancel Low Power mode or Sleep mode.
, mark
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-59
3.7 Loading paper into the bypass tray
Paper can be fed manually through the bypass tray if you wish to copy onto
paper that is not loaded into a paper tray, or if you wish to copy onto thick
paper, postcards, envelopes, overhead projector transparencies or label
sheets.
To load paper (bypass tray)
1 Open the bypass tray.
– When loading large-sized paper,
pull out the tray extension.
2 With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as much
as possible into the feed slot.
3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size
of paper being loaded.
Tray extension
Lateral guides
3 Before making copies
3-60 bizhub C252
4 Select the paper type.
– To print on colored paper, envelopes, or letterheads, touch [ ],
and then select the paper type.
– If “A6 Card w” is selected, the paper type is automatically set to
"Thick 2".
– If envelopes are loaded, continue with step 5.
– For details on selecting a setting for non-standard-size paper, refer
to "To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings)" on
page 8-15.
– For details on selecting a setting for wide paper, refer to "To specify
a setting for oversized paper (Oversized Paper settings)" on
page 8-22.
– For details on special paper, refer to "Special paper" on page 8-6.
? What should be done if media other than postcards are inserted?
% Select the appropriate paper type.
? What paper type is selected when label sheets are loaded?
% Select "Thick 1".
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-61
5 Pull up the upper right-side door
release lever, and then open the
upper right-side door.
6 Push up the fusing unit cover.
7 Push down the left and right release
levers M2 to the position.
8 Close the fusing unit cover.
9 Close the upper right-side door.
M2
3 Before making copies
3-62 bizhub C252
2
Reminder
After printing on envelopes, return the left and right M2 release levers to
their center positions, otherwise decreased image quality may result
when printing on plain paper.
Do not load so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the
+ mark.
Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the paper.
When loading postcards, load them in the w orientation, as shown in the
illustration. Do not load postcards in the v orientation.
A maximum of 20 postcards can be loaded into the bypass tray.
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-63
When loading overhead projector transparencies, load them in the v
orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load overhead projector
transparencies in the w orientation.
A maximum of 20 overhead projector transparencies can be loaded into
the bypass tray.
Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is
removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed,
otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a paper misfeed may
occur.
3 Before making copies
3-64 bizhub C252
When loading envelopes, load them with the flap side up, as shown in the
illustration. If the envelopes are loaded with the flap side down, a paper
misfeed may occur. The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on.
A maximum of 10 envelopes can be loaded into the bypass tray.
Flap side
Before making copies 3
bizhub C252 3-65
When loading label sheets, load them in the w orientation, as shown in
the illustration. Do not load label sheets in the v orientation.
A maximum of 20 label sheets can be loaded into the bypass tray.
Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces
up.
2
Note
The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when
the paper is loaded into the bypass tray.
Side to be printed on
3 Before making copies
3-66 bizhub C252
!
Detail
For details on specifying the paper size for the bypass tray, refer to "To
specify a paper size (set size settings)" on page 8-12.
For details on the paper sizes, refer to "Copy paper" on page 8-3.
4 Basic copy operations
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-3
4 Basic copy operations
4.1 General copy operation
This section contains information on the general operation for making
copies. The following procedure describes how to copy a single-sided
document using basic copy operations.
2
Note
Some settings cannot be used together. For details on the settings that
cannot be combined, refer to "Operations that cannot be combined" on
page 4-6.
To make a copy
1 Press the [Copy] key to display the Basic screen in Copy mode.
2 Position the document to be copied.
– For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the
document" on page 4-9.
4 Basic copy operations
4-4 bizhub C252
3 Specify the necessary copy settings.
– The default settings when this machine is purchased are listed
below.
[Color]: Auto Color
[Paper]: Auto Paper Select
[Zoom]: Full size (e 1.000)
[Simplex/Duplex]: 1 1
[Quality/Density]: Text/Photo
– For details on specifying Original settings, refer to "Specifying
original settings" on page 4-24.
– For details on selecting a Color setting, refer to "Selecting a color
setting" on page 4-40.
– For details on selecting a Paper setting, refer to "Selecting a paper
setting" on page 4-43.
– For details on specifying a Zoom setting, refer to "Specifying a
zoom setting" on page 4-46.
– For details on specifying a Simplex/Duplex setting, refer to
"Selecting the document and copy type settings (Simplex/Duplex
settings)" on page 4-59.
– For details on selecting the quality of the document, refer to
"Selecting the quality of the document" on page 4-65.
– For details on specifying the density settings, refer to "Specifying
the density settings" on page 4-70.
– For details on selecting a Combine Originals setting, refer to
"Selecting a combine originals setting" on page 4-77.
– For details on selecting Finishing settings, refer to "Selecting
finishing settings" on page 4-81.
– For details on specifying the "Fold & Staple" function, refer to
"Specifying center binding" on page 4-96.
– For details on specifying settings for the Application functions, refer
to "Application functions" on page 9-3.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-5
4 Using the keypad, type in the desired
number of copies.
– If the number of copies was
incorrectly entered, press the [C]
(clear) key in the keypad, and
then specify the correct number
of copies.
5 Press the [Start] key.
– To stop the copy operation being
performed, press the [Stop] key.
For details, refer to "Stopping
scanning/printing" on
page 4-105.
– The next copy operation can be
queued while a copy operation is
being performed. For details,
refer to "Scanning the next document to be copied while a copy job
is being printed (next job reservation)" on page 4-103.
4 Basic copy operations
4-6 bizhub C252
4.2 Operations that cannot be combined
Certain copy settings cannot be used together.
Specifying settings that cannot be combined will result in one of the following
occurring.
- The setting specified last is given priority. (The setting specified first is
canceled.)
- The setting specified first is given priority. (A warning message appears.)
Operations where the setting specified last is given priority
The procedure for setting the "Booklet" function after selecting the "2
Position" Staple setting is described below.
1 Select the [ 2 Position] Staple setting.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-7
2 Set the "Booklet" function.
The "2 Position" Staple setting is automatically cancelled, and the
"Booklet" function is set.
To select the "2 Position" Staple setting, cancel the "Booklet" function,
and then select the "2 Position" setting.
4 Basic copy operations
4-8 bizhub C252
Operations where the setting specified first is given priority
If a warning message appears, indicating that settings cannot be combined,
those settings cannot be specified together.
The procedure for selecting the "2 Position" Staple setting after setting the
"Booklet" function is described below.
1 Set the "Booklet" function.
2 Select the "2 Position" Staple setting.
The message "This mode is not available with Booklet." appears and
the "2 Position" Staple setting cannot be selected.
The "Booklet" function remains selected and the "2 Position" Staple
setting is canceled.
To select the "2 Position" Staple setting, cancel the "Booklet" function,
and then select the "2 Position" setting.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-9
4.3 Feeding the document
The document can be fed in either of the following two ways. Be sure to
position the document correctly according to the type of document being
copied.
To load the document into the ADF
0 The ADF is an option.
0 For details on the types of documents that can be loaded into the ADF,
refer to "Original documents" on page 8-29.
0 Do not load documents that are bound together, for example, with paper
clips or staples.
0 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the
stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise a document misfeed or
damage to the document or machine may occur. However, a document
that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned in separate batches. For details,
refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan”
setting)" on page 4-13.
0 If the document is not loaded correctly, the document may not be fed in
straight or a document misfeed or damage to the document may occur.
1 Slide the adjustable document
guides to fit the size of the
document.
– If large-sized documents are to
be loaded, pull out the document
support.
Document Feed Method Features
Using the ADF By using the ADF, a multi-page document can be fed automatically.
This feed method can also be used with double-sided
documents, and is perfect for multi-page double-sided
documents.
Using the original glass The document is placed directly on the original glass, then
scanned. This method is best with books and other documents
that cannot be fed through the ADF.
Document support
4 Basic copy operations
4-10 bizhub C252
2 Load the document face up in the
document feed tray.
– Load the document pages so that
the top of the document is toward
the back or the right side of the
machine.
3 Adjust the document guides to the
size of the document.
– For details on loading documents
of mixed sizes, refer to "Copying
documents of mixed sizes
(“Mixed Original” setting)" on
page 4-24.
– For details on loading thick
documents, refer to "Copying
thick documents (“Thick Original”
setting)" on page 4-26.
– For details on selecting the
document orientation, refer to
"Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)"
on page 4-28.
– For details on selecting the position of the binding margin, refer to
"Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings)" on
page 4-32.
Adjustable
document guide
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-11
To place the document on the original glass
0 For details on the types of documents that can be placed on the original
glass, refer to "Original documents" on page 8-29.
0 When placing the document on the original glass, be sure to lift open the
ADF at least 20°.
If the document is placed on the original glass without the ADF being
lifted at least 20°, the correct document size will not be detected.
0 Do not place objects weighing more than 2 kg on the original glass. In
addition, do not press down extremely hard on a book spread placed on
the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged.
0 For thick books or large objects, make the copy without closing the
original cover, or ADF if it is installed. When a document is being scanned
with the original cover or ADF open, do not look directly at the light that
may shine through the original glass. Although the light that shines
through the original glass is bright, it is not a laser beam and, therefore,
is not as dangerous.
1 Lift open the original cover, or the ADF if it is installed.
2 Position the document face down onto the original glass.
– Load the document pages so that the top of the document is
toward the back or the left side of the machine.
When loaded in the v orientation: When loaded in the w orientation:
4 Basic copy operations
4-12 bizhub C252
3 Align the document with the mark
in the back-left corner of the
document scales.
– For details on selecting the
document orientation, refer to
"Selecting the document
orientation (Original Direction
settings)" on page 4-28.
– For details on selecting the
position of the binding margin,
refer "Selecting the position of
the binding margin (Margin
settings)" on page 4-32.
– For transparent or translucent
documents, place a blank sheet
of paper of the same size as the
document over the document.
– For bound documents spread
over two facing pages, such as a
book or magazine, position the
top of the document toward the
back of this machine and align
the document with the mark in
the back-left corner of the
document scales, as shown.
4 Close the original cover, or the ADF if it is installed.
Document scales
Blank sheet
of paper
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-13
Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)
A large document can be divided and scanned in a number of batches.
A maximum of 100 document pages can be loaded into the ADF at one time.
However, by copying with the "Separate Scan" setting, a document that
exceeds 100 pages can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In
addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass
and the ADF during the scanning operation.
0 The loading capacity of the ADF is 100 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) or
38 sheets of thick paper (210 g/m2).
0 Either "Auto Print" or "Batch Print" can be selected as the print setting
when scanning with the "Separate Scan" setting. The default setting is
"Auto Print". For details on selecting the print setting for scanning with
the "Separate Scan" setting, refer to "Copier setting" on page 13-33.
0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document"
on page 4-9.
1 Position the document to be copied.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan].
– To cancel the "Separate Scan" setting, touch [Separate Scan] again
to deselect it.
4 Basic copy operations
4-14 bizhub C252
3 Press the [Start] key.
Scanning begins.
– If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch
Print", touch [Finish] in the following screen, which appears while
the document is scanned with the ADF, to continue to step 5.
4 Load the next batch of the document, and then press the [Start] key.
– Repeat this step until all pages of the document have been
scanned.
– If the document cannot be loaded into the ADF, place it on the
original glass. For details on the types of documents that can be
loaded into the ADF, refer to "Original documents" on page 8-29.
– The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory"
in the upper-right corner of the Basic screen.
– To delete the image data, press the [Stop] key, and then delete the
job. For details, refer to "Stopping scanning/printing" on
page 4-105.
– To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. For
details on changing the scanning settings, refer to "To change scan
settings for each document" on page 4-36.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-15
– The buttons that appear in the Change Setting screen differ
depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can
be changed.
Simplex/Duplex, Bind, Zoom, Frame Erase, Center Erase, Original
Size
5 After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish].
4 Basic copy operations
4-16 bizhub C252
– If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch
Print", touch [Yes] in the screen that appears, requesting
confirmation that scanning of the document is finished. Otherwise,
touch [No] is touched to return to step 3.
6 Press the [Start] key.
– If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch
Print", touch [Print] or press the [Start] key.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-17
– If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch
Print", the copy settings can be changed. To change the copy
settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after
changing the settings as desired. Otherwise, touch [Cancel
Change] to cancel the changes to the settings.
4 Basic copy operations
4-18 bizhub C252
Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass
When making double-sided or combined copies using the original glass,
place each page of a multi-page document on the original glass to scan it.
The following procedure describes how to place single-sided document
pages on the original glass to make double-sided copies.
0 Either "Auto Print" or "Batch Print" can be selected as the print setting
when scanning with the "Separate Scan" setting. The default setting is
"Auto Print". For details on selecting the print setting for scanning with
the "Separate Scan" setting, refer to "Copier setting" on page 13-33.
1 Lift open the original cover, or the ADF if it is installed.
2 Position the first page or the first side of the document face down onto
the original glass.
– For details on positioning the document, refer to "To place the
document on the original glass" on page 4-11.
3 Close the original cover, or the ADF if it is installed.
When loaded in the v orientation: When loaded in the w orientation:
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-19
4 In the Basic screen, touch [Simplex/Duplex].
The Simplex/Duplex screen appears.
5 Touch [1%2].
– The screens that appear differ depending on the options that are
installed.
4 Basic copy operations
4-20 bizhub C252
6 Touch [Binding Direction], select the binding position for the copies,
and then touch [OK].
– For details on specifying the binding position, refer to "To select
double-sided copies" on page 4-62.
7 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded
document, and then touch [OK].
– For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to
"Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)"
on page 4-28.
8 Touch [OK].
9 Press the [Start] key.
Scanning begins.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-21
10 Load the next batch of the document, and then press the [Start] key.
– Repeat this step until all pages of the document have been
scanned.
– The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory"
in the upper-right corner of the Basic screen.
– To delete the image data, press the [Stop] key, and then delete the
job. For details, refer to "Stopping scanning/printing" on
page 4-105.
– To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. For
details on changing the scanning settings, refer to "To change scan
settings for each document" on page 4-36.
– The buttons that appear in the Change Setting screen differ
depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can
be changed.
Simplex/Duplex, Bind, Zoom, Frame Erase, Center Erase, Original
Size
11 After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish].
4 Basic copy operations
4-22 bizhub C252
– If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch
Print", touch [Yes] in the screen that appears, requesting
confirmation that scanning of the document is finished. Otherwise,
touch [No] is touched to return to step 9.
12 Press the [Start] key.
– If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch
Print", touch [Print] or press the [Start] key.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-23
– If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch
Print", the copy settings can be changed. To change the copy
settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after
changing the settings as desired. Otherwise, touch [Cancel
Change] to cancel the changes to the settings.
4 Basic copy operations
4-24 bizhub C252
4.4 Specifying original settings
The following procedure describes how to specify the type of document to
be copied.
Copying documents of mixed sizes (“Mixed Original” setting)
Documents of different sizes can be loaded together into the ADF to be fed
and scanned one by one automatically.
The possible combinations of document sizes differ depending on the widest
document loaded (position of the adjustable document guides of the ADF).
0 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the
stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise a document misfeed or
damage to the document or machine may occur. However, a document
that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned in separate batches. For details,
refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan”
setting)" on page 4-13.
0 If the document is not loaded correctly, the document may not be fed in
straight or a document misfeed or damage to the document may occur.
1 Slide the adjustable document guides to fit the size of the largest page.
– If large-sized documents are to be loaded, pull out the document
support.
– For details on the document sizes that can be mixed in the ADF,
refer to "Documents that can be loaded into the ADF" on
page 8-29.
2 Arrange the document pages so that
the side to be copied (first page)
faces up, as shown in the illustration.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-25
3 Load the document face up in the
document feed tray.
Slide the adjustable document
guides against the edges of the
document.
– Load the document pages into
the ADF so that the top of the
pages is toward the back or the
left side of the machine.
4 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals].
The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears.
5 Touch [Mixed Original].
– To cancel the "Mixed Original" setting, touch [Mixed Original] again
to deselect it.
Adjustable
document guide
4 Basic copy operations
4-26 bizhub C252
Copying thick documents (“Thick Original” setting)
When copying thick documents with a weight of 129 g/m2 to 210 g/m2
loaded into the ADF, select the "Thick Original" setting.
0 When the "Thick Original" setting is selected, a maximum of 38
document pages can be loaded into the ADF. For details on thick
documents, refer to "Original documents" on page 8-29.
0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document"
on page 4-9.
1 Position the document to be copied.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals].
The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears.
Adjustable
document guide
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-27
3 Touch [Thick Original].
4 Basic copy operations
4-28 bizhub C252
Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)
When copying double-sided documents, making double-sided copies, or
using a Combine Originals setting, specify the document orientation,
otherwise the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct
front and back page arrangement.
2
Note
The default setting is the first setting (with the top of the document at the
top (toward the back of the machine)).
Document Loading Orientation
Using the ADF Using the Original
Glass
Icon Description
Select this setting for a document
loaded with the top toward the back
of this machine.
Select this setting for a document
loaded with the top toward the front
of this machine.
• Select this setting for a document
loaded into the ADF with the top
of the document toward the left
side of this machine.
• Select this setting for a document
placed on the original glass with
the top of the document toward
the right side of this machine.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-29
• Select this setting for a document
loaded into the ADF with the top
of the document toward the right
side of this machine.
• Select this setting for a document
placed on the original glass with
the top of the document toward
the left side of this machine.
Using the ADF Using the Original
Glass
Icon Description
4 Basic copy operations
4-30 bizhub C252
To specify an original direction setting
0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document"
on page 4-9.
1 Position the document to be copied.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals].
The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Original Direction].
The Original Direction screen appears.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-31
4 Touch the button for the orientation of the loaded document, and then
touch [OK].
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
4 Basic copy operations
4-32 bizhub C252
Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings)
If a double-sided document is loaded into the ADF, specify the position of
the top of the back side of the document by specifying the binding margin
position for the document.
2
Note
The default setting is "Auto".
Document Binding Margin Position
Margin Setting Icon Description
Select this setting if the document is loaded
with the binding margin at the left.
Select this setting if the document is loaded
with the binding margin at the right.
Select this setting if the document is loaded
with the binding margin at the top.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-33
When the document length is
297 mm or less:
Select this setting to automatically select
the position of the binding margin.
If the document length is 297 mm or less, a
binding position along the long side of the
paper is selected.
If the document length is more than 297
mm, a binding position along the short side
of the paper is selected.
2
Note
If "Auto" is selected, the binding
margin is set at the top or at the
left.
When the document length is
more than 297 mm:
Margin Setting Icon Description
4 Basic copy operations
4-34 bizhub C252
To specify a margin setting
0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document"
on page 4-9.
1 Position the document to be copied.
– When loading a document with a binding margin, position the top
of the document toward the back of the machine.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals].
The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Margin].
The Page Margin screen appears.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-35
4 Touch the button for the desired margin position, and then touch [OK].
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
4 Basic copy operations
4-36 bizhub C252
To change scan settings for each document
When copying using the "Separate Scan" setting or when multi-page
documents are placed on the original glass, the scan settings can be
changed for each document. The following procedure describes how to
change the settings when the "Separate Scan" setting is used.
1 Position the document to be copied.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan].
3 Press the [Start] key.
Scanning begins.
4 Touch [Change Setting].
A screen appears, allowing you to change the settings.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-37
5 Touch the key of the setting to be changed, select the desired setting,
and then touch [OK].
– The buttons that appear in the Change Setting screen differ
depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can
be changed.
Simplex/Duplex, Bind, Zoom, Frame Erase, Center Erase, Original
Size
4 Basic copy operations
4-38 bizhub C252
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel Change].
Simplex/Duplex screen
Original Bind Position screen
Center Erase screen
Original Size Setting screen
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-39
– For details on specifying the Zoom setting, refer to "Specifying a
zoom setting" on page 4-46. For details on specifying a zoom ratio,
refer to "Erasing specified areas of copies (“Erase” function)" on
page 9-71.
4 Basic copy operations
4-40 bizhub C252
4.5 Selecting a color setting
The following five Color settings are available.
2
Note
The default setting is "Auto Color".
Color Setting Description
Auto Color Select this setting to automatically detect whether the
scanned document is in color or in black and white, and then
select the appropriate Color setting ("Full Color" or "Black").
Full Color Select this setting to print the copy in full color, regardless of
whether the scanned document is in color or in black and
white.
2 Color Select this setting to print all areas of the scanned document
determined to be in color with the specified color, and print all
areas determined to be black in black. (The color used for the
areas printed in color are: red, yellow, blue, magenta, green or
cyan. Refer to page 1-35.)
Black Select this setting to print the copy in black and white, regardless
of whether the scanned document is in color or in black
and white.
Single Color Select this setting to print copies in the specified color, regardless
of whether the scanned document is in color or in
black and white. (The color used for printing the copy can be
set to one of the 21 available. Refer to page 1-34.)
When the "Single Color" setting is selected, the following two
methods for reproducing gradations in documents are available.
Relative luminosity: The document will be copied using monocolor
concentration variations to express color differences
(color shading that can be seen with the eye) and gradation
levels. This enables the color of markers, the blue lines in
graphing paper and the red of stamps to be distinctly reproduced
in copies.
Average brightness: The document will be copied using
monocolor concentration variations to only express gradation
levels, regardless of the color differences in the original document.
This is useful for producing monocolor copies of documents
containing gradation differences, such as magazines
and newspapers, and for offsetting the yellow tint in documents
that have yellowed. To select this method, touch [Solid].
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-41
To select a color setting
The following procedure describes how to select a Color setting.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Color].
The Color screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the desired Color setting.
4 Basic copy operations
4-42 bizhub C252
– If the "2 Color" setting was selected, touch the button for the
desired color, and then touch [OK].
One of the colors for the "2 Color" setting is black, which cannot be
changed. In this step, touch the button for the second color.
– If the "Single Color" setting was selected, touch the button for the
desired color, and then touch [OK].
– Touch [ Back] or [Fwd. ], and then select the desired color. If
desired, touch [Solid].
– If the "Solid" setting is not selected, the relative luminosity method
is selected.
– To use the average brightness method for reproducing gradations
in monocolor documents, touch [Solid].
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-43
4.6 Selecting a paper setting
The paper size can be selected automatically according to the document
size or it can be specified manually. Specify the paper size according to the
corresponding procedure, depending on the desired copy settings.
2
Note
If a setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not
selected automatically with the "Auto Paper Select" setting. (However, a
paper tray set to "Single Side Only" is given priority to be selected.) This
setting is useful for paper trays loaded with special paper. For details,
refer to "To specify a setting for special paper" on page 8-25.
The default setting is "Auto Paper Select".
For details on the operations that cannot be combined, refer to
"Operations that cannot be combined" on page 4-6.
The "Auto Zoom" and "Auto Paper Select" settings cannot be selected at
the same time. If the "Auto Zoom" setting was selected, the Zoom screen
appears. In the Zoom screen, specify the desired zoom setting.
4 Basic copy operations
4-44 bizhub C252
Automatically selecting the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting)
The size of the loaded document is detected, and copies are produced using
paper of the same size.
If the "×1.0" Zoom setting was specified, paper of the same size as the
document is selected.
If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased, a paper size that corresponds
to the specified zoom ratio is automatically selected.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
2 Touch [Auto Paper Select].
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-45
Manually selecting the desired paper size
0 By also selecting the "Auto Zoom" setting, the most appropriate zoom
ratio is selected based on the size of the loaded document and the
specified paper size. For details on the "Auto Zoom" setting, refer to
"Automatically selecting the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting)" on
page 4-44.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
2 Select the paper tray loaded with the desired paper.
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
4 Basic copy operations
4-46 bizhub C252
4.7 Specifying a zoom setting
The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size
different than the document or to enlarge or reduce the size of the copy
image.
The following procedure describes how to specify the Zoom setting.
Automatically selecting the zoom ratio (“Auto Zoom” setting)
The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size
of the loaded document and the specified paper size.
0 The default setting is "×1.0".
0 The "Auto Zoom" and "Auto Paper Select" settings cannot be selected
together. If the "Auto Paper Select" setting was selected, the Paper
screen appears. In the Paper screen, specify the desired Paper setting.
0 If the "Auto Zoom" setting is selected and an enlargement is to be copied
on paper larger than the document, load the document with the same
orientation as the paper.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-47
2 Touch [Auto Zoom].
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
4 Basic copy operations
4-48 bizhub C252
Specifying the same zoom ratio as the document (“×1.0” setting)
A copy that is the same size as the document (e1.000) is produced.
0 The default setting is "×1.0".
0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [–] to reduce the zoom
ratio in e0.001 intervals.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch [×1.0].
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-49
Slightly reducing the copy (“Minimal” setting)
A document image can be printed slightly smaller (x0.930) than the original
document size.
0 The default setting is "×1.0".
0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [–] to reduce the zoom
ratio in e 0.001 increments.
0 The zoom ratio of the "Minimal" setting can be changed (between e0.900
and e0.999). For details on changing the zoom ratio for the "Minimal"
setting, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 4-57.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch [Minimal].
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
4 Basic copy operations
4-50 bizhub C252
Selecting a preset zoom ratio (enlarge and reduce settings)
The most appropriate zoom ratio can be selected for copying from a
common standard document size to a standard paper size.
0 The default setting is "×1.0".
0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [–] to reduce the zoom
ratio in e0.001 increments.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the appropriate zoom ratio according to the
document and paper sizes.
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-51
Typing In the zoom ratio (XY Zoom setting)
By using the keypad, a zoom ratio between e0.250 and e4.000 can be typed
in directly without changing the height-to-width ratio.
0 If a value outside of the allowable range is specified, the message "Input
Error" appears. Type in a value within the allowable range. If the value
was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and
then specify the correct value.
0 The entered zoom ratio can be stored. For details on storing the zoom
ratio, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 4-57.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch [XY Zoom].
4 Basic copy operations
4-52 bizhub C252
3 Use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
The Basic screen appears again.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-53
Typing In separate X and Y zoom ratios (independent zoom settings)
By using the keypad, separate zoom ratios can be typed in directly for the
horizontal direction (between e0.250 and e 4.000) and for the vertical
direction (between e0.250 and e4.000).
By combining different horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, the copy image
can be adjusted as shown in the following illustration.
0 If a value outside of the allowable range is specified, the message "Input
Error" appears. Type in a value within the allowable range. If the value
was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and
then specify the correct value.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
4 Basic copy operations
4-54 bizhub C252
2 Touch [XY Zoom].
3 Touch [X] under "Set Individual Zoom", and then use the keypad to
type in the desired zoom ratio (between e0.250 and e4.000) for the X
direction.
4 Touch [Y] under "Set Individual Zoom", and then use the keypad to
type in the desired zoom ratio (between e0.250 and e4.000) for the Y
direction.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-55
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
The Basic screen appears again.
4 Basic copy operations
4-56 bizhub C252
Selecting a stored zoom ratio
Copy zoom ratios that have been stored can be recalled to be used when
desired. In addition, stored copy zoom ratios can be changed.
0 The default setting is "×1.0".
0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [–] to reduce the zoom
ratio in e 0.001 increments.
0 Stored zoom ratios can be changed to desired zoom ratios. For details
on storing zoom ratios, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on
page 4-57.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio.
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-57
Storing the desired zoom ratio
Three frequently used zoom ratios and the zoom ratio for the "Minimal"
setting can be stored.
0 If a value outside of the allowable range is specified, the message "Input
Error" appears. Type in a value within the allowable range. If the value
was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and
then specify the correct value.
0 The default zoom ratios (e4.000, e2.000 and e0.500) are stored. When a
new zoom ratio is stored, it overwrites the zoom ratio stored with the
selected button.
0 To store a "Minimal" zoom ratio, type in the desired zoom ratio between
e0.900 and e0.999.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch [XY Zoom].
4 Basic copy operations
4-58 bizhub C252
3 Use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio (between e0.250 and
e4.000).
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
4 Touch [Set Zoom].
5 Touch the button or [Minimal] where the new zoom ratio is to be stored.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
The specified zoom ratio is stored.
6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.
The Basic screen appears again.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-59
4.8 Selecting the document and copy type settings
(Simplex/Duplex settings)
The type of document and copy can be specified.
The following four Simplex/Duplex settings are available.
The following procedures describe how to select a Simplex/Duplex setting.
Simplex/Duplex Description
1%1 Select this setting to produce single-sided copies
from single-sided documents.
1%2 Select this setting to produce one double-sided
copy from two single-sided documents.
2%1 Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies
from one double-sided document.
2%2 Select this setting to produce double-sided copies
from double-sided documents.
4 Basic copy operations
4-60 bizhub C252
To select single-sided copies
0 The default setting is "1%1".
0 For details on using the original glass to scan multiple document pages,
refer to "Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass" on
page 4-18.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Simplex/Duplex].
The Simplex/Duplex screen appears.
2 Touch [1%1] or [2%1].
– If "2%1" is selected, specify the binding direction and the original
direction, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired.
– If the binding position for the document is set to "Auto", the position
of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin
along the long side of the paper is selected if the document length
is 297 mm or less. If the document length is more than 297 mm, a
binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected.
– If the binding position for the document is set to "Auto", the binding
margin is set at the top or at the left.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-61
– The screens that appear differ depending on the options that are
installed.
– For a double-sided document, touch [Binding Direction], select the
binding position for the document, and then touch [OK].
3 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded
document, and then touch [OK].
– For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to
"Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)"
on page 4-28.
4 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
4 Basic copy operations
4-62 bizhub C252
To select double-sided copies
0 The default setting is "1%1".
0 For details on using the original glass to scan multiple document pages,
refer to "Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass" on
page 4-18.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Simplex/Duplex].
The Simplex/Duplex screen appears.
2 Touch [1%2] or [2%2].
– Specify the binding direction and the original direction, otherwise
the copies will not be printed as desired.
– If the binding position for the document is set to "Auto", the position
of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin
along the long side of the paper is selected if the document length
is 297 mm or less. If the document length is more than 297 mm, a
binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected.
– If the binding position for the document is set to "Auto", the binding
margin is set at the top or at the left.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-63
– If the binding position for the copy is set to "Auto", the binding
position is automatically determined according to the orientation of
the loaded document. If the document length is 297 mm or less, a
binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the
document length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the
short side of the paper is selected.
– If the binding position for the copy is set to "Auto", the binding
position is set at the top or at the left.
3 Touch [Binding Direction].
– For a single-sided document, select the binding position for the
copy, and then touch [OK].
– For a double-sided document, select the binding positions for the
document and the copy, and then touch [OK].
4 Basic copy operations
4-64 bizhub C252
4 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded
document, and then touch [OK].
– For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to
"Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)"
on page 4-28.
5 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-65
4.9 Selecting the quality of the document
Loading documents with small print or photos (Original Type settings)
Select the setting for the text and image type of the document to better
adjust the copy quality.
The Original Type settings are available.
2
Note
The default setting is "Printed Photo" in the "Text/Photo" category.
Icon Description
Text
Select this setting when copying documents containing
only text.
The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness,
providing an image that is easy to read.
Text/Photo Photo Paper
Select this setting when copying photos from documents
containing both text and images onto photographic paper.
A smooth copy image is produced.
Printed Photo
Select this setting when copying printed documents containing
both text and images, such as pamphlets or catalogs.
Photo Photo Paper
Select this setting when copying photos from documents
onto photographic paper.
Select this setting to produce better reproductions of halftone
document images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be
reproduced with the usual settings.
A smooth copy image is produced.
Printed Photo
Select this setting when copying printed documents, such
as pamphlets or catalogs.
Select this setting to produce better reproductions of halftone
document images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be
reproduced with the usual settings.
4 Basic copy operations
4-66 bizhub C252
The following procedure describes how to select an Original Type setting.
Special Quality Map
Select this setting when copying documents with a background
color or documents containing pencil markings or
fine colored lines. A sharp copy image is produced.
Dot Matrix
Original
Select this setting when copying documents consisting
only of text that appears faint (such as that written with a
pencil).
The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker, providing
text that is easy to read.
Copied Paper
Select this setting when copying images (documents) printed
with this machine.
Icon Description
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-67
To specify an original type setting
0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document"
on page 4-9.
1 Position the document to be copied.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Quality/Density].
The Quality/Density screen appears.
3 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded
document.
– For a document that contains only text, touch [Text].
– For a document that contains both text and photos, touch
[Text/Photo] to display the Photo Type screen. Touch the button for
the appropriate setting, and then touch [OK].
4 Basic copy operations
4-68 bizhub C252
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
– For a document that contains photos, touch [Photo] to display the
Photo Type screen. Touch the button for the appropriate setting,
and then touch [OK].
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-69
– For a document that contains maps or faint text, touch [Special
Quality] to display the Special Quality screen. Touch the button for
the appropriate setting, and then touch [OK].
The Quality/Density screen appears again.
4 Basic copy operations
4-70 bizhub C252
4.10 Specifying the density settings
The density can be adjusted to print a copy that is darker or lighter than the
current print result.
The following three density adjustments are available.
The following procedures describe how to specify the density settings.
Density Settings Description
Density The density of the print image can be adjusted to one of nine
levels.
Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened
or darkened by one level.
Touch [Std.] to select the middle setting of the nine levels.
Background Removal The density of the background color of the document can be
adjusted to one of nine levels.
Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the background density
is lightened or darkened by one level.
Touch [Std.] to select the seventh setting from the "Light" end.
Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the level of the background
density according to the document being copied.
Text Enhancement Select one of nine settings for the reproduction quality of text
when copying documents consisting of text that overlaps images
such as illustrations or graphs (text with a background).
Each time [Lighter Text] or [Darker Text] is touched, the text
density is lightened or darkened by one level.
To emphasize the text on the background, touch [Darker Text]
to adjust the setting toward +.
To de-emphasize the text on the background, touch [Lighter
Text] to adjust the setting toward –.
Touch [Std.] to select the middle setting of the nine levels.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-71
Adjusting the print density (Density settings)
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Quality/Density].
The Quality/Density screen appears.
2 Touch [Change] under "Density".
The Density screen appears.
4 Basic copy operations
4-72 bizhub C252
3 Select the desired Density setting.
– Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or
darkened by one level.
– To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Std.].
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
4 Touch [OK].
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-73
Adjusting the background density (Background Removal settings)
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Quality/Density].
The Quality/Density screen appears.
2 Touch [Change] under "Background Removal".
The Background Removal screen appears.
4 Basic copy operations
4-74 bizhub C252
3 Select the desired background density setting.
– Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or
darkened by one level.
– To select the third setting from the right (default setting), touch
[Std.].
– Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the level of the background
density according to the document being copied.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
4 Touch [OK].
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-75
Adjusting the reproduction quality of text
0 The default setting is "0".
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Quality/Density].
The Quality/Density screen appears.
2 Touch [Text Enhancement].
The Text Enhancement screen appears.
4 Basic copy operations
4-76 bizhub C252
3 Select the desired text density setting.
– Each time [Lighter Text] or [Darker Text] is touched, the density is
lightened or darkened by one level.
– Touch [Std.] to select the middle setting ("0") of the nine levels.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
4 Touch [OK].
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-77
4.11 Selecting a combine originals setting
Document images of multiple pages (2, 4 or 8 pages) can be combined and
printed on a single page, reducing paper use.
!
Detail
When a Combine Originals setting is selected, the auto display zoom
ratio is selected, and the document image is copied at a reduced size.
The auto display zoom ratios for each setting are listed below.
2 in 1: e0.707
4 in 1: e0.500
8 in 1: e0.353
2
Note
The default setting is the Auto Display Zoom Ratio.
By using the "Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet" parameter in Utility
mode, the machine can be set so that the auto display zoom ratios are
not recalled. For details, refer to "Copier setting" on page 13-33.
4 Basic copy operations
4-78 bizhub C252
The following three Combine Originals settings are available.
Combine Originals Setting Description
2 in 1 Select this setting to print two document pages on one page.
4 in 1 Select this setting to print four document pages on one page.
The page arrangement (Numbering Direction settings) can be
specified.
8 in 1 Select this setting to print eight document pages on one page.
The page arrangement (Numbering Direction settings) can be
specified.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-79
The following procedure describes how to select a Combine Originals
setting.
Copying multiple document pages onto a single page (Combine
Originals)
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals].
The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears.
2 Select the desired combination of pages.
– Select the page arrangement according to the orientation and
number of pages. If "4 in 1" or "8 in 1" was selected, the page
arrangement for "Vertical" and "Horizontal" can be viewed in the
sub display area. However, this appears only if the "Sub Screen
Display Type" parameter in Utility mode is set to "Setting value".
4 Basic copy operations
4-80 bizhub C252
– If "4 in 1" or "8 in 1" was selected, touch [Horizontal] or [Vertical] to
specify the page arrangement.
– To cancel the setting, touch the button again to deselect it.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-81
4.12 Selecting finishing settings
Various settings are available for sorting and finishing copies when they are
fed into the copy exit tray.
2
Note
The factory default setting is "Group".
!
Detail
If no finisher is installed and the following conditions are met, printed
copies can be fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern.
A4- or B5-size paper is used.
Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one
paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray.
The "Auto Paper Select" setting is selected.
The "Auto Paper Select" setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original"
setting is selected.
2
Note
From Administrator mode, the machine can be set so that copies are fed
out without being shifted when the finisher FS-514 is installed. As a
factory default, "Offset by Each Job Setting" is set to "ON". For details
on specifying the setting for offset feeding when the finisher FS-514 is
installed, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38.
4 Basic copy operations
4-82 bizhub C252
The following five Finishing settings are available.
Finishing Setting Description
Sort Select this setting to separate each set of a multi-page document
(collated).
Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in a
multi-page document (uncollated).
Offset
If the sorting conditions are met, printed copies are fed out
and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern.
The copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with
each set shifted to separate it.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-83
The following procedures describe how to select Finishing settings.
2
Note
The Staple settings and Punch settings differ depending on the installed
finisher.
Available Staple and Punch settings
Staple Select one of these settings to bind the copies with a staple in
the corner or with two staples.
Punch Select this setting to punch holes (4 holes) in the copies for filing
them.
Finishing Setting Description
Finisher FS-603 Finisher FS-501 Finisher FS-514
Staple settings"
Corner" &
"2 Position"
o — o
Staple setting
"Corner"
o o o
Punch setting With punch kit PK-501
installed
o
— With punch kit PK-510
installed
o
4 Basic copy operations
4-84 bizhub C252
Separating copies by sets (“Sort” setting)
0 The factory default setting is "Group".
0 If "Offset" is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be
fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern if the following
conditions are met.
0 A4- or B5-size paper is used.
0 Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one
paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray.
0 The "Auto Paper Select" setting is selected.
0 The "Auto Paper Select" setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original"
setting is selected.
0 If "Offset" is selected while a finisher is installed, printed copies are fed
out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
2 Touch [Sort].
– To separate each set of copies, touch [Offset].
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-85
– To specify the output tray, touch the button for the desired tray
under "Output Tray".
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
4 Basic copy operations
4-86 bizhub C252
Separating copies by pages (“Group” setting)
0 The default setting is "Group".
0 If "Offset" is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be
fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern if the following
conditions are met.
0 A4- or B5-size paper is used.
0 Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one
paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray.
0 The "Auto Paper Select" setting is selected.
0 The "Auto Paper Select" setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original"
setting is selected.
0 If "Offset" is selected while a finisher is installed, printed copies are fed
out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-87
2 Touch [Group].
– To separate each set of pages, touch [Offset].
– To specify the output tray, touch the button for the desired tray
under "Output Tray".
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
4 Basic copy operations
4-88 bizhub C252
Stapling copies (Staple settings)
Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places.
When Finisher FS-603 is installed
Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity (detected with either
measurement)
60 g/m2 to
90 g/m2
A4 w/v, B5 w/v 1,000 sheets 150 mm
A3 w, B4 w 500 sheets 75 mm
Number of Bound
Pages
Maximum Number of Sets
One place towards
the back
One place towards
the front
Two places
A4 w or
smaller
2 sheets 100 sets 40 sets 40 sets
3 to 5 sheets 80 sets 40 sets 40 sets
6 to 10 sheets 60 sets 40 sets 40 sets
11 to 20 sheets 30 sets 30 sets 30 sets
21 to 30 sheets 30 sets 30 sets 30 sets
31 to 50 sheets 30 sets/1,000
sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
B4 w or
larger
2 sheets 100 sets 50 sets 50 sets
3 to 5 sheets 80 sets 40 sets 40 sets
6 to 10 sheets 40 sets 40 sets 40 sets
11 to 20 sheets 30 sets/1,000
sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
21 to 25 sheets 30 sets/1,000
sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-89
When Finisher FS-501 is installed
!
Detail
In order for the copies to be stapled, all of the following conditions must
be met.
The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm.
The paper length must be between 182 mm and 432 mm.
If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must have the same
paper width.
If a Staple setting is selected, the "Sort" setting is automatically selected.
A Staple setting cannot be used together with the "Offset" setting.
If a Staple setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the
document is positioned and the orientation of the page to be stapled,
otherwise the copies may not be stapled as desired.
For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the
document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28.
Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity (detected with either
measurement)
60 g/m2 to
90 g/m2
A4 w/v, B5 w/v 1,000 sheets 150 mm
A3 w, B4 w 500 sheets 75 mm
Number of Bound Pages Maximum Number of Sets
2 sheets 100 sets 200 sheets
3 to 5 sheets 80 sets 400 sheets
6 to 10 sheets 60 sets 600 sheets
11 to 20 sheets 40 sets 800 sheets
21 to 30 sheets 33 sets 1,000 sheets
4 Basic copy operations
4-90 bizhub C252
When Finisher FS-514 is installed
Examples of the possible number of bound pages
- 50 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper
- 2 sheets of 209 g/m2 paper + 48 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper
- Maximum of 30 sheets of 91 to 150 g/m2 paper
!
Detail
In order for the copies to be stapled, all of the following conditions must
be met.
The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm.
The paper length must be between 148.5 mm and 431.8 mm.
If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must have the same
paper width.
If a Staple setting is selected, the "Sort" setting is automatically selected.
A Staple setting cannot be used together with the "Offset" setting.
If a Staple setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the
original is positioned and the orientation of the page to be stapled,
otherwise the copies may not be stapled as desired.
For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the
document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28.
Tray Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity
Finishing tray 1 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v 32 mm
91 g/m2 to 120 g/m2
Finishing tray 2 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v A4 w or less: 132 mm
B4 w or more: 64.5 mm
91 g/m2 to 120 g/m2
Optional finishing tray 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v 24 mm
91 g/m2 to 120 g/m2
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-91
To bind copies with staples
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
2 Under "Staple", touch either [Corner] or [2 Position].
– To cancel the Staple settings, touch [Corner] or [2 Position] again to
deselect it. [2 Position] is available only if finisher FS-603 or finisher
FS-514 is installed.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
– To specify the output tray, touch the button for the desired tray
under "Output Tray".
4 Basic copy operations
4-92 bizhub C252
3 Touch [Position], and then touch the button for the desired position.
– Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the stapling position
according to the orientation of the loaded document. If the
document length is 297 mm or less, the long side of the paper is
stapled. If the document length is more than 297 mm, the short side
of the paper is stapled.
– If "Auto" is selected, the stapling position is set at the top or at the
left.
– To cancel changes to the stapling position, touch [Cancel].
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
The Basic screen appears again.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-93
Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)
!
Detail
In order for holes to be punched in the copies, all of the following
conditions must be met.
The paper width must be between 280 mm and 297 mm.
The paper length must be between 182 mm and 432 mm.
If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must have the same
paper width.
If a Punch setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the
document is positioned. If an Original Direction setting is not selected,
holes may not be punched in the copies as desired.
For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the
document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28.
2
Note
Holes can be punched in the paper that is fed out if punch kit PK-501 is
installed on optional finisher FS-603 or punch kit PK-510 is installed on
optional finisher FS-514.
Paper Weight Paper Size
60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 A3 w, A4 v
4 Basic copy operations
4-94 bizhub C252
To punch holes in copies
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
2 Touch [4holes].
– To cancel the Punch setting, touch [4holes] again to deselect it.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
– To specify the output tray, touch the button for the desired tray
under "Output Tray".
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-95
3 Touch [Position], and then touch the button for the desired position.
– Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the position of the
punched holes according to the orientation of the loaded
document. If the document length is 297 mm or less, the holes are
punched along the long side of the paper. If the document length is
more than 297 mm, the holes are punched along the short side of
the paper.
– If "Auto" is selected, the punched hole position is set at the top or
at the left.
– To cancel changes to the punched hole position, touch [Cancel].
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
The Basic screen appears again.
4 Basic copy operations
4-96 bizhub C252
4.13 Specifying center binding
The paper that is fed out can be folded in half and stapled at two places
along the vertical center.
“Center
Staple” + “Fold”
settings (folded in half and stapled
at the center in two places)
“Fold” setting
(folded in half)
Document
(The “Booklet” function
is automatically set.)
“Center Staple” setting
(stapled at the center in
two places)
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-97
When Finisher FS-603 is installed
* The number of sheets that can be bound together differs depending on the paper weight.
64 g/m2 paper: 15 sheets
80 g/m2 paper: 10 sheets
!
Detail
In order for copies to be bound at the center, all of the following
conditions must be met.
The paper width must be between 210 mm and 297 mm.
The paper length must be between 279 mm and 432 mm.
Paper Weight Paper Size Number of Bound Pages
60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A3 w, B4 w, A4 w 2 sheets to 15 sheets*
Number of Bound Pages Maximum Number of Sets
2 sheets to 5 sheets 20 sets
6 sheets to 10 sheets 10 sets
11 sheets to 15 sheets* 10 sets
4 Basic copy operations
4-98 bizhub C252
When Finisher FS-514 is installed
Examples of the possible number of bound pages
- 2 to 15 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper (maximum of 60 pages)
- 1 sheet of 50 to 209 g/m2 paper + 14 sheets of 50 to 90 g/m2 paper
(maximum of 60 pages)
- Maximum of 13 sheets of 91 to 120 g/m2 paper
- Maximum of 10 sheets of 121 to 150 g/m2 paper
- Maximum of 8 sheets of 151 to 209 g/m2 paper
!
Detail
In order for copies to be bound at the center or folded in half, all of the
following conditions must be met.
The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm.
The paper length must be between 257 mm and 431.8 mm.
2
Note
The "Fold & Staple" setting is available when finisher FS-603 is installed
or if the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. The "Fold"
setting is available when the saddle stitcher is installed on optional
finisher FS-514.
Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity (detected in
either measurement)
50 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 B5 w, A4 w, B4 w, or
A3 w
200 sheets or 20 sets
91 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 —
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-99
To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-603
0 When the "Fold & Staple" setting is selected, the following default
settings are automatically selected.
1%2", "Sort", "Booklet",
Auto display zoom ratio when a Booklet setting is selected (e0.707)
0 If "Yes" is selected under "Center Erase", an area of 10 mm along the
binding is erased.
0 If paper misfeeds often occur when "No" is selected under "Center
Erase", select "Yes" to reduce the number of paper misfeeds.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Fold & Staple].
The Center Erase screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the desired Center Erase setting.
– To erase the area along the center, touch [Yes]. To not erase the
area along the center, touch [No].
– To cancel the "Fold & Staple" setting, touch [OFF].
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
4 Basic copy operations
4-100 bizhub C252
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-101
To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-514
0 When the "Fold & Staple" setting is selected, the following default
settings are automatically selected.
"1%2", "Sort", "Booklet",
Auto display zoom ratio when a Booklet setting is selected (e0.707)
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Fold & Staple].
The Center Erase screen appears.
2 Specify the desired center binding and folding settings.
– To staple copies at the center in two places, touch [Center Staple].
– To fold copies in half, touch [Fold].
– To fold copies in half and staple them at the center in two places,
touch [Center Staple] and [Fold].
– To cancel the "Fold & Staple" setting, touch [OFF].
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
4 Basic copy operations
4-102 bizhub C252
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-103
4.14 Scanning the next document to be copied while a
copy job is being printed (next job reservation)
The settings for the next copy job can be specified and the document can be
scanned while a copy operation is being performed so that it can be printed
once the current copy operation is finished.
To reserve a copy job
0 Up to 61 copy jobs, including the current copy job, can be reserved.
0 A copy job can be reserved after scanning of the loaded document is
finished. A copy job cannot be reserved while a document is being
scanned.
0 If Utility Setting parameter "Copy Operating Screen" is set to "ON",
[Program Next Job] appears. Touch [Program Next Job], and then
specify the copy settings for the next copy job.
For details on specifying the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter, refer
to "Display setting" on page 13-30.
0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document"
on page 4-9.
0 To cancel a reserved copy job, display the Basic screen for the reserved
copy job, and then press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to "Performing
operations on jobs" on page 12-8.
1 Press the [Start] key to begin scanning and outputting the current copy
job.
– The Basic screen for reserving a copy job appears.
4 Basic copy operations
4-104 bizhub C252
2 When the message "Ready to accept another job." appears, copy
settings can be specified for the next copy job.
3 Press the [Start] key.
4 After the current copy job is finished, the next copy job begins.
– When the current copy job is finished, the copy settings for the next
copy job are automatically displayed and the copy operation
begins.
Basic copy operations 4
bizhub C252 4-105
4.15 Stopping scanning/printing
The following procedure describes how to stop scanning the document and
stop the printing operation.
To stop scanning/printing
0 If a document is being scanned for a job, pressing the [Stop] key stops
scanning.
0 For details on deleting a stopped job, refer to "Deleting a stopped job" on
page 4-106.
1 Press the [Stop] key while a
document is being scanned or a job
is being printed.
Scanning/printing stops.
The Stopped Jobs screen appears.
2 To continue all stopped jobs, press the [Start] key
4 Basic copy operations
4-106 bizhub C252
4.16 Deleting a stopped job
The following procedure describes how to delete a stopped job.
To delete a stopped job
0 For details on stopping a job being printed, refer to "Stopping
scanning/printing" on page 4-105.
0 Select only one job at a time to be deleted.
0 To continue the stopped job, press the [Start] key.
1 Press the [Stop] key while a
document is being scanned or a job
is being printed.
Scanning/printing stops.
The Stopped Jobs screen appears.
2 Select the job to be deleted, and then touch [Delete].
The selected job is deleted.
5 Additional copy
operations
Additional copy operations 5
bizhub C252 5-3
5 Additional copy operations
5.1 Checking the copy settings (Mode Check)
From the Mode Check screens, the current copy settings can be checked
and changed if desired.
To check the settings
1 Press the [Mode Check] key.
5 Additional copy operations
5-4 bizhub C252
The Mode Check screen appears.
Additional copy operations 5
bizhub C252 5-5
2 After checking the settings, touch [Job End] or press the [Mode Check]
key.
The Basic screen appears again.
!
Detail
There are four Mode Check screens. The number of the currently
displayed screen appears to the right of the screen title.
To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next
screen, touch [Fwd. ].
The buttons for functions where the setting has been changed from the
default appear selected.
To change the settings
1 Press the [Mode Check] key.
2 Touch [ Back] or [Fwd. ] until the button for the function to be
changed is displayed.
3 Touch the button for the setting that you wish to change.
The screen for specifying the setting appears.
4 Follow the appropriate procedure to change the setting.
5 Additional copy operations
5-6 bizhub C252
5.2 Printing a proof copy to be checked (Proof Copy)
Before printing a large number of copies, a single proof copy can first be
printed to be checked. This prevents copy errors from occurring.
To make test prints
1 Position the document to be copied. (Refer to page 4-9 for details.)
2 Select the desired copy settings.
3 Press the [Proof Copy] key.
A single proof copy is printed.
4 Check the sample copy.
– If the sample copy was printed as desired, skip to step 8.
– To change the copy settings, continue with step 5.
5 Touch [Change Setting] in the screen that appeared when the sample
copy is printed.
Additional copy operations 5
bizhub C252 5-7
6 In the Change Job Setting screen, change the copy settings as desired,
and then touch [OK].
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel Change].
? Why is the button for the setting that I wish to change not
displayed?
The copy setting cannot be changed.
% If the copy settings cannot be changed, stop printing the proof
copy. Then, press the [Reset] key to cancel the copy settings, and
then specify the desired settings.
7 Press the [Proof Copy] key to print another sample 